SEMESTER III - University of Madras
VERY IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS:
Kindly refer the official communication of the University in the
B.A. R&S file .
APPENDIX – 17 [R]
UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS
M.Sc. DEGREE COURSES
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
(w.e.f. 2008-2009)
SECOND YEAR
(i.e. III & IV SEMESTERS)
COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS
NAME OF THE COURSES
1) M.Sc. APPLIED ELECTRONICS
2) M.Sc. APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
3) M.Sc. BIOCHEMISTRY
4) M.Sc. BIOINFORMATICS
5) M.Sc. BIOTECHNOLOGY
6) M.Sc BIOTECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT
7) M.Sc. BOTANY
8) M.Sc. CHEMISTRY
9) M.Sc. COMPUTER SCIENCE
10) M.Sc. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (5 YEAR INTEGRATED)*
11) M.Sc. ELECTRONIC MEDIA
12) M.Sc. FOODS SCIENCE NUTRITION AND DIETETICS
13) M.Sc. FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT AND DIETETICS
14) M.Sc. GENERAL GENETICS
15) M.Sc. HOTEL AND CATERING MANAGEMENT
16) M.Sc. INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
17) M.Sc. MATHEMATICS
18) M.Sc. MEDICAL LABORATORY TECHNOLOGY
19) M.Sc. PHYSICS
20) M.Sc. VISUAL COMMUNICATION
21) M.Sc. ZOOLOGY
The scheme of examinations for different semesters shall be as follows:
Vide APPENDIX-B
APPENDIX - B
SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS FOR III AND IV SEMESTERS
1. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS
Second Year
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course Components |Subjects |Inst. |Credit|Exam | |
| | |Hrs |s |Hours |Max. Marks |
| | | | | |Int. |Ext. Marks |Total |
| | | | | |marks | | |
|Core Courses |Paper – IX |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Data Communication and Computer Networking| | | | | | |
| |Paper – X |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Digital Signal Processing | | | | | | |
| |Paper – XI |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Practical – III Embedded and DSP | | | | | | |
| |Laboratory | | | | | | |
| |Paper – XII |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Basic VLSI Design | | | | | | |
|Elective Subject - III |Paper – III |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Embedded Systems | | | | | | |
|(Extra disciplinary) |Offered by M.Sc computer Science |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Soft Skill – III | |4 |3 |3 |40 |60 |100 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
|Course Components |Subjects |Inst. |Credits|Exam Hours | |
| | |Hrs | | |Max. Marks |
| | | | | |Int. |Ext. |Total |
| | | | | |marks |Marks | |
| |Paper – XIII |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Part –I |Industrial Process Control | | | | | | |
|Core Courses | | | | | | | |
| |Paper – XIV |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Semiconductor Device Technology | | | | | | |
| |Paper – XV |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Project & Viva voce | | | | | | |
|Elective |Paper – IV |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Power Electronics | | | | | | |
| |Paper - V |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Elements of Nanotechnology in Electronics | | | | | | |
|Soft Skill – IV | |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
FOURTH SEMESTER
2. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course components |Subjects |Inst. |Credits |Exam |Max. Marks |
| | |Hrs. | |Hours | |
| | | | | |Int. |Ext. |Total |
| | | | | |marks |marks | |
|Core Courses |Paper-IX |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Microbial Genetics | | | | | | |
| |Paper-X |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Genetic Engineering | | | | | | |
| |Paper-XI |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Molecular Biology | | | | | | |
| |Paper-XII |5 |4 |6 |40 |60 |100 |
| |Microbial Genetics, Molecular Biology & | | | | | | |
| |Genetic Engineering - Practical III | | | | | | |
|Elective Subject-III |Research Methodology |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Elective Subject-IV |Industrial & Pharmaceutical Microbiology |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Extra disciplinary |Environmental Biotechnology |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Soft Skill-I | | |2 |3 |40 |60 |100 |
UNIVERSITY PRACTICAL EXAMINATION WILL BE CONDUCTED IN EVEN SEMESTER ONLY.
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course components |Subjects |Inst. |Credits |Exam |Max. Marks |
| | |Hrs. | |Hours | |
| | | | | |Int. |Ext. |Total |
| | | | | |marks |marks | |
|Core Courses |Paper-XIII |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Food, Dairy and Environmental Microbiology | | | | | | |
| |Paper-XIV |6 |4 |6 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Soil, Agricultural, Food and Environmental | | | | | | |
| |Microbiology - Practical IV | | | | | | |
| |Paper-XV |12 |4 |3 |20 |80 |100 |
| |Project | | | | | | |
|Elective Subject-V |Soil and Agricultural Microbiology |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Soft Skill-I | | |2 |3 |40 |60 |100 |
UNIVERSITY PRACTICAL EXAMINATION WILL BE CONDUCTED IN EVEN SEMESTER ONLY.
3. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOCHEMISTRY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course |Name of Course |Inst. Hours |Credits |Exam. Hours |Max. Marks |
|components | | | | | |
| | | | | |CIA |External |
|Core - 8 |Cell and Molecular Biology |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core - 9 |Hormonal Chemistry |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core - 10 |Clinical Biochemistry |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core - 11 |Practical III |6 |4 |6 |40 |60 |
|Elective - 4 |Biostatistics |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective - 5 |Immunology |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra-disciplinary |Clinical basis of Diseases |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|SOFT SKILL – III | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the
Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course components |Name of Course |Inst. Hours |Credits |Exam Hours |Max. Marks |
| | | | | |CIA |External |
|Core - 12 |Principles of Biotechnology |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core - 13 |Concepts of |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Bio-informatics | | | | | |
|Elective - 6 |Microbial Biochemistry |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core - 14 |Project and Viva voce | |8 | |20 |60 project |
| | | | | | |20 viva voce |
|SOFT SKILL – IV | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
4. M.Sc. Degree Course in Bioinformatics
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course |Name of Course |Inst. |Credits |Exam |Maxmarks |
|Components | |hours | |(Hours) |CIA Ext |
|Paper 12 |Genomics & Proteomics |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core | | | | | | |
|Paper 13 |Algorithms for Computational Biology |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core | | | | | | |
|Paper 14 |Structural Bioinformatics |6 |4 |6 |25 |75 |
|Core | | | | | | |
|Paper 15 |Tools and their Applications in |6 |4 |3 |40 |60 |
|Core |Bioinformatics (Practicals) | | | | | |
|Paper 16 |Systems Biology |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective | | | | | | |
|Paper 17 |Potentia;l Applications and commercial |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective (Other |aspects of Bioinformatics | | | | | |
|Departments) | | | | | | |
|Soft Skill | | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course |Name of Course |Inst. |Credits |Exam |Maxmarks |
|Components | |hours | |(Hours) |CIA Ext |
|Paper 18 |Databases in Molecular Biology |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core | | | | | | |
|Paper 19 |Advanced Topics in Bioinformatics |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective | | | | | | |
|Paper 20 |Bioinformatics & Drug design |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective | | | | | | |
|Paper 21 |Project & viva-voce |12 |8 |- |20 |80 |
|Core | | | | | | |
|Soft Skill | | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
5. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course Components |Name of Course |Semester |Inst. |Credits |Exam |Max. Marks |
| | | |Hours | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | |CIA |External |
|Paper-13 Core |Enzyme Technology |6 |4 |3 |25 |
| | | | | |CIA |External |
|Paper-19 Core |Strategic Management |6 |4 |3 |25 |
| | | | | |CIA |Ext |Total |
|CORE | Paper-IX. Cell Biology, Genetics, Biostatics and Plant|5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Breeding | | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper-X | |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Plant Molecular Biology |5 | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper- XI | |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Plant Biotechnology |5 | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper XII | |4 |4 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Practicals- IV- Covering theory papers IX, X & XI |5 | | | | | |
|Elective | Bioinformatics |4 |3 |4 |40 |60 |100 |
|III | | | | | | | |
|Extra disciplinary- |Herbal Drug Biotechnology | | 3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|I | |4 | | | | | |
|Soft Skill- III | |2 | 2 |3 |40 |60 |100 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course Component |Subject | |Credit |Exam |Marks |
| |Title of the paper |Inst. Hrs| |Hrs | |
| | | | | |CIA |Ext |Total |
|CORE | Paper-XIII. Plant Biochemistry and Biophysics |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|CORE |Paper-XIV- Plant Physiology | |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| | |6 | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper- XV | |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Applied Plant cell and Tissue Culture |6 | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper- XVI | |4 |4 |40 |60 |100 |
| |Practicals- V- Covering theory papers XIII, XIV & XV |6 | | | | | |
|Elective- IV | Algal Biotechnology |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Soft Skill | |2 | 3 |3 |40 |60 |100 |
|IV | | | | | | | |
8. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN CHEMISTRY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course Components |Subjects |Inst. Hours |Credits |Hrs. |Max. Marks |
| | | | | |CIA |External |
|Core IX |Organic Chemistry-III |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core X |Inorganic Chemistry-III |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core XI |Physical Chemistry-III |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core XII |Physical Chemistry Practical* |8 |4 |6 |40 |60 |
|Elective III |Theory Elective |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill | | |2 | |40 |60 |
Theory Electives Offered:
1. Material Science
2. Elementary Bio Chemistry
3. Research methodology
Electives offered in the II & III Semester can also be taken by other branch students.(ED)
* Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course Components |Subjects |Inst. Hours |Credits |Hrs. |Max. Marks |
| | | | | |CIA |External |
|Core XIII |Organic Chemistry-IV |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core XIV |Inorganic Chemistry-IV |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core XV |Physical Chemistry-IV |5 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective IV |Analytical Chemistry Practical* |8 |4 |6 |40 |60 |
|Elective V |Group Project /Review |7 |4 |6 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill | | |2 | |40 |60 |
* Practical examinations to be conducted at the end of the academic year.
9. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course components |Name of Course |Semester |Credits|Exam. |Max. Marks |
| | | | |Duratio| |
| | | | |n | |
| | | | | |CIA |UE |
|Core |Principles of Compiler Design |III |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core |Object Oriented Analysis and Design |III |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra –Disciplinary |Digital Image Processing |III |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective |Elective –II |III |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective |Elective – III |III |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core |Practical – V: Mini Project |III |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|Soft Skill-4 | |III |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|**Internship |During summer vacation 4 to 6 weeks of I Year | |2 | | |100 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third
Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course components |Name of Course |Semester |Credits|Exam. |Max. Marks |
| | | | |Duration | |
| | | | | |CIA |UE |
|Core |Project & Viva-Voce |IV |20 |- |20 |60+ 20 |
List of Electives
Elective – II
Data Warehousing and Data Mining OR Mobile Computing OR Artificial Intelligence
Elective – III
Artificial Neural Networks OR Computer Simulation and Modeling OR Cryptography
10.M.Sc. DEGREE FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED COURSE IN
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
III Semester Theory
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST201 |Computer Oriented Mathematics |4 |25 |75 |
|CST203 |Internet and its Applications |4 |25 |75 |
|CST205 |Microprocessors |4 |25 |75 |
|CST207 |Programming in C |4 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill – III | |3 |40 |60 |
|Environmental Studies |Exam. In IV Semester | | | |
PRACTICAL
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST209 |Practical – III : C Programming and : Microprocessors Lab |4 |40 |60 |
IV SEMESTER THEORY
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST202 |Software Engineering |4 |25 |75 |
|CST204 |Data Structures |4 |25 |75 |
|CST206 |Computer Graphics |4 |25 |75 |
|CST208 |Programming in C++ |4 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill – IV | |3 |40 |60 |
|Environmental Studies |Exam. In IV Semester |2 | | |
PRACTICAL
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST210 |Practical IV : Data Structures using C++ |4 |40 |60 |
V SEMESTER THEORY
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST301 |Database Management Systems |4 |25 |75 |
|CST303 |Operating Systems |4 |25 |75 |
|CST305 |Visual Programming |4 |25 |75 |
|CST307 |Computer Networks |4 |25 |75 |
| |Value Education |2 | | |
PRACTICAL
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST309 |Practical V : RDBMS with Visual Programming Lab |3 |40 |60 |
VI SEMESTER THEORY#
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
|CST302 |Multimedia Systems |4 |Int. |Ext. |
|CST304 |Java Programming |4 |25 |75 |
|CST306 |Computer Architecture |5 |25 |75 |
|CST308 |Object Oriented Analysis and Design |4 |25 |75 |
| |Extension Activities |1 | | |
PRACTICAL
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST310 |Practical – VI : Java Programming Lab |3 |40 |60 |
VII SEMESTER THEORY#
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST401 |Advanced Java Programming |3 |25 |75 |
|CST403 |Design and Analysis of Algorithms |4 |25 |75 |
|CST405 |Web Technologies |3 |25 |75 |
| |Elective I |4 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill – V | |2 |40 |60 |
PRACTICAL
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credit |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST407 |Practical VII: Advanced Java Programming Lab. |3 |40 |60 |
|CST409 |Practical VIII : Web Applications Lab. |3 |40 |60 |
ELECTIVE – I
|1 |CST411 |Parallel Algorithms |
|2 |CST413 |Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems |
|3 |CST415 |Systems Software |
VIII SEMESTER THEORY#
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credit |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST402 |Unix and Shell Programming |3 |25 |75 |
|CST404 |Distributed Databases |4 |25 |75 |
|CST406 |E-Commerce |3 |25 |75 |
|CST408 |Information Security |3 |25 |75 |
| |Elective II |4 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill – VI | |2 |40 |60 |
|Soft Skill – VII | |2 |40 |60 |
|Internship** |During Summer Vacation | | | |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the fourth year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Ninth Semester Marks Statement.
PRACTICAL
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST410 |Practical IX : Unix Lab |3 |40 |60 |
ELECTIVE II
|1 |CST412 |Software Project Management |
|2 |CST414 |Fuzzy Logic |
|3 |CST416 |Computer Simulation and System Modelling |
IX SEMESTER THEORY#
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST501 |Network Programming |3 |25 |75 |
|CST503 |Software Testing |3 |25 |75 |
|ED |Data Warehousing and Data Mining |3 |25 |75 |
| |Elective III |4 |25 |75 |
| |Elective IV |4 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill – VII | |2 |40 |60 |
|Internship | |2 | |100 |
PRACTICAL
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credit |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST507 |Practical X : Network Programming Lab |3 |40 |60 |
ELECTIVE III
|1 |CST509 |TCP/IP Networks |
|2 |CST511 |Artificial Neural Networks |
|3 |CST513 |Windows Programming |
ELECTIVE IV
|1 |CST515 |CAD/CAM |
|2 |CST517 |Distributed Computing |
|3 |CST519 |Image Processing |
X SEMESTER
|Subject Code |Name of the Subject |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int. |Ext. |
|CST502 |Project |20 |20 |60+20 |
# Soft Skill courses for IV and V year shall be opted by the students as per soft skills regulations for postgraduate courses.
11. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN ELECTRONIC MEDIA
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course Code |Title of the Course |Inst.Hr |Credit |Exam.Hr |MAX.MARKS |
| | |Week | | | |
| | | | | |INT. |EXT. |
| | | | | |MARKS |MARKS |
|Core 9 |Communication Research Methods-I |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 10 |Film Studies |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 11 |Radio Production |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective 5 |Technical Communication |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective 6 |Public Relations & Corporate Communication |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills |Soft Skills |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|Soft Skills |**Internship |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course Code |Title of the Course |Inst.Hr |Credit |Exam.Hr |MAX.MARKS |
| | |Week | | | |
| | | | | |INT. |EXT. |
| | | | | |MARKS |MARKS |
|Core 12 |Communication Research Methods-II |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 13 |Cross-Cultural Communication |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core14 |Research Project Work |6 |6 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 15 |Specialization (Video Magazine) |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 16 |Media practice (Internship II) |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective 7 |Media Analysis Technique |2 |2 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills |Soft Skills |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |
| |Total Credits | |90 | | | |
12. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN FOOD SCIENCE NUTRITION AND DIETETICS
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE |SUBJECT |INST. |CREDITS |EXAM |MAX.MARKS |
|COMPONENTS | |HOURS | |HOURS | |
| | | | | |INT. |EXT. |
| | | | | |MARKS |MARKS |
|CORE 9 |PAPER IX |6 |5 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Advanced Human Nutrition – Macro Nutrients | | | | | |
|CORE 10 |PAPER X |6 |5 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Advanced Dietetics | | | | | |
|CORE 11 |PAPER XI |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Dietetics Practical | | | | | |
|CORE 12 |PAPER XII |- |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Dietetics Internship | | | | | |
|Elective |PAPER III |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Inter Disciplinary |Dissertation Design | | | | | |
|Elective |PAPER IV |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra Disciplinary |Clinical Biochemistry | | | | | |
|SOFT SKILL III | |2 |2 | |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE |SUBJECTS |INST. |CREDITS |EXAM |MAX. MARKS |
|COMPONENTS | |HOURS | |HOURS | |
| | | | | |INT. |EXT. |
| | | | | |MARKS |MARKS |
|CORE 13 |PAPER XIII |6 |5 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Advanced Human Nutrition – Micronutrients | | | | | |
|CORE 14 |PAPER XIV |- |8 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Dissertation | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE |PAPER V |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra Disciplinary |Principles of Gene Manipulation | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE |PAPER VI |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra Disciplinary |Community Relations | | | | | |
| ELECTIVE |PAPER VII |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Inter Disciplinary |Fundamentals of Child Guidance and Counselling | | | | | |
|SOFT SKILL IV | |2 |2 | |40 |60 |
13. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN FOOD SERIVICE MANAGEMENT AND DIETETICS
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE |SUBJECT |INST. |CREDITS |EXAM |MAX. MARKS |
|COMPONENTS | |HOURS | |HOURS | |
| | | | | |CIA |EXT |
| | | | | | |MARKS |
|CORE 9 |PAPER IX |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Food Service Management | | | | | |
|CORE 10 |PAPER X |6 |5 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Advanced Dietetics | | | | | |
|CORE 11 |PAPER XI |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Dietetics Practicals | | | | | |
|CORE 12 |PAPER XII |- |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Dietetics Internship | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE |PAPER III |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Inter Disciplinary |Dissertation Design | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE |PAPER IV |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra Disciplinary |Clinical Biochemistry | | | | | |
|SOFT SKILL III | |2 |2 | |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE |SUBJECTS |INST. |CREDITS |EXAM |MAX. MARKS |
|COMPONENTS | |HOURS | |HOURS | |
| | | | | |CIA |EXT |
| | | | | | |MARKS |
|CORE 13 |PAPER XIII | - | 5 | 3 | 25 | 75 |
| |Catering Internship | | | | | |
|CORE 14 |PAPER XIV | - | 8 | 3 | 25 | 75 |
| |Dissertation | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE |PAPER V | 5 | 3 | 3 | 25 | 75 |
|Extra Disciplinary |Principles of Gene Manipulation | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE |PAPER VI | 5 | 3 | 3 | 25 | 75 |
|Extra Disciplinary |Community Relations | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE |PAPER VII | 5 | 3 | 3 | 25 | 75 |
|Inter Disciplinary |Fundamentals of Child Guidance and | | | | | |
| |Counselling | | | | | |
|SOFT SKILL IV | | 2 | 2 | | 40 | 60 |
The following Courses are common to both the Branches.
(12 & 13)
1. Paper X - Advanced Dietetics
2. Paper XI - Dietetics Practicals
3. Paper IV(EDP) - Clinical Biochemistry
4. Paper V (EDP) - Principles of Gene Manipulation
5. Paper VI - Community Relations
6. Paper VII – Fundamentals of Child Guidance and Counselling
(Inter Disciplinary)
14. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN GENERAL GENETICS
THIRD SEMSESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS | |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |HRS. |MAX. MARKS |
| |NAME OF COURSE | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | |CIA |EXTN |
|CORE 10 |Paper XIV Recombinant DNA Technology |6 HRS. |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE 11 |Paper XV |6 HRS. |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Human Genetics II | | | | | |
|CORE 12 |Paper XVI Developmental Genetics |6 HRS. |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE 13 |Paper XVII Practical III |6 HRS. |4 |3 |40 |60 |
|ELECTIVE 4 |Paper XVIII Gene Therapy |6 HRS. |5 |3 |25 |75 |
|SOFT SKILL | | |2 | |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third
Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMSESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |HRS. |MAX. MARKS |
| | | | | |CIA |EXTN |
|ELECTIVE 5 |Paper XIX |6 HRS. |5 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Genomics and Proteomics | | | | | |
|Project work* | | |8 |3 |50 |100 |
| | | | | | |Viva-Voce |
| | | | | | |(Fully |
| | | | | | |external) |
Project work*: CIA (Project) – 50 Marks; External – 100 Marks
Note: Students are expected to do internship during summer vacation at the end of second semester and submit a typed write up not exceeding 5-10 pages during third semester. Internship carries two credits.
15. M.Sc. Degree Course in Hotel and Catering Management
THIRD SEMESTER
|SUBJECTS |HOURS |CREDITS |
|Paper XI- Hotel Financial Management |6 |4 |
|Paper XII- Tourism Marketing and Travel Operations |6 |4 |
|Paper XIII- Management Information System |6 |4 |
|Paper XIV- Advanced Front Office Management |5 |4 |
|Paper XV- Kitchen Operation and Cost Control |5 |4 |
|Soft Skills |2 |2 |
|Total |30 |22 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|SUBJECTS |HOURS |CREDITS |
|Paper XVI- Research Methodology |6 |4 |
|Paper XVII- Food and Beverage Department Organization |6 |4 |
|Paper XVIII- Conceptual Skills of Accommodation Operation |6 |4 |
|Paper XIX- Rooms Division Yield Management |5 |4 |
|Paper XX- Project and Viva Voce |5 |4 |
|Soft Skills |2 |2 |
|Total |30 |22 |
16. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course components |Name of Course |Credits |Exam. |Max. Marks |
| | | |Duration | |
| | | | |CIA |UE |
|Core |Computer Networks |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core |Design and Analysis of Algorithms |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core |Advanced Java Programming |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra- Disciplinary |Information Security |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective |Elective – V |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core |Practical – V: Advanced Java Lab. |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|Soft Skill-3 | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|Soft Skill-4 | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|Internship** |During summer vacation 4 to 6 weeks of I Year |2 | | |100 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third
Semester Marks Statement.
Fourth Semester
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |CREDITS |EXAM. |MAX. MARKS |
| | | | |DURATION | |
| | | | | |CIA |UE |
|Core |Project & Viva-Voce |IV |20 |- |20 |60+ 20 |
List of Electives
Elective – V: Mobile Computing OR Artificial Intelligence OR Computer Graphics
17. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN MATHEMATICS
THIRD SEMESTER
|Core |XIV | Complex Analysis-I |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Core |XV | Topology |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Core |XVI |Operations Research |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Core |XVII | Mechanics |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Elective |XVIII | Elective – III (Choose one from Group C) |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Soft skill -III |XIX | |40 |60 |3 Hrs |2 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURHT SEMESTER
|Core |XX | Complex Analysis-II |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Core |XXI |Differential Geometry |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Core |XXII |Functional Analysis |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Elective |XXIII | Elective – IV (Choose one from Group D) |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Elective |XXIV |Elective - V (Choose one from Group D) |25 |75 |3 Hrs |4 |
|Soft skill-IV |XXV |IV |40 |60 |3 Hrs |2 |
|Total Marks / Credits 2400 | | 90 |
Elective-III (Semester III)
Any one of the following courses from Group-C shall be chosen as Elective-III for
Semester III.
Group-C
1. Algebraic Theory of Numbers
2. Number Theory and Cryptography
3. Stochastic Processes
4. Data Structures and Algorithms
Elective-IV (Semester IV)
Any one of the following papers from Group-D shall be chosen as Elective-IV for
Semester IV.
Group-D:
5. Fluid Dynamics
6. Combinatorics
7. Mathematical Statistics
8. Algebraic Topology
Any one of the following papers from Group-E shall be chosen as Elective-V for Semester IV.
Group – E
17. Tensor Analysis and Relativity
18. Mathematical Physics
19. Financial Mathematics
20. Calculus of Variations and Integral Equations
18. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN MEDICAL LABORATORY
TECHNOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course component |Name of Course |Inst. Hours |Credits |Exam |Max. Marks |
| | | | |Hours | |
| | | | | |CIA |External |
|Core – 7 |Microbiology |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core – 8 |Medical Laboratory Technology and |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Biiostatistics | | | | | |
|Core – 9 |Microbiology Practical – III |6 |4 |6 |40 |60 |
|Core -10 |Serology and Hematology |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective- 5 |Parasitology |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective- 6 (ED) |Diagnostic Clinical Biochemistry |5 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core – 11 |Serology and Hematology Practical - IV|6 |4 |6 |40 |60 |
|SOFT SKILL - III | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course component |Name of Course |Inst. Hours |Credits |Exam |Max. Marks |
| | | | |Hours | |
| | | | | |CIA |External |
|Core - 12 |Pathology |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core –13 |Pathology Practical - V |6 |4 |6 |40 |60 |
|Elective- 7 |Pharmacology and Toxicology |4 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core - 14 |Project and viva-voce | |8 | |20 |60 |
|SOFT SKILL - IV | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF PRACTICAL EXAMINATION
University Practical examination for practical I and II will be conducted at
the end of second semester. Practical III shall be conducted at the end of fourth semester.
19. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN PHYSICS
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |HRS |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | |CIA |EXT |
|CORE |PAPER 11 – Statistical Mechanics |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |PAPER 12 – Nuclear And Particle |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Physics | | | | | |
|CORE |PAPER 13 – Computational Methods and |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Programming | | | | | |
| CORE |PAPER 14 – Practical - III |6 |4 |4 |40 |60 |
|Extra Disciplinary II |PAPER 15 |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills-III | |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third
Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |HRS |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | |CIA |EXT |
|CORE |PAPER 16 – Condensed Matter Physics |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |PAPER 17 – Practical – IV *** |6 |4 |4 |40 |60 |
|ELECTIVE- II |PAPER 18 |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|ELECTIVE- III |PAPER 19 |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |PAPER 20 – PROJECT **** | |4 | |** |** |
|Soft Skills-IV | |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |
Elective I - Paper 9
Spectroscopy [OR] Nanoscience and Technology
Elective II and III -Papers 18 and 19
Any two out of the following:
1. Microprocessor and Microcontroller.
2. Material Science.
3. Advanced Spectroscopy.
Extra disciplinary Electives to be offered to M. Sc. students in Chemistry, Mathematics and other disciplines.
1. Basic Quantum Mechanics.
2. Intelligent Instrumentation.
3. Basic Material Scince.
4. Mathematical Methods.
5. Classical Dynamics.
Total credits : 90 ( Core 60 + Soft-skill/Internship 10 + Electives/ED 20 )
20. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN VISUAL COMMUNICATION
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course Code |Title of the Course |Inst. |Credit |Exam. |MAX |
| | |Hr | |Hr |MARKS |
| | |Week | | | |
| | | | | |CIA |EXT |
|Core 9 |Visual Research Methods |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 10 |Special Visual Effects (Practical) |4 |4 |3 |40 |60 |
|Core 11 |Video Editing (Practical) |3 |3 |3 |40 |60 |
|Elective 5 |Entertainment & Society |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective 6 |Film Analysis & Criticism |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills |Soft skills |2 |2 |3 |40 | 60 |
|Soft Skills |**Internship |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third
Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course Code |Title of the Course |Inst. |Credit |Exam. |MAX |
| | |Hr | |Hr |MARKS |
| | |Week | | | |
| | | | | |CIA |EXT |
|Core 12 |Computer Graphics & Animation III (Practical) |3 |3 |3 |40 |60 |
|Core 13 |Sound Recording & Editing (Practical) |3 |3 |3 |40 |60 |
|Core14 |Project Management |6 |6 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 15 |Research Project Work |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 16 |Specialization (Project) |2 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective 7 |Gaming & Game Design |2 |2 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills |Soft skills |2 |2 |3 |40 | 60 |
| |Total Credits |90 | | | |
21. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN ZOOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Core/Elective/EDP |Name of the Course |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int |Ext |
|Core |Developmental Biology |4 |25 |75 |
|Core |Immunology |4 |25 |75 |
|Core |Lab Course III |4 |25 |75 |
|Elective |Elective III |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective |Elective IV |3 |25 |75 |
|EDP II |Microbiology |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills -III | |2 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the
Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Core/Elective/EDP |Name of the Course |Credits |Marks |
| | | |Int |Ext |
|Core |Biotechnology |4 |25 |75 |
|Core |Research methodology |4 |25 |75 |
|Core |Lab Course IV |4 |25 |75 |
|Elective |Elective V |3 |25 |75 |
|Core |Project |6 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills -IV | |2 |40 |60 |
Electives*
1. Fishery Biology
2. Entomology
3. Endocrinology
4. Toxicology
5. Sericulture
6. Costal Ecosystem
7. Aquaculture
* Colleges offering M.Sc. Zoology can choose any FIVE electives from the list given.
A.C.F.2009
APPENDIX - 17 (S)
university of madras
1. M.Sc. Degree course in applied electronics
syllabus
Semester III
CORE Paper IX – DATA COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING
Objectives
i) This course introduces the fundamental concepts and terminology of data communication
and networking,
ii) Provides a general introduction to data communications and computer networking
that would be useful to all personnel who deal with distributed systems,
iii) Encompassing both technical and managerial aspects,
iv) To help students better understand the challenges and opportunities faced by
modern business, and
v) Topics include: fundamentals of telecommunications, data transmission mechanisms,
telecommunication media and technologies, considerations for LAN and WAN
implementations, the Internet and intranet applications, emerging telecommunications
technologies, and trends in the telecommunications industry.
Unit 1 DATA COMMUNICATION
Introduction to data communication: A digital communication system - Data terminal equipment (DTE) - Line control unit (LCU) - Data communication Equipment (DCE) - Transmission media and communication link - Communication system formats - Data link protocols : General protocols, Character oriented protocols, Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC), High level data control (HDLC) and XMODEM communications protocols - Low speed data communications - Frequency shift keying- FSK link and FSK modems- High speed modems and systems - Balanced modulator - Phase shift Keying- Differential PSK Bit splitters - PSK modulator- Quadrature Phase shift keying (QPSK)- QPSK modems - QPSK demodulator- Higher data rate modems- Multi channel data communications : Frequency division multiplexing (FDM) - FDM groups and subgroups - Multichannel data distribution- Data under voice (DUV)- Digital T carriers and Time division multiplexing (TDM)-Multichannel TDM- Sampling theorem- Sampling using TDM- Natural sampling- Sample and hold- Quantisation - Pulse code modulation- Delta modulation - Adaptive delta modulation- CODECS Vocoders.
Unit 2 DATA TRANSMISSION
Transmission – Synchronous transmission – Overview of modems and control – Error detection methods - Data compression – Transmission control circuits – Communication control devices - Data transmission concepts – Analog and Digital data transmission – Transmission media – Guided transmission media – Wireless transmission – Protocols - Error control - Ideal RQ – Continuous RQ – Link management – Data link control protocols – Bit oriented protocols.
Unit 3 COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKS
Open system network models : Data topologies - Data switching- Types of networking- The open system interconnection (OSI) model-System network architecture (SNA)- SNA layers- Logical units- SNA message formats- Local area networks – Selection issues – Types – Protocols – Performance – High speed and bridged area networks - Interconnection methods - High speed LAN - Bridges - Transparent bridges – Source routing bridges – Performance issues – LAN technology – Architecture – BUS/TREE LANs, Ring LANs, Star LANs and Wireless LANs.
Characteristic of public networks - Packet switched data networks – Circuit switched data networks – Integrated services digital networks – Private networks – Inter network architecture – Network layer structure - Internet protocol standards – Frame relay protocols architecture – Frame relay call control - User data transfer - Network function - Congestion control.
Unit 4 ARCHITECTURE, PROTOCOLS AND INTERFACES
Protocols and architecture - TCP/IP protocols – Principles of inter-networking and intra-networking - Current loop interface – RS232- RS432 interface – BASIC test - Breakout box and line monitors – Pattern generators and bit error rate analyzers – Protocol analyzers – Time domain refractometry – Fibre optic systems.
Unit 5 ADVANCES IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Enhanced features of telephone : Conference calls -Call transfers- Call queuing- Priority calls and automatic directory search- PBXs- Picture phone- Still picture video telephone - Telephotograph transmission- Facsimile services- Radio paging- Radio telephone- Mobile/cellular telephone-Vehicle location monitoring- Vehicle traffic control-Remote control of machines-Emergency communication -Interactive TV (shopping, advertisement and games)- Data broadcasting - Mail gram- Voice gram -Electronic mail delivery-Electronic fund/cash transfer (banking) - Person identification systems (security systems) - Computer assisted instructions
Books for Study:
1. F. Halsall, 1994, Data Communications, Computer Networks and Open Systems, Addison Wesley.
2. A. C. Agarwall, Computer Communication and ISDN Systems, Khanna
Publishers.
3. W. L. Schweber, Data Communications, McGraw–Hill.
4. D. Besteskas and R. Gallagar, Data Networks, Prentice Hall.
5. J. Quinn, Digital Data Communications, Prentice Hall.
6. James Martin, 1987, Future developments in Telecommunications, Prentice Hall
Inc.
Books for Reference:
1. A. S. Tanenbaum, 1999, Computer Networks, 3rd Ed., PHI.
2. D. F. Commer, 2000, Computer Networks and Internets, 2nd Ed., Addison –Wesley.
3. U. Black, 1999, Computer Networks, 2nd Ed., PHI.
4. Thiagrajan Vishwanathan, 1992, Telecommunication switching systems and networks, Printice Hall of India.
5. Gordon White, Newnes, 1995, Mobile Radio technology, Butterworth Heinemann Ltd.
6. John L. McNamara, 1991, Local Area Networks, Prentice Hall of India.
Core PAPER x - DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Objectives
i) To introduce the basic concepts of signal processing,
ii) To give basic knowledge of the typical structure of a DSP system,
iii) To explain the benefits of DSP,
iv) To inculcate different architectures/types of DSPs, and
v) To introduce some applications of DSP.
Unit 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF DSP
Signals and graph terminology – Mean and standard deviation – Histogram – Normal distribution – Digital noise generation – Precision and accuracy – Quantization – Sampling theorem – Digital to analog conversion – Analog filters for data conversion – Selecting the antialias filter – Multirate & single bit data conversion
Unit 2 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
Basics of signals - Discrete sequences - Signal amplitude – Magnitude - Power - Sampling rate - aliasing - Discrete linear systems - Time-invariant systems – Frequency domain representation of discrete time signals – Transfer function - Types of transfer functions – All pass, minimum-phase and maximum-phase - Complementary transfer functions – Discrete-time processing of random signals.
Unit 3 TRANSFORM TECHNIQUES IN DSP
Laplace transform – Discrete Fourier transform – Computation of the DFT - Fast Fourier transform – Decimation in time – Decimation in frequency – Bit reversal – Radix-2 Butterfly structures - Z-transform – Chirp Z-transform – Hilbert transform.
Unit 4 DIGITAL FILTER DESIGN
Fundamentals and basic structures of FIR & IIR filters – Convolution - Low-pass, band-pass, high-pass FIR filters – Design of IIR filters – Impulse invariance method – Bilinear transform method – Design of digital IIR notch filter – Low-pass IIR digital filter design – Comparison of IIR & FIR digital filters.
Unit 5 IMPLEMENTATION OF DSP TECHNIQUES IN TYPICAL DSP HARDWARE
DSP circuits – Different DSP hardware – Typical DSP board (Analog devices/Texas Instruments/Motorola/AT&T) – Functional block diagram – DSP software – Fixed point – Floating point – Number precision – Program language - Applications – Spectral analysis using DFT - Short-term DFT.
Books for Study:
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer, 1999, Digital Signal Processing, Prentice-
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Steven W Smith, 1999 , The Scientist and Engineer’s Guide to Digital Signal
Processing, California Technical Publishing.
Books for Reference:
1. Richard G. Lyons, 1999 , Understanding Digital Signal Processing, Addison Wesley.
2. Sanjit K. Mitra, 1998, Digital Signal Processing: A Computer Based Approach,
TMH.
3. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, 2000 ,Digital Signal Processing, Principles,
Algorithms and Applications, Third Edition, PHI.
4. Boaz Porat, 1997, A Course in Digital Signal Processing John Wiley & Sons.
5. Andrew Bateman, Iain Paterson-Stephens, 2002, The DSP Handbook - Algorithms,
Applications and Design Techniques, Prentice Hall & Pearson Education Ltd,
6. Walt Kestler, 2000, Mixed Signal and DSP Design Techniques, Analog Devices Inc.
Internet Resources:
1. Texas Instruments Website:
2. Analog Instruments Website:
3. Motorola Website:
4.
5.
6.
Core PAPER xi - Practical – III: Embedded and DSP Laboratory
Objectives
i) To train students with practical ability to design and implement real- time/embedded
systems based on the understanding of real- time the
ii) To become familiar with the building of a real-time/embedded system using I/O
devices, device drivers, and real-time operating system's functions, and
iii) To study the embedded applications with the goal of optimizing parameters such as robustness, cost, speed, size, or features against real world constraints.
Any twelve experiments of the following to be done
Introduction to DSP & DSK (TMS320C6711)
1. Examples with DSK & CCS (Echo generation, sine wave generation with two sliders for amplitude and frequency control, square wave generation, ramp wave generation)
2. FIR filter design (Low, High, Bandpass & Bandstop)
3. IIR filtering (Low, High, Bandpass & Bandstop) Convolution & correlation
4. FFT & DFT
5. Generation of fixed PWM with variable frequency and variable duty cycle
6. AC induction motor control using sine modulation technique
7. Assembly language programming of the 8031/8051 (16-bit Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & Division)
8. Interfacing experiments of 8031(Key board, LED, LCD)
9. Interfacing experiments of 8051 (ADC & DAC)
10. 8031/8051- Parallel port
11. 8255 & 8251A- Serial port interface
12. 8031/8051 – 8253 counter and timer interface
13. 8031/8051 – Stepper motor control
Core PAPER xii - BASIC VLSI DESIGN
UNIT 1 MOS AND BI-CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN PROCESSES
MOS Layers –Stick Diagrams –Design Rules and Layout –General Observations on the Design Rules –2um Double Metal, Double Poly. CMOS/Bicomos Rules –1.2um Single Metal, Single Poly. CMOS Rules –Layout Diagrams –A Brief Introduction –Symbolic Diagrams – Translation to Mask Form.
UNIT 2 BASIC CIRCUIT CONCEPTS
Sheet resistance (Rs) –Sheet resistance concept applied to MOS transistors and inverters –Area capacitances of layers –Standard unit of capacitance Cg –Standard unit of capacitances calculation –The delay unit –Inverter delays –Driving large capacitive loads –Propagation delay –Wiring capacitances.
UNIT 3 SCALING OF MOS CIRCUITS
Scaling models and scaling factors –Scaling factors for device parameters –Some discussion on and limitations of scaling.
UNIT 4 SUBSYSTEM DESIGN AND LAYOUT
Some architectural issues –Switch logic –Gate (restoring) logic –Examples of structured design (combinational logic) –Some clocked sequential circuits –Other system considerations.
UNIT 5 ILLUSTRATION OF THE DESIGN PROCESS– COMPUTATIONALELEMENTS
Some observations on the design process –Regularity –Design of an ALU subsystem –A further consideration of adders –Multipliers.
Books for Study:
1. BASIC VLSI DESIGN “Douglas A. Punknell & Kamran Eshraghian” – Eastern Economy Edition, IIIrd Edition.
2. S. M. Sze, 1988, VLSI Fabrication Technology, McGraw Hill.
3. Nell H. E. Weste and Kamran Eshraghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design", 2ndEdition, Addision Wesley, 1998.
4. Jacob Backer, Harry W. Li and David E. Boyce, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation ", Prentice Hall of India, 1998.
ELECTIVE PAPER III - Embedded Systems
Objectives
i) To understand the scientific principles and concepts behind embedded systems,
ii) To obtain hands-on experience in programming embedded systems,
iii) To inculcate the basics of embedded system requirements of real-life electronic/electrical
systems,
iv) To learn fundamental real-time theory such as real-time scheduling, timing analysis and validation, synchronization, which are essential for advanced research in real-time area.
Unit 1 OVERVIEW OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Introduction – Review of microcontrollers – 8 and 16 bit microcontroller families– Flash series – Embedded RISC processor architectures - Embedded system design process – Design examples
Unit 2 EMBEDDED SYSTEM ENVIIRONMENT
Microcontroller architecture - Communication interface standards- Embedded system development process- Embedded operating systems- Types of embedded operating systems.
Unit 3 MCS51 EMBEDDED CHIPS
Introduction- 8051 Micro controller hardware – Assembly language programming – Addressing modes - Input/Output ports and circuits- External memory- Counter and timers- Serial data Input/Output- Interrupts - Inter facing of 8051 with LCD, ADC, sensors, stepper motor, key board, DAC, memory.
Unit 4 MICROCHIP EMBEDDED CHIPS
Microchip PIC16C6x/7x family – Features – Architecture – Memory organization – Register file map – I/O ports – PORTA – PORTB – PORTC – Data EEPROM and flash program memory – Asynchronous serial port – SPI mode – I2C mode – MPASM assembler and its use – Applications in communication and industrial controls.
Unit 5 REAL – TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Architecture of the kernel – Task and task scheduler – Interrupt service routines- Semaphores – Mutex – Mailboxes – Message queues – Event registers – Pipes – Signals – Timers – Memory management – Priority inversion problems – Embedded operating systems – Embedded linux – Real-time operating systems – RT linux – Handheld operating systems – Windows CE
Books for Study:
1. Frank Vahid, Tony D. Givargis, 2002, Embedded System Design – A Unified Hardware/Software Introduction, John Wiley.
2. KVKK Prasad, 2005, Embedded / Real Time Systems, Dreamtech Press.
3. Programming for Embedded Systems- Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gillispie Mazidi, 2002, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, Fourth Indian Reprint, Pearson Education.
5. John B. Peatman, 2004, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, Seventh Indian Reprint Pearson Education.
Books for Reference:
1. David E. Simon, 2005, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Ed.,.
2. Raj Kamal, 2002, Introduction to Embedded Systems, TMS.
3. 1187D: Atmel semiconductor reference manual.
4. DS30292B: Microchip reference manual.
Internet Resources:
1. Atmel semiconductor web site –
2. Microchip semiconductor web site –
3. National semiconductor web site –
4.
5.
Semester IV
CORE Paper XIIi – Industrial Process Control
Objectives
The students will
i) understand the principles of industrial process control systems,
ii) study the various controllers and their characteristics
iii) understand the importance of computers in process control industry
iv) become familiar with CAD, CAM & CIMS
v) study various process control systems.
Unit 1 INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL AND TRANSDUCERS AND ACTUATORS
Identification of functional elements - Control system evaluation-Analog and digital processing - Application specific selection of transducers for measurement of process parameters : temperature, pressure, flow level, density, safety and weight sensors- Synchro/Servo motors- Control valves- Solenoids-Electropneumatic converters- Indicators- annuniators- Alarms-Displays-Recorders- Loggers, etc.
Unit 2 CONTROLLER PRINCIPLES AND CONTROL LOOP CHARACTERESTICS
Process characteristics : Process equation, process lead, process lag and self regulation - Control system parameters : Error, variable range, control parameter range, control lag, dead time, cycling- Controller modes: discontinuous controller modes, two position mode, multiposition mode and floating control mode, continuous controller modes, proportional (P), integral (I) and differential (D) control modes, composite controller modes – PI, PD and PID - Control loop characteristics- Control system configurations – Single variable and cascade control- Multivariable control system- Stability- Process loop tuning- Open loop transient response method- Ziegler-Nicholas method and Frequency response method.
Unit 3 COMPUTER IN PROCESS CONTROL
Programmable controllers- Data logging- Supervisory control- Computer based controller- Hierarchial control- Controller software- Computer aided integrated manufacturing (CIM)- The product cycle and CAD/CAM- Fundamentals of CAD- Computer aided process planning- Computerized scheduling- Material requirement planning and shop floor control- NC, CNC and computer controlled robots- Computer aided quality control- Implementation of CIM’s.
Unit 4 DISCRETE STATE CONTROLLERS
Definitions and terminologies- Characteristics of the system-Discrete state variables- Process space and event sequence description- Ladder diagram- Programmable logic controllers (PICs)- Use of microcontrollers- Fuzzy logic control.
Unit 5 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS
Batch process control and automation- Boiler control- Chiller control- Clean room control- Compressor control - Cooling tower to crystallizers control-Distillation control -Dryer control - Evaporation control- Extruder controls-Furnace control- Heat exchangers- PH control- Pump controls- Reactor controls- Rolling mill control- Steam turbine control -Water treatment control.
Books for Study:
1. C. D. Johnson, 1996, Process control instrumentation technology, Prentice Hall of India.
2. M. P. Groover and E. W. Zimmers, 1992, CAD/CAM, Prentice Hall of India.
Books for Reference:
1. J. M. Jacob, 1989, Industrial control electronics, Prentice Hall Inc.
2. B. B. Liptak, 1995, Process measurement and analysis, Chilton Book Co.
3. B. B. Liptak, 1995, Process control, Chilton Book Co.
Core PAPER – XIv - SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND TECHNOLOGY
Objectives
The students will learn the various crystal growth techniques, semiconductor devices fabrication and monolithic integrated circuit technology, ion implantation techniques and the developments in the IC technology
Unit 1 MATERIAL PROPERTIES AND CRYSTAL GROWTH
Material properties of Si and GaAs – Crystal structure – Planes and orientations – Defects: Crystal defects, Poisson dislocation and their movement – Vacancies- CZ and Bridgeman techniques – Zone
Unit 2 WAFER PREPARATION AND EPITAXY
Ingot shaping – Polishing – Cutting – Wafering – Scribe lines - Cleavage planes- Vapour phase epitaxy – Basic transport process and reaction kinetics – Reaction of the substrate – Elements of nucleation and growth – Doping and autodoping – Process selection and capabilities - Buried layer epitaxial defects – Liquid phase epitaxy – Tilt type growth furnace – Slider boat arrangement – Apparatus – Si on insulators – Sapphire and amorphous substrates.
Unit 3 DIFFUSION AND OXIDATION
Nature of diffusion – Interstitial and substitutional movements – Diffusion concentration gradient – The diffusion co-efficient – Field aided motion – Interaction of charged defects- The dissociative process – Impurity behaviour in Si – Substitutional diffusers – Interstitial diffusers- Thermal oxidation of Si – Oxide formation – Kinetics of oxide growth - Network former – Network breaker – Oxidation systems – Oxidation furnaces - Techniques for growing thin oxide layer – Oxidation induced stacking faults – Anodic oxidation systems – Thermal oxidation of GaAs – Plasma oxidation – Properties of oxide layers.
Unit 4
ION IMPLANTATION, ANNEALING AND SINTERING AND VACUUM DEPOSITION
Ion implantation versus diffusion – Penetration range – Backscattering – Sputtering – Straggling – Nuclear and electronic stopping expression for range, transverse effects – Ion implantation systems and principles – Simulation of ion implantation – Different Gaussian modes and Pearson IV model – 3 moments of range data – Analytical equation – Boltzmann transport equation – Monte Carlo approximation – Implantation damage – Shallow junctions - Annealing of implanted impurities – Isothermal and isochronal annealing – Reverse annealing effects – Sintering of contacts - Chemical vapour deposition – Plasma assisted deposition – Electroplating – Deposition techniques specifically for metal, dielectric, polysilicon and polymer films.
Unit 5 LITHOGRAPHY, ETCHING AND PACKAGING
Positive and negative resistance development – Photomask – Its preparation and scaling – Pattern reticle mask – Master mask – Production mask – Alignment – Optical lithography – Contact printing – Projection printing – Proximity printing- Wet chemical etching – Crystallographic etches – Etching noncrystalline films – String model – Lift off process – Plasma etching – Plasma assisted etching – Sputter etching – Milling - Bonding techniques – Ultrasonic die bonder – Packing materials – Standard packages and selection criteria – Packaging techniques- IC technologies: SSI, MSI, LSI, VLSI and VVLSI .
Books for Study:
1. S. M. Sze, 1988, VLSI Fabrication Technology, McGraw Hill.
2. S. K. Gandhi, 1983, Si/GaAs Devices Fabrication Technology, John Wiley Ltd.
Books for Reference:
1. Ruska, 1988, Devices Fabrication Technology, McGraw Hill.
2. D. K. Schroder, 1990, Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization, Wiley, NY.
3. M. S. Tyagi, Introduction to Semiconductor Devices, Wiley.
Core PAPER – XV - Project & Viva voce
Objectives
To let students adventure into preliminary research field both in experiment and theory, the concept of project has been introduced in the final semester. The project work can be based on experimental work. The students shall explore new developments from journals, collecting literature/data and write a dissertation based on his/her work and studies. A close interaction with industry will be appreciated while carrying out the project work.
ELECTIVE – IV - POWER ELECTRONICS
unit 1 Thyristors and related devices
Thyristors – Triacs – Power diodes – Power transistors – Power MOSFETs – GTOs and insulated gate transistors – Steady state and switching characteristics – Protection circuits – Series and parallel operation – Thyristor commutation techniques.
UNIT 2 Rectifiers and cONVERTERS
Phase control – Half-wave thyristor rectifiers with R, RL and RLC load – Effect of free wheeling diode – Full-wave thyristor rectifiers – Single phase half-controlled and fully-controlled thyristor bridge converters - Load voltage, load current and input power factor for continuous current operation – Three-phase half-controlled and fully-controlled thyristor - Converters – Dual converters.
UNIT 3 Inverters
Series and parallel inverters using thyristors – Inverter circuits using devices other than thyristors – Single phase and three phase bridge inverters – Voltage and wave form control – Current source inverters – Cycloconverters. Switch mode regulators: Buck regulators –Boost regulators –Buck/Boost regulators – CUK regulation –SMPS.
UNIT 4 Choppers
DC chopper circuit using devices other than thyristors – Single quadrant DC – Chopper with R,RL,RLC load - Time ratio control – Load voltage and load current for continuous current operation – Two quadrant and four quadrant DC choppers – AC choppers (AC voltage controller) using thyristors and triacs – ON-Off control and phase control – Single phase full-wave controller with R & RL load – load voltage, load current and input power factor – circuits for three phase half-wave and full-wave controllers.
UNIT 5 Control circuits and applications
Generation of control pulses – Microprocessor based implementation – DC and AC drives – HVDC systems – Static circuit breakers – Regulated power supply – UPS
Book for study:
1. S.B. Dewan and A. Stranghen, Power Semiconductor Circutis, Wiley, NY, 1975.
2. M.H. Rashid, Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices, and Application, 2nd Ed.,
Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 1999.
3. S. Rama Reddy, Fundamentals of Power Electronics, Narosa, New Delhi, 2000.
Books for Reference:
1. A. Ahmed, Power Electronics for Technology, Pearson Education, PrenticeHall,NJ,1999.
2. G.K. Dubey, S.R. Doradla, A. Joshi, and R.M.K. Sinha, Thyristorised Power Controllers, New Age International, New Delhi, 1986.
3. P.C. Sen, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1987.
4. M. Ramamoorthy, An Introduction to Thyristors and Their Applications, 2nd Ed., Affiliated East West, New Delhi, 1991.
5. M.D. Singh and K.B. Khanchandani, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
6. P.S. Bimbhra, Power Electronics, 3rd , Ed., Khanna, New Delhi, 1999.
7. R.K. Sugandhi and K.K. Sugandhi, Thyristors – Theory and Applications, 2nd Ed., Wiley Eastern, New Delhi, 1981.
8. N. Mohan, T.M. Undeland, and W.P. Robbins, Power Electronics – Converters, Applications, and Design, 2nd Ed., Wiley, NY 2001.
9. B.W. Williams, Power Electronics –Devices, Drivers, Application, and Passive Components, 2nd Ed., Macmillan, London, 1992.
10. J.N. Ross, The Essence of Power Electronics, Prentice-Hall, London, 1997.
ELECTIVE
PAPER V - Elements of Nanotechnology in Electronics
Unit 1 INTRODUCTION TO NANOTECHNOLOGY
Definition of nanoscale – Significance of nanoscale: Surface-volume, Grain boundary, Examples of Critical sizes in phenomena - Property Enhancements: Quantum mechanical aspects – nanosize and energy bands –confinement effects, discretisation and tunneling – lithography at nanoscale
Unit 2 NANOSCALE FORMATIONS AND ELECTRONICS
Nanoparticles – production methods: Gas condensation, laser ablation, decomposition (thermal and ultrasonic), chemical methods, mechanical milling – Application of nanoparticles. Nanolayers – production methods: deposition (PVD, CVD, Epitaxy - ion implantation – Applications of nanolayers.
Nanotubes – carbon nanotubes – types – production – properties – applications in electronics
Unit 3 NANOSTRUCTURING
Nanopolishing - Etching of nanostructures – Lithography: optical, electron beam, ion beam, x-ray lithography procedures(principles and methodologies) – nanoimprinting – Nanostructure characterisation tools: AFM , Near-field Optics and Electron microscopy (principles and procedure in each of these)
Unit 4 CONVENTIONAL DEVICES BY NANOTECHNIQUES
MOS transistors: structure and technology – electrical characteristics of sub-100 nm MOS devices- limitations – low-tempearature aspects – future trends
Bipolar transistors: Structure and technology at nanoscale – trends
Unit 5 NOVEL DEVICES BASED ON NANOSTRUCTURES
Resonant Tunneling Diode: principles and technology – aplications -- Quantum Cascade Laser :Principles and structure – applications – Single Electron Transistor: Principle – technology – applications – Carbon Nanotube devices: structure and technology – CNT transistors
Book for study:
W.R. Fahrner (Ed) Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics Springer International Edition,Indian reprint 2006
2. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
SEMESTER - III
PAPER IX - MICROBIAL GENETICS
UNIT I :
Nucleic acid as genetic information carriers : experimental evidence. DNA structure: historical aspects and current concepts, melting of DNA. Super helicity in DNA, linking number, topological properties.
UNIT II :
Organization of genes and chromosomes: Definition of gene, Operon, interrupted genes, gene families, structure of chromatin and chromosomes, unique and repetitive DNA, heterochromatin, euchromatin, transposons.
UNIT III :
Plasmids as extrachromosomal genetic elements; Types and properties of plasmids; Structure of plasmids: Col E1, F1 and Ti plasmid, their replication, control, partitioning, incompatibility, plasmid amplification and plasmid curing; Gene transfer mechanisms: Transformation, conjugation and transduction.
UNIT IV :
Mutation: Mutants; Mutagens; Mutagenesis; Biochemical basis of mutation: Spontaneous and induced mutations; Isolation of Mutants; Reversion; Suppression; Genetic analysis of Mutants; Molecular basis of spontaneous and induced mutations and their role in evolution; Environmental Mutagenesis and toxicity testing; Carcinogens: Chemical Carcinogenesis and Carcinogenecity testing.
UNIT V :
Molecular recombination - Mechanism, control and models. Transposition; Regulatory sequences and transacting factors; Genetic mapping in E. coli and Yeast. Genetics and life cycle of Lambda, M13, Mu, T4 and OX174; Mycophages and Cyanophages. Fine structure and genetic analysis using II systems of phage T4. Genetic systems of yeast and Neurospora; Extrachromosomal inheritance and mitochondrial genetics. Basic concepts of Genomics.
PAPER X - GENETIC ENGINEERING
UNIT I :
Principles and methods in genetic engineering: Host cell restriction; Restriction modification; Restriction enzymes: Types and applications; Restriction mapping; DNA finger printing; RFLP, RPAD and AFLP techniques; Nucleases, Ribonucleases, DNA ligases, Tag DNA Polymerases, Methylases, Topoisomerases, Gyrases, and Reverse Transcriptases.
UNIT II :
Vectors: plasmid vectors: pSC101, pBR322, pUC series and Ti plasmids based vectors; Bacteriophage vectors: Lambda phage based vectors, phagemids, cosmids, and M13 based vectors; Viral vectors: Vaccinia, Retroviral, SV40 and Baculoviral system; Bacterial artificial chromosome and yeast artificial chromosome. Expression vectors, Insect vectors.
UNIT III :
Cloning techniques; Genomic DNA and cDNA library Construction; Screening methods; Cloning in E. coli, Bacillus, Pseudomonas, Streptomyces and yeast; Expression systems; Gene fusion and Reporter genes; Gene targeting; Methods of gene transfer - Transformation, Transfection; Electroporation, microinjection and biolistics.
UNIT IV :
Analysis of Recombinant DNA; Polymerase chain reaction; Principles and techniques of nucleic acid hybridization and cot curves; Southern, Northern, Western and South-Western blotting techniques; Dot and Slot blotting.
UNIT V :
DNA and protein sequencing; Protein engineering; Protoplast fusion; Hybridoma Technology, cell & tissue culture in plants & animals. Transgenic animals & plants; Applications of genetic engineering in agriculture, health and industry including gene therapy.
PAPER XI - MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
UNIT I :
Structure of atoms, molecules and chemical bonds. Composition, structure and function of biomolecules (carbonhydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids). Stabilizing interactions (Van der, Waals, electrostatic, hydrogen bonding, hydrophobic interaction, etc.). Conformation of proteins (Ramachandran plot, secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure; domains; motif and folds). Conformation of nucleic acids (A-, B-, Z-, DNA), t-RNA, micro-RNA. Stability of protein and nucleic acid structures. Molecular approaches to diagnosis and strain identification.
UNIT II :
DNA replication, repair and recombination: Unit of replication, enzymes involved, replication origin and replication fork, fidelity of replication, extrachromosomal replications, DNA damage and repair mechanisms.
UNIT III :
RNA synthesis and processing: Transcription factors and machinery, formation of initiation complex, transcription activators and repressors, RNA polymerases, capping, elongation and termination, RNA processing, RNA editing, splicing, polyadenylation, structure and function of different types of RNA, RNA transport.
UNIT IV :
Protein synthesis and processing: Ribosome, formation of initiation complex, initiation factors and their regulation, elongation and elongation factors, termination, genetic code, aminoacylation of tRNA, tRNA-identity, aminoacyl tRNA synthetase, translational proof-reading, translational inhibitors, post-translational modification of proteins.
UNIT V :
Control of gene expression at transcription and translation level: Regulation of phages, viruses, prokaryotic and eukaryotic gene expression, role of chromatin in regulating gene expression and gene silencing.
PAPER XII - MICROBIAL GENETICS, MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND GENETIC ENGINEERING PRACTICAL - III
UNIT I :
Isolation of genomic DNA from bacteria and demonstration in agarose gel electrophoresis. Isolation of plasmid DNA by alkali lysis method and demonstration in agarose gel electrophoresis. Estimation of DNA by diphenyl amine method. Determination of Tm value of DNA. Quantitation of nucleic acids by UV Spectrophotometer.
UNIT II :
Isolation of RNA from yeast. Estimation of RNA by orcinol method. Induced mutagenesis - Isolation of antibiotic resistant auxotrophic mutants.
UNIT III :
Estimation of proteins by Lowery et al method. SDS-PAGE. 2D-Gel electrophoresis. Isoelectric focussing. Separation of amino acids by TLC and paper chromatography.
UNIT IV :
Separation of proteins using Gel filtration and Ion exchange chromatography. Immobilization of enzymes and whole cells. Western blotting. Protoplast and spheroplast isolation. Induction of beta-galactosidase activity in E. coli using 1PTG.
UNIT V :
Preparation of competent cells. Transformation and Blue-White selection for transformants. DNA amplification by PCR. Separation of PCR amplified product on PAGE using a marker ladder and identification of product size. Restriction mapping / Restriction analysis.
ELECTIVE III - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
UNIT I :
Research Methodology - An Introduction: Meaning of Research, Objectives of Research, Types of Research, Research Approaches, Importance of knowing how research is done, Research Process, Criteria of good research. Defining the Research Problem; Research Design; Sampling Design; Methods of Data Collection; Processing and Analysis of Data; Sampling Fundamentals; Testing of Hypothesis.
UNIT II :
Molecular biology methods: In vitro mutagenesis and deletion techniques, Gene knock out in bacterial and eukaryotic organisms; methods for analysis of gene expression at RNA and protein level, large scale expression analysis, such as micro array based techniques; isolation separation and analysis of carbohydrate and lipid molecules.
UNIT III :
Histochemical and immunotechniques: Flowcytometry and immunofluorescence microscopy, detection of molecules in living cells, in situ localization by techniques such as FISH and GISH. Biophysical methods: Analysis of biomolecules using UV/visible, fluorescence, circular dichroism, NMR and ESR spectroscopy, structure determination using X-ray diffraction and NMR; analysis using light scattering, different types of mass spectrometry and surface plasma resonance methods.
UNIT IV :
Radiolabeling techniques: Properties of different types of radioisotopes normally used in biology, their detection and measurement; incorporation of radioisotopes in biological tissues and cells, molecular imaging of radioactive material, safety guidelines. Miscroscopic techniques: Microscopy of living cells, scanning and transmission microscopes, different fixation and staining techniques for EM, freeze-etch and freeze-fracture methods for EM, image processing methods in microscopy.
UNIT V :
Writing the Research Report (Thesis and publications): Components of research report - Title, Authors, Addresses, Abstract, Keywords, Introduction, Materials and Methods, Results, Discussion, Summary, Acknowledgements and Bibliography.
ELECTIVE IV - INDUSTRIAL & PHARMACEUTICAL MICROBIOLOGY
UNIT I :
Isolation, preservation and improvement of industrially important micro organisms; Raw materials and media design for Fermentation processes; Sterilization; Development of inocula for industrial fermentations; Types of fermentation: Batch, continuous, dual or multiple, surface, submerged, aerobic and anaerobic.
UNIT II :
Fermenter - Design, Instrumentation and control, aeration and agitation, Recovery and purification of fermentation products; Types of fermentors; Enzyme and cell immobilization, production of recombinant proteins having therapeutic and diagnostic applications: Vaccines, Insulin, Interferon, Somatotropin; single cell protein.
UNIT III :
Biology of industrial micro organisms. Streptomyces, Yeasts (Saccharomyes, Hansenela) Spirulina and Penicillium. Mushroom cultivation, Biochips; Biosensors; Biofuels from microbial sources.
UNIT IV :
Production of primary metabolites: Alcohols (Ethanol and Butanol); Beverages (Beer and Wine); Aminoacids (Glutamic acid and Lysine); Organic acids (Citric acid and acetic acid).
UNIT V :
Production of secondary metabolites: Antibiotics (Penicillin and Streptomycin); Vitamins (Riboflavin and Cyanocobalamin); Steroids; Production of enzymes (Protease, amylase and lipase); Biopolymers (Xanthan gum and PHB); Biopreservatives (Nisin).
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - PAPER-II - ENVIRONMENTAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT I :
Biofilm Kinetics: Completely mixed biofilm reactor-Soluble microbial products and inert biomass-Special-case biofilm solution.
UNIT II :
Reactors: Reactor types - A batch reactor - A continuous-flow stirred-tank reactor with effluent recycle A plug-flow reactor - A plug-flow reactor with effluent recycles-Reactors with recycle of settled cells - Using alternate rate models - Linking stoichiometric equations to mass balance equations - Engineering design of reactors - Reactors in series.
UNIT III :
Denitrification: Physiology of denitrifying bacteria-Tertiary denitrification-One-sludge denitrification - Waste water treatment systems - Anaerobic & Aerobic - Drinking-water treatment: Anaerobic treatment by methanogenesis - uses for methanogenic treatment-Reactor configurations - Special factors for the design of anaerobic sludge digesters.
UNIT IV :
Detoxification of Hazardous chemicals: Factors causing molecular recalcitrance - Synthetic organic chemical classes - Energy metabolism versus co-metabolism - Electron donor versus electron acceptor - Minimum substrate concentration (Smin) Biodegradation of problem environmental contaminants.
UNIT V :
Bioremediation: Engineering strategies for bioremediation - Evaluation bioremediation - Sewage and waste treatment - Pollution monitoring, control and remediation (petroleum Industry, Paper Industry, chemical industry etc.) Biomass from the wastes.
SEMESTER - IV
PAPER XIII - FOOD, DAIRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY
UNIT I :
Food Microbiology: Sources of contamination of microorganisms in foods; Factors influencing microbial growth in foods; Extrinsic and intrinsic; Principles and methods of food preservation: High Temperature, Low Temperature, Drying, Irradiation and Chemical Preservatives; Food borne diseases: Bacteria, Fungi, Viruses, Algae and Protozoa; Spoilage of fruits, vegetables, meat, poultry, fish and sea foods.
UNIT II :
Dairy Microbiology: Microflora of milk; sources of contamination, preservation and spoilage of milk and milk products; Milk borne diseases; Preservation of milk, Fermented foods: Sauerkraut, Pickles, Buttermilk, Yogurt and Cheese; Probiotics and Prebiotics; Food sanitation, food control agencies and their regulations.
UNIT III :
Microbiology of air: Composition of Air; Number and kinds of organisms in air; Distribution and sources of air borne organisms; Droplet and droplet nuclei; Assessment of air quality; Air Sanitation; Airborne diseases; Microbiology of water: Physico-Chemical properties of water; Kinds of aquatic habitats (freshwater and marine); Aquatic microflora and fauna of lake, ponds, river, estuary and sea; Biology and ecology of reservoirs; Distribution and impact of environmental factors on the aquatic biota; Biodegradation in different aquatic ecosystems.
UNIT IV :
Environmental Microbiology: Waste treatment - Wastes - Type - characterization - solid and liquid; Treatment of solid wastes - composting, vermiform composting, silage, pyrolysis and saccharifications; Treatment of liquid wastes - primary, secondary (anaerobic and aerobic) - trickling, activated sludge, oxidation pond, and oxidation ditch-tertiary - disinfection.
UNIT V :
Degradation of Xenobiotic compounds: Simple aromatics, chlorinated polyaromatic petroleum products, pesticides and surfactants; Biodeterioration of materials by microbes: Paper, leather, wood, textiles and paint; Metal corrosion; Bioaccumulation of heavy metals; Biofouling, Bioleaching, Biofilms and Bioremediation.
PAPER XIV - SOIL, AGRICULTURAL, FOOD AND ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY - PRACTICAL-IV
UNIT I :
Isolation and enumeration of soil microorganisms (fungi, bacteria and actinomycetes). Isolation of phosphate solubilizer from soil. Isolation of Nitrogen fixers (a) Rhizobium from root nodule and (b) Azotobacter from rhizosphere. Screening of antagonistic bacteria in soil by agar block overlay method. Isolation of Cyanobacteria and Photosynthetic bacteria from soil/water.
UNIT II :
Estimation of foliar infection by Stoyer's method. Cultivation of oyster mushroom. Study of the following diseases: Tobacco mosaic; Bacterial blight of paddy; Downy mildew of bajra; Powdery mildow of cucurbits; Head smut of sorghum, Leaf rust of coffee; Leaf spot of mulberry, Red rot of sugarcane, Root knot of mulberry.
UNIT III :
Detection of number of Bacteria in milk by breed count. Determination of quality of milk sample by methylene blue reductase test and Resorzurin method. Detection of number of bacteria in milk by standard plant count. Isolation of yeast and molds from spoiled nuts, fruits, and vegetables. Bacteriological examination of specific food (a) Curd (b) Raw meat (c) Fish (d) Ice cream.
UNIT IV :
Extracellular enzyme activities - phosphatase. Quantification of microorganisms in air-solid and liquid impingement techniques.
UNIT V :
Physical, chemical and microbial assessment of water and potability test for water. Physical and chemical-colour, pH, alkalinity, acidity, COD, BOD, anions and cations. Microbiological - MPN index presumptive, completed and confirmatory tests.
PAPER XV - PROJECT PLUS VIVA VOCE
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE
To impart advanced practical knowledge in conducting a research project.
To plan and design Statistically, retrieve relevant literature, organize and conduct, process the data, photograph relevant observations, evaluate by statistical programmes. Present the project in any regional/national conference/seminar during the Second year of the course and submit for final semester Examinations. The work has to be conducted in department under the guidance of the project supervisor. Interdisciplinary collaborations from external departments / institutions can be organized only for essential areas of the project. The method of valuation of project report submitted by the candidate is outlined as follows:
Internal 20 marks 2 out of 3 presentations - 20 Marks
Viva - 20 Marks
Project Report - 60 Marks
ELECTIVE-V - SOIL AND AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY
UNIT I :
Characteristics and classification of soils; Soil Microorganisms; Interactions between microorganisms: Mutalism, commensalism, ammensalism synergism, parasitism, predation, competition; Interaction of microbes with plants and animals: Rhizosphere, phyllosphere, mycorrhizae.
UNIT II :
Symbiotic and Asymbiotic Nitrogen fixation; Genetics of Nitrogen Fixation; Rumen Microbiology; Biogeochemical cycles: Carbon, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Sulfur; Biofertilizers - Rhizobium, Azotobacter, Azospirillum, VAM, Phosphobacteria, Azolla Cyanobacteria; Biopesticides. Interrelationships between microorganisms, plants and soil: Enzymes of microbial origin and their role in release of available plant nutrients, microorganisms and soil-borne plant pathogens, microbial toxins and their degradation in soil.
UNIT III :
Plant pathogens and classification of plant diseases. Principles of plant infection and defense mechanisms: Entry of pathogen in to host; Colonization of host; Role of enzymes, toxins and growth regulatory substances; Structural and biochemical defense mechanisms in plants; Secrets of host pathogen recognition and specificity; Molecular aspects of host defense reactions; Lipoxygenase and other enzymes in the expression of disease resistance.
UNIT IV :
Plant disease management: Exclusion Evasion, Eradication; Crop rotation, Sanitation, Physical, Chemical and Biological control, Plant disease forecasting; Biotechnological approaches to disease management.
UNIT V :
Symptoms, Etiology, Epidemiology and management of the following plant diseases: Mosaic disease of tobacco; Bunchy top of banana; Leaf roll of potato; Bacterial blight of paddy; Angular leaf spot of cotton, Late blight of potato; Damping off of tobacco, Downy mildew of bajra; Powdery mildew of cucurbits; Head smut of sorghum; Leaf rust of coffee; Blight of maize/sorghum; Leaf spot of paddy, Grassy shoot of sugar cane; Root knot of mulberry.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P. and Klein, D.A. (1999) Microbiology. McGraw Hill, New Delhi
1. Ketchum, P.A. (1984) Microbiology: Concepts and Applications. John Wiley and Sons, New York.
2. Madigan, M.T., Martinko, J.M. and Parker, J. (1999). Brock’s Biology of Micro organisms, 9th Edn. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
3. Salle, A.J. (1992) Fundamental Principles of Bacteriology, 7th Edn. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
4. Mandelstam, J., McQuillen, K. and Dawes, L. (1992) Biochemistry of Bacterial Growth, 3rd Edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
5. Moat, A.G. and Foster, J.W. (1995) Microbial Physiology, 3rd Edn. John Wiley and Sons, New York.
6. Roitt, I.M.(1988) Essential Immunology. Blackwell Scientific Publications,Oxford.
7. Jawetz, E., Melnic, J.L. and Adelberg, E.A. (2000) Review of Medical Microbiology ,19th Edn. Lange Medical Publications, U.S.A.
8. Ananthanarayan, R. and Jeyaram Paniker, C.K. (1994) Text Book of Microbiology,6th Edn. Orient Longman, Chennai.
9. Jeyaram Paniker, C.K. (2006) Text Book of Parasitology. Jay Pee Brothers, New Delhi.
10. Alexender, M. (1977) Introduction to Soil Microbilogy. John Wiley and Sons, New York.
11. Stanbury, P.F., Whitaker, A. and Hall, S.J. (1995) Principles of Fermentation Technology, 2nd Edn. Pergamon Press, Oxford.
12. Frazier, W.C. and Westhoff, D.C. (1988) Food Microbiology, 4th Edn. McGraw Hill, New York.
13. Old, R. and Primrose, S.B. (1995) Principles of Gene Manipulation: An Introduction to Genetic Engineering, 5th Edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
14. Freifelder, D. (1995) Molecular Biology. Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
15. Timbury, M.C. (1986) Medical Virology, 9th Edn. Churchill Livingstone, London.
16. Jagadish Chander (1996) A Text Book of Medical Mycology. Interprint, New Delhi.
17. Arora, D.R. (2003) Text Book of Microbiology, 2nd Edn. CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi.
18. Arora, D.R. and Arora, B.(2002) Medical Parasitology, 1st Edn. CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi.
19. Dubey, R.C. and Maheswari, D.K. (2003) A Text Book of Microbiology, 1st Edn. S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
20. Dubey, R.C. and Maheswari, D.K. (2002) Practical Microbiology, 1st Edn. S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi
21. Sathyanarayana, U. (2002) Essentials of Biochemistry 1st Edn. Books and Allied (P) Ltd., Kolkata.
22. Deb, A.C., (1999) Concepts of Biochemistry, 1st Edn. Books and Allied (P) Ltd., Kolkata.
23. Rose,A.H. (1976) Chemical Microbiology: An Introduction to Microbial Physiology, 3rd Edn.Plenum, New York.
24. Gottschalk, G. (1986) Bacterial Mrtabolosm, 2nd Edn. Springer-Verlag, New York.
25. Davis, B.D., Delbecco, R., Eisen, H.N. and Ginsburg, H.S. (1990) Microbiology, 5th Edn. Harper & Row, New York.
26. Alexopolus, C.J. and Mims, C.W. (1979) Introductory Mycology, 3 rd Edn .John Wiley and Sons, New York.
27. Schmidt, G.D. and Roberts, L.S. (1981) Foundations of Parasitology, 2nd Edn, Mosby, St. Louis.
28. Tizard, R.I. (1983) Immunology: An Introduction. Saunders College Publishing, Philadelphia.
29. Kuby, J. (1994) Immunology, 2nd Edn. H.W.Freeman and Company, New York.
30. Elgert, K.D. (1996) Immunology:Understanding the Immune System. Wiley – Liss, New York.
31. Cambell, R. (1983) Microbial Ecology, 2nd Edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, London.
32. Atlas, R.M. and Bartha, R. (1992) Microbial Ecology: Fundamentals and Applications, 2nd Edn. The Benjamin / Cummings Publishing Co.,Redwood City,CA.
33. Mitchell, R. (1974) Introduction to Environmental Microbiology. Prentice – Hall. Inc. New Jersey.
34. Subba Rao, N.S. (1995) Soil Microorganisms and Plant Growth. Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
35. Paul, E.A. and Clark, F.E. (1989) Soil Microbiology and Biochemistry. Academic Press, London.
36. Subbha Rao, N.S. (1995) Biofertilizers in Agriculture and Forestry, 3rd Edn. Oxford & IBH Pub. Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
37. Banwart, G.J. (1989) Basic Food Microbiology. CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi.
38. Casida, J.E. (1968) Industrial Microbiology. Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.
39. Adams, M.R. and Moss, M.O. (1995) Food Microbiology. Royal Society of Chemistry, Cambridge.
40. Winnacker, E.L. (1987) From Genes to Clones: Introduction to Gene Technology. VCH, Weinheim.
41. Brown, T.A. (1995) Gene Cloning. Chapman and Hall, London.
42. Maloy, S.R., Cronan, J.E., Jr. and David Freifelder. (1994) Microbial Genetics, 2nd Edn. Jones and Bartlett, Boston.
43. Chatterjee (1986) Medical Parasitology. Tata McGraw Hill, Calcutta.
44. Grierson, D. and Covery, S. (1989) Plant Molecular Biology, 2nd Edn. Blackie, London.
45. Luria, S.E., Darnel, J.E., Jr., Baltimore, D. and Campbell, A. (1978) General Virology, 3rd Edn. John Wiley & Sons, New York.
46. Fenner, F. and White, D.O. (1970) Animal Virology. Academic Press,New York.
47. Glick B.K. and Pasternak, J.J. (1999) Molecular Biotechnology. Principles and Applications of Recombinant DNA. ASM Press, Washington, DC.
48. Stryer, L. (1995) Biochemistry. W.H. Freeman & Co., New York.
49. Ingraham, J.L. and Ingraham, C.A. (2000) Introduction to Microbiology, 2nd Edn. Books / Cole Thomson Learning, UK.
50. Lee, J.D. (2001) Inorganic Chemistry. Blackwell Science,Oxford.
51. Sony, P.L. (2000) A Text Book of Inorganic Chemistry. S.Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
52. Greenwood, N.N. and Earnshaw, A. (1989) Chemistry of the Elements.Mac Millan Publication New York.
53. Cotton, F.A and Wilkinson, G. (1989) Inorganic Chemistry. John Wiley and Sons, NewYork.
54. Schelegel, H.G. (1993) General Microbiology,7th Edn. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
55. Lehninger, A.L., Nelson, D.L. and Cox, M.M. (1993) Principles of Biochemistry, 2nd Edn. CBS Publishers, New Delhi.
56. Pelczar, M.J., Jr., Chan, E.C.S and Kreig, N.R. (1993) Microbiology. McGraw Hill, New York.
57. Negi, A.S. and Anand, S.C. (1997) A Text Book of Physical Chemistry, 5th Edn. New Delhi.
59. Gerald Karp,(2002) Cell and Molecular Biology :Concepts and Experiments,3rd Edn John Wiley, New York.
68. Arora, M.P., Gurdarshan and Sandhu, S. (2004) Genetics, 5th Edn. New Age International Publishers, New Delhi.
69. Raven & Johnson (1990) Biology, 4th Edn. Wm. C. Brown Publishers, London.
70. 80. Salisbury, F.B. and Ross, C.W. (1991) Plant Physiology. Wassworth Publication. Co. Belmont.
71. Daniel, W.W. (2005) Biostatistics; A foundation for analysis in the health sciences, 7th Edn. Jhon Wiley & sons Inc, New York.
72. Garumani, N. (2004) An introduction to Biostatistics. JP publishers, Chennai.
73. Wilson, K. and Walker, J. (2002) Practical Biochemistry: Principles & Techniques, 5th Edn. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
74. Sundar Rao, P.S.S. and Richard, J. (2006) Introduction to Biostatistics & Research methods. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi.
75. Rittman, B.E. and McCarty P.L. (2001) Environmental Biotechnology: Principles and application. McGraw-Hill, New York.
76. Anderson, J.B., Durston, H. and Poole, M. (1970) Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley Eastern Private Limited, New Delhi.
77. Day, R.A. (1988) How to write and publish a scientific paper, 3rd edition, Oryx Press, Phoenix, Anzona.
78. Jayaraman, J. (2000) Laboratory Manual of Biochemistry. Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi 110 002.
79. Sharma, K.R. (2002) Research methodology. National Publishing House, Jaipur and New Delhi.
80. Webster, J.G. (2004) Bioinstrumentation, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd., Singapore.
81. Agrios, G.N. (1978) Plant Pathology, 2nd Edn., Academic Press, New York.
82. Butler, E.J. (1918) Fungi and Disease in plants. Thacker Spink and Co., Calcutta.
83. Gregory, P.H. and Monteth (1962). Airborne Microbes. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK.
84. Watson, J.D., Gilman, M., Witkowshi, J. and Zoller, M. (1992) Recombinant DNA, 2nd Edn. Scientific American Books, New York, USA.
85. Board, R.G. (1983) A modern introduction to food microbiology. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
86. Hobbs, B.C. and Roberts, D. (1993) Food Poisoning and Food Hygiene. Edward Arnold: London.
87. Jay, J.M. (1987) Modern food microbiology. CBS Publisher and Distributors, New Delhi.
88. Weir, D.M. and Steward J. (1993) Immunology, 7th Edn. ELBS, London.
89. Humphrey, J.H. and White, R.G. (1995) Immunology for Students of Medicine, 5th Edn. ELBS, London.
90. Parija, S.C. (1996) Text Book of Medical Parasitology. Orient Longman, Chennai.
91. Morag, C. and Timbury, M.C. (1994) Medical Virology, 10th Edn. Churchill Livingston, London.
92. Daniel, W.W. (1995) Biostatistics : A foundation for analysis in health sciences,6th Edn. John Wiley & Sons, New York.
93. Cotton, T. (1974) Statistics in Medicine. Little Brown, Boston.
94. Arunagirinathan, N. and Rajendran, P.(2006) Allergy, 1st Edn. Rahul Publication,Arcot,Vellore.
95. Kannan, I. (2007) Immunology. MJP Publishers, Chennai.
96. Daniel, J.C. (1996) Environmental Aspects of Microbiology. Bright Sum Publication, Chennai.
97. Meena Kumari, S. (2006) Microbial Physiology. MJP Publishers, Chennai.
98. Arunagirinathan, N. and Aswini, L. (2006) Biotechniques, 1st Edn. Rahul Publication,Arcot,Vellore.
99. Cappuccino, J. and Sherman, N. (2002) Microbiology: A Laboratory Manual, 6th Edn. Pearson Education Publication, New Delhi.
100. Vijaya Ramesh, K (2007) Food Microbioloy. MJP Publishers., Chennai.
101. Jayapal, V. (2007) Fundamentals of Medical Immunology. Jay Pee Brothers Medical Publications, New Delhi.
102. George Pinchuk (2002) Immunology (Schaum’s Outlines). McGraw Hill , New York.
103. Palanivelu, P (2004) Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – A Laboratory Manual for B.Sc & M.Sc Students, 3rd Edn. Twenty-first Century Publication, Palkalai Nagar, Madurai.
104. Nicholl, D.S.T. (1994) An Introduction to Genetic Engineering. Cambridge Press, London, UK.
105. Sundararaj, T. (2002) Microbiology Laboratory Manual, Ist Edn.Mrs.Aswathy Sundararaj Publication, Chennai .
106. Robinson, R.K. (1990) Dairy Microbiology. Elsevier Applied Sciences, London.
107. Gautham, N. (2006) Bioinformatics. Narosa Publishing Company, New Delhi.
108. Lesk, A.M. (2002) Introduction to Bioinformatics, Ist Edn. Oxford University press, Oxford, UK.
109. Westhead, D.R., Parish, J.H. and Twyman, R.M.(2003) Instant Notes Series – Bioinformatics, Ist Edn. Viva Books Private Limited, New Delhi, India.
110. Attwood, T.K. and Parry-Smith, D.J.(1999) Introduction to Bioinformatics. Addision Wesley Longman Limited, England.
111. Ignacimuthu, S. (2005) Basic Bioinformatics, Ist Edn. Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Finegold, S.M. (2000) Diagnostic Microbiology, 10th Edn. C.V. Mosby Company, St. Louis
2. Holt, J.S., Krieg, N.R., Sneath, P.H.A. and Williams, S.S.T. (1994) Bergey’s Manual of Determinative Bacteriology, 9th Edn. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore.
3. Rheinheimer, G. (1980) Aquatic Microbilogy, 2nd Edn. John Wiley & Sons, New York.
4. Peppler, H.J. and Pearl Man, D. (1979) Fermentation Technology, Vol 1 & 2, Academic Press, London.
5. Bert Desowitz (1980) Ova and Parasites. Harper and Row Publishers, New York.
6. Hayes, W. (1968) The Genetics of Bacteria and their Viruses. Blackwell Scientific Publications, London.
7. Lennette, E.H. (1974) Diagnostic Procedures for Viral and Rikettsial Diseases. American Public Health Association, New York.
8. Hoeprich, P.D. (1977) Infectious Diseases, 2nd Edn. Harper & Row Publishers, New York.
9. Hall, D.V. and Rao, K.K. Photosynthesis. Arnold, London.
10. Postgate, J. (1987) Nitrogen Fixation,2nd Edn. Cassel, London.
11. Zar, J.H. (2006) Biostatistical analysis, 4th Edn. Pearson education Inc. New Jersey.
12. Scragg, A. (1999) Environmental Biotechnology. Pearson Education Ltd., England.
13. Marshall, K.C. (1985) Advances in Microbial Ecology, Vol.8, Plenum Press, U.K.
14. Fletcher, M. and Gray, T.R.G. (1987). Ecology of Microbial communities. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK.
15. Forster, C.F. (1985). Biotechnology and Wastewater Treatment. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge,UK.
16. Gray, N.F. (1989). Biology of Waste Water Treatment. Oxford University Press, Oxford,UK.
17. Metcalf and Eddy (1985) Waste Water Engineering: Treatment, Disposal and Reuse, 2nd Edn. McGraw Hill, International Book Company, Auckland.
18. Rheinheimer (1977) Microbial ecology of brackish water environment. Ecological studies, Vol. 25, Springer - Verlag Berlin - Heidelberg. N.Y.
19. Watson, J.D., Hopkins, N.H., Roberts, J.W., Steitz, J.A. and Weiner, A.M. (1987) Molecular biology of the gene, 4th Edn. The Benjamin/cummings Publishing Company Inc. NY.
20. Baumberg, S., Hunter, I.S. and Rhodes, P.M. (ed). (1989) Microbial Products - New approaches. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK.
21. Demain, A.L. and Solomon, N.A. (1986) Manual of Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology. American Society for Microbiology, Washington.
22. Reed, G. (1982) Industrial Microbiology. Mac Millan Publishers Ltd., Wisconsin.
23. Boyd, R.F. (1998) General Microbiology. Times Mirror, Mosby College Publishing, St Louis.
24. Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. and Pober, J.S. (1994) Cellular and Molecular Immunology, 2nd Edn. WB Saunders, USA.
25. Gerhardt, P., Murray, R.G., Wood, W.A. and Kreig, N.R. (Eds) (1994) Methods for General and Molecular Bacteriology. ASM Press, Washington, DC.
26. Snedecar, G.W. and Cochram, W.G. (1967) Statistical Methods. Oxford Press,London.
27. Wolfgang, Joklik and Smith, D.T. (1990) Zinsser Microbiology, 16th Edn. Appleton Century Crafts, New York.
28. Cowan and Steel (1995) Manual for Identification of Medical Bacteria, 4th Edn. Cambridge University Press, London.
29. Weir, D.M. (1995) Experimental Techniques in Immunology. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
30. Topley and Wilson (1995) Principles of Bacteriology Virology and Immunity. 9th Edn. Vol I, Edward Arnold, London.
31. Murray, P.R., Baron, E.J., Jorgensen, J.H., Pfaller, M.A. and Yoke, R.H. (2003) Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 8th Edn. Vol 1&2, ASM Press, Washington, D.C.
32. Balows, A., Hausler. W.J., Ohashi.M. and Turano.A. (Eds) (1988) Laboratory Diagnosis of Infectious Diseases: Principles and Practice, Vol 1 Springer-Verlag, New York.
33. Murray, R.K., Granner, D.K.and Rodwell, V.W. (2006) Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry, 27th Edn. Mc Graw Hill, Singapore.
34. Strachan, T. and Read, A. P. (1996) Human Molecular Genetics, Bios Scientific Publishers, U.K.
35. Lodish, H., Baltimore, O., Berk, A., Zipursky, S.L.,Matsudaira ,P.and Darnell, J. (1995). Molecular Cell Biology, Scientific American Books, New York USA.
36. Innis, M.A (1995) PCR Strategies. Academic Press, London, UK.
37. Clover, D.M. (1987) DNA cloning series, Vol. I to IV, IRL Press, Oxford.
38. Benjamin Lewin (1997) Genes VII. Oxford University Press, London,UK.
39. Baker, K.H. and Herson, O.S. (1994) Bioremediation. Mc Graw Hill, Inc.New York.
40. Amold, L., Demain, A.L. and Davies, J.E. (1999) Manual of Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology, 2nd Edn. ASM Press, Washington DC.
41. Maniatis, T., Fritsh, E.F. and Sambrook, J. (1998) Molecular cloning A Laboratory Manual, Vol I to III, Coldspring Harbour Lab., New York, USA.
42. Krane, D.E. and Raymer,M.L. (2003) Fundamental Concepts of Bioinformatics, Benjamin Cummings, New York ,USA.
43. Baldi, P. and Brunak, S. (2003) Bioinformatics. Affillated East – West Press, New Delhi, India.
44. Srinivas, V.S. (2005) Bioinformatics: A Modern Approach. Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, India.
45. Mount, D.W. (2001) Bioinformatics Sequence and Genome Analysis, Ist Edn. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New Delhi, USA.
46. Doelle, H.W. (1975) Bacterial Metablism, 2nd Edn. Academic Press, London.
47. Collee, J.C., Duguid, J.P., Fraser, A.C. and Marimon, B.P. (1996) Mackie and McCartney Practical Medical Microbiology, 14th Edn. Churchill Livingstone, London.
48. Greenwood, D., Slack, R.B. and Peutherer, J.F. (2002) Medical Microbiology, 16th Edn. Churchill Livingstone, London.
49. Lynch, J.M. and Poole, N.J. (1979) Microbial Ecology: A. Conceptual Approach. Blackwell Scientific Publications, London.
50. Glover, D.M. (1984) Gene Cloning: The Mechanism of DNA Manipulation. Chapman and Hall, London.
51. Levanthal, R. and Cheadle, R.S. (1979) Medical Parasitology. S.A. Davies Co., Philadelphia.
52. Walter Beck, J. and Davies, J.E. (1976) Medical Parasitology, 2nd Edn. C.V. Mosby Company, St. Louis.
53. Bridge, E.A. (1994) Bacterial and Bacteriophage Genetics, 3rd Edn. Springer–Verlag,New York.
54. Jacob, W.P. (1979). Plant Hormones and Plant Development. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
55. Baker, K.F. and Cook, R.J. (1974) Biological Control of Plant Pathogens. W.H. Freeman and Co., New York.
56. Imhoff, K. and Fair, G.M. (1956) Sewage Treatment. John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York.
57. Dan, R.R. and Jellis, G.J. (1988) Genetics and plant pathogenesis, Blackwell Scientific Publication, Oxford.
58. Ward, O.P. (1989) Fermentation Biotechnology: Principles, Processes and Products. Prentice Hall Engle Wood Cliffs, New Jersey.
59. Dimmock, N.J. and Pimbrose, S.B. (1994) Introduction to Modern Virology, 4th Edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
60. Conrat, H.F., Kimball, P.C. and Levy, J.A. (1994) Virology, 3rd Edn, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
3. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOCHEMISTRY
SEMESTER III
|Title of the paper |Cell and Molecular Biology -Core-8 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To introduce the students to the basic of cytology and central dogma of Molecular biology |
Course Outline: (Cell and Molecular Biology)
UNIT I
Gene as a unit of mutation and recombination Identification of DNA as a genetic material. Mutation: Molecular nature, chemical mutagenesis by nitrous acid, hydroxylamine, alkylating agent, interclators and physical mutation by UV, origin of spontaneous mutation and its control, DNA damage and repair: Chemical and physical agents cross-linkers- Mechanism of repair: Photo reactivation, excision repair, recombinational repair- The SOS and adaptive responses and their regulation- Heat shock response.
UNIT II
Architecture of Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells – Plant and Animal cells. Cell division, mitosis and meiosis, Cell differentiation, Organogenesis. Cell cycle-phases of cell cycle, cell-cell interaction, cell cycle and its regulation.
UNIT III
Replication machinery, Prokaryotic replication mechanisms, the cellular replisomes, Eukaryotic DNA replication, the role of Topoisomerases and Telomerases, Regulation of replication. Mutation and molecular mechanism of mutation, effect of mutation in protooncogenes.
UNIT IV
The Lac Operon, identification of Operator and Regulator, sequences by mutations, induction and repression, foot – printing and gel, shift assays for identification of protein – DNA interactions. Catabolite repression, Trp Operon – attenuation. Regulation of eukaryotic transcription – response elements, DNA – binding motifs, association of methylation with gene expression, molecular mechanism of eukaryotic transcription control.
UNIT V
Post transcriptional and post translational modifications. Genetic code, deciphering the genetic code. mRNA 5’ capping and 3’poly adenylation, splicing. Spliceosome assembly, alternative splicing, processing of tRNA and rRNA, self-splicing, ribozymes, dehydration of mRNA, RNA editing, regulation of mRNA processing. Protein sorting – signal peptides, targettting of mitochondrial, secretory and lysosomal proteins, protein degradation.
Reference Books:
Cell Biology: A short course – Bolsover S, 2004, 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons.
Molecular biology of cell – Bruce Alberts, Alexander Johnson, Julian Lewis, Martin Raff, Keith Roberts, Peter Walter, 2002, 4th edition, Garland science.
Molecular Biology – Weaver, 2002, 2nd edition, Mc Graw-Hill.
Molecule Cell Biology – Levin Benjamin, 2000, 4th edition, WH Freeman & Company, New York.
Recommended Books:
Introduction to Molecular Biology – Paolella P, 1998, Mc Graw-Hill.
Cell and Molecular Biology – Karp G, 2002, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Indian Books:
Cell Biology – Singh S.P, Tomar B.S, 1993, Rastogi Meerut, Delhi.
Cell Biology, Genetics, Molecular Biology and Evolution – Verma O.P.S and Agarwal O.V.K, 1986, S.Chand & Co. Madras.
Web Sites:
biology
|Title of the paper |Hormonal Chemistry – Core - 9 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To introduce to the students the basics of Endocrine system and related signal transduction. |
Course Outline : (Hormonal Chemistry)
UNIT I
Hormones - Definition. Classification, biosynthesis, circulation in blood, modification and degradation. Target tissue - feedback control. Hormone receptors - External features and structure, regulation of receptor levels. Mechanisms of hormone action. Signal transduction. Plasma membrane receptors adenylate cyclase, role of G proteins, protein kinases, tyrosine kinase, inositol phosphates, calcium, calmodulin. Steroid hormone receptors – Mechanism of steroid hormone action.
UNIT II
Hypothalamus and pituitary hormones. Vasopressin and oxytocin. Hypothalamic releasing factors. Anterior pituitary hormones – actions and feedback regulation of synthesis. Growth promoting, lactogenic hormones, glycoprotein hormones the POMC family. Endorphins. MSH. Hypho and hyperactivity of pituitary hormones-gigantism, acromegaly, dwarfism, vasopressin and oxytocin. Diabetes insipidus, syndrome of inappropriate ADH secretion
UNIT III
Thyroid hormones – Synthesis and secretion, transport, metabolic fate and biological actions. Antithyroid agents. Thyroid diseases – thyrotoxicosis, goiter, hypothyroidism, grave’s disease and Hashimoto’s thyroiditis. Biosynthesis, transport, functions, mechanism of action of Parathyroid hormone, calcitonin and calcitriol. Rickets and osteomalacia
UNIT IV
Pancreatic hormones – cell types of the islets of langerhans. Insulin – biosynthesis regulation of secretion. Biological actions. Mechanism of action. Insulin receptor – intracellular mediators. Insulin signaling pathways. Diabetes mellitus. Glucagon, somatostatin and pancreatic polypeptide. Insulin like growth factors.
UNIT V
Adrenal hormones – glucocorticoids, mineralocorticoids synthesis, secretion, transport, metabolism and secretion. Biological effects. Mechanism of action. Adrenal androgens – metabolic effects and functions Adrenal medulla – catecholamines, biosynthesis, storage, metabolism, regulation of synthesis.
Abnormal secretion of adrenal hormones – Addison’s disease, Cushing’s syndrome, congenital adrenal hyperplasia, phaeochromocytoma.
Gonadal hormones – androgens, estrogens. Biological actions. Ovarian cycle. Pregnancy - Biochemical changes in pregnancy.
Textbooks recommended
1. William’s textbook of endocrinology – Wilson and Forester 8th edition.
2. Mechanisms of hormone action – Austin and short.
3. Harper’s biochemistry – Murray et al.25th ed. McGraw hill, 2000.
4. Principles of biochemistry – mammalian biochemistry – smith et al. McGraw Hill 7th ed.
5. Text book of Biochemistry with clinical correlations (eds.) T.M.Devlin (John Wiley).
6. Endocrinology by Mac.E.Hadley (Prentice Hall).
7. Tietz text book of clinical chemistry by Carl. A.Burtis and Edward R.Ashwood.
8. Essential endocrinology J.E.Wise (Oxford Press).
|Title of the paper |Clinical Biochemistry-Core -10 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the biochemical basis of disease based on clinical investigations |
Course outline: (Clinical Biochemistry)
UNIT I
Collection, preparation of biological specimens such as blood, urine,CSF, bile, saliva and faeces, automation in clinical biochemistry. Disorder of blood-blood dyscrasias, agranulocytosis, thrombocytopenia, aplastic, hemolytic anemia, methhemoglobin, hemutria hemoglobinopathies, homeostasis and thromobosis, extrinsic and intrinsic pathways of blood clotting, mechanism and disorders. Laboratory test and measure coagulation and anticoagulants.
UNIT II
Prenatal detection of in born disorders of metabolism and in the fetus and heterozygous carriers by enzyme assays in amniotic fluid, plasma cells and biopsy samples. Phenylketonuria, alkaptonuria, phenylalaninemia, homocystinuria and tyrisonemia and related disorders of aminoacidurias, hartnup’s disease. Hypo and hyper uricemia and gout.
UNIT III
Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism-blood sugar level , diabetes mellitus, metabolic complications, various type of glucose tolerance test, assay of insulin, glycosylated hemoglobin, glycogen storage diseases, galactosemia, lactose intolerance, fructosuria, pentosuria, mucopolysaccharidosis, ketone bodies. Plasma lipids, lipoproteins , abnormalities, hypo and hypercholesterolemia lipidosis. Clinical interrelationship of lipids (sphingolipidosis, multiple sclerosis), lipoproteins and apolipoprotiens. Diagnostic tests of apolipoprotein, HDL-Cholesterol, LDL-Cholesterol and triglyceride disorders.
UNIT IV
Clinical enzymology – Plasma enzymes in diagnosis and prognosis – Amino transferases, Creatine Kinase, lactate dehydrogenases, adlolase, amylase, phosphatases, lipase, elastase, γ-glutamyl transferase, 5’nucleotidase. Iso enzymes of ALP and LDH. Clinical application of plasma enzyme assays in myocardial infarction, liver diseases and muscle contraction.
UNIT V
Evaluation of organ function test-assessment and clinical manifestation of renal (clearance and tubular function tests), hepatic (proteins, carbohydrate lipid, pigment metabolism, detoxification, excretion), pancreatic, gastric (FTM, pentagastrin test, insulin stimulation tests), and intestinal functions (malabsorption syndrome, disaccharidases deficiency).
Reference Books:
Varley's Practical Clinical Biochemistry - Alan H Gowenlock, published by CBS Publishers and distributors, 1988, 6th edition, India.
Textbook of Biochemistry with clinical correlations-T.M.Devlin, 2002, 5th edition.
Biochemistry: A case oriented approach- Montgomery, Comway, Spector, Chappell,1996, 6th edition, Mosby Publishers, USA.
Recommended Books:
Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical chemistry – Burtis and Ashwood, 2001, 5th edition, WB Saunders Company, Oxford Science Publications USA.
Indian Books:
Text book of Biochemistry : A clinically oriented approach - Dinesh Puri, B.I, 2002, Churchill Livingstone Inc., India.
Text Book of Medical Biochemistry – Chatterjea & Schinde, 2000 4th edition.
|Title of the paper |Practical- III –Core -11 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To get hands on training in Biochemical methods |
Course outline: (Practical- III)
Antioxidant status: Estimation of super oxide dismutase and catalase. Estimation of vitamine E and C.
Haematology: RBC count, WBC count – total and differential count, ESR, PCV, MCV. Estimation of hemoglobin.
Immunological studies
a. Serotyping
b. Qualitative determination of antigen by Outcherlony diffusion technique
c. Demonstration experiments.
i) Production of antibody
ii) Determination of antibody titre
iii) Assay of IgM, IgG.
Liver function test: Estimation of bilirubin – direct and indirect. Estimation of plasma protein, A/G ratio, Thymol turbidity test, Assay of serum glutamate oxaloacetate transaminase, alkaline phosphatase, isoenzyme separation of LDH by electrophoresis.
Renal function test: Qualitative tests for normal and pathological components of urine. Estimation of blood and urine urea, creatinine, creatine and uric acid. Urea Clearance test. Chemical analysis of kidney and gall stones.
Estimation of blood glucose by orthotoluidine and glucose oxidase method. Determination of glycosylated Hb. Glucose tolerance test.
Lipid profile: Estimation of cholesterol by Zak’s method, lipoprotein profile, estimation of ketone bodies, estimation of triglycerides, free fatty acids and phospholipids.
Reference Books:
Varley’s Practical Clinical Biochemistry by Alan H Gowenlock, published by CBS Publishers and distributors, India Sixth Edition (1988).
Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical chemistry – Burtis and Ashwood, Fifth Edition, WB Saunders Company, Oxford Science Publications USA, (2001)
Practical Biochemistry – Keith Wilson & John Walker, fifth edition, Cambridge Universtiy Press, UK (2000).
Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – Palanivelu third edition (2004).
Biochemical calculations – Irwin H. Segel, second edition, John Wiley & Sons, USA (1976).
Introduction to Practical Biochemistry by Sawhney and Randhir Singh, Narosa Publishing House, London (2000).
Experiments in Biochemistry – A Hands on Approach by Shawn O Farrell and Ryan T Ranallo, Thomson Learning Inc., USA (2000)
Recommended Books:
Principles of Instrumental analysis – Skoog, Holler, Nieman, fifth edition Published by Harcourt College Publishers, Singapore (2001).
Essentials of Practical Biochemistry by Lalit M Srivatsava, Nibhriti Das, Subrata Sinha, Published by CBS Publishers and Distributors, India, (2002)
Indian Books:
Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – Palanivelu third edition (2004).
|Title of the paper |Biostatistics Elective – 4 |
|Category: E |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the basic statistical methods applied in Biochemical research |
Course Outline – Biostatistics
UNIT I
Statistics – Scope –collection, classification, tabulation of Statistical Data – Diagrammatic representation – graphs – graph drawing – graph paper – plotted curve –Sampling method and standard errors –random sampling –use of random numbers –expectation of sample estimates – means – confidence limits – standard errors – variance.
UNIT II
Measures of central tendency – measures of dispersion – skewness, kurtosis, moments – Correlation and regression – correlation table – coefficient of correlation – Z transformation – regression – relation between regression and correlation.
UNIT III
Probability – Markov chains applications – Probability distributions – Binomial (Gaussian distribution) and negative binomial, compound and multinomial distributions – Poisson distribution – Normal distribution – graphic representation – frequency curve and its characteristics –measures of central value, dispersion, coefficient of variation and methods of computation – Basis of Statistical Inference –Sampling Distribution – Standard error – Testing of hypothesis – Null Hypothesis –Type I and Type II errors.
UNIT IV
Tests of significance for large and small samples based on Normal, t, z distributions with regard to mean, variance, proportions and correlation coefficient – chi-square test of goodness of fit – contingency tables – c2 test for independence of two attributes – Fisher and Behrens ‘d’ test – 2×2 table – testing heterogeneity – r X c table – chi-square test in genetic experiments – partition X 2 – Emerson’s method – Tests of significance –t tests – F tests – Analysis of variance – one way classification – Two way classification, CRD, RBD, LSD.
UNIT V
Spreadsheets – Data entry –mathematical functions – statistical function – Graphics display – printing spreadsheets – use as a database word processes – databases – statistical analysis packages graphics/presentation packages.
Recommended Texts:
• Zar, J.H. (1984) “Bio Statistical Methods”, Prentice Hall, International Edition
Sundar Rao P. S.S., Jesudian G. & Richard J. (1987), “An Introduction to
Biostatistics”, 2nd edition,. Prestographik, Vellore, India,.
• Warren,J; Gregory,E; Grant,R (2004), “Statistical Methods in Bioinformatics”,1st edition,Springer
References Books:
• Milton,J.S.(1992),. “Statistical methods in the Biological and Health Sciences”, 2nd edition ,Mc Graw Hill,
• Rosner,B (2005), “Fundamentals of Biostatistics”, Duxbury Press
|Title of the paper |Immunology – Elective - 5 |
|Category: E |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To introduce to the students the basics of Immunology |
Course Outline – (Immunology)
UNIT I
Scope of immunology, historical background of immunology, biological aspects of immunology. Self and non-self recognition, specificity, memory of immune system.
Antibody - structure, properties and functions, Antigens - properties and function, antigen - antibody reactions, antigenicity, essential factors for antigenicity, antibody diversity.
Theories of antibody formation : instructive, selective and clonal selection theory.
UNIT II
Introduction and definition, Innate and acquired immunity, factors affecting immunity. Cells of immune system - stem cells, lymphocytes, B and T cells, macrophages, null cells, natural killer cells, eosinophils, basophils, neutrophils, mast cells and platelets.
Complement system – Nature, components of complement pathway, complement fixation.
UNIT III
Allergy and Hypersensitivity – Immediate Hypersenstitivity, Delayed Hypersensitivity.Transplantation: Immunological response, HLA and other systems of human major histocompatability complex, rejection mechanism. immunosuppressants.
UNIT IV
Immunological techniques - Radio immuno assay, ELISA, immuno electrophoresis, Western blot, immunodiffusion. Agglutination tests – Direct and Indirect, Widal’s test, VDRL test. Production and purification of antibodies, Quantitation of immunoglobulin by RID, EID and nephelometry.
Hybridoma and monoclonal antibody production; Immunodiagnosis & Applications of monoclonal antibodies in biomedical research.
UNIT V
Introduction, auto-recognition, classes of auto-immune diseases like Hashimoto’s disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, aut-immune hemolytic anemia.
Recommended Books:
Essential Immunology- Ivan M. Roitt and Peter J. Delvis, 10th edition, Blackwell
Science Pub.,USA.
Immunology for Life Scientists - Lesley Janes Eales, 2nd edition, Wiley Pub.
Immunology-Janes Kuby, Fifth edition, W.H.Freeman and company, New York. Antibodies- Their structure and Function - Steward, M.W., 1984, Chapman
And Hall, New York.
II.Ransohoff Richard et aI., 1996, Cytokines and the CNS, CRC Press Boca Raton. 12Joshi, K.R & Osama, N.O., 1998, Immunology, Agro Botanica Bikaner.
Indian Books:
Microbiology - Panicker, 2000,6th edition, Orient Longman, Hyderabad.
Immunology: introductory textbook - I. Nandini Shetty, 1996, New Age International,
New Delhi.
Websites:
library.csusm.edu/course guides/biology
|Title of the paper |Clinical Basis of Diseases – Extra disciplinary |
|Category: ED |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the biochemical basics of metabolic disorders based on clinical investigations |
Course outline: (Clinical Basis of Diseases)
UNIT I
Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism
Glucose homeostasis, Diabetes Mellitus and its metabolic complications, Glucose Tolerance Test, assay of insulin, glycosylated haemoglobin. Glycogen storage diseases, galactosemia, fructosuria and lactose intolerance.
UNIT II
Disorders of lipid metabolism
Sphingolipidosis, hypercholesterolemia and atherosclerosis, hypertrigeridemia, and hyperlipoproteinemia, LCAT deficiency
UNIT III
Disorders of amino acid, protein and nucleic acid metabolism
Inborn errors of amino acid metabolism – phenylketonuria, alkaptonuria, albinism and cystinuria, hyperuricemia, gout, orotic aciduria, Lesch-Nyhan syndrome.
UNIT IV
Disorders of blood and Autoimmune disorders
Blood Agranulocytosis, Thrombocytopenia, β Thalassemias, anemias, haemoglobinopathies, disorders of blood clotting mechanism, Autoimmune disorders.
UNIT V
Cancer
Etiology of cancer- Agents of transformation –viruses as agents and oncogenes, DNA viruses, RNA viruses-retro viruses, chemical carcinogenesis and radiation carcinogenesis.
Reference Books:
Varley's Practical Clinical Biochemistry - Alan H Gowenlock, published by CBS Publishers and distributors, 1988, 6th edition, India.
Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical correlations-T.M.Devlin, 2002, 5th edition.
Biochemistry: A case oriented approach- Montgomery, Comway, Spector, Chappell,1996, 6th edition, Mosby Publishers, USA.
Recommended Books:
Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical chemistry – Burtis and Ashwood, 2001, 5th edition, WB Saunders Company, Oxford Science Publications USA.
Indian Books:
Text book of Biochemistry : A clinically oriented approach - Dinesh Puri, B.I, 2002, Churchill Livingstone Inc., India.
Text Book of Medical Biochemistry – Chatterjee & Schinde, 2000 4th edition.
Web Sites:
http.//
SEMESTER IV
|Title of the paper |Principles of Biotechnology-Core -12 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Fourth Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the technological aspects applied to Molecular Biology |
Course outline: (Biotechnology)
Principles of Biotechnology
UNIT I
Biotechnology-definition-scope-importance
Basic techniques: Cutting DNA molecules, Restriction digestion, isoschizomers, joining DNA molecules – DNA ligase, double linkers, adaptors, homopolymer tailing, selection of recombinants and screening – genetic methods, immuno chemical methods, South-Western screening, Nucleic acid hybridization methods, synthesis of probes, radio-active and non-radioactive labelling of probes, analysing DNA sequences – Maxam and Gilbert and Sanger’s methods, in silico sequence analysis, pulsed field gel electrophoresis.
UNIT II
Cloning strategies: Cloning vectors – plasmids (pBR 322, pUC 18), phage ( and M 13, cosmids, phasmids, expression vectors, yeast vectors –YAC, Ti plasmid. Genomic DNA libraries, chromosome walking, cDNA cloning, PCR, Inverse PCR, Hot start PCR, RT-PCR, RACE, RAPD. Site directed mutagenesis of cloned genes.
UNIT III
Animal Biotechnology: Introduction of genes into animal cells: Reporter genes, selectabe markers, viral vectors – Retroviruses and Baculovirus, Transferring genes into animal cells in culture, oocytes, eggs, embryos and specific tissues, transgenic animals.
UNIT IV
Plant Biotechnology: Agro bacterium – mediated gene transfer to plant cells, microprojectiles, transgenic plant technology – for pest resistance, herbicide tolerance, delay of fruit ripening and use of plants to produce commercially important proteins.
UNIT V
Applications of recombinant DNA technology – gene therapy, antisense therapy, production of insulin in E. coli. Immunotechnology- Hybridoma technology
Biotechnology and Bioethics: Issues from legal and ethical perspectives including property rights of transgenic and clones privacy discrimination-policy concerns to societal concerns in India and abroad.
References:
• Brown TA Gene Cloning and DNA Analysis ; Blackwell Publishing; (2006)
• Twyman RM, Primrose SB Principles of Gene Manipulation and Genomics ; Blackwell Publishing; (2006)
• Old RW, Primrose SB An Introduction to Genetic Engineering S.B; Blackwell Science (2003)
• Sambrook J, Fritsch, EF , Maniatis T.
Molecular Cloning – A Laboratory Manual; Cold Spring Harbor Lab Press(2005).
Web Sites:
|Title of the paper |Concepts of Bio-informatics –Core 13 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Fourth Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To introduce the students to analyze the database/Bioethics |
Course outline: (Bioinformatics)
UNIT I
Basics of computing: Introduction to operating systems – WINDOWS, UNIX, LINUX; Advantages of security installation; Use of internet; Graphics – visualization techniques; softwares and hardwares; Computer networking – LAN, WAN, MODEM, Optical vs electronic networking, firewalls; Ethernet and TCP/IP family of protocols.
UNIT II
Data warehousing, data capture, data analysis; Introduction to Nucleic Acid and Protein Sequence Data Banks; Nucleotide databases (Genbank, EMBL, DDBJ); Protein databases (Swiss-Prot, Tr-EMBL, PIR_PSD, Expasy); Derived Databases (Prosite, PRODOM, Pfam, PRINTS); Sequence submission Methods and tools (Sequin, Sakura, Bankit); Sequence retrieval systems (Entrez & SRS); Sequence File Formats and Conversion tools; Genome (NCBI, EBI, TIGR, SANGER), Metabolic Pathway database (KEGG, EMP, EcoCyc, BioCyc and MetaCyc); Specialized database (IMGT, Rebase, COG, LIGAND, BRENDA); Structural database.
UNIT III
Internal and external co-ordinate system; Generation of co-ordinates of biopolymers in Cartesian and cylindrical polar co-ordinate system; Genome Anatomy, Prokaryotic genomes structures, Eukaryotic genomes structures, Gene density, Gene Ontology, Gene Order (synteny), Plasticity zone, Gene Network, tandem repeats, Transposable elements, Pseudogenes, Gene Clusters, Segmental duplication, non-coding conservation, Comparative genomics, Importance of Full Genome Alignments, Concepts & applications of Suffix tree in comparative genomics, Algorithms for BLAST2, MegaBlast, MUMmer.
UNIT IV
Analysis of protein and nucleic acid sequences, multiple alignment programs, Development of programs for analysis of nucleic acid sequences, Pairwise Sequence Alignment - Similarity, Identity and Homology, Global Alignment, Local Alignment; database search methods and scoring matrics ; Dynamic Programming, Heuristic approach, Scoring Matrices and Affine Gap costs; Detailed method of derivation of the PAM & BLOSUM Matrices; Differences between Distance & Similarity Matrix; Assessing the Significance of Sequence Alignments.
Multiple Sequence Alignment - Multiple alignment programs, Development of programs for analysis of nucleic acid sequences, Conversion of various file formats; Phylogenetic Analysis - Concept of dendrograms; Strings and Evolutionary trees; Ultrametric trees and Ultrametric distances; Additive - Distance trees; Methods of Construction of Phylogenetic trees-Maximum Parsimony Method, Maximum likelihood method and Distance Methods, Reliability of trees.
UNIT V
Analysis of structures and correctness of structures, Submission of data to PDB: atomic coordinates and electron density maps; Anatomy of Proteins - Ramachandran plot, Secondary structures, Motifs, Domains, Tertiary and quaternary structures; Calculation of conformational energy for bio-macromolecules; Methods for Prediction of Secondary and Tertiary structures of Proteins - Knowledge-based structure prediction, Fold recognition, Ab initio methods for structure prediction; Methods for comparison of 3D structures of proteins; Molecular interactions of - Protein – Protein, Protein – DNA, Protein – carbohydrate, DNA – small molecules etc.; Docking of Molecules; Molecular Design.
Recommended Texts:
• Lesk, A.M. (2002) “Introduction to Bioinformatics:, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK
• N. Gautham (2006) “Bioinformatics”, Narosa Publishing Company, New Delhi
• Westhead, D. R., Parish, J.H and Twyman, R.M (2003) “Instant Notes Series – Bioinformatics” 1st Edition, Viva Books Private Limited, New Delhi, India
• Bernhard Haubold and Thomas Wiehe (2006) “Introduction to Computational Biology – An Evolutionary Approach” Birkhauser Verlag, Switzerland
Reference Books:
• Krane, DE; Raymer, ML (2003), “Fundamental concepts of Bioinformatics”, Benjamin Cummings
• Ignacimuthu, S (2005) “Basic Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, India
• P. Baldi and S. Brunak (2003) “Bioinformatics” Affiliated East-West Press, New Delhi, India
Web Sites:
|Title of the paper |Microbial Biiochemistry Elective 6 |
|Category: E |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |second year & Second Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To introduce to the students the various beneficial and pathogenic micro-organisms |
Course outline: (Microbial Biochemistry)
UNIT I
Micro organisms and their place in living world. Historical developments of microbiology (spontaneous generation, germ theory of disease and Koch’s postulates) Recent developments and future trends. Ultrastructure of bacteria, fungi, algae and protozoa. Structure and functions of the cellular components. Classification of microbes – phenotypic and taxonomic characters.
UNIT II
Environmental Microbiology – Microbial ecology – role of microorganisms in the productivity of ecosystems – interaction between microorganisms, and with plants and animals – microbes and biodeterioration – microbes in waste treatment – home and industrial.
Food and Dairy microbiology : food spoilage, food preservation, fermented foods (cheese, yoghurt, pickles, bread), food infections –clostridium, staphylococcus and salmonella
UNIT III
Medical Microbiology: Pathogenic micro organisms - Salmonella, E.coli, Pseudomonas, Klebsiella, staphylococcus, streptococcus, Neisseria, Haemophilus and mycobacterium. Disease reservoirs, epidemiological terminologies, infectious disease transmissions, cure, control and prevention.
UNIT IV
Industrial microbiology : Industrial use of microbes – fermentation products, bio-conversions – bio remediation. products of industrial microbiology – penicillin, methanol, vinegar, vitamin B12, citric acid, glutamic acid and protease.
UNIT V
Introduction to virology : Classification, morphology, size, ultrastructure and life cycle of some representative viruses (TMV, T4, SV40 and M13), methods of culturing viruses, isolation, purification and characterization.
Reference Books:
Microbiology - Michael J.Pelczar I.R., Chan E.C.S and Noel R.Kreieg, 2004, 5th
Edition, 27th reprint Tata McGRAW-Hill, New Delhi.
Bioprocesses and Biotechnology for Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals - Jean-Richard Neeser, and Bruce 1 German. 2004. Marcel Dekker.
Principles of Microbiology - Atlas RM, 1997, WCB Publishers.
Microbiology - Daniel Lim, 1998, 2nd edition. McGraw-Hill.
Microbiology: A laboratory manual -.Cappuccino J.G &.Sharman N, 1999, 4th
Edition, Addition Wesley Lonbgman, Inc.
Medical Microbiology:A guide to microbiological infection - David Slack Richard, 1992, 10th, edition, Churchill Livingstone, New York.
Indian Books:
Microbiology of Diseases - Gupta Yanka, 2000 ,1st edition, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi.
Microbiology - Panicker, 2000,6th edition, Orient Longman, Hyderabad.
Web sites:
microbiology-direcLcom
bact.wisc.edu/MicrotextbookJindex.php
|Title of the paper |Project + Viva voce -Core-14 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Fourth Semester |8 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |- |
C - Core; E- Elective; ED- Extra Discipliniary
4. M.Sc. Degree Course in Bioinformatics
Paper 12,Core GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS
UNIT I:
Organization of the prokaryotic and eukaryotic genomes – Genetic linkage maps and physical maps – current sequencing technologies – partial sequencing – gene identification – gene prediction rules and softwares,sequence assembly, Human Genome Project
UNIT II:
Gene therapy – pathway regulatory networks – drug discovery – management of chemical libraries - Microarrays – genes in metabolic pathways – microarrays in drug toxicity testing and metabolic pathways.
UNIT III:
Life cycle of a protein – functional protein families – Gene _expression – EST (Expressed sequence tag) – mass spectrometry – application of proteomic mining, expression profiling, network mapping and mapping protein modification.
UNIT IV:
Extracting proteins from biological samples – protein separation before and after digestion using PAGE, preparative IEF, and HPLC – Tandem LC approaches for peptide analysis – protein digestion technique – Mass spectrometry for protein – protein sequence analysis by TMS data, Software for Mass Spectrometry data analysis.
UNIT V:
Mining proteomics- protein expression profiling – identifying protein-protein interaction and protein complexes – mapping protein modification – new approaches in proteomics.
Recommended Texts:
1. Primrose, S.B. and Twyman, R.M. (2003). “Principles of Genome Analysis and
Genomics”: 3rd edition, Blackwell Publishing Company, Oxford, UK.
2. Liebler, D.C. (2002). “Introduction to Proteomics – Tools for the New Biology”, 1st
Edition, Humana Press Inc., New Jersey, USA.
3. Orengo, C.A., Jones, D.T. and Thornton, J.M. (2003). “Bioinformatics – Genes,
Proteins and Computers”, 1st Edition, BIOS Scientific Publishers Limited, Oxford,
UK.
Reference Books:
1. Mount, D.W. (2001). “Bioinformatics – Sequence and Genome Analysis”, 1st Edition, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York, USA.
2. Westhead, D.R., Parish, J.H. and Twyman, R.M. (2003). “Instant Notes Series – Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Viva Books Private Limited, New Delhi, India.
3. Ignacimuthu , S. (2005). “Basic Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, India.
4. Lesk, A.M. (2002). “Introduction to Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 13. Core ALGORITHMS FOR COMPUTATIONAL BIOLOGY
Unit I: Strings and trees
Definitions – strings – substrings, superstrings, suffix and prefix strings – operations on strings – concatenation – delete operator – graphs – definitions – directed, connected, cyclic, complete graphs – trees and terminology – leaf, node, branch root – algorithms – big O notation – classification of algorithms – P, NP, NP-hard, NP – complete, with examples, Travelling Salesman, Hamilton Path – pseudocode algorithms for sorting, finding minimum/maximum.
Unit II: Sequence alignment
Why align sequences – similarity v/s homology – heterologs, orthologs, paralogs, xenologs – Karlin – Altschul statistics to estimate significance of an alignment – expectation values and Z values – sequence comparisons using dot matrices with examples – dynamic programming – details of Needleman – Wunsch, Smith – Waterman algorithms with worked out examples – hashing methods with worked out examples – BLAST and FASTA
Unit III: Multiple sequence alignment, substitution matrices and phylogenetic trees
Representing and scoring a multiple sequence alignment – dynamic programming for multiple sequence alignment – pitfalls – progressive or hierarchical alignment with worked out examples – substitution matrices – evolutionary models – PAM substitution matrices – BLOSUM substitution matrices – gap penalties – phylogenetic trees – distance matrix methods – UPGMA, neighbour joining, with worked out examples – maximum parsimony with worked out examples - maximum likelihood.
Unit IV: Pattern discovery and characterization in protein and DNA sequences
Sequence pattern representations – deterministic patterns – regular expressions – probabilistic patterns – sequence logos – general methods of pattern classification – methods for proteins – hidden Markov models and application to analyses of protein sequences – general methods of gene discovery – using HMM, GeneMark – artificial neural networks – introduction and their use in gene discovery, GRAIL – Gene discovery using Fourier analysis, GeneScan ,Bayesian Classifications
Unit V: Methods of analyses of biomolecular structures
Visualisation and representation of molecular structure - computer graphics – methods of representing a three-dimensional onbject on a two-dimensional surface – methods of representing biological molecules – geometrical analyses – bond lengths, angles, hydrogen bonds, torsion angles, calculations of planes, the Ramachandran map – protein surface and solvent accessibility – protein structure comparisons – superposition techniques – distance matrices – dynamic programming using distance matrices – COMPARER – nucleic acid structural parameters.
References:
• Mount D.W. Bioinformatics. Sequence and Genome Analaysis. (Cold Spring Harbor,2000)
• Baxevanis A.D. Bioinformatics: A practical guide to the analysis of genes and
proteins (John Wiley & Sons, 2nd edn. 2001)
• Attuvod T.K. Smith D.J. Introduction to Bioinformatics (Addison Wesley Longman Ltd ,1999 )
• Taylor, H.D Bioinformatics: sequence structure and data banks (Oxford Univ. Press,2000)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 14, Core STRUCTURAL BIOINFORMATICS
UNIT I:
Structural features of biomolecules – techniques used to determine the structure of biomolecules - geometrical parameters – potential energy surfaces – molecular graphics – hardware and software requirements – Internet – mathematical concepts,molecular file formats
UNIT II:
Structure prediction – secondary structure – homology modeling, fold recognition and ab initio 3D structure prediction – structure comparison and alignment – prediction of function from structure.
UNIT III:
Molecular dynamic using simple models – simulations with continuous potentials – advantage of constant temperature and pressure simulation – solvent effects – analysis of conformational changes during molecular dynamic simulation.
UNIT IV:
Molecular docking – structure based drug design – de novo approach – molecular similarity – quantitative structure-activity relationship – 3D pharmacophore derivation and matching – importance of molecular modeling in drug discovery, Cheminformatics and its applications, Combinatorial libraries and Chemical diversity
UNIT V:
Protein stability and folding-SCOP-DALI-assignment of protein structures to genomes-determining gene function through conserved protein structure-prediction of protein function-approaches to protein structural genomics
Recommended Texts:
1. Lesk, A.M. (2002).” Introduction to Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Oxford
University Press, Oxford, UK.
Reference Books:
1. Mount, D.W. (2001).” Bioinformatics – Sequence and Genome Analysis”, 1st
Edition, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York, USA.
2. Westhead, D.R., Parish, J.H. and Twyman, R.M. (2003). Instant Notes Series –
Bioinformatics, 1st Edition, Viva Books Private Limited, New Delhi, India.
3. Ignacimuthu (s.j.), S. (2005). Basic Bioinformatics, 1st Edition, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, India.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 15, Core Tools and their Applications in Bioinformatics
(Practicals)
A set of 15 computer ‘experiments’ are suggested, starting from bibliographic searches, and ending with elementary structure analyses. The experiments use the CSIR-TCS Biosuite- software package.
Unit I: Bibliographic search on the Internet – PubMed: The students should search PubMed (ncbi.nlm.) and obtain information about a particular topic, which may be suggested by the teacher.
Browsing database – Each student should independently access at least one database described in and describe its contents
Unit II: Blast search – Each student is given a specific protein or DNA sequence, which is used in the search through the Blast web page (ncbi.nlm.)
PsiBlast – Each student is given a specific protein or DNA sequence, which is used in the search through the PsiBlast web page (ncbi.nlm.)
Unit III: Global alignment using Needleman – Wunsch (NW) algorithm – student is given a pair of sequences to perform a global alignment using the NW algorithm.
DotPlot – student creates a DotPlot display of a pair of sequences
Multiple sequence alignment – Each student creates an alignment of a set of 6 to 10 sequences and displays the results appropriately
Restriction Site analyses – Given a DNA sequence and a particular restriction enzyme, the student identifies the cleavage sites. Comparative genomics using Vista
Unit IV: Phylogenetic tree construction (UPGMA) – Given a set of 6 to 10 protein or DNA sequences, the student uses UPGMA to construct a phylogenetic tree.
Phylogenetic tree construction (Neighbour Joining) – Given a set of 6to 10 protein or DNA sequences, the student uses Neighbour Joining to construct a phylogenetic tree
Unit V: Sequence conversions – The student converts a DNA sequence into the complementary RNA and vice versa. The student translates the DNA sequence in all six reading frames to the protein sequence and a protein sequence and a protein into the respective DNA sequence, choosing an appropriate codon usage table
Gene discovery – Given a large DNA sequence (such as e.g. a small portion of an eukaryotic genome) the student predicts all possible genes.
Protein structure calculations – Given a small protein/peptide structure, the student calculates and tabulates bond lengths, bond angles, and torsion angles, and identifies hydrogen bonds, Molecular surface calculations.
Ramachandran plot – Given a protein structure, the students creates and displays its Ramchandran plot Structural superposition – Given a pair of similar protein structures the student performs a structural superposition and calculates the similarities/differences
Chemical library search, molecular format conversion
Molecular dynamics simulation using simple models and continuous potentials, Molecular docking and interaction analysis, QSAR, pharmacophore search
Recommended Texts:
1. K.Mani and N.Vijayaraj (2004) “Bioinformatics – A Practical Approach” Aparnaa
Publication, Coimbatore, India
2. C.Gibas and P.Jambeck (2001) “Developing Bioinformatics computer Skills” Shroff
Publishers and Disctributors Pvt Ltd, Mumbai, India
Reference Books:
1. It is expected that a computer laboratory is available, with necessary software and data.
The manuals corresponding to the software would serve as Reference Books.
Paper 16, Elective SYSTEMS BIOLOGY
SYSTEMS BIOLOGY
UNIT I: Introducing computational Systems biology
Basic concepts of System biology, Enabling information and integration for systems biology, Databases for Systems biology, Natural language processing and ontology-enhanced biomedical literature mining for Systems Biology.
UNIT II: Foundations of biochemical network analysis and modeling
Introduction to computational models of biochemical reaction networks, Biological foundations of Signal transduction and the Systems biology perspective, Reconstruction of metabolic network from genome information and its structural and functional analysis, Metabolic Flux analysis, GEPASI, Gopher
UNIT III: Computer simulations of dynamic networks
Discrete approach to network modeling, Gene networks: Estimation modeling and simulation, Computational models for circadian rhythms: Deterministic Versus Stochastic approaches.
UNIT IV: Multiscale representation of cells and Emerging phenotypes
Spatio-temporal Systems biology, Cytomics-from Cell States to predictive medicine, The IUPS Physiome project, E-Cell Concept. Genesis tool and its applications
UNIT V: Applications and perspectives of Systems biology.
Developments and trends of Systems biology, Long and medium term goals of Systems biology, the potential applications of Systems biology, Microarray analysis and gene networks, BRB Array tool
Reference Books:
1. Computational Systems Biology. By Andres Kriete, Roland Eils. Published by Academic Press, 2005, ISBN 012088786X.
2. Systems Biology: Applications And Perspectives. By Peter Bringmann. Published by Springer, 2007, ISBN 3540313389.
3. Systems Biology: Principles, Methods, and Concepts. By Andrzej K. Konopka. Published by CRC Press, 2007, ISBN 0824725204.
4. Systems Biology: Definitions and Perspectives. By Lilia Alberghina, Hans V. Westerhoff, Published by Birkhäuser, 2005, ISBN 354022968X.
Paper 17, Elective (Other Departments)
Potential APPLICATIONS AND COMMERCIAL
Aspects of Bioinformatics
Unit 1: Visualization of sequence data: What a sequence reveals about the biological function of a gene
Unit 2: Applications of bioinformatics in drug discovery
Unit 3: Genetic basis of disease Role of genetics in future approaches to healthcare, Genetic medicine, human disease and genes
Unit 4: Pharmacogenomics, Personalized medicine and gene-based diagnostics: Definition of personalized medicine, Conventional medicine versus personalized medicine, Role of genetics in development of personalized medicines
Unit 5: Introduction to ethical issues, Legal, ethical and commercial ramifications of bioinformatics Ethical and Regulatory Aspects of Personalized Medicine
FOURTH SEMESTER
Paper 18,Core DATABASES IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
Unit I: Database concepts
Databases in general – definitions and examples – computerized databases – advantages and disadvantages – need for database models and systems – examples of logical models – hierarchical, network and relational models – RDBMS – objected oriented models – primary and secondary (derived) databases – structure and sequences databases – growth of databases,Gene Ontology classifications
Unit II: Molecular Biology data types
Brief descriptions of the various types of data used in modern Molecular Biology and how they are obtained, stored, represented and retrieved – organisms – genome maps – DNA, RNA and protein sequences – RNA secondary structure – protein secondary and tertiary structure – DNA and protein sequence motifs – protein and RNA structure motifs – RNA and protein-protein interaction data – mutations and polymorphisms in sequences and structures – tissues and cells – populations.
Unit III: Primary sequence databases
DNA sequence databases – GenBank, EMBL, DDBJ – details of structure of GenBank – differences with and links to other databases – protein sequence databases – Swissprot, PIR – details of arrangement of data in Swissport – differences and links to other databases – TrEMBL database
Unit IV: Derived sequence database
Subcollections of data – FlyBase – AceDB, WormBase – comprehensive microbial genome, Omniome – organelle genome database, GOBASE – eukaryotic promoter database – Codon usage table database – Exon-Intron database – examples of protein sequence subcollections – GPCR sequence database – human unidentified gene-encoded large protein sequence database, HUGE – CluSTr and COGS – databases of protein sequence patterns and motifs – PRINTS, PROSITE, Pfam, ProDom.
Unit V: Structural databases
Nature of structure data – coordinate systems – primary structure databases –PDB, CSD – details of arrangement of data in PDB with examples – access to PDB and CSD – derived structure databases – value-added subcollections, NDB – structural patterns and motifs – SCOP – CATH-FSSP-PALI-DSSP, Drug bank, ligand depot,Querying chemical databases
References:
Nucleic Acids Research (January 2008) Number 1. Database Issue. (This issue is available online for free and open access at the following url )
• N.Gautham (2006) ‘Bioinformatics’ Narosa Publishing Company, New Delhi
• V.R. Srinivas (2005) ‘Bioinformatics: A Modern Approach’ Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited New Delhi, India.
• D.Mount (2000) ‘Bioinformatics: Sequences and Genome Analysis’ Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, USA
• D.Higgins and W.Taylor. (eds) (2000) ‘ Bioinformatics: Sequences, Structures and Databanks’ Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 19,Elective ADVANCED TOPICS IN BIOINFORMATICS
Unit I: Pharmacogenomics and Toxicogenomics
Definition of Pharmacogenomics & Toxicogenomics – case study in Alzheimer’s diseases – safety metabolisms pharmacology – Exploitary Toxicology, Preclinical Toxicology, Pharmacokinetics & Metabolism
Unit II: Phylogenetic analysis and Comparative genomics
Relationship of phylogenetic analysis to sequence alignment, genome complexity and phylogenetic analysis – Maximum parsimony method, Distance methods. Reliability of phylogenetic predictions- Complications from phylogenetic analysis – Phylip & Paup softwares. DNA computers – Principle & working
Unit III: Nutrigenomics
Nutritional genetics – nutritional genomics-genetic nutrition-gene directed nutrition with reference to diabetes, cardiovascular diseases and obesity and neurogenomics-short notes on herbal informatics (medicinal foods)
Unit IV: Chemogenomics
Definition – Effect of chemicals on genes – delayed mutations – Interaction of molecules (small & Big) with DNA intercalation – case study with copper deficiency leading to diseases, Role of p53 – Oncogene changes
Unit V: Metagenomics and Molecular Evolutionary Pathways
Definition of metagenomics – application of genomics to cultured and uncultured microorganisms, metagenomics of microbial communities, clastistics – evolutionary relationships – evolution of nucleic acids, proteins and enzymes associated SNP’s.
References:
• Jacoby, E (2005) Chemogenomics- Knowledge-based Approaches to Drug Discovery,World Scientific
• Rothstein,MA ,(2003) Pharmacogenomics,Wiley-Liss
• Chakraborty,C ; Bhattacharya,A (2005) Pharmacogenomics, Biotech Publishers
• Rimbach,GH (2005), Nutrigenomics, CRC
• Hamadeh,HK:Afshari,CA (2004) Toxicogenomics : Principles and Applications Wiley-Liss.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 20,Elective BIOINFORMATICS AND DRUG DESIGN
Unit I:
Introduction – Basics of combinatorial chemistry & natural product libraries – Chemical parameters in Drug design prodrugs & soft drugs – physico chemical parameters in Drug design – structure based drug design – Micro array and drug discovery.
Unit II :
Drug metabolism – Genome to drug discovery – Sequence analysis – Structure properties & computer identification of eukaryotic genes – analyzing regulatory regions in genomes.
Unit III:
Homology modeling – Molecular modeling using computers – CADD, protein-ligand docking in drug design – vaccine development through Bioinformatics, Lipinski’s rule
Unit IV:
Target discovery – Target validation – Assay development – High through screening – Lead optimization – Drug substrate manufacture – Development of new drugs, subtractive genomics
Unit V:
Candidate drug nomination – clinical trial – Investigational new drug application – FDA, MDA, approval, patenting and formulations-Marketing.
References:
• Richard B. Silverman , Organic chemistry of Drug Design & Drug action Elsevier Science, Academic Press
• Wu-Pong Susanna, Rojanasakul, Youngyut Biopharmaceutical Drug Design and Development, Molecular modeling – Principles and Applications ,Prentice Hall
• R. Mannhold, H.Kubinyi, H.Timmerman, (Editors) Bioinformatics – From Genomes to Drugs – Methods & Principles in medicinal chemistry Vol-14
• H.Gerhard vogel, Wolgang H Drug Discovry & Evaluation. Pharmacological assays (with CD-ROM)
• Eric M.Gordon ;James F.Kerwin (Editors)Combinatorial chemistry & Molecular Diversity in drug discovery
• Stuart M.Brown (2002) Essentials of medical genomics, John Wiley & Sons
5. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY
SYLLABUS
| Paper – 13 |
|Title of the paper |Enzyme Technology |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |III |4 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Enzyme nomenclature and classification, General properties of enzymes and the factors that affect their activity and the associated changes: Extraction and purification of enzymes: Membrane bound enzymes – their extraction, enzyme assay methods.
Unit – 2:
Enzyme kinetics –pre –steady state kinetics, steady state, fast kinetics to elucidate the intermediate and rate limiting steps (flow & relaxation techniques); complex kinetics and analysis.
Unit – 3:
Michaels –menton equation derivation , determination of km value and studying kinetics using Line weaver –Burke plot, Eadie- Hofstee plot and Hans Woolf equations, enzyme inhibitors
Unit – 4:
Enzyme specificity – Evidence for enzyme substrate complex –Enzyme catalysis - Nucleophilic and Electrophilic attack –Role of metal ions in enzyme catalysis, Acid Base catalysis, Covalent catalysis, Proximity & Orientation catalysis: Mechanism of enzyme action – lysozyme , chymotrypsin , DNA polymerase , RNase etc, Zymogen and enzyme activators, Active site determination.
Unit – 5:
Regulation of enzymes-Allosteric interactions and Product inhibition: Coenzymes, Isoenzymes, Immobilization of enzymes, Clinical and Industrial applications of enzymes; Enzyme engineering
Recommended Texts
1. Voet & Voet 1995. Biochemistry .John wiley & sons, Inc.USA
2. Dixon & Webb .Enzymes
3. Palmer. Enzyme technology
| Paper – 14 |
|Title of the paper |Genomics and Proteomics |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |III |4 |
COURSE OUTLINE:
Unit – 1:
Genomics and cDNA sequences and output management from different biological output sources, gene prediction rules and software – Human Genome project.
Unit – 2:
Analysis of genomic and proteomic information with respect to biological systems- Genome applications – pathway regulatory networks. Drug design/ discovery and identification, synthesis of new drugs.
Unit – 3:
Management of diverse chemical libraries, Gene expression, Microarrays and recent development in expression analysis; Applications of Microarrays in drug toxicity testing, metabolic pathways.
Unit – 4:
Sequences Analysis – Protein and Nucleic acid sequence Alignment methods- proteomics- protein analysis – structural comparison – 2D gel, Mass spectrometry, and protein and Antibody arrays.
Unit – 5:
Protein Databases – comparison of protein sequences and database searching-Methods for Protein structure prediction –Conserved patterns in protein sequences and structures- Comparison of protein 3D structures – predicting functions based on DNA and protein sequences.
Recommended Texts:
1. Grandi Guido, Genomics, Proteomics and Vaccines, John wiley and sons.2004.
2. Maleolm & J.Goodship.2001. Genotype to phenotype, 2nd Edition .Bios Scientific publishers Ltd.
3. Brown, T.A, 1999, Genomics, 1 st Edition, John wiley and sons.
4. B.Primrose, 1998. Principles of genome analysis. 2 nd Edition .Blackwell science.
| Paper -15 |
|Title of the paper |Bioprocess Technology and Downstream Processing |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |III |4 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Introduction to bioprocess technology. Microbial growth kinetics, Measurment of growth (cell number, direct and indirect methods) nutrition and product formulation. Effect of environment (temperature, pH, substrate concentration) on product formation. Media formulation, Kinetics of thermal death of microorganisms.
Unit – 2:
Types of bioreactors: Submerged reactors, surface reactors, mechanically agitated reactors, non-mechanically agitated reactors. Design of fermentors – body construction-,microbial cell culture.
Unit – 3:
Aerobic and anaerobic fermentation processes and their application in the field of biotechnology industry. Solid substrate, slurry fermentation and its application. Whole cell immobilization. Production of citricacid, penicillin and insulin.
Unit – 4:
Introduction to bioproducts and bioseparation. Primary recovery process: Cell disruption methods. Cell lysis and Flocculation: Osmotic and mechanical methods of lysis. Flocculation by electrolysis;polymorphic flocculation. Filtration: Principles, Conventional, Crossflow filtration. Sedimentation: Principles, Sedimentation coefficients. Extraction Principles, Liquid – liquid extraction, aqueous two phase extraction, supercritical fluid extraction.
Unit – 5:
Membrane separation – ultrafiltration, precipitation methods: liquid-liquid extraction, aqueous two phase extraction.. Drying –Principles and operation of vacuum dryer, shelf dryer, rotary dryer, freezer and spray dryer. Formulation methods.
Recommended Texts:
1. P.A.Belter, E.L.Cursler, and W.S.Hu. Bioseparation: Down stream processing for Biotechnology. John Wiley and sons. 1988.
2. R.G. Harrison, P.Todd, SR.Rudge and D.P. Petrides. Bioseparation science and engineering. Oxford Press. 2003.
3. Michael L.Shuler, Fikret Kargi. Bioprocess Engineering. PHI publishers. 2003.
| Paper – 16 Practical III |
|Title of the paper |Enzyme Technology, Genomics and Proteomics practical, Bioprocess Technology |
| |and Downstream processing |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |III |4 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Enzyme Technology Practicals
1. Isolation, purification of Amylase and Alkaline Phosphatase(Ammonium sulphate
precipitation, Ion exchange chromatography, Native PAGE, Gel permeation
chromatography, SDS PAGE).
2. Kinetic studies – Effect of pH, Temperature, Substrate Concentration, - -Km Determination, L.B Plot. Determination of enzyme activity, Effect of inhibitors, purification chart
3. Enzyme immobilization by entrapment method and covalent method.
4. Chemical modification of enzyme by any two methods.
Genomics and Proteomics Practicals
1. Sequence identity search- Sequence similarity search using BLAST, FASTA, PSI & PHI- BLAST.
2. SEQUENCE ANALYSIS- Pattern Search (Domains & Motifs)-ORFs Search-Sequence translation.
3. SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT- Pair-wise (Needleman-Wunsch & Smith-Waterman)- Multiple using CLUSTAL.
4. PHYLOGENY- Phylogenetic tree using PHYLIP.
5. PROTEOMICS- Structure Prediction (Secondary and Tertiary)-Molecular visualization of proteins using RASMOL.
Bioprocess Technology and Downstream processing Practicals
1. Isolation of industrially important microorganisms for microbial processes.
2. Production and estimation of protease and amylase.
3. Use of alginate for cell immobilization.
4. Media standardization (C:N ratio) for maximum biomass production of an industrially important microorganism.
5. Cell disruption (Sonication)
6. Conservation of Bacteria by Lyophilization.
7. Aqueous Two Phase Extraction of enzymes
| Paper – 17 Elective |
|Title of the paper |Tissue Engineering |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Elective |II |III |3 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Basic biology of tissue engineering: The basis of growth and differentiation-morphogenesis and tissue engineering.
Unit – 2:
In vitro control of tissue development-Growth factors-Tissue engineering bioreactors-Tissue assembly in microgravity-In vitro synthesis of Tissue and organs.
Unit – 3:
Organotypic and histotypic models of engineered tissues-Biomaterials in tissue engineering-Approaches to transplanting engineered cells and tissue engineering.
Unit –4:
Bioartificial pancreas-Hepatassist liver support system-Heamatopoietic system: Red blood cell substitutes-Renal replacement devices- Musculoskeletal system.
Unit – 5:
Structural tissue engineering-Bone regeneration through cellular engineering-Brain implants-Neural stem cells-Periodontal applications- -Artificial Womb.
Recommended Texts:
1. Robert P. Lanaza, Robert Langer and Joseph Vacanti.2000. Principles of Tissue Engineering. Second edition Academic Press.
2. Sylvia, S. Mader, 2000, Human Biology, Sixth edition , Mc Graw Hill, USA.
3. Cecie Starr, 1996, Biology, Third edition , Wordsworth, America..
4. Micklem.H.S., Loutit John.F., Tissue grafting and radiation, Academic Press, New York.2004.
5. Penso.G., Balducci.D., Tissue cultures in biological research,Elsevier, Amsterdam. 2004.
| Paper – 18 Elective |
|Title of the paper |Stem Cell Technology |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Elective |II |III |3 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Stem cells - Definition, Characterization, Pluripotency, Self renewal and differentiation, hierarchy, Stem cell niche, Niche specification - Drosophila germ line stem cells. Adult stem cell from amniotic fluid, cord blood and tooth primordial.
Unit – 2:
Characteristics of stem cell- cell cycle, Ras\Raf pathway, PI3K cell signaling, p53 check points, Role of LIF pathway in cell cycle control. Stem cell communications - gap junctions, cell fusion, HOX genes, upstream transcriptional factors, transdifferentiation, cell fusion
Unit – 3:
Chromatin modification and transcriptional regulation, chromatin modifying factors, epigenetic regulation- expression of receptors, Chromosomal inactivation.
Unit – 4:
Spermatogonic stem cell, epiblast, trophoblast cell lineage, blastocyst formation and axis specification. Generation of Primordial germ cells (PGC), gonad and liver.
Unit – 5:
Therapeutic applications of Embryonic stem cells, Bone marrow stem cells, Adipose derived stem cells and Hematopoietic stem cells in Heart regeneration and neural defects. Ethics in human stem cell research.
Recommended Texts:
1. Ann A.Kiessling “ Human Embryonic Stem Cells” Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Inc. second edition, (2006).
2. Institute of Medicine (Corporate Author): “Stem Cells and The Future Of Regenerative Medicine” National Academy Press ( 2002).
3. Robert Lanza: “Essentials of Stem Cell Biology” Academic Press (2005).
4. Kursad Turksen : “Adult Stem Cells” Humana Press, Inc (2004).
5. James Thomson et al : “Handbook of Stem Cells: Embryonic/Adult and Fetal Stem Cells”, vol 1 & 2; Academic Press (2004).
| Elective offered to other Dept. |
|Title of the paper |Principles of Gene Manipulation Technology |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Elective |II |III |3 |
Unit – 1:
Restriction enzymes, DNA modifying enzymes, cloning vectors, prokaryotic hosts-Creating Recombinant DNA Molecules-Isolation and Cloning of genes.-Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries-polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications-Southern / Northern blotting analysis.
Unit – 2:
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries- polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications- Southern/Northern bloting analysis, RFLP, RAPD, AFLP analysis. Genomics- Structural genomics-Gene mapping-Comparative genomics -Functional genomics -Gene expression -EST’s-DNA arrays.
Unit – 3:
Gene transfers - Introduction of Foreign Genes into Cells: electroporation, biolistic transfer, Transfection, selectable markers, microinjection, embryonic stem cells, reporter transgenes, Homologous recombination - "knock-ins / outs”.
Unit – 4:
Transgenics- Approaches to transgenesis: Microinjection / Embryonic stem cells/Sperm- mediated transfer -Mammalian cloning by nuclear transfer - "Dolly” as an example. Production of transgenic sheep, cattle, pigs and plants. - BT cotton, Transgenesis and growth- performance in farm livestock, & plants-The growth hormone in both bovine and porcine systems.
Unit – 5:
Edible vaccines, Disease resistance in transgenic organisms, Pest and herbicide resistant plants. The Mx gene system for anti-viral disease resistance in animals. Issues in Genetic Engineering - Biosafety of transgenic organisms.-Food safety of GMOs-Environmental safety .
Recommended Texts:
1. Old, R,W. and Primrose, S.B., Principles of Gene Manipulation (5th edition)
2. Blackwells Scientific Publications, Oxford, U.K. 1997
3. Strachan, T. and Read, A.P. Human Molecular Genetics 2 ( 2nd edition), BIOS
Scientific Publications, John Wiley and Sons , Toronto, Canada. 1999
4. Watson, J.D., Gilman, M., Witkowski, J., and Zoller, M., Recombinant DNA (2nd edition),Scientific American Books, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York, N.Y., U.S.A.
5. Cantor and Smith (1999). Genomics. Wiley & Sons.
6. T.A. Brown (1999). Genomes. Bios Publishers.
7. K.Dharmalingam (1987). M13 cloning manual. MacMIllan, Chennai.
| Paper – 19 |
|Title of the paper |Environmental Biotechnology and Nano Biotechnology |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |IV |4 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Concept and scope of environmental biotechnology, The natural cycles of environment (Hydrological, Oxygen, Nitrogen, Phosphate and Sulphur cycle), Toxic chemicals in the environment (Arsenic, Cadmium, Mercury and Lead), Carcinogens. Air pollutants (Carbon monoxide, Nitrogen oxide, Sulphur dioxide, acid rain), Air quality standards, air sampling and air monitoring.
Unit – 2:
Water pollutants, waste water treatment, physical, chemical, biological characterization of waste water, BOD, COD, TOC, use of indicator organism for biological characterization of waste water treatment processes (aerobic and anaerobic). Sewage and waste treatment, Biodegradation, Bioremediation, Engineering strategies for bioremediation – Evaluating bioremediation.
Unit – 3:
Denitrification: Physiology of denitrifying bacteria - Tertiary denitrification – One- sludge denitrification-Drinking Water treatment: Anaerobic treatment by methanogenesis-Uses for methanogenic treatment-Reactor configurations-Special factors for the design of anaerobic sludge disasters.
Unit – 4:
Introduction to nanobiotechnology. Status of nanobiotechnology in India. Nanomaterials, Nanostructures and dynamics of biocompatible materials. Bioactive nanomaterials in bone grafting and tissue engineering. Nanocomposites in bone replacement therapy.
Unit – 5:
DNA based artificial nanostructures. Carbon nanotubes, Biosensors, Nanorobots, Biochips and their application in agriculture and medicine. Nanofibers and their application in tissue engineering. Nanaomaterials and Drug delivery.
Recommended Texts
1. Environmental chemistry 5th edition by A.K.De. 1997.
2. Environmental Biotechnology :Principles and applications. McGraw Hill, Newyork. Bruce E. Rittmann and Perry L. McCarty. 2001.
3. Industrial and Environmental Biotechnology. Horizon Press. Ahmed N, Qureshi, F.M. and Khan, O.Y. 2001.
4. Challa S.S.R.Kumar (Ed). 2006. Biologicals and pharmaceutical nanomaterials, Wiley-VCH Verlag Gmbh & Co, KgaA.
5. K.K.K.Jain 2006. Nanobiotechnology in Molecualr Diagnostics: Current Techniques and Applications Horizon Bioscience
6. Niemeyer, C.M., Mirkin, C.A. (Eds). 2004. Nanobiotechnology Concepts, Applications and Perspectives, Wiley-VCH, Weinheim.
| Paper – 20 Elective |
|Title of the paper |Animal Biotechnology |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Elective |II |IV |3 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
History of animal biotechnology: Basic principles as applicable to animal science- Conventional methods of animal improvement, selective breeding and cross breeding. Oestrus synchronization. In vitro fertilization, Embryo preservation, Embryo collection, evaluation and transfer.
Unit – 2:
Animal health – disease diagnosis, hybridoma technique, monoclonal antibodies, application of probes for disease diagnosis of existing and emerging animal diseases. Prophylaxis - Vaccines, Oral vaccines – DNA Vaccines in animal disease.
Unit – 3:
Cell culture: primary and established culture; organ culture; tissue culture; Disaggregation of tissue and primary culture; cell separation, Slide and coverslip cultures, flask culture, test tube culture techniques, cell synchronization, cryo preservation. Scaling up of animal cell culture, cell line and cloning – micromanipulation and cloning, somatic cell cloning. Biology and characterization of cultured cells. Karyotyping; measuring parameters for growth, measurement of cell death, apoptosis and its determination, cytotoxicity assays.
Unit – 4:
Nuclear magnetic resonance methods of monitoring cell metabolism- culturing animal cells in fluidised bed reactors- GPI- Anchored fusion proteins- harvesting GPI- anchored proteins from CHO cells- Hematopoietic cells for cellular and gene therapy.
Unit – 5:
Identification and isolation of genes of economic importance. Transgenic animals: Production and application; transgenic animals in livestock improvement, transgenic animals as model for human diseases. Impact of gene cloning and Bioethics. Biosafety – Regulations on experiments and release of Genetically Modified Organisms.
Recommended Texts:
1. Culture of animal cells. 3rd edition. Ian Freshney, Wiley-Liss.1996.
2. Recombinant DNA. 2nd edition. J.D.Watson, M.Gillman, J.Witknowski and M.Zoller, Scientific American Books, NY, 1992.
3. Animal cell biotechnology: Methods and protocols by Nigel Jenkins (Ed). Humana Press, New Jersey. Pp 1-302, 1999.
4. Genetic Engineering of Animals by (Ed) A.Puhler, VCH Publishers, Weinheim, FRG, 1993.
5. Animal Cell culture – Practical approach. Ed. John R.W.Masters, Oxford.2004.
|Paper – 21 Elective |
|Title of the paper |Bioethics, Human rights and Social issues |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Elective |II |IV |3 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Introduction: Historical development of Human Rights and Human Relations – International and National. International Instruments: United Nation Commission for Human Rights,
Unit – 2:
European Convention for Human Rights, UDHR, Civil and Political Rights-National Instruments:National and State Instruments: Development of Human Rights – Article 21 of Indian Constitution.
Unit – 3:
Human Relations: Political relations, Ethnic and Communal relations, Socio-cultural relations, Organisation relation etc., and related Human Rights.Economics of Human Rights and Relations – Adam Smith’s thoughts on moral sentiments – Economic philosophy of Thiruvalluvar.
Unit – 4:
Student’s Activity: Assignment/Case study/Term paper etc.,
Unit – 5:
Impact of gene cloning and Bioethics. Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) and patents, biosafety, containment facilities for Genetic Engineering experiments, Regulations on field experiments and release of GMO’s (Genetically Modified Organisms), labeling of GM (Genetically Modified) Foods.
Recommended Texts:
1. Trayror, P.C., Frederic.R. and Koch, M. 2002. Biosafety. Board of Trustees, Michigan State University, USA.
2. Benjamin Lewin, 2000, Genes VII, First edition, Oxford, New York.
3. Paul R.C., 2000.Situations of Human Rights in India.Efficient offset printers.
4. Beauchamp, T.L. and Leroy, W.1999.Contemporary issues in bioethics.Wardsworth publishing Co. Belmont, California.
5. Bishop.M.J and Rawlings, 1987, Nucleic acid and protein sequence analysis, First, IRL Press, England.
6. William, S Klug and Michel, R Cummings, 2003, Concepts of Genetics, Seventh edition , Pearson Education, Singapore.
7. Paul, R.C., 2000.Situations of Human Rights in India, Efficient Offset printers,
8. Marc Galanter, Social Inequality.
9. Adam Smith, Theory of Moral Sentiments
10. Thiruvlalluvar, Thirukural: Arathuppal and Porutpal
11. Kretch & Crutchfield, Social Psychology
6. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY & MANAGEMENT
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
| Paper –13 |
|Title of the paper |Enzyme Technology |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |III |4 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Enzyme nomenclature and classification, General properties of enzymes and the factors that affect their activity and the associated changes: Extraction and purification of enzymes: Membrane bound enzymes – their extraction, enzyme assay methods.
Unit – 2:
Enzyme kinetics –pre –steady state kinetics, steady state, fast kinetics to elucidate the intermediate and rate limiting steps (flow & relaxation techniques); complex kinetics and analysis.
Unit – 3:
Michaels –menton equation derivation , determination of km value and studying kinetics using Line weaver –Burke plot, Eadie- Hofstee plot and Hans Woolf equations, enzyme inhibitors
Unit – 4:
Enzyme specificity – Evidence for enzyme substrate complex –Enzyme catalysis - Nucleophilic and Electrophilic attack –Role of metal ions in enzyme catalysis, Acid Base catalysis, Covalent catalysis, Proximity & Orientation catalysis: Mechanism of enzyme action – lysozyme , chymotrypsin , DNA polymerase , RNase etc, Zymogen and enzyme activators, Active site determination.
Unit – 5:
Regulation of enzymes-Allosteric interactions and Product inhibition: Coenzymes, Isoenzymes, Immobilization of enzymes, Clinical and Industrial applications of enzymes; Enzyme engineering
Recommended Texts
1. Voet & Voet 1995. Biochemistry .John wiley & sons, Inc.USA
2. Dixon & Webb .Enzymes
3. Palmer. Enzyme technology
| Paper – 14 |
|Title of the paper |Operational Management |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |III |4 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit -1:
Production System , Introduction , Scope , Objectives, Functions; Production , Productivity Production Planning and Control-Routing , Scheduling , Dispatching ; maintenance management, types of maintenance, breakdown, preventive routine, linear programming problem.
Unit 2
Process design, plant capacity, capacity planning, make or buy decision, plant location, factors controlling the selection.
Plant layout- meaning, factors influencing principles, types of layout, material equipment handing, distribution method-MODI method.
Unit 3
Job design, objectives, factors affecting job design, techniques of job design, human factor, ergonomics, work study, motion study, and work measurement.
Unit 4
Inventory management – meaning, objectives, factors influencing, benefits. Inventory control techniques, JIT, MRP- I, II, Basic inventory models.
Unit 5
Quality control, quality Assurance, Quality control techniques, TQM.
Recommended Text:
1. Evertt E, Adam Jr& Ronald J Ebert, Production & Operations management, Prentice Hall of India.
2. P.Gopalkrishnan – purchase Materials Management- Tata Mc-Graw Hill Publishing, New Delhi-11 th edition 2001.
| Paper – 15 |
|Title of the paper |Genomics and Proteomics |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |III |4 |
COURSE OUTLINE:
Unit – 1:
Genomics and cDNA sequences and output management from different biological output sources, gene prediction rules and software – Human Genome project.
Unit – 2:
Analysis of genomic and proteomic information with respect to biological systems- Genome applications – pathway regulatory networks. Drug design/ discovery and identification, synthesis of new drugs.
Unit – 3:
Management of diverse chemical libraries, Gene expression, Microarrays and recent development in expression analysis; Applications of Microarrays in drug toxicity testing, metabolic pathways.
Unit – 4:
Sequences Analysis – Protein and Nucleic acid sequence Alignment methods- proteomics- protein analysis – structural comparison – 2D gel, Mass spectrometry, and protein and Antibody arrays.
Unit – 5:
Protein Databases – comparison of protein sequences and database searching-Methods for Protein structure prediction –Conserved patterns in protein sequences and structures- Comparison of protein 3D structures – predicting functions based on DNA and protein sequences.
Recommended Texts:
1. Grandi Guido, Genomics, Proteomics and Vaccines, John wiley and sons.
2. Maleolm & J.Goodship.2001. Genotype to phenotype, s2 nd Edition .Bios scientific publishers Ltd.
3. Brown, T.A, 1999, Genomics, 1 st Edition, John wiley and sons.
4. B.Primrose, 1998. Principles of genome analysis. 2 nd Edition .Blackwell science.
| Paper – 16 Practical-III |
|Title of the paper |Enzyme Technology, Genomics and Proteomics practical, |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |III |4 |
Enzyme Technology Practicals
1. Isolation, purification of Amylase and Alkaline Phosphatase(Ammonium sulphate
precipitation, Ion exchange chromatography, Native PAGE, Gel permeation
chromatography, SDS PAGE).
2. Kinetic studies – Effect of pH, Temperature, Substrate Concentration, - -Km Determination, L.B Plot. Determination of enzyme activity, Effect of inhibitors, purification chart
3. Enzyme immobilization by entrapment method and covalent method.
4. Chemical modification of enzyme by any two methods.
Genomics and Proteomics Practicals
1. Sequence identity search- Sequence similarity search using BLAST, FASTA, PSI & PHI- BLAST.
2. SEQUENCE ANALYSIS- Pattern Search (Domains & Motifs)-ORFs Search-Sequence translation.
3. SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT- Pair-wise (Needleman-Wunsch & Smith-Waterman)- Multiple using CLUSTAL.
4. PHYLOGENY- Phylogenetic tree using PHYLIP.
5. PROTEOMICS- Structure Prediction (Secondary and Tertiary)-Molecular visualization of proteins using RASMOL.
|Paper -17- Elective |
|Title of the paper |Entrepreneurial Development Project Management |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Elective |II |III |3 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit 1
Entrepreneurship- meaning, types, qualities of an Entrepreneur, classification of entrepreneurs, factors influencing entrepreneurship, functions of entrepreneurs.
Unit 2
Commercial banks, district industries centre, national small industries corporation, small industries development organization, small industries service institute, all
India financial institutions- IDBI, IFCI, ICICI-IRDBI.
Unit 3
Knowledge management and project management in Biotech fields – IPR ,identifying and protecting IPR, licensing , regulatory approvals, compliance and managing intellectual property and regulatory processes.
Unit 4
Entrepreneurial development programmes (EDP) –Their role, relevance and achievements, role of government in organizing EDPs, critical evaluation
Unit 5
Economic development and Entrepreneurial growth, role of entrepreneur in economic growth, strategic approaches in the changing economic scenario for small Entrepreneurs. Networking, Franchising /Dealership, Development of women Entrepreneurship.
Recommended Text
Srinivasan, N.P.2003.Entrepreneurial Development. 5 Th edition .Sultan Chand & sons. New Delhi
Saravanavel 2003 Entrepreneurial Development, 4 Th editions Ess Pee Kay, Chennai.
| Paper – 18 Elective |
|Title of the paper |Principles of Gene Manipulation Technology |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Elective |II |III |3 |
Unit – 1:
Restriction enzymes, DNA modifying enzymes, cloning vectors, prokaryotic hosts-Creating Recombinant DNA Molecules-Isolation and Cloning of genes.-Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries-polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications-Southern / Northern blotting analysis.
Unit – 2:
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries- polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications- Southern/Northern bloting analysis, RFLP, RAPD, AFLP analysis. Genomics- Structural genomics-Gene mapping-Comparative genomics -Functional genomics -Gene expression -EST’s-DNA arrays.
Unit – 3:
Gene transfers - Introduction of Foreign Genes into Cells: electroporation, biolistic transfer, Transfection, selectable markers, microinjection, embryonic stem cells, reporter transgenes, Homologous recombination - "knock-ins / outs”.
Unit – 4:
Transgenics- Approaches to transgenesis: Microinjection / Embryonic stem cells/Sperm- mediated transfer -Mammalian cloning by nuclear transfer - "Dolly” as an example. Production of transgenic sheep, cattle, pigs and plants. - BT cotton, Transgenesis and growth- performance in farm livestock, & plants-The growth hormone in both bovine and porcine systems.
Unit – 5:
Edible vaccines, Disease resistance in transgenic organisms, Pest and herbicide resistant plants. The Mx gene system for anti-viral disease resistance in animals. Issues in Genetic Engineering - Biosafety of transgenic organisms.-Food safety of GMOs-Environmental safety .
Recommended Texts:
8. Old, R,W. and Primrose, S.B., Principles of Gene Manipulation (5th edition)
9. Blackwells Scientific Publications, Oxford, U.K. 1997
10. Strachan, T. and Read, A.P. Human Molecular Genetics 2 ( 2nd edition), BIOS
Scientific Publications, John Wiley and Sons , Toronto, Canada. 1999
11. Watson, J.D., Gilman, M., Witkowski, J., and Zoller, M., Recombinant DNA (2nd edition),Scientific American Books, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York, N.Y., U.S.A.
12. Cantor and Smith (1999). Genomics. Wiley & Sons.
13. T.A. Brown (1999). Genomes. Bios Publishers.
14. K.Dharmalingam (1987). M13 cloning manual. MacMIllan, Chennai.
FOURTH SEMESTER
| Paper – 19 |
|Title of the paper |Strategic Management |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |IV |4 |
Unit 1
Frame work of strategic management – Basic concepts of Strategic Management; Phases of Strategic Management, Benefits & Challenges to Strategic Management, Impact of Globalization in Strategic Management.
Unit 2
Corporate governance – the role of Board of Directors & Top management in Corporate Governance, Agency theory versus Stewardship theory in corporate governance social responsibility of strategic decision makers.
Environmental Scanning, Industrial Analysis & Organizational Analysis including Porter’s approach to industry analysis.
Unit 3
Strategy Formulation- SWOT Analysis for generation of alternatives, TOWS Matrix , Corporate Strategy ,Types of strategies, Portfolio Analysis ( BCG Matrix, GE Business Screen & Corporate parenting).
Unit 4
Strategic choice & Implementation, Functions & Importance of Functional Strategies; Strategy alternatives; Considering Strategic Variations & Strategic Choice, Strategic Implementation
Unit 5
Evaluation & Control of Strategy –Measuring Performance & Strategic Information Systems. Challenges of Strategic Management with respect to technology and Innovation.
Recommended Text
1. Thomas L Wheelmen, J. David Hunger and Krish Rangarajan, Strategic Management and Business Policy, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Lawrance, Jaunch & William Blucck Business Policy and Strategic Management, McGraw Hill Intl, 2003
3. P.K.Ghosh, Business Policy and strategic Management, Sultan Chand and sons
| Paper -20 - Elective |
|Title of the paper |Animal Biotechnology |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |IV |3 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
History of animal biotechnology: Basic principles as applicable to animal science- Conventional methods of animal improvement, selective breeding and cross breeding. Oestrus synchronization. In vitro fertilization, Embryo preservation, Embryo collection, evaluation and transfer.
Unit – 2:
Animal health – disease diagnosis, hybridoma technique, monoclonal antibodies, application of probes for disease diagnosis of existing and emerging animal diseases. Prophylaxis - Vaccines, Oral vaccines – DNA Vaccines in animal disease.
Unit – 3:
Cell culture: primary and established culture; organ culture; tissue culture; Disaggregation of tissue and primary culture; cell separation, Slide and coverslip cultures, flask culture, test tube culture techniques, cell synchronization, cryo preservation. Scaling up of animal cell culture, cell line and cloning – micromanipulation and cloning, somatic cell cloning. Biology and characterization of cultured cells. Karyotyping; measuring parameters for growth, measurement of cell death, apoptosis and its determination, cytotoxicity assays.
Unit – 4:
Nuclear magnetic resonance methods of monitoring cell metabolism- culturing animal cells in fluidised bed reactors- GPI- Anchored fusion proteins- harvesting GPI- anchored proteins from CHO cells- Hematopoietic cells for cellular and gene therapy.
Unit – 5:
Identification and isolation of genes of economic importance. Transgenic animals: Production and application; transgenic animals in livestock improvement, transgenic animals as model for human diseases. Impact of gene cloning and Bioethics. Intellectual Property Rights (IPR), Patents. Biosafety – Regulations on experiments and release of Genetically Modified Organisms.
Recommended Texts:
1. Culture of animal cells. 3rd edition. Ian Freshney, Wiley-Liss.
2. Recombinant DNA. 2nd edition. J.D.Watson, M.Gillman, J.Witknowski and M.Zoller, Scientific American Books, NY, 1992.
3. Animal cell biotechnology: Methods and protocols by Nigel Jenkins (Ed). Humana Press, New Jersey. Pp 1-302, 1999.
4. Genetic Engineering of Animals by (Ed) A.Puhler, VCH Publishers, Weinheim, FRG, 1993.
5. Animal Cell culture – Practical approach. Ed. John R.W.Masters, Oxford.
| |
|Extra Disciplinary Elective – Paper-21 |
|Title of the paper |Bioethics, Biosafety, IPR, Human rights and Social issues |
|Category of the course |Year |Semester |Credits |
|Core |II |IV |3 |
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Introduction: Historical development of Human Rights and Human Relations – International and National. International Instruments: United Nation Commission for Human Rights,
Unit – 2:
European Convention for Human Rights, UDHR, Civil and Political Rights-National Instruments:National and State Instruments: Development of Human Rights – Article 21 of Indian Constitution.
Unit – 3:
Human Relations: Political relations, Ethnic and Communal relations, Socio-cultural relations, Organisation relation etc., and related Human Rights.Economics of Human Rights and Relations – Adam Smith’s thoughts on moral sentiments – Economic philosophy of Thiruvalluvar.
Unit – 4:
Student’s Activity: Assignment/Case study/Term paper etc.,
Unit – 5:
Impact of gene cloning and Bioethics. Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) and patents, biosafety, containment facilities for Genetic Engineering experiments, Regulations on field experiments and release of GMO’s (Genetically Modified Organisms), labeling of GM (Genetically Modified) Foods.
Recommended Texts:
1. Trayror, P.C., Frederic.R. and Koch, M. 2002. Biosafety. Board of Trustees, Michigan State University, USA.
2. Benjamin Lewin, 2000, Genes VII, First edition, Oxford, New York.
3. Paul R.C., 2000.Situations of Human Rights in India.Efficient offset printers.
4. Beauchamp, T.L. and Leroy, W.1999.Contemporary issues in bioethics.Wardsworth publishing Co. Belmont, California.
5. Bishop.M.J and Rawlings, 1987, Nucleic acid and protein sequence analysis, First, IRL Press, England.
6. Krech, D., David, K., Crutchfield, R.S. and Ballachey E.L. 1962. Individual in society. A textbook of social psychology. Mc Graw- Hill.
7. William, S Klug and Michel, R Cummings, 2003, Concepts of Genetics, Seventh edition Pearson Education, Singapore.
8. Paul, R.C., 2000.Situations of Human Rights in India, Efficient Offset printers,
9. Marc Galanter, Social Inequality.
10. Adam Smith, Theory of Moral Sentiments
11. Thiruvlalluvar, Thirukural: Arathuppal and Porutpal
12. Kretch & Crutchfield, Social Psychology
7. M. Sc . DEGREE COURSE IN BOTANY
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
|Title of the Course/ Paper |PAPER-IX |
| |CORE- CELL BIOLOGY, GENETICS, BIOSTATISTICS AND PLANT BREEDING |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit- 4 |Subject Code |
| |II Year | | |
| |III Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
CELL BIOLOGY, GENETICS, BIOSTATISTICS AND PLANT BREEDING
UNIT I
Prokaryotes and eukaryotes, -Cytoplasm - Physical and chemical properties.
Plasma membrane molecular structure, chemical nature, function; Signal transduction G proteins- secondary messengers- Cell organelles- Endoplasmic Reticulum, dictyosomes, Microbodies-Iysosomes, glyoxysomes and peroxisomes.
Mitochondria occurrence ultra structure, chemical composition and function. Plastid classification, morphology, ultra structure, origin, development chemistry and function.
Mitochondrial and chloroplast DNA-semi autonomy of the organelle DNA
UNIT- II
Nucleus -General structure- Nuclear envelope, Concepts on nucleoplasmic index and nuclear volume, nuclear pore complex, nucleo cytoplasmic relationship. Ultra structure and chemistry.
Nucleolus - Ultra structure - chemistry- Nucleolar DNA, RNA and proteins, nucleo-cytoplasmic relations, persistence nucleolus.
Cell division - mitosis,; cell cycle - significance, abnormal mitosis in cancer mitotic movement and mitotic apparatus and significance, mitotic inducers and inhibitors.
Meiosis: Biochemical (Molecular) and cytological changes – significance- synaptonemal complex- significance..
Chromosomes - morphology, fine structure - telomere-types: lamp brush, polytene, isochromosomes - heterochromatin and euchromatin, chromosome identification - banding techniques
Unit- III
Mendelian and Non Mendelian inheritance; linkage, crossing over, chiasma frequency; chromosome mapping, tetrad analysis.
Genetics of sex - sex determination in plants, sex linkage - dominant and recessive sex linked genes - holandric genes; sex linked diseases - hemophilia, colour blindness - Pedigree chart. Multiple alleles, pseudo alleles - Complementation test polygenes quantitative inheritance. Extranuclear inheritance, mitochondrial genome -Yeast and higher eukaryotes, Male sterility in corn. Immunogentics- Nature and types of antigen and antibodies. Genetic theories of Antibody formation
Mutation- classification- detection- characterization, mutagens - chemical and physical agents clastogens, carcinogens. Transposons . Chromosomal aberration- structural types .Polyploidy- types- and significance.
Bacterial genetics - transformation, transduction and conjugation; biochemical genetics - Neurospora, Beadle and Tatum experiment.
UNIT IV
Population genetics - Gene frequency and gene pool- Hardy-Weinberg Law - Factors affecting genetic drift.
Eugenics- types- Human karyotypes - variation - syndromes - Genetic counseling-Gene concept - fine structure - split gene - exon and introns. Gene function - protein synthesis, genetic code, - Biostatics- Analysis of quantitative characters on the basis of mean, standard deviation and standard error .- Chi-square test for goodness of Fit; Null hypothesis, level of Significance- Student's t-distribution ; " t " test
UNIT V
Objectives - genetic variability and its role in plant breeding. Breeding methods self and cross pollinated plants, vegetatively propagated and apomictic plants.
Heterosis and in breeding depression-genetic basis use of polyploidy and mutant varieties in the improvement of crop plants.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Brown and Berke: Text Book of Cytology, Blackstains Sons & Co.
2. Brachet and Mirsky (ed.): The Cell, Academic Press, Vols. 16.
3. Darlington, C.D. : Recent Advances in Cytology, Blarkstains Sons & Co.
4. Lewin, B. 2000. Genes VII, Oxford University Press, USA.
5. DeRobertis, E.D.P. and De Robertis, E.M.F. 2001. Cell and Molecular Biology, Lippineott Williams & Wilkins, Bombay.
6. Sharma, A.K. and Sharma, A. 1980. Chromosome Techniques. Theory and Practice, Butterworth.
7. Stebbins, J.L. Chromosomal Evolution in Higher Plants, Edward Arnold Publ., London.
8. Roy, S.C. and Kumar, K.D.C. 1977. Cell Biology, New Central Book Agency, Calcutta.
9. Wolfe, S.L. 1993. Molecular and Cellular Biology, Wordsworth Publ. Co., California, USA..
10)Singleton, W.R. 1963. Elementary Genetics.
11)Gardner, E.J. 1972. Principles of Genetics.
12)Levin B. 2000. Genes VIII
13)Stansfield, W.D. 1969. Theory and problems of Genetics.
14) Stick Berger, M. W. 1976. Genetics.
15)Sinnott, E.W. Dunn, L.E. and Dobzhansky, T. 1973. Principles of Genetics.
16)Hays, K.K. Immer, F.R. and Smith D.C. 1985. Methods of Plant Breeding.
17)Chaudhari, H.K.1984. Elementary Principles of Plant Breeding.
18)Kenneth, J and Frey. 1980. Plant Breeding.
19)Gustafson, J.P. 1984. Gene manipulation In Plant Breeding and Evolution.
20)Ahluwaalia, K. B. 1996. Genetics.
21 )Genetics, Winter,P.C., Hickey,G.I. and Fletcher, H.L., Viva Books 2002
22). Klug, Concepts of Genetics, Pearson Education
23.) Genes VII, Benjamin Lewin, OUP
24). Genetics a Molecular Approach, 2nd Ed. Brown, T.A., Chapman and Hall, 1992
25. Burnham, C.R. 1962. Discussions in Cytogenetics, Burgess Publishing Comp. Minnesota.
26. . Khush,G.S. 1973. Cytogenetics of aneuploids, Academic Press, New York.
27. . Sybenga, J. 1975. Meiotic configurations. Springer Verlag, Berlin Heidel Berg.
28. . Lewin, B. 2004. Gene VIII, Prentice Hall.
29. . Russel, P.J. 1998. Genetics (5 th edition), The Benjamin / Cummings Publishing Company, Inc., USA.
32. . Strickberger, Genetics, Prentice Hall.
Russel, P.J. 1998. Genetics. The Benjamin/Cunnings Publishing Co., Inc., USA.
33.. Khush, G.S. 1973. Cytogenetics of Aneuploids, Academic Press, London.
36. . Chahal, G.S. and Gosal, S.S. Principles and Procedures of Plant BreedingBiotechnological
and Conventional Approaches, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
37. . Darbeshwar Roy, 2000. Plant Breeding: Analysis and Exploitation of variation, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
38. . Singh, P. 2001. Essentials of Plant Breeding, Kalyani Publishers, Hyderabad.
|Title of the Course/ Paper |PAPER-X |
| |CORE- PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-4 |Subject Code |
| |II Year III Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
UNIT I
Nucleic acids - Base pairing and variations in base composition.
Types of DNA. Chargaff's rule - DNA size - fragility - melting curves -hydrophobic interactions denaturation - renaturation - circular and superhelical DNA - topoisomerase - special base Repeated sequence - Single stranded DNA - DNA methylation, structure of RNA. Inhibitors of nucleic acid biosynthesis- DNA synthesis and sequencing
UNIT II
DNA replication - basic rule of replication – DNA replication in prokaryotes enzymology DNA topoisomerase - DNA polymerase - ligase, helicase Termination of DNA replication - Replication of eukaryotic chromosomes- Eukaryotic DNA polymerase- DNA repair mechnism- DNA methylation- DNA gyrase.
UNIT- III
Transcription - Enzymology - RNA polymerase - classes of RNA molecules - transcription in Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - splicing mechanisms - Reverse transcriptions. Inhibitors of nucleic acid biosynthesis
UNIT- IV
Translation: Outline of translation. Post transcriptional processing of mRNA Inhibitors of translation- Genetic code – characters- codon and anticodons- Wobble hypothesis .
UNIT V
Gene regulation - Operon concept - Lac repressor- -c-AMP, Catabolic repression-, ara - operon and trp operons - Gene expression in eukaroytes- gal gene expression in Yeast
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Alberts, B., Bray, D., Lewis, J. Raff, M., Roberts, K. and Watson, J.D. 1989. Molecular
Biology of the cell, Garland Publishing Inc., New York.
2. Lodish, H., Berk, A., Zipursky, S.L., Matsudaira, P., Baltimore, D. and Darnell, J. 2000. Molecular Cell Biology, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York, USA.
3. Richard, M., Twyman and Wisden, W. 1999. Advanced Molecular Biology, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd.
4. Turner, P.C., Mclenann,A.G., Bates, A.D. and White, M.R.H. 2001. Instant notes on molecular biology.
5. Snustad Peter, D. Michael J. Simmons. Principles of Genetics, John Wiley Sons.
6. Robert H. Tamarin. Principles of Genetics, Tata McGraw Hill Company.
7. Benjamin Lewin . Genes VIII, Prentice Hall.
8. Westhead, D.R. J.H. Parish & R.M. Twyman. Bioinformatics, Viva Books.
|Title of the Course/ Paper |PAPER-XI |
| |CORE- PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-4 |Subject Code |
| |II Year III Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT-I
Recombinant DNA technology – Tools of recombinant DNA: restriction endonucleases and other enzymes; vectors; plasmid, bacteriophage and other viral vectors, cosmids, Ti plasmid, yeast artificial chromosome- choice of vectors- gene cloning principles and techniques- construction of genomics/ cDNA libraries, , PCR, PAGE, Northern and Southern blotting RFLP, RAPD, AFLP based DNA finger printing.
UNIT II
Methods of crop improvements- gene transfer- indirect method- Agrobacterium mediated gene transfer gene transfer- Direct DNA gene transfer technology- liposome mediated gene transfer- biolistic gun( Shot gun method)- Electroporation- silicon carbide method -microinjection
UNIT- III
Biotechnology and transgenics- Herbicide resistance- resistance against glyphosate and Basta- Resistance against pests and insects- Bacillus thuringiensis – Bt genes endotoxins- resistance against pathogens
UNIT- IV
Novel introduction and expression. - antisense and sense gene suppression- biosynthetic pathways to produce/accumulate alternative products.
UNIT- V
Transgenic plants as bioreactors, Transgenic plants as vaccine production systems, Transgenics for Phytoremediation of contaminated soils, Regulation and release of Genetically modified organism in India- Recombinant DNA guidelines, 1990-Guidelines for research in transgenic crops, 1998 – Regulation of GM food – Status of development of GM food in India .
REFERNCE BOOKS
Trigiano, R.N., and D.J. Gray (eds.). 2000. Plant tissue culture concepts and laboratory exercises. CRC Press. (Textbook). 2nd Edition.
Kyte, M., and Kleyn, J. 1996. Plant from test tubes. Timber Press. Auge, R. et al., 1995. In vitro culture and its applications in horticulture. Science Publishers, Inc.
Crispeels, M.J. and D. E. Sadava. 2003. Plants, genes and agriculture. Jones and Bartlett Publishers.
Gamborg, O.L. and G. C. Phillips (eds). 1995. Plant cell, tissue and organ culture. Springer Lab Manual.
Potrykus, I, and G. Spangenberg (eds.). 1995. Gene transfer to plants. Springer Lab Manual.
Jones, H. 1996. Plant gene transfer and expression protocols. Methods in molecular biology . 49. Humana Press.
Kreuzer, H, and A. Massey. 1996. Recombinant DNA and biotechnology. A guide for teachers. ASM Press.
1) Freidfelder 1990. Molecular Biology.
2) Rasthogi 1997. Concept in Molecular Biology.
3) Brown. T.A. 1999. Genomes John & Sons (Asin). Singapore.
4) Howkins J.D. 1996. Gene structure and expression. Cambridge.
5) Twyman. R.M. 1998. Advanced Molecular Biology. ViVa book, Chennai.
6) Benjamin Lewin, 2000. Gene VII.
7) Watson, 1996 4th Ed. Molecular biology of the gene. Benjamin and cumming publication.
8) Datnel, Lodish and Baltimore 1968. Molecular cell biology. Scientific American publication
9) Lycett and Grierson ed. Genetic engineering of crop plants.
10) Brown ,T.A. 1990. Gene cloning. An introduction.
11) Ole R.W. , and S. B. Primrose. Principles of gene manipulation. An introduction to genetic engineering.
12) Brown. T.A. 1999. Genomes. John Wiley & Sons Singapore.
|Title of the Course/ Paper |PAPER-XII |
| |PRACTICAL- IV ( COVERING THEORY PAPERS IX, X & XI |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit- 4 |Subject Code |
| |I Year I Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level training in above subjects |
CELL BIOLOGY
1. Study of dividing cells – squash
2. Calculate the mitotic index of onion root tip cells
3. Smear techniques
4. Study of induced aberrations in onion root tips employing chemicals and plant extracts.
5. Calculation of aberration percentage of chemical treated onion root tip cells
6. Demonstration of Banding techniques
7. .Induction of polyploidy using colchicine
8. .Observation of Bchromosomes in suitable material
9. Study of sub cellular organelles from electron micrographs
10. Nuclear stains
11. Pre fixatives
12. Demonstration of Salivary gland chromosomes
13. Hybridisation techniques - emasculation – bagging
GENETICS
13.Genetics problem based on the theory
14.Chromosome mapping
15. Calculation of variation pattern in fruits/leaves/ seeds - standard deviation standard error – based on the data given.
16. Chi square test
17. Students “t” Test
18. Plant breeding spotters taken from standard text books
PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND BIOTECHNOLOGY
14. Isolation of Genomic DNA
15. Isolation of RNA
16. Electrophoresis of nucleic acids
17. Encapsulation of callus cells/protoplast in alginate leads (Demonstration only. Expected to know protocols)
18. Preparation of competent E.Coil cells
19. Transformation and recovery of plasmid clones
20. Isolation of plasmid DNA
21. RE1striction analysis of DNA
22. Southern blotting
23. Northern blotting
24. Hybridization analysis of DNA and RNA
25. Molecular. cloning and screening for recombinants
26. RFLP techniques
27. PCR techniques
Cot curve, DNA melting curve, tertiary structure of protein, tRNA, reco\1nition site for HIND III, EGO RI, Bam H1, Puc Plasmid, PCR flow chart, SDS, Southern blotting, X-ray diffraction protein DNA, Ethidium bromide, Lac Operon. Simple problems based on the theory syllabus.
|Title of the Course/ Paper | |
| |ELECTIVE SUBJECT- III- BIOINFORMATICS |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-3 |Subject Code |
| |II Year III Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
BIOINFORMATICS
UNIT- I
Introduction to Bioinformatics – Definitions Proteomics, genomics , Need, Development and Potential of bioinformatics, Basic on internet- Biological Data bases Sequence Data Banks – protein sequence data bank. SWISSPROT, Nucleic acid sequence data bank – GenBank, EMBL nucleotide sequence data bank,– protein Data Bank (PDB), Genome data bank .
UNIT-II
Predicting functional domains of gene, Predicting secondary structure of RNA Predicting molecular structure and functional domains of proteins,
UNIT-III
Bioinformatics in Taxonomy and Biodiversity – Taxonomic data base design and, - Cladistic analysis using models - Molecular phylogeny
UNIT-IV
Microarray- Protein array, RNA arrays, DNA microarrays- Applications. Human genome project and medically relevant genes, Drug targeting-
UNIT-V
Techniques in Bioinformatics- FASTABLAST, Multiple Sequence Analysis- Open Reading Frame
Reference books:
AndrewsR. Leach. Molecular Modeling: Principles and Applications
Ignacimuthu, S. Plant Biotechnology, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
Leonard , Banaszak. Foundation of Structural Biology
Rastogi, S. C1993, Mandiratta,Namita, Rastogi, Parag.. Bioinformatics-Concepts, Skill Applications
Shanmugavel. P. Principles of Bioinformatics Pointer Publication Jaipur
|Title of the Course/ Paper |EXTRA DISCIPLINARY- I - HERBAL DRUG BIOTECHNOLOGY |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-3 |Subject Code |
| |II Year III Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
HERBAL DRUG BIOTECHNOLOGY
Unit I:
Crude Drugs – Scope & Importance, Classification (Taxonomical, Morphological Chemical, Pharmacological); Cultivation, Collection & processing of Crude Drugs.
Unit II:
Medicinal & Aromatic Plants-Cultivation and Utilization of Medicinal & Aromatic Plants in India. Genetics as applied to Medicinal herbs.
Unit III:
Tissue Culture of medicinal Plants Plant Tissue Culture as source of medicines, Plant Tissue Culture for enhancing secondary metabolite production (Withania somnifera, Rauwolfia serpentina, Catheranthus roseus, Andrographis paniculata, Dioscorea sp.); Anticancer drugs, Biogenesis of Phytopharmaceuticals.
Unit IV:
Analysis of Phytochemicals
Methods of Drug evaluation (Morphological, Microscopic, Physical & Chemical). Preliminary screening, Assay of Drugs – Biological evaluation / assays, Microbiological methods- Chemical Methods of Analysis and Detection of Adulterants: Chemical estimations, Spectrophotometry & Fluorescene analysis. Drug adulteration – Types of adulterants.
Unit V:
Types of Phytochemicals_
Carbohydrates & derived products; Glycosides - extraction methods (Digitalis, Aloe,
Dioscorea,); Tannins (Hydrolysable & Condensed types); Volatile Oils - extraction methods (Clove, Mentha); UNIT VII : Types of Phytochemicals_II -Alkaloids - extraction methods (Taxus, Papaver, Cinchona); Flavonoids- extraction methods,
Resins- extraction methods.-: Applications of Phytochemicals Application of phytochemicals in industry and healthcare; Biocides, Biofungicides, Biopesticides.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Pharmacognosy, C. K. Kokate, A. P. Purohit & S. B. Gokhale (1996), Nirali Prakashan, 4th Ed.
2. Natural Products in medicine: A Biosynthetic approach (1997), Wiley.
3.. Hornok,L. (ed.) (1992). Cultivation & Processing of Medicinal Plants, Chichister, U. K: J. Wiley & Sons.
4. . Trease & Evans, Pharmacognosy – William Charles Evans, 14th ed. (1989), Harcourt
Brace & Company.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Title of the Course/ Paper |PAPER-XIII |
| |CORE- PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-4 |Subject Code |
| |II Year IVSemester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS
UNIT- I
Atomic structure; chemical bonds - Ionic bond, covalent bond, co-ordination bond, hydrogen bond; Radioactivity; Hydrogen ion concentration (pH), buffers.
Biomolecules: Carbohydrates - properties of mono, oligo and polysaccharides. Structure and functions of trioses, tetroses, pentoses, hexoses, maltose, sucrose, starch and pectin-glycosidic linkage, deoxy sugars, glycoproteins, aminosugars, isomerism and mutarotation.
UNIT- II
Biomolecules: Amino acids and proteins, ionic forms of amino acids -zwitterion, isoelectric pH, optical isomers of amino acids, physical properties of amino acids. Formation of peptide bond - peptides – structure of polypeptides primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary-protein structure. Ramachandran plot - denaturation of proteins. Protein purification - types of chromatography. Electrophoresis of proteins (native and SDS-PAGE) and protein sequencing.
UNIT- III
Biomolecules: Lipids - structure of fatty acids and glycerol - phospholipids, glycolipids, steroids. – Biosynthesis and Oxidation of fatty acid - Glyoxalate pathway – Gluconeogenesis
UNIT- IV
Bioenergetics - Laws of thermodynamics - enthalpy, entropy and free energy. Exergonic and endergonic reactions. Redox potential. Structure and hydrolysis of ATP, high energy compounds-
UNIT- V
Enzymes- Properties- apoenzyme, Cofactors, metallic activators- coenzymes. Nomenclature and Classification- Enzyme kinetics – Concept of active sites Michaelis-Menton equation - enzyme inhibition - enzyme regulation.
General principles of extraction and purification of enzymes. Multienzyme complex – Enzyme immobilization. Application of enzymes in industry and medicine.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Principles of Biochemistry by A.L.Lehninger, D.L.Nelson & M.M.Cox. (1993) Worth Publishers, New York.
2. Biochemistry by L.Stryer (1994) Freeman & Co, New York.
3. Biochemistry by G. Zubay (1988) Macmillan Publishing Co, New York.
4. The vital force: A study of Bioenergetics by F.M.Harold (1986) Freeman & Co, New York.
|Title of the Course/ Paper |PAPER- XIV |
| |CORE- PLANT PHYSIOLOGY |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-4 |Subject Code |
| |II Year IVSemester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
UNIT- I
Photosynthesis – Properties of light – Interaction between radiant energy and matter, fluorescence and phosphorescence. Ultrastructure of chloroplast – Biosynthesis of chlorophyll – Van Niel’s hypothesis. Hills Reaction – Red drop phenomenon – Emerson enhancement effect, two pigment system – I & II. Light harvesting systems(LHS). Reaction centre, P680, P700, water oxidation complex, electron transport system – Z-scheme – cyclic – non cyclic – pseudocyclic electron flow – photophosphorylation- mechanism – photosynthetic carbon reduction (PCR) pathways in C3, C4 and CAM plants Biochemical variants of C4 pathway. C3-C4 intermediates. CO2 concentration mechanism in C4 plants – C2 cycle-photorespiration and its significance. Biochemistry and molecular biology of RUBISCO.
UNIT- II
Respiration – RQ – Glycolysis – pentose phosphate pathway – Kreb’s cycle – significance - Modern concept on Electron transport system and oxidative phosphorylation – Ultrastructure of mitochondria-Energetics of respiration – Respiratory inhibitors – Cyanide resistant respiration. Amphibolic role of respiration.
UNIT-III
Secondary metabolites. Biosynthesis and functions of flavonoids, terpenoids, alkaloids, steroids. Anthocyanin and Lignin – Role of secondary metabolites in plant –
Nitrogen metabolism – Source of soil nitrogen. Range of nitrogen fixing organisms – Legume Rhizobium, symbiosis, biochemistry and physiology. Nitrogenase, characteristics and functions of Leghaemoglobin, Genetics of nitrogen fixation. Nitrate reduction – Biochemistry and characteristics of NR and NIR – assimilation of ammonia. GDH and GS-GOGAT pathways – Transamination, Reductive amination .Aminoacid families. Synthesis of amino acids. Aspartate synthesis, aromatic amino acid synthesis. Interaction between photosynthesis and nitrogen metabolism.
UNIT IV
Water relations of plants: physico-chemical properties of water – water potential. Mechanism of absorption of water – active and passive transport – Apoplast and symplast concept. Ascent of sap. Transpiration – types-Movement of stomata- mechanism and transpiration. Antitranspirants, Guttation-.Mineral nutrition – criteria for essentiality. Macro and micro nutrients and their ‘role. Deficiency symptoms. Absorption of solutes – passive, active diffusion and facilitated diffusion – symport and antiport – translocation of solutes – pathways and mechanism.
UNIT- V
Growth and development: Growth kin~tics – Biosynthesis and mode of action of phytohormones – auxins, gibberellins, cytokinins, abscissic acid. Phytochrome – properties and photochemical transformation. Movement – nastic and tropic movements. Seed dormancy – causes and methods to break seed dormancy – physiology of seed germination – abscission – and senescence. -Stress physiology.- Biotic stresses- Pathogens and insects- Abiotic stresses:- Cold, heat ,light, oxidative and pollutants
Reference Books
1. Bidwell. R. G. S. 1979 Plant Physiology. Macmillon Delhi.
2. Datta. S. C. 1989.Plant Physiology. Central Book Depot. Allahabad.
3. Gauch. H. G.1972 Inorganic Plant Nutrition. Hutchinson & Dowd. New York.
4. Govindji. 1982. Photosynthesis. AP. New York
5. Hall. D. V. K. K. Rao. Photosynthesis. Arnold London
6. Jacob. W. P. 1979. Plant Hormones and Plant Development. Cambridge University Press. Cambrigde
7. Khan. A. A. 1982. The Physiology and Biochemistry of Seed development, Dormancy and Germination. Elesiver. Amsterdam
8. Salisbury. F. B., C. W. Ross.1991 Plant Physiology. Wassworth Pub. Co. Belmont
9. Ting. I. P. 1982.Plant Physiology. Addison Wesley Pb. Philippines
10.Michealis. I. And J. C. Torry. 1956. Plant in Action W. H. Freeman
11.Lea, P. J. and R. C. Leegood. 1993. Plant Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons. New York.
12. Gregory, R. P. F. 1989. Biochemistry of Photosynthesis Wiley Chichester
13. Sage, R. and R. K. Monson (eds). 1999. The Biology of C4 Plants AP New York.
14. Dixon, R. O. D. and C. T. Wheller 1986. Nitrogen Fixation in Plants Blackie. Glasgow.
15. Postgate. J. 1987. Nitrogen Fixation 2 nd Edition Cassel, London
17. Stacey,G., R. H. Burris and Evans, H. J. 1992. Biological Nitrogen Fixation. Chapman and Hall, New York
18. Mann, J. 1987, Secondary Metabolism Clarendron Press, Oxford
19. Harborne, J. B. Introduction to Ecological Biochemistry. Academic Press. Oxford.
20.Bonner, J. and J. E. Varner. 1979.Plant Physiology. Macmillon Delhi
21.Conn. E. E. and P. K. Stump. 1976.Outlines of Biochemistry Wiley Eastern
22. Robert Horton, H. L. A. Moran, R. S. Ochs, J. D. Rawn and K. G. Scrimgeour. 1996. 22. Principles of Biochemistry. Printice hall International. NJ.
23. Fersht. A. 1985. Enzyme Structure and Metabolism. W. H. Freeman New York
24. Lewin. B.1994. Genes. V. Oxford University Press. New York
25. Ferrier, R. J. and Collind, R. M. 1995. Monassaharides Wiley, New York.
26. Moore, T. S. (ed).1993. Lipid Metabolism in Plants. CRC Press. Boca Raton
27. Murphy, D. J (ed) 1994. Designer Oil Crops. VCH Press. Germany
28. Dey, P. M. J. B. Harborne (eds)1997 Methods in Plant Biochemistry, Academic Press London
29. Dey, P. M. J. B. Harborne (eds)1997.Plant Biochemistry, Academic Press London
30. Hopkins, W.G. 1995. Introduction to Plant Physiology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, USA.
31. . Nobel, P.S. 1999. Physiochemical and Environmental Plant Physiology, Academic Press, San Diego, USA.
32. . Taiz and Zeiger, 1998. Plant Physiology (2 nd ed.)
33.. Voet and Voet, 1992. Biochemistry, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, USA.
.
|Title of the Course/ Paper |PAPER - XV |
| |CORE: APPLIED PLANT CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-3 |Subject Code |
| |II Year IV Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
APPLIED PLANT CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE
UNIT-I
Laboratory organization, methods of sterilization (including ozonization, airpurification), Media composition- standard media – MS and B5 media -growth of callus and cell cultures, Regeneration, methods of micro propagation and their use in forestry, horticulture, agriculture and floriculture.- Culture initiation; cell suspension culture; micropropagation of herbaceous & woody plants; comparative study of solid & liquid media for micropropagation; suitabilities of different matrices for micropropagation; cell suspension culture in bioreactors; production of a secondary metabolite in culture; biotransformation by cell line.
UNIT-II
Haploids – production of homozygous lines and uses. Somatic embryogenesis and synthetic seeds, cryo preservation and germplasm storage
UNIT- III
Protoplast isolation and culture and somatic hybridization- Somaclonal and gemotoclonal variations.
meristem tip culture for virus free plants,
UNIT-IV
Approaches and factors affecting the production of secondary metabolites in in vitro. Principal classes of secondary metabolites. Production of pharmaceutically important drugs – alkaloids, food adititives and insecticides in vitro system.
UNIT-V
Bioreactors; types of bioreactors- stirred tank, air lift, membrane type process and
operation. Bioreactor for production of biomass (secondary metabolites)- Design of TC laboratory and management
Reference Books :
Trigiano, R.N., and D.J. Gray (eds.). 2000. Plant tissue culture concepts and laboratory exercises. CRC Press. (Textbook). 2nd Edition.
Kyte, M., and Kleyn, J. 1996. Plant from test tubes. Timber Press. Auge, R. et al., 1995. In vitro culture and its applications in horticulture. Science Publishers, Inc.
Crispeels, M.J. and D. E. Sadava. 2003. Plants, genes and agriculture. Jones and Bartlett Publishers.
Gamborg, O.L. and G. C. Phillips (eds). 1995. Plant cell, tissue and organ culture. Springer Lab Manual.
Potrykus, I, and G. Spangenberg (eds.). 1995. Gene transfer to plants. Springer Lab Manual.
Jones, H. 1996. Plant gene transfer and expression protocols. Methods in molecular biology . 49. Humana Press.
Bhojwani, S.S. and Razdan, M.K. 1996. Plant Tissue Culture: Theory and Practice (a
revised edition). Elsevier Science Publishers, New York, USA.
Bojwani, S.S. 1990. Plant Tissue Culture: Applications and Limitations, Elsevier
Science Publisher, New York, USA.
Collins, H.A. and Edwards, S. 1998. Plant Cell Culture, Bios Scientific Publishers, Oxford, UK.
Hall, R.D. (Ed.) 1999. Plant Tissue Culture: Techniques and Experiments, Academic
Press, New York.
Kartha, K.K. 1985. Cyropreservation of plant cells and organs. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida.
Khasim, S.M. 2002. Botanical Microtechnique: Principles and Practice, Capital
Publishing Company, New Delhi.
Vasil, I.K. and Thorpe, T.A. 1994. Plant Cell and Tissue Culture, Kluwer Academic Press, The Netherlands.
|Title of the Course/ Paper |PAPER-XVI |
| |PRACTICAL- V: ( Covering theory paper XIII, XIV & XV) |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-4 |Subject Code |
| |II Year IV Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY
1. Basic Biochemistry - Preparation of different types of solutions
2. Principles of Photometry - Colorimeter and Spectrophotometer- principles and Applications.
3. To find complimentary colour for different coloured solutions by using colorimeter.
4. Preparation of standard graph for potassium dichromate (K2 Crp7) by using colorimeter (OR) Verification of Beer- Lambert Law by using colorimeter.
5. Principles of pH meter and application
6. Determination of pH of lemon juice and detergent powder by using pH meter.
7. Determination of neutralization point of acid- base mixture by titration method using pH meter.
8. Estimation of glucose by anthrone reagent method colorimetrically.
9. Estimation of aminoacids by ninhydrin method colorimetrically.
10. Estimation of proteins (Lowry's method and Bradford method ).
11. Extraction and separation of known and unknown amino-acids by using Paper Chromatographic method.
12. Assay of the enzyme Catalase
13. Assay of the enzyme Peroxidase
14. Assay of the enzyme Dehydrogenase
(DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS)
1. Dialysis
2. Warburg manometer
3. Preparation of Buffers
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
1. Extraction and separation of photosynthetic pigments of Ca and C4 plants by paper chromatographic method.
2. Extraction and separation of photosynthetic pigments of Ca and C4 plants by thin layer chromatographic (TLC)method.
3. Extraction and separation of photosynthetic pigments of C3 and C4 plants by Column chromatographic method.
4. Extraction and separation of photosynthetic pigments by Chemical method.
5. Estimation of Chlorophyll a, Chlorophyll b and Total chlorophyll by Arnon's method.
6. Estimation of Carotenoids by using colorimeter.
7. Determination of absorption spectra of Chlorophyll a and Chlorophyll b by using colorimeter.
8. Determination of water potential by Plasmolytic method
9. Deficit (DPD) by weighing method.
10. Determination of effect of Chemicals on membrane permeability (Colorimetricaly)
11. Determination of effect of Temperature on membrane permeability (Colorimetricaly)
12. Effect of varying intensities of light on the rate of photosynthesis of an aquatic plant by using Wi1mott's Bubble Counter
13. Effect -of varying wave lengths of light (Or Quality of light)on the rate of photosynthesis of an aquatic plant by using Wilmot’s Bubble Counter.
14. Effect of varying concentrations of CO2 on the rate of photosynthesis of an aquatic plant by using Wilmot’s Bubble Counter.
15. Determination of rate of respiration of different respiratory substrates by using Titration method.
(DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS PLANT PHYSIOLOGY)
1. Dye reduction test (Hill's Reaction)
2. Polyacrylamide Gel Electrophoresis (PAGE and SDS PAGE)
3. Estimation of total nitrogen by Kjaldhal method.
4. Bio- assay of 2,4-D.
Bioassay of kinetin.
APPLIED PLANT CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE
Tissue culture laboratory design
Streilization
Inoculation of explant
Media preparation
Callus Culture and Cell suspension Culture
Organ Culture
Plant regeneration- Anther culture- Root culture
Morphogenetic studies
Cytodifferentation
Embryo dissection and embryo culture
|Title of the Course/ Paper |ELECTIVE -IV: ALGAL BIOTECHNOLOGY |
|Category of the Course |Year/ Semester |Credit-3 |Subject Code |
| |II Year IV Semester | | |
|Prerequisites |Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects |
|Objectives of the Course |Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects |
ALGAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT- I
Objectives of algal biotechnology, Resource potential of algae. Commercial utility of algae. Algae as a source of food and feed, algae as therapeutants, pigments, fine chemicals, fuel, biofertilizers and hormones.
Classification of oceanic environments, biological importance of sea food from sea, knowledge of Indian Ocean and adjacent seas.
UNIT-II
Phytoplankton (Fresh water and marine) seasonal succession, factors affecting distribution and succession.Algae as a source of food and feed. Algae as biofertilizers and seaweed liquid fertilizers, industrial uses of algae. Algae as food for fish, poultry and animals. Mass cultivation of micro algae as source of protein and as feed.
UNIT-III
Therapeutic uses. Remedial compounds, antioxidant, antithromombiotic, anticoagulants, wound healing, skin diseases, antiulcerogenic, antifungal, antibiotics and ant tumor, antiviral compounds. Production of pigments and utilization.
Industrial application of algal fuel, algal lipids- transesterification to ester fuel- substitutes for petroleum derived fuel, production of fine chemicals.
Positive and negative roles of algae in agriculture and aquaculture.Role of algae in closed systems; symbiotic algae, parasitic algae; phycopathology.
UNIT-IV.
Immobilization of algae: Aim recent approaches in applied algology- secondary metabolites-bioreactors, natural compounds of immobilization-methods of immobilization-alginate beads--extraction of compounds.
Recombinant DNA technology in algae, cloning of algal genomics and genetic engineering with reference to algae. Transformation systems in algae. Isolation of protoplasts, regeneration of fusion of macro algae.
UNIT- V
Role of algae in environmental health; Sewage treatment, treating industrial effluent, heavy metal removal, algae as indicators in assessing water quality and pollution; Saprobies index; Monitoring , assessment, restoration and management of coastal and marine ecosystem environment.
References:
Baddiley, S. Carey, N.H. Higgins, I.J. and Potter , W.G. 1994 .Micro algae: Biotechnology and Microbiology. Cambride University Press.. Cambridge.
Becker. E.W. 1994. Micro algae Biotechnology and Microbiology. Cambridge University press.
Borowitzka, M.A. and borowizka, L.J. Microalgal Biotechnology.
Ignacimuthu, S. 1996. Basic Biotechnology. Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Ltd. New Delhi.
Trehan, K. 1990. Biotechnology. Naroisa Pub. House. London.
Trivedi, P.C. 2001. Algal Biotechnology.. Point publisher, Jaipur. India.
Alexopoulos, C. J. And Bold, H. C. Algae and Fungi. The Macmillion Co. London
Bold, H. C and Wynne, M. J. 1978.Introduction to the Algae: Structure and Function. Prantice Hall of India New Delhi
Chapman,V. J. 1962. The Algae. Macmillan and Co. Ltd. New York.
Dioxn, P. S. 1973. Biology of Rhodophyta. Hafner Press. New York.
Dodge, J. E. The Fine Structure of Algal Cells. AP London
Fogg., G. E. 1953. The Metabolism of Algae. Methuen & Co. London
Fott, B.1959. Studies in Phylogy. Academia Prague
Fritsch, F. E.1935. The Structure and Reproduction of Algae, Vol. I. University Press Cambridge
Fritsch, F. E.1945. The Structure and Reproduction of Algae, Vol Il. I. University Press Cambridge
Kumar H. D and H. N. Singh.1982. A text Book on Algae. Affiliated East- West Press Pvt. Ltd
Morris, I. 1968. An Introduction to the Algae, Hutchinson University Library, London
Pickett_ Heaps, J. D.1975. Green Algae. Sinauer Associates, Sunderland, Mass
Prescott, G. W. 1969.The Algae: A Review. Thomson Nelson & Sons. London
Round, F. E. 1973. The Biology of Algae. Edward Arnold. London
Smith, G. M.1955. Crytogamic Botany Vol. IMc Graw – Hill Co.New York
Smith, G. M.1955. Crytogamic Botany Vol. IMc Graw – Hill Co.New York
Smith, S and Reed, D. J.1997. Mycorrhizal mSymbiosis Academic Press.
Stein, J. R. Hand Book of Phycological Methods. University Press. Cambridge
8. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN CHEMISTRY
SECOND YEAR
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
CORE IX - ORGANIC CHEMISTRY – III
(90 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
The first part of the paper explains the instrumental methods and their application in the determination of structure of organic molecules . The second part includes the basic concepts of aromaticity and photochemistry . A detailed account of orbital symmetry which forms the basis of many organic reactions is also included The last part of the subject deals with heterocyclics, terpenoids and steroids.
UNIT I – PHYSICAL METHODS OF STRUCTURE DETERMINATION :
Principles and applications of ultraviolet and infra – red spectroscopy in organic structure determination. Mass spectrometry and its applications. Optical rotatory dispersion and its applications. Cotton effect, axial haloketone rule and octant rule. Problem solving approach. (for molecules with a maximum number of C10) Woodward Fieser Rule (only application).
UNIT – II – NMR SPECTROSCOPY :
Nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy. Proton chemical shift, spin-spin coupling, coupling constants and applications to organic stuctures-FT NMR 13C resonance spectroscopy (elementary treatment).
UNIT III – ORGANIC PHOTOCHEMISTRY AND AROMATICITY :
Aromaticity of benzenoid, heterocyclic and non-benzenoid compounds, Huckel’s rule-Aromatic systems with pi electron numbers other than six non-aromatic (cyclooctatetraene etc) and anti-aromatic systems (cyclobutadiene etc)-systems with more than 10pi electrons – Annulenes up to C18 (synthesis of these compounds is not expected).
.Photo chemistry of ketones, photo reduction, photocycloaddition, Paterno - Buchi reaction, Di –p- methane rearrangement. cis- trans isomerisation, Barton reaction, photo- Fries reaction, photochemistry of cyclohexadienones synthesis of Vit - D.
UNIT IV – ORBITAL SYMMETRY AND CORRELATION :
Pericyclic reaction-classification-orbital symmety-Woodword Hoffman rules, FMO-Analysis of electrocyclic, cycloaddition and sigmatropic reactions-correlation diagram for, cycloaddition reaction ((2s + (2s) and ((4s + (2s) – butadiene – cyclobutene system and Inter conversion of hexatriene to cyclohexadiene. Structure of bulvalene, a fluxional molecule- Cope and Claisen rearrangements.
UNIT V – HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS , TERPENOIDS AND STEROIDS :
Flavones, isoflavones, anthocyanins,.( Synthesis of parent and simple alkyl or aryl substituted derivatives are expected). Synthesis of carotenoids - licopenes and Vitamin A1 (Reformatsky and Wittig reaction methods only). .
Elucidation of structure of cholesterol (by chemical degradation). Conversion of cholestrol to progestrone, esterone and testosterone
TEXT BOOKS :
1. R.M. Silverstein, G.C. Bassler and Morril, 1991, Spectrometric identification of Organic Compounds, 5th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, New York.
2. I.L. Finar, 1986, Organic Chemistry – Vol.II, 5th edition, ELBS Publication.
3. P.S. Kalsi, 2002, Spectroscopy of Organic Compounds, Wiley Eastern Ltd, Chennai.
4. H. Depuy and Orville, Molecular reaction and Photochemistry Charles, L.Chapman, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
5. L.A. Pacquette, 1978, Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry, Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co., London.
6. J. March, 1992, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Singapore
7. F.A. Carey and R.J. Sundberg, 1990, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Plenum Press, New York.
8. Neil S. Issacs, 1987, Physical Organic Chemistry, ELBS Publication.
9. P.S. Kalsi, 1999, Texbook of Organic Chemistry, Mcmillan India Ltd.
WEBSITES :
1. http :// info dome. sdsu, ./research/ guides/ science/ org chemistryblr. html
2. http :// liv.ac.uk/chemistry/links /reactions.html
3. http ://orgchem.chem..uconn.edu/namereact/named.html
4. chempen softwar4ee/reactions.html
CORE X - INORGANIC CHEMISTRY - III
(90 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the structures of solids and their properties.
To introduce applications of different spectroscopic methods in the study of Inorganic compounds.
UNIT I SOLID STATE CHEMISTRY I
1.1 Structure of Solids; Comparison of X-Ray, Neutron and Electron Diffraction.
1.2 Structure of ZnS, Rutile, Pervoskite, Cadmium iodide and nickel arsenide; spinels and inverse spinels.
1.3 Defects in solids, non-stoichometric compounds.
1.4 Use of X-ray powder diffraction data in identifying inorganic crystalline solids, details for cubic systems.
UNIT II SOLID STATE CHEMISTRY II
2.1 Band theory, Semiconductors, Superconductors, Solid State Electrolytes.
2.2 Magnetic Behaviour - Dia, Para,,Ferro, Antiferro and Ferrimagnetism, Hysterisis, Ferrites, Garnets.
2.3 Solid State Lasers, Inorganic Phosphorus
2.4 Diffusion in solids , types, Diffusion Coefficient, Diffusion Mechanisms, Vacancy and Interstitial Diffusion, Formation of Spinels.
2.5 Reactions in Solid State and Phase Transitions. Solid Solutions: Order-Disorder Transformations and Super Structure.
Unit III
3.1 Term states for dn - ions, energy diagrams, d-d transitions, Orgel and Sugano - Tanabe diagrams, spin- orbit coupling, nephelauxetic effect.
3.2 Applications to inorganic systems of the following: Ultraviolet, visible, Infrared and Raman spectroscopy of metal complexes, organometallic and simple inorganic compounds with special reference to coordination sites, isomerism.
Unit - IV
Applications to inorganic systems of the following:
NMR, NQR, Mossbauer spectra: NMR spectra of 31P, 19F, NMR shift reagents, NQR-Nitrosyl compounds. Mossbauer of Fe and Sn systems.
Unit-V
5.1 ESR introduction-Zeeman equation, g value, nuclear hyperfine splitting, Interpretation of the spectrum, simple carbon centered free radicals. Anisotropy in g value and hyperfine splitting constant. McConnels equation, Kramer’s theorem, esr of transition metal complex of copper, manganese and vanadyl complexes.
5.2 Photoelectron spectroscopy – UPS and XPS-Photoelectron spectra – Koopman’s theorem,-Fine structure in PES, Chemical shift and Correlation with electronic charges..
Text Books.
1. L.Smart, E.Moore – Solid State Chemistry – An Introduction-2nd Edition
2. A.R.West – Basic Solid state Chemistry 1961 – John Wiley
3. A.R.West – Solid state Chemistry and its applications 2007 – John Wiley
4. W.E Addison, 1961, Structural principles in Inorganic Chemistry, Longman
5. Structural principles in inorganic Chemistry –Adams
6. Physical methods in inorganic Chemistry – Russel Drago
7. Physical methods in inorganic Chemistry – E.A.V Ebsworth, Rankin and Caddock. 1987
References
1. R.B.Heslop and K.Jones, inorganic Chemistry, Elsevier Scintific Publ .1976.
2. H.A.O Hill and P.Day, physical methods in dvanced Inorganic Chemistry, John wiley 1968.
3. C.N.R Rao, J.R.Ferraro, Spectrosopy in inorganic chemistry, Vol.I and Vol II, Academic press, 1970.
4. G.Aruldhas, molecular structures and spectroscopy-Prentice hall.
5. M.F.Lappert –Physical inorganic Chemistry-inorganic Electron Spectrosopy 1968
CORE – XI - PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY - III
(90 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
To understand and appreciate the significance and applications of classical thermodynamics, solution electrochemistry and to learn the principle and applications of optical and resonance spectroscopy.
UNIT I - THERMODYNAMICS - I :
Partial molar properties - Partial molar free energy (Chemical potential) - Partial molar volume and partial molar heat content - their significance and determination of these quantities. Variation of chemical potential with temperature and pressure.
Thermodynamics of real gases - gas mixture - fugacity definition - determination of fugacity variation of fugacity with temperature and pressure -thermodynamics of ideal and non ideal binary solutions-dilute solutions-excess functions for non-'ideal solutions and their determination-the concepts of activity and activity coefficients-determination of standard free energies.
Choice of standard states - determination of activity and activity coefficients for non-electrolytes.
UNIT 2 - SPECTROSCOPY I :
Interaction of matter with radiation-Einstein's theory of transition probability-rotational spectroscopy of a rigid rotor- non-rigid rotor-diatomic and polyatomic molecules. Vibrational spectroscopy-harmonic oscillator-anharmonicity-vibrational spectra of polyatomic molecules-vibrational frequencies-group frequencies-vibrational coupling-overtones-Fermi resonance. Raman Spectra.
Electronic spectra of polyatomic molecules, selection rules-types of transition in saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons, effect of conjugation,and solvent effects .
UNIT 3 – SPECTROSCOPY II :
Resonance spectroscopy-Zeeman effect-equation of motion of spin in magnetic fields-chemical shift-spin-spin coupling-NMR of simple AX and AMX type molecules- H1 -13C, 19F, 31P NMR spectra - a brief qualitative discussion of Fourier transform spectroscopy.
UNIT 4- ELECTROCHEMISTRY OF SOLUTION:
Mean ionic activity and activity coefficient-concept of ionic strength, Debye-Huckel theory of strong electrolytes-activity coefficient of strong electrolytes-determination of activity coefficient -Debye Huckel limiting law at appreciable concentration of electrolytes - Debye Huckel Bronsted equation-qualitative and quantitative verification.
UNIT 5 –QUANTUM CHEMISTRY -IV
Approximation methods –perturbation and variation method –application to hydrogen ,helium atoms –R.S. coupling and term symbols for atoms in the ground state – Slater orbital and HF –SCF methods Born – Heimer approximation –valence bond theory for hydrogen molecule –LACO –MO theory for di and polyatomic molecules –concept of hybridization – Huckel theory for conjugated molecules (ethylene , butadiene and benzene)- semi empirical methods .
TEXT BOOKS :
1. S. Glasstone, 1960, Thermodynamics for chemists, Affiliated East West Press, New Delhi.
2. J. Rajaram and J.C. Kuriacose, 1986, Thermodynamics for students of chemistry, Lal Nagin Chand, New Delhi.
3. A. Caringtion and A.D Mc Lachlan, 1967, Introduction to Magnetic Resonance Harper and Row, New York.
4. G. Aruldas, 2002, Molecular structure and spectroscopy, Prentice Hall.
5. C.N. Banwell, 2003, Fundamentals of Molecular ,Spectroscopy Tata McGraw Hill.
6. D.N. Sathyanarayana vibrational spectroscopy
7. D.N. Sathyanarayana electronic spectroscopy
8. J.O.M. Bokris and A.K.N. Reddy, 1977, Electrochemistry, VoIs1 and 2 Plenum, New York..
9. J. Robbins -1993, Ions in Solution-An Introduction in electrochemistry, Clarendon press, Oxford
10. R.K.Prasad, 1992, Quantum Chemistry, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.
11. D.A. Mcquarrie, 1983, Quantum Chemistry, University Science Books, Mill Valley, Calfornia.
SUGGESTED REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. R.L. De Koch and H.B. Gray, Chemical Structure and Bonding, Benjamin/Cumming, Menlo Park, California.
2. J.N. Murrell, S.F.A. Kettle and J.M. Tedder, 1985, The Chemical Bond, Wiley.
3. P.W. Atkins, 1983, Molecular Quantum Mechanics, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
4. P.H. Rieger, 1994, Electrochemistry, Chapman and Hall, New York.
5. W. Kemp, 1986, NMR in Chemistry McMilan Ltd.
6. G.W. King, 1964, Spectroscopy and Molecular Structure, Holt Rieneheart and Winston.
7. K.D. Mclauchlan, 1970, Magnetic Resonance, Oxford chemistry Series, Oxford.
8. B.P.Staughan and S.Walker, 1976, Spectroscopy Vol. 1 , 11 and 111, Chapman and Hall.
9. B.W. Cook and K. Jones, 1972, A.Programmed Introduction to Infra red spectroscope, Heydon and Son Ltd.
10. F.A. Rushworth and D.P Tunstal, 1973, Nuclear Magnetic Rewsonance Gorden and Breaqch Science Publishing, New York.
11. J.K. Sanders and B.K.Hunther, 1987, Mordern NMR Spectroscopy, A Guide for Chemists, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
12. J.K.M. Sanders, E.C. Constable and B.K. Huntherm Morden, 1989, NMR Spectroscopy - A World Book of chemical problems, Oxford.
CORE XII –PHYSICALCHEMISTRY PRACTICALS
(120 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and verify the concepts and equations in physical chemistry by carrying out suitable experiments . Typical list of possible experiments are given .A minimum of 10 – 12 experiments have to be performed .
1. Study of the adsorption of acetic acid or oxalic acid on charcoal , verification of Freundlich isotherm and determination of concentration of given acetic acid or oxalic acid.
2. Construction of phase diagram for a simple binary system ;naphthalene – biphenyl, naphthalene –p-dichlorobenzene , naphthalene-diphenylamine.
3. Construction of phase diagram for the three component system(partially miscible liquid system) acetone – chloroform – water ; chloroform –aceticacid – water.
4. Determination of the equilibrium constant of the reaction between iodine and potassium iodide by partion method ..
5. Determination of the concentration of given potassium iodide solutions by partition method.
6. Determination of molecular weight of benzoic acid in benzene and the degree of association of benzoic acid in benzene using partition method .
7. Kinetic study and comparison of rate constant for the inversion of cane sugar in presence of acid using polarimeter
8. Kinetic study of the reaction between acetone and iodine in acidic medium and determination of the order with respect to iodine and acetone
.9. Kinetic study of saponification of ethylacetate by sodium hydroxide conductometrically and determination of order of the reaction.
10. Kinetic study and comparison of acid strengths using acid catalysed hydrolysis of methyl acetate
11. Determination of temperature coefficient and energy of activation for the acid catalysed hydrolysis of methylacetate.
12. Determination of the rate constant and order for the reaction between potassium persulphate and potassium iodide
13. Study of the primary salt effect on the kinetics of oxidation of iodide by persulphate
14. Kinetic study of the decomposition of sodium thiosulphate by mineral acid.
ELECTIVE – III MATERIALS SCIENCE
(60 HOURS)
Unit -I:
1.1 Structure and bonding in solids-cohesive forces in crystals-van der waal’s interactions, ionic bonding, covalent bonding and hydrogen bonding in solids.
1.2 Techniques of structure determination in solid state- X-ray diffraction, electron and neutron diffractions and electron microscopy-principle, instrumentation and applications.
Unit - II:
2.1 Theories of metallic state- free electron theory, Brillouin and Band models.
2 .2. Smart metals – binary and ternary – examples and applications.
2 .3 Defects in crystals-Frenkel and Schotky defects, f centers, effect of defects on the electrical, optical, magnetic, thermal and mechanical properties of crystals.
Unit - III
3.1 Optimized ionic conductors – silver ion, copper ion, alumina and related electrolytes, alkali metal ion and fluoride ion and proton conductors- super conductors- principle and applications..
3 .2 Photoconducting materials- principle and applications
UNIT -IV
4.1 Charge transfer complexes-characterization and their electrical properties.
4.2 Conducting polymers – polyacetylenes, polyanilines and polyvinylidenes – preparation and applications.
4.3 Liquid crystals – classification-thermotropic and lyotropic –nematic, smectic and cholesteric and their applications. (15 hrs)
UNIT –V:
5.1 Preparation and properties of nanoparticles –Materials-metals, semiconductors, ceramics (oxides, carbides, sulphides, nitrides )-Pysical methods-Physical vapour deposition( evaporation and sputtering) –chemical methods-reduction methods –sol-gel methods- optical properties ,electrical properties and magnetic properties
5.2 Carbon nano structures: carbon clusters, C60- alkali doped C60- carbon nanotubes - preparation- arc-discharge, laser ablation and catalytic decomposition of hydrocarbons- electronic and mechanical properties- applications – field emission. Sensors- mechanical reinforcement.
References:
1. Materials Science – Raghavan
2. Materials Science - Manas Chanda Vol I &II
3. A.F.Wells, 1984, Structural Inorganic Chemistry, V.Edition, Oxford.
4. A.R. West, Solid State Chemistry and applications 1991,John Wiley
5. Lesley Smart and Elaine Moore , Solid State Chemistry,
6. Kenneth, J. Klabunde, Nanoscale materials in chemistry, Wiley Interscience, 2001
7. T . Pradeep , Nano : The Essentials ,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2007.
8. Sulabha K. Kulkarni, Nano technology, Principles and practices, Capital publisher 2007.
ELECTIVE III – ELEMENTARY BIOCHEMISTRY
(60 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES:
This course aims to explain the basic concepts in chemistry and metabolism of carbohydrates, amino acids ,proteins and lipids. Role of nucleic acid , enzymes and vitamins are also included in this paper.
UNIT – I
1.1 Classification and biological role of carbohydrates
1.2 Monosaccharides – Linear and ring structures (Haworth formula) of ribose, glucose, fructose,and mannose(structural determination not required) – physical and chemical properties of glucose and fructose.
1.3 Disaccharides – Ring structures – physical and chemical properties of maltose, lactose,and sucrose.
1.4 Polysaccharides – starch, glycogen and cellulose – structure and properties.
1.5 Glycolysis of carbohydrates.
UNIT – II
2.1 Amino acids ; classifications, essential amino acids, physical properties and reactions
2.2 Proteins : Classifications based on shape, composition and solubility – physical properties
2.3 Primary structure of proteins – End group analysis(N-terminal analysis –Edman’s method, dansyl chloride method :C- terminal analysis – hydrazinolysis and biochemical method )
2.4 Secondary and tertiary structure of proteins
2 .5 Biological functions of proteins, deamination, transamination reactions, urea cycle.
UNIT – III
3.1 Definition and classification of lipids.
3.2 Saponification number, Acetyl number.
3.3 Chemical properties and biological importance of cholesterol.
3.4 Functions of bile acids.
3.5 Biological functions of lipids.
UNIT -IV
4.1 Purine and pyrimidine bases
4.2 Nucleosides, nucleotides, polynucleotides.
4.3 DNA and RNA –structure and types.
4.4 Biological functions of DNA and RNA – genetic code.
UNIT – V
5.1 Enzymes : definition , nomenclature, sources, classification and specificity – isoenzymes – factors affecting enzyme activity – substrate, pH, temperature, enzyme concentration.
5.2 Vitamins : definition, classification – water soluble vitamins –B1, B2, B3, B6, B12 and vit- C –fat soluble vitamins – A, D, E, K –structure, deficiency diseases, biochemical rules and daily requirements.
5.3 Minerals ; Ca, P, Na, K and Mg. and trace elements –Fe, Cu and Se
Suggested Reference Books:
1. C.B.Powar and G.R.Chatwal, Biochemistry.
2. Ragunatha Rao, Elements of Biochemistry
3. U.Sathyanarayana, Essential Biochemistry
4. J.L.Jain, Elementary biochemistry
ELECTIVE III - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
(60 HOURS)
UNIT – I
1.1 Objectives of research ,types of research – basic, applied, and othertypes
1.2 Problem selection – project proposal - funding agencies
UNIT – II
2.1 Chemistry literature survey –primary, secondary and tertiary sources
2.2 Journals published by the ACS and RSC – CA and its importance –Indian Journals – reviews , monographs, data books and indexes
2.3 Methods of searching, compilation, preservation and retrieval of collected literature
2.4 Impact factor and citation index
UNIT -III
3.1 Planning and conducting experiments
3.2 Methods of collecting data – primary and secondary –sources of secondary data
3.3 Classification and tabulation of data – types of classification –general rules for tabulation –types of tables
3.4 Simple sampling techniques and size of the sample
UNIT -IV
4.1 Presentation of data - Types of errors – Gross, Systematic and Random errors
4.2 Measures of central tendency, mean, standard deviation and measures of variability.
4.3 Linear regression , correlation and method of least squares
UNIT –V
5.1 Project report writing – general format, chapter format, page format
5.2 Procedure for presenting tables, graphs and figures, foot-notes, bibliography and appendices
5.3 Abbreviations, symbols and SI units
5.4 Plagiarism, copy right and patent laws
5.5 Publication of research paper.
SUGGESTED REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thesis and Assignment Writing – J Anderson, B.H. Dursten and M. Poole, Wiley Eastern (1977).
2. Statistical Method, Gupta S. P, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi, 2004
3. Hand Book For Authors –Journal of the American Chemical Society Publications
4. Chemical publications – Their nature and uses
5. Organic Chemistry, Jerry March, 4th edition, McGraw - Hill
FOURTH SEMESTER
CORE -XIII - ORGANIC CHEMISTRY - IV
(75 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
This paper introduces the basic methodologies for the synthesis of organic compounds. A brief introduction to biosynthesis of alkaloids and terpenoids is also included. Certain aspects of free radical chemistry also will be discussed.
UNIT I - BIO-ORGANIC CHEMISTY :
Pyrimidines (cytocine and uracil ) and purines (adenine and guanine only)
Structure and role of nucleic acids. DNA and RNA Genetic code.
Biosynthesis of Cholestrol , phenanthrene alkaloids and bile acids
UNIT 2 - ALKALOIDS AND PROTEINS :
Peptides and their synthesis (Synthesis of tripeptide using the Amino acids - Glycine, Alanine, Lysine, Cysteine, Glutamic acid, Arginine).Merrified synthesis, Determination of primary, secondary and tertiary structure of proteins. Total synthesis of , morphine, resperine and cocaine.
UNIT 3 - MODERN SYNTHETIC METHODOLOGY :
Retro synthetic analysis and Synthesis of simple organic molecules using standard reactions like acetylation and alkylation of enamines and active methylene compounds, Grignard reactions, Phosphorus and sulphur ylides, Robinson annulation. Formation of C-C and C=C bonds.
UNIT 4 - USE OF REAGENTS IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS:
Diels-Alder reactions ENE reaction, protection and deprotection of functional groups (R-OH, RCHO, R-CO-R, R-NH2 and R-COOH). Uses of the following reagents : DCC, trimethyl silyl iodides, 1, 3-dithiane (Umpolung), diisobutyl aluminimumhydride (DIBAL), 9BBN, trimethylsilylchloride. and tributyl tinhydride .
Application of synthetic methodology for the synthesis of simple cyclic and acyclic target molecules -synthesis of cubane, 5 - hexenoicacid , bicyclo (4, 1, 0) heptane-2-one.,trans 9-methyl-1- decalone ,longifolene and onocerin
UNIT 5 - FREE RADICAL REACTIONS :
Long lived and short lived free radicals, methods of generation of free radicals. Adddition of free radicals to olefinic double bonds. The following aromatic radical substituents are to be studied : decomposition of diazocompounds, phenols-coupling - Sandmayer reaction - Gombereg-Gauchmann reaction, Pschorr reaction, Ulmann reaction, mechanism of Hunsdicker reaction Detection of free radicals by ESR.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. R.K. Mackie and D.M. Smith. 1998, Guide book to organic synthesis, ELBS Publication.
2. I. L. Finar, 1986, Organic Chemistry, 5th Edition, Vol .II, ELBS Publication.
3. L. Smith, Robert L. Hill .1. Robert Lehman, Robert J .Iet Rowitz, Philp Handler and abrahim white principles of Biochemistry General aspects, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill Int.
4. L. Stryer, Biochemistry, W.H.Freeman and Co., New York.
5. Agarwal, Chemistry of Organic Natural Products, Goel Publishing House.
6. B.l. Smith, 1980, Organic synthesis, Chapman and Hall, NY.
7. Francis.A. Carey, Richard J. Sundbreg, 2001, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Plenum Press, New York.
8. N.J. Turro, 1978 Modern Molecular Photochemistry, Benjamin, Cummings, California.
WEBSITES :
1. . html
2.
3.
4. chempensoftwar4ee/reactions.html)
CORE XIV - INORGANIC CHEMISTRY - IV
(75 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES:
This paper exposes the student to the reaction mechanisms of inorganic complexes and the chemistry of organometallic compounds and their industrial applications.
UNIT I - COORDINATION CHEMISTRY - REACTION MECHANISMS:
1.1 Electron transfer reactions; outer and inner sphere processes; atoms transfer reaction, complementary and non-complementary reactions.
1.2 Formation and rearrangement of precursor complexes, the bridging ligand, successor complexes, Marcus theory.
UNIT 2 - SUBSTITUTION REACTIONS IN COORDINATION COMPOUNDS
2.1 Substitution Reactions : Substitution in square planar complexes, reactivity of platinum complexes, influences of entering, leaving and other groups, the trans-effect.
2.2 Substitution of octahedral complexes of cobalt and chromium, replacement of coordinated water, solvolytic (acids and bases) reactions applications in synthesis (platinum and cobalt complexes only).
2.3 Rearrangement in 4 and 6 coordinate complexes : reaction at coordinated ligands- template effect.
Unit 3 Organo Metallic Chemistry
3.1 Carbon donors: Alkyls and Aryls, metalation, bonding in carbonyls and nitrosyls, chain and cyclic donors, olefin, acetylene, and allyl systems, synthesis, structure and bonding, metallocenes.
3.2 Reactions: Assciciation, Substitution, Addition, Eleimination, Ligand protonation, Electrophilic and Nucleophilic attack on ligands, carnonylation and decarboxylation, oxidative addition and fluxionality.
Unit 4 Industrial applications of Organo Metallic compounds
4.1 Catalysis – Hydrogenation of olefins(Wilkinson’s catalyst), hydroformylation of olefins using cobalt or rhodium catalyst(Oxo process), oxidation of olefins to aldehydes and ketones(Wacker process):polymersisation(Ziegler-Natta catalyst); Cyclo oligomerisation of acetylene using nickel catalyst(Reppe’s catalyst), polymer bound catalysts.
Unit - V
5.1 Lanthanides and actinides: Occurrence and isolation of the metals, electronic structure - Lanthanide contraction and significance. Oxidation states magnetic and spectral properties - Important co-ordination compounds of lanthanide -nuclear and non-nuclear applications of lanthanides including use of lanthanides as shift reagents.
5.2 Inorganic Photochemistry – Photoredox reactions and photosubstitution reactions in coordination complexes with particular reference to Co(III), Cr(III) and Pt(II) complexes. Photosensitisation reactions of [Ru(bpy)3]2+ complex and its applications in solar energy conversions.
TEXT BOOKS
1. N,J,Turro, 1978, molecular photochemistry.
2. K.K.Rohatgi Mukherjee
3. Purcell, K.F. and Kotz, J.C., - Inorganic Chemistry
4. D.F.Shrivers, Atkins.Inorganic Chemistry
5. J.E. Huheey, 1993, Inorganic Chemistry - Principles, Structure and Reactivity; IV Edition, Harper Collins, NY.
6. S. Manku, 1984, Inorganic Chemistry, TMG Co.,
7. Selected Topics in Inorganic Chemistry, U.Malik, G.D.Tuli, R.D.Madan, 1992.
8. Basolo and R.G. Pearson, 1967, Mechanism of Inorganic Reactions, Wiley, NewYork.
9. R.Sarkar, general and Inorganic chemistry, (Parts I and II), New Book Agency, Calcutta
REFERENCES:
1. S.F.A. Kettle, 1973, Coordination Chemistry, ELBS
2. G.Coates, M.L.green and K.Wade, Priciples of Organometallic Chemistry, !988
3. R.B.Jordan, Reaction Mechanism of Inorganic and Organo Metallic systems – OUP 1991.
4. P.Powell, Principles of Organometakkic chemistry, Chapman and hall 1998.
5. R.C.Mehothra, A.Singh, Organo Metallic Chemistry, Wiley Eastern Comp.1992.
6. V.Balzani & Carrasitti – Photochemistry of coordination compounds
CORE - XV- PHYSICALCHEMISTRY – IV
(75 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
To learn the principles of photophysics and photochemistry and their applications in organic and inorganic chemistry and energy conversion .Principles and applications of statistical thermodynamics and electrode kinetics are also included in this paper.
UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS
Absorption and emission of radiation-Franck-Condon Principle-decay of electronically excited states-radiative and non radiative processes-fluorescence and phosphorescence-spin forbidden radiative transition internal conversion and intersystem crossing-energy transfer process-excimers and exciplexes-static and dynamic quenching-Stern Volmer analysis.
UNIT II - TECHNIQUES AND PHOTOCHEMICAL REACTIONS
Quantum yield and Life time measurements, Flash photolysis, Actinometry. Photo physical process and kinetics of photochemical reactions.
Photoredox reactions and photosubstitution reactions in coordination chemistry - photovoltaic and photogalvanic cells. photoelectrochemistry, Aspects of solar energy conversion
UNIT III – ELECTRODE KINETICS
Electrode-electrolyte interface - electrical double layer-electrocapillary phenomena - Lippmann equation-Structure of double layer-Helmholtz -Perrin, Guoy Chapmann and Stern models of electrical double layer.
Mechanism of electrode reaction - polarization and overpotential, the Butler - Volmer equation for one step and multistep electron transfer reactions- significance of exchange current density and symmetry factor-transfer coefficient and its significance-mechanism of hydrogen and oxygen evolution reactions. :
Corrosion and passivation of metals- Pourbaix diagram - fuel cells-electrodeposition - principle and applications.
UNIT IV - THERMODYNAMICS - II :
Concept of thermodynamic probability - distribution of distinguishable and non-distinguishable particles .Maxwell-Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac and Bose Einstein statistics - modes of contribution to energy-. Partition function - translational, vibrational and rotational partition functions for mono, diatomic and polyatomic ideal gases.
UNIT V - THERMODYNAMICS – III :
Thermodynamic functions in terms of partition functions, equilibrium constant for isotope exchange and dissociation of diatomic molecules; heat capacity of solids (Einstein and Debye Models) ortho and para hydrogen -Planck's radiation law - electron in metals
TEXT BOOKS :
1. J.O.M. Bokris and A.K.N. Reddy, 1977, Electrochemistry, VoIs1 and 2 Plenum, New York.
2. P. Delahay - 1965, Electrode Kinetics and Structure of Double layer, Interscience, New York.
3. S. Glasstone, 1960, Introduction to Electrochemistry, Affiliated East West Press, New Delhi.
4. D.R. Crow, 1991, Principles and Applications of Electrochemistry, Chapman and Hall.
5 N.J. Turro, 1978, Modern Molecular Photochemistry, Benjamin, Cummings, Menlo Park, California.
6 K.K. Rohatgi Mukherjee, 1978, Fundamentals of Photochemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
8. M.C. Gupta, 1990, statistical; thermodynamics, wiley eastern New Delhi
9. B.J. McClelland, 1973, Statistical Thermodynamics, Chapman and Hall, London.
SUGGESTED REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. J.G. Calvert and J.N. Pitts, 1966, Photochemistry, Wiley, London.
2. R.P. Wayne, 1970, Photochemistry, Butterworths, London.
3. R.P. Cundell and A. Gilbert, 1970, Photochemistry, Thomas Nelson London
ELECTIVE- IV - ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICALS
(120 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
To impart the techniques of analysis of ores, alloys , quantitative estimations of organic compounds and inorganic metal ions and spectral interpretation ..
Unit I Estimation of Organic Compounds
1.1 Estimation of Phenol and Aniline – Bromination method
1.2 Estimation of ethyl methyl Ketone
1.3 Estimation of Glucose – Bertrand’s method
Unit II Quantitative analysis:
Gravimetric estimation of
2.1 magnesium in the mixture of Iron and magnesium
2.2 Nickel in the mixture of copper and nickel
2.3 Zinc in the mixture of copper and zinc.
2.4 Nickel in the mixture of iron and Nickel.
Unit - III. Analysis of Ores and Alloys:
3.1 Determination pf percentage of calcium and magnesium in dolomite.
3.2 Determination of percentage of Mn02 in pyrolusite.
3.3 Determination of copper and zinc in brass.
*Unit 1V Analysis of Inorganic Complex Compounds:
4.1 Preparation of cis and trans potassium bis (oxalato) diaquochromate and analysis of each of these for chromium.
4.2 Preparation of potassium tris (oxalato) ferrate (III) and analysis for iron and oxaiate.
* UNIT V CHROMATOGRAPHIC SEPARATIONS
5.1 Separation of a mixture of two metal ions by paper chromatography.
5.2 Separation of zinc and magnesium on an anion exchanger
5.3 Thin layer chromatography – separation of green leaf pigments
5.4 Column chromatography – separation of o-nitro and p-nitro phenol
UNIT - VI SPECTRAL INTERPRETATION
6.1 List of inorganic spectra to be given for interpretation.
31P NMR Spectra of methylphosphate
31P NMR Spectra of HPF2
19F NMR Spectra of CIF3
'H NMR Spectra of Tris (ethylthioacetoacetanato) cobalt (III)
Expanded high resolution NMR spectra of (N-propylisonitrosoacety lacetoneiminato) (acetylac etoneiminato) Nicke! (II)
ESR Spectra of the aqueous ON (S03)22- ion.
ESR Spectra of the H atoms in CaF2
ESR Spectra of the [Mn (H20)6]2+ ion
ESR Spectra of the bis (salicyladiminato) copper (II)
IR Spectra of the sulphato ligand
IR Spectra of the nitro and nitritopentaminecobalt (III) chloride
IR Spectra of the dimethylglyoxime ligand and its Nickel (II) complex.
IR Spectra of carbonyls
Mossbauer spectra of FeS04.7H20
Mossbauer spectra of FeCl3
Mossbauer spectra [Fe (CN)6]3
Mossbauer spectra [Fe (CN)]4-
6.2 SPECIAL INTERPRETATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS. UV, IR, PMR AND MASS SPECTRA OF 15 COMPOUNDS.
1. 1, 3, 5-Trimethylbenzene
2. Pinacolonen0
3. prophyl amine
4. p-Methoxybenzyl alcohol
5. Benzyl bromide
6. Phenyl acetone
7. 2-Methoxyethyl acetate
8. Acetone
9. Isopropyl alcohol
10. Acetaldehyde diacetate
11. 2-N, N-Dimethylamino ethanol
12. Pyridine
13. 4-Picoline
14. 1, 3 dibromo-1, 1-dichloropropene
15. Cinnamaldehyde
* Only for Internal Assessment
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vogel, Text book of Inorganic quantitative analysis.
2. Dougles A. Skoog, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 3rd Edition.
3. Arthur I. Vogel, A Text Book of Practical Organic Chemistry
9. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE
SYLLABUS
SECOND YEAR
|Title of the Course/ |Principles of Compiler Design |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year &Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No.: 16 |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces various steps in the design of a compiler. |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction to Compilers - Finite Automata and lexical Analysis. |
| |Unit-2: Syntax Analysis: Context free grammars - Derivations and parse trees – Basic parsing techniques – |
| |LR parsing. |
| |Unit 3: Syntax - directed translation, symbol tables. |
| |Unit-4: Code optimization - More about code optimization. |
| |Unit-5 : Code generation - Error detection and recovery. |
1. Recommended Text
i) A.V. Aho, J.D.Ullman, 1985, Principles of Compiler Design, Narosa Pub-House.
2. Reference Books
i) D.Gries, 1979, Compiler Construction for Digital Computers, John Wiley & Sons.
ii) A.V.Aho, Ravi Sethi, and J.D.Ullman, 1986, Compilers Principles, Techniques and Tools, Addison Wesley Pub. Co.
|Title of the Course/ |Object Oriented Analysis & Design |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 17 |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the basic concepts of bject Oriented Analysis and Design. |
|Course outline |Unit 1: System Development - Object Basics - Development Life Cycle - Methodologies - Patterns - Frameworks|
| |- Unified Approach - UML. |
| |Unit 2: Use-Case Models - Object Analysis - Object relations - Attributes - Methods - Class and Object |
| |responsibilities - Case Studies. |
| |Unit 3: Design Processes - Design Axioms - Class Design - Object Storage - Object Interoperability - Case |
| |Studies. |
| |Unit 4: User Interface Design - View layer Classes - Micro-Level Processes – View Layer Interface – Case |
| |Studies. |
| |Unit 5: Quality Assurance Tests - Testing Strategies - Object orientation on testing - Test Cases - test |
| |Plans - Continuous testing - Debugging Principles - System Usability - Measuring User Satisfaction - Case |
| |Studies. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) A. Bahrami, 1999, Object Oriented Systems Development, Tata McGraw Hill International Edition.
2. Reference Books
i) G. Booch, 1999, Object Oriented Analysis and design, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, Boston
ii) R.S.Pressman, 2005, Software Engineering, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
iii) Rumbaugh, Blaha, Premerlani , Eddy, Lorensen, 2003, Object Oriented Modeling And design , Pearson education, Delhi.
|Title of the Course/ |Digital Image Processing |
|Paper | |
|Extra Disciplinary |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 18 |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the various concepts related to Digital Image Processing |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction – steps in image processing, Image acquisition, representation, sampling and |
| |quantization, relationship between pixels. – color models – basics of color image processing. |
| |Unit 2: Image enhancement in spatial domain – some basic gray level transformations – histogram processing |
| |– enhancement using arithmetic , logic operations – basics of spatial filtering and smoothing. |
| |Unit 3: Image enhancement in Frequency domain – Introduction to Fourier transform: 1- D, 2 –D DFT and its |
| |inverse transform, smoothing and sharpening filters. |
| |Unit 4: Image restoration: Model of degradation and restoration process – noise models – restoration in the|
| |presence of noise- periodic noise reduction.. Image segmentation: Thresholding and region based |
| |segmentation. |
| |Unit 5 : Image compression: Fundamentals – models – information theory – error free compression –Lossy |
| |compression: predictive and transform coding. JPEG standard. |
1. Recommended Texts
(i) R.C. Gonzalez, R.E.Woods, 2002, Digital Image processing, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education.
2. Reference Books
i) Anil K. Jain, 1994, Fundamentals of Digital image Processing, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
(ii) Pratt. W.K., Digital Image Processing, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons.
(iii) Rosenfled A. & Kak, A.C, 1982, Digital Picture Processing, vol .I & II, Academic
Press.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i)
|Title of the Course/ |Practical - V : Mini Project |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 2 |Sl. No. : 21 |
|Objective of the course|This course gives practical training in design and implementation of a single mini problem. |
|Course outline |Each student will develop and implement individually application software based on any emerging latest |
| |technologies. |
|Title of the |Project & Viva-Voce |
|Course/Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Fourth Semester |Credit: 20 |Sl. No. : 24 |
|Objective of the course|This course is to train the student in executing a project and preparing the report of work done. |
|Course outline |The project work is to be carried out either in a software industry or in an academic institution for the |
| |entire semester and the report of work done is to be submitted to the University. |
Elective – II
|Title of the Course/ | Data Warehousing and Data Mining |
|Paper | |
|Elective |II Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 19 A |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the basic concepts of data warehousing and data mining |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction: Data Mining tasks – Data Mining versus Knowledge Discovery in Data bases – Relational|
| |databases – Data warehouses – Transactional databases – Object oriented databases – Spatial databases – |
| |Temporal databases – Text and Multimedia databases – Heterogeneous databases - Mining Issues – Metrics – |
| |Social implications of Data mining. |
| |Unit 2: Data Preprocessing: Why Preprocess the data – Data cleaning – Data Integration – Data |
| |Transformation – Data Reduction – Data Discretization. |
| |Unit 3: Data Mining Techniques: Association Rule Mining – The Apriori Algorithm – Multilevel Association |
| |Rules – Multidimensional Association Rules – Constraint Based Association Mining. |
| |Unit 4: Classification and Prediction: Issues regarding Classification and Prediction – Decision Tree |
| |induction – Bayesian Classification – Back Propagation – Classification Methods – Prediction – Classifiers |
| |accuracy. |
| |Unit 5 : Clustering Techniques: cluster Analysis – Clustering Methods – Hierarchical Methods – Density |
| |Based Methods – Outlier Analysis – Introduction to Advanced Topics: Web Mining , Spatial Mining and |
| |Temporal Mining. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) J. Han and M. Kamber , 2001, Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann, .New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) M. H.Dunham, 2003, Data Mining : Introductory and Advanced Topics , Pearson Education, Delhi.
ii) Paulraj Ponnaiah, 2001, Data Warehousing Fundamentals, Wiley Publishers.
iii) S.N. Sivananda and S. Sumathi, 2006, Data Mining, Thomsan Learning, Chennai.
3. Website, E-learning resources
i) .
ii)
|Title of the Course/ |Mobile Computing |
|Paper | |
|Elective |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 19 B |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the basic concepts of mobile computing |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction - Mobile and Wireless Devices – Simplified Reference Model – Need for Mobile |
| |Computing –Wireless Transmissions –Multiplexing – Spread Spectrum and Cellular Systems- Medium Access |
| |Control – Comparisons. |
| |Unit 2: Telecommunication Systems – GSM – Architecture – Sessions –Protocols – Hand Over and Security – |
| |UMTS and IMT – 2000 – Satellite Systems. |
| |Unit 3: Wireless Lan - IEEE S02.11 – Hiper LAN – Bluetooth – Security and Link Management. |
| |Unit 4: Mobile network layer - Mobile IP – Goals – Packet Delivery – Strategies – Registration – Tunneling|
| |and Reverse Tunneling – Adhoc Networks – Routing Strategies. |
| |Unit 5: Mobile transport layer - Congestion Control – Implication of TCP Improvement – Mobility – Indirect |
| |– Snooping – Mobile – Transaction oriented TCP - TCP over wireless – Performance. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) J. Schiller, 2003, Mobile Communications,2nd edition, Pearson Education, Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) Hansmann, Merk, Nicklous, Stober, 2004, Principles of Mobile Computing, 2nd Edition, Springer (India).
ii) Pahlavan, Krishnamurthy, 2003, Principle of wireless Networks: A unified Approach, Pearson Education, Delhi.
iii) Martyn Mallick, 2004, Mobile and Wireless Design Essentials, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
iv) W.Stallings, 2004, Wireless Communications and Networks, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, Delhi.
|Title of the Course/ |Artificial Intelligence |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 19 C |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the concepts of machine learning. |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction - Intelligent Agents- Problem Solving - by Searching - Informed Search and Exploration|
| |- Constraint Satisfaction Problems - Adversarial Search |
| |Unit 2: Knowledge and Reasoning - Logical Agents - First-Order Logic - Inference in First-Order Logic - |
| |Knowledge Representation |
| |Unit 3: Planning – Planning and Acting in the Real World - Uncertain knowledge and reasoning - Uncertainty |
| |- Probabilistic Reasoning - Probabilistic Reasoning Over Time - Making Simple Decisions - Making Complex |
| |Decisions |
| |Unit 4: Learning - Learning from Observations - Knowledge in Learning - Statistical Learning Methods - |
| |Reinforcement Learning |
| |Unit-5: Communicating, Perceiving, and Acting - Communication - Probabilistic Language Processing - |
| |Perception – Robotics. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, 2003, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight, 1991, Artificial Intelligence, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
ii) Herbert A. Simon, 1998, The Sciences of the Artificial Intelligence, 3rd Edition, MIT Press.
iii) N.J. Nilson, 1983, Principles of AI, Springer Verlag.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i)
Elective -III
|Title of the Course/ | Artificial Neural Networks |
|Paper | |
|Elective |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 20 A |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the fundamental concepts of Artificial Neural Networks |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction to Neural Networks – Basic Concepts of Neural Networks – Inference and Learning – |
| |Classification Models – Association Models – Optimization Models – Self-Organization Models. |
| |Unit 2: Supervised and Unsupervised Learning – Statistical Learning – AI Learning – Neural Network Learning|
| |– Rule Based Neural Networks – Network Training – Network Revision- Issues- Theory of Revision- Decision |
| |Tree Based NN – Constraint Based NN |
| |Unit 3: Incremental learning – Mathematical Modeling – Application of NN- Knowledge based Approaches. |
| |Unit 4: Heuristics- Hierarchical Models – Hybrid Models – Parallel Models – Differentiation Models- |
| |Control Networks – Symbolic Methods- NN Methods. |
| |Unit 5: Structures and Sequences – Spatio-temporal NN – Learning Procedures – Knowledge based Approaches. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) L. Fu, 1994, Neural Networks in Computer Intelligence, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) R. J. Schalkoff, 1997, Artificial Neural Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
ii) Anderson, 2001, An Introduction to Neural Network, PHI, New Delhi.
|Title of the Course/ | Computer Simulation and Modeling |
|Paper | |
|Elective |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 20 B |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the basic concepts of Computer Simulation and Modeling |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction to Simulation -Simulation Examples: Simulation of queuing systems, inventory systems |
| |and other examples - General Principles: Concepts in discrete event system simulation - List Processing. |
| |Unit 2: Programming Languages for Simulation: FORTRAN, GPSS. Simulation of Queueing Systems: Queueing |
| |System Characteristics - Queueing Notation - Transient and Steady-State Behaviour of Queues - Long-Run |
| |Measures of Performance of Queueing Systems - Steady- State Behaviour of Infinite-Population Markovian |
| |Models - Network of Queues. |
| |Unit 3: Random-Number Generation: Properties of Random Numbers - Generation of Pseudo-Random Numbers |
| |- Techniques for Generating Random Numbers - Tests for Random Numbers. Random Variate Generation: |
| |Inverse Transformation Technique:- Uniform Distribution - Exponential Distribution - Weibull |
| |Distribution - Triangular Distribution - Empirical Continuous Distribution - Discrete |
| |Distribution - Direct Transformation for the Normal Distribution - Convolution Method for |
| |Erlang Distribution - Acceptance-Rejection Technique: Poisson Distribution - Gamma |
| |Distribution. |
| |Unit 4: Input Data Analysis: Data Collection - Identifying the Distribution with Data - |
| |Parameter Estimation - Goodness-of- Fit Tests: Chi-Square Test - Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test; Selecting |
| |Input Models without Data - Multivariate and Time-Series Input Models. Verification and Validation|
| |of Simulation Models: Model Building, Verification and Validation - Verification of Simulation Models - |
| |Calibration and Validation of Models:- Face Validity - Validation of Model Assumptions - Validating |
| |Input-Output Transformations - Input-Output Validation using Historical Input Data - Input-Output . |
| |Validation using a Turing Test. |
| |Unit 5: Output Data Analysis: Stochastic Nature of Output Data - Types of Simulation with respect to |
| |Output Analysis - Measures of Performance and their Estimation - Output Analysis for Terminating |
| |Simulations - Output Analysis for Steady-State Simulation |
1. Recommended Texts
(i) J. Banks, J. S.Carson II and B. L. Nelson, 1995, Discrete-Event System Simulation, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) Averill M.Law and W.David Kelton, 1991, Simulation Modeling & Analysis, 2nd Edn., Tata McGraw Hill.
ii) Geoffrey Gardon, 1992, System Simulation, 2nd Edn., Printice Hall of India.
iii) Narsingh Deo, 1979, System Simulation with Digital Computers, Prentice Hall of India.
iv) C.Dennis Pegden, Robert E.Shannon and Randall P.Sadowski, 1995, Introduction to Simulation using SIMAN, 2nd Edn., Tata McGraw-Hill.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i).
|Title of the Course/ |Cryptography |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 20 C |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the basic concepts and for computing related applications. |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Conventional Encryption: Conventional encryption model – DES –RC 5 – Introduction to AES - Random|
| |number generation. |
| |Unit 2: Number Theory: Modular arithmetic – Euler’s theorem – Euclid’s algorithm – Chinese remainder |
| |theorem – Primarily and factorization –Discrete logarithms – RSA algorithm |
| |Unit 3: Public key Cryptography: Principles – RSA algorithm – key management- Diff – Hellman key exchange|
| |Unit 4: Message Authorization and Hash functions: Hash functions-Authentication requirements |
| |–Authentication function- Message authentication codes –Secure Hash algorithms |
| |Unit 5: Digital Signature and Authentication Protocols : Digital Signature-Authentication Protocols |
| |–Digital signature standard. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) Stallings, W., 2005 , Cryptography and Network Security Principles and Practice, Pearson Education, Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman, Mike specimen, Network Security- Private Communication in a public world.
ii) Michael Welsehenbach, 2005, Cryptography in C & C++”, John Wiley.
iii) Bruce sehneier , 2001 Applied Cryptography , John Wiley and sons.
iv) Kailash N.Gupta , Kamlesh N. Agarwala, Pratek A. Agarwala, 2005, Digital signature Network security practices , PHI, New Delhi.
FOURTH SEMESTER
Core:
Project and Viva-Voce
10. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
(FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED)
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER III
CST201 – Computer Oriented Mathematics
Unit-I: Propositions and Compound Propositions - Logical Operations - Truth tables - Tautologies and Contradictions - Logical Equivalence - Algebra of propositions - Conditional and Biconditional Statements - Arguments - Logical Implications - Quantifiers - Negation of Quantified Statements - Basic Counting Principles - Factorial - Binomial Coefficients - Permutations - Combinations - Pigeonhole Principle - Ordered and Unordered partitions.
Unit-II: Order and Inequalities - Mathematical Induction - Division Algorithm - Divisibility - Euclidean Algorithm - Fundamental theorem of Arithmetic - Congruence relation - Congruence Equations - Semigroups - Groups - Subgroups - Normal subgroups - Homomorphisms - rings - Integral Domains - Fields - Polynomials over a Field.
Unit-III: Roots of Equations: Graphical Methods - Bisection Methods -False-Position Method - Fixed-point Iteration - Newton-Raphson Method - Secant Method - Multiple Roots - System of Nonlinear Equations - Roots of Polynomials: Conventional Methods - Mueller's Method - Bairstow's Method.
Unit-IV: Algebraic Equations: Gauss Elimination - Non-linear system of Equations - Gauss-Jordan - LU Decomposition - Matrix Inverse - Error Analysis - Tridiagonal Systems - Cholesky Decomposition - Gauss-Seidel.
Unit-V: Differentiation and Integration: Trapezoidal Rule - Simpson's Rule - Romberg Integration - Gauss Quadrature - Richardson Extrapolation - Derivatives and Integrals for Data with Errors.
Books for Study:
1. Seymour Lipschutz and Marc Lipson - Discrete Mathematics - Second Edition - Tata McGraw Hill Edition - 1999.
2. Steven C. Chopra and Raymond P.Canale - Numerical Methods for Engineers - Third Edition - McGraw Hill International Edition - 1998.
CST203 – Internet and its Applications
Unit-I: Internet Concepts - Internet Services - Types of Accounts - Media for Internet - ISP - TCP/IP and Connection Software - - Disconnecting from the internet.
Dial-up Networking - Setting up and internet Connection - Testing Connection
Unit-II: Contenders - Issues in high-speed Connection - Connecting via ISDN, ADSL and Cable Modem - Intranets - Components of an Intranet - Steps for Creating Intranet - Maintenance - Connecting LAN to Internet.
Unit-III: E-mails - Downloading E-mails - Signatures and Stationery - Web Based E-mail - E-mail tasks - Outlook Express - Sending and Receiving files using Eudora - Outlook Express and Pine - Multiple e-mail accounts - Sending form letters - Formatting e-mail - E-mail mailing lists.
Unit-IV: Forms of chat and Conferencing - Internet Relay Chat (IRC) - Chatting in Microsoft Chat and V.Chat - Starting and managing a channel - Web-based Chat - Direct Chat systems - MUDs, MOOs and mussles - Voice and Video Conferencing.
Unit-V: Elements of web - Browsers - Security and Privacy Issues - Purchasing Products Online with wallet programs - Netscape Navigator and Communicator - Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Books for Study:
1. Margaret Levine Young - Internet - The Complete Reference - Millennium Edition - TMH Edition - 1999.
2. Harley Hahn - The Internet - Complete Reference - Second Edition - TMH Edition.
CST205: Microprocessors
Unit-I: Introduction to micro computers, microprocessors and assembly languages – micro processor architecture and its operations – 8085 MPU – 8085 instruction set and classifications
Unit-II: Writing assembly levels programs – programming techniques such as looping, counting and indexing addressing nodes – data transfer instructions – arithmetic and logic operations – dynamic debugging.
Unit-III: Counters and time delays – hexadecimal counter modulo10 counter – pulse timings for flashing lights – debugging counter and time delay program – stack – subroutine – conditional call and return instructions.
Unit-IV: BCD to binary and binary to BCD conversions – BCD to HEX and HEX to BCD conversions – ASCII to BCD and BCD to ASCII conversions – BCD to seven segment LED code conversions – binary to ASCII and ASCII to binary conversions – multi byte addition – multi byte subtraction – BCD addition – BCD subtraction – multiplication and division.
Unit-V: Interrupt – implementing interrupts – multiple interrupt 8085 – trap – problems on implementing 8085 interrupt – DMA memory interfaces – RAM & ROM – I/O interface – direct I/O memory trapped I/O.
Books for study:
1. R S Gaonkar – Microprocessor architecture – Programming and application with 8085/8080A – Wiley Eastern Limited – 1990
2. A Mathur – Introduction to Microprocessor – III Edition – Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. – 1993
CST207: Programming in C
Unit-I: C fundamentals – character set – identifier and key works – data types – constants – variables – declarations – expressions – statements – arithmetic, unary, relational and logical, assignment and conditional operators – library functions.
Unit-II: Data input/output functions – simple c programs – flow of control – control structures – switch, break and continue, go to statements – comma operator.
Unit-III: Functions – defining, accessing functions – functions prototypes – passing arguments – recursions – storage classes – multi file programs.
Unit-IV: Arrays – defining and processing – passing arrays to functions – multidimensional arrays – arrays and string – structures – passing structures to functions – self referential structures – unions.
Unit-V: Pointers – declarations – passing pointers to functions – operation in pointers – pointer and arrays – arrays of pointers – structures and pointers – files: creating, processing, opening and closing – bit wise operations.
Books for study:
1. Gottfried B S – Programming with C – II Edition TMH Pub Co Ltd.
2. Kanetkar Y – Let us C - BPB Publication.
CST209: Practical – III : C Programming and Microprocessors Lab.
1. Summation of series
a. sin(x)
b. cos(x)
c. exp(x)
2. String manipulations
a. Counting the number of vowels, consonants, words white spaces in a line of text and array of lines.
b. Reverse a string & check for palindrome
c. Sub string detection and count
d. Sub string removal
e. Find and replacing substrings
3. Recursion
a. nPr
b. nCr
c. GCD of two numbers
d. Maximum & minimum
e. Fibonacci sequence
f. Tower of Honoi
4. Matrix manipulation
a. Addition & subtraction
b. Multiplication
c. Transpose
d. Determinant of a matrix
e. Inverse of a Matrix
5. Sorting and searching
a. Insertion sort
b. Bubble sort
c. Selection sort
d. Linear search
e. Binary search
Microprocessors
1. Addition and subtraction
a. 8 bit addition
b. 16 bit addition
c. 8 bit subtraction
d. BCD subtraction
2. Multiplication and division
a. 8 bit multiplication
b. BCD multiplication
c. 8 bit division
3. Sorting and searching
a. searching for an element in a array
b. Sorting in Ascending order
c. Finding largest and smallest elements from an array
d. Reversing array elements
e. Block move
f. Sorting in descending order
4. Code conversion: BCD to HEX and HEX to BCD
5. Application: Traffic signal controller
SEMESTER IV
CST202-Software Engineering
Unit-I: The Product-The Process-Project Management Concepts-Software Projects And Project Metrics
Unit-II: Software Project Planning-Risk Analysis And Management-Project Scheduling And Tracking-Software Quality Assurance.
Unit-III: Software Configuration Management-System Engineering-Analysis Concepts And Principles-Analysis Modeling .
Unit-IV: Design Concepts And Principles-Architectural Designs-User Interface Design.
Unit-V: Component level Design-Software Testing Techniques-Software Testing Strategies-Technical Metrics For Software.
Books for Study:
1. Roger S. Pressman - Software Engineering A Practitioner’s approach – 5th edition - McGraw Hill.
2. Ian Sommerville – Software Engineering - 5th Edition – Addison Wesley.
CST204 - Data Structures
Unit-I: Abstract Data Types – Asymptotic Notations- Complexity Analysis – Arrays – Representation of Arrays – Operations on Arrays - Ordered Lists - Polynomials.
Unit-II : Singly Linked Lists – Circular Linked Lists – Doubly Linked Lists – General Lists – Stacks – Queues – Circular Queues – Evaluation of Expressions .
Unit-III : Trees – Binary Trees – Binary Tree Traversals – Binary Tree Representations – Binary Search Trees – Threaded Binary Trees – Application of Trees (Sets) – Representation of Graphs – Graph Implementation – Graph Traversals- Application of Graph Traversals- Minimum Cost Spanning Trees – Shortest Path Problems .
Unit-IV: Internal Sorting – Optimal Sorting Time – Sorting Large Objects – Sorting with Tapes- Sorting with Disks.
Unit-V: Hashing – AVL Trees - Red-Black Trees – Splay Trees - B-Trees.
Books for study :
1. E.Horowitz, S.Sahni and Mehta – Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++ - Galgotia- 1999.
2. Gregory L.Heileman – Data Structures , Algorithms and Object Oriented Programming – Mc-Graw Hill International Editions – 1996.
CST206 - Computer Graphics
Unit-I: Video Display Devices – Raster Scan Systems – Input Devices – Hard Copy Devices- Graphics Software – Output Primitives- Attributes of Output Primitives.
Unit-II: Two – Dimensional Transformation – Clipping – Window-view port mapping.
Unit-III: User dialogue – Input of Graphical Data- Input Functions- Input Device Parameters- Picture Construction Techniques- Virtual Reality Environments.
Unit-IV: Three Dimensional Concepts – 3D Transformations- 3D Viewing.
Unit-V: Visible-Surface Detection : Back-Face Detection - Depth- Buffer Method – Scan Line Method – A-Buffer Method- Properties of Light – Infinitive Color Concepts- RBG Color Models- Computer Animation.
Books for Study :
1. D.Hearn and M.P.Baker – Computer Graphics- Second Edition – PHI- 1996.
2. W.M.Neumann and R.F.Sproull – Principle of Interactive Computer Graphics- McGraw Hill – 1979.
3. Foley, Van Dan, Feiner, Hughes – Computer Graphics – Addison Wesley – 2000.
CST208: Programming in C++
. Unit-I: Principles of Object Oriented Programming (OOP) – Software Evaluation -- OOP Paradigm – Basic Concepts of OOP – Benefits of OOP – Applications of OOP.
Unit-II: Introduction to C++ -- Tokens – Keywords – Identifiers – Variables – Operators – Manipulators – Expressions and Control Structures – Pointers – Functions – Function prototyping – Parameters Passing in Functions – Values Return by Functions – Inline Functions – Friend and Virtual Functions.
Unit-III: Classes and Objects – Constructors and Destructors -- Operator overloading -- Type Conversions – Type Conversions – Type of Constructors – Function Overloading.
Unit-IV: Inheritance – Types of Inheritance – Virtual Functions and Polymorphism Constructors in inheritance – Mapping Console I/O operations.
Unit-V: Files – File Streams – File operations – File pointer – Error Handling during file operations – Command line arguments.
Books for Study:
1. Stanley Lippmann, Josee Lajoie – C++ Primer – Third Edition – Addison Wesley.
2. Robert Lafore – Object Oriented Programming in Microsoft C++ - Galgotia
CST210 - Practical-IV: Data Structures using C++
1. Implements PUSH,POP operations of stack using arrays.
2. Implements PUSH,POP operations of stack using pointers.
3. Implement add, delete operations of a queue using arrays.
4. Implement add, delete operations of a queue using pointers
5. Conversion of infix to postfix using stack operations.
5. Postfix expression evaluation.
6. Addition of two polynomials using Arrays and Pointers.
7. Polynomial multiplication using singly linked list
8. Creation , Insertion and deletion in doubly linked list.
10.Binary tree traversals (inorder, preorder and post order) using linked list and recursion.
11.Non- recursive inorder traversal
12.Non- recursive preorder traversal
13. Non- recursive postorder traversal
14. Depth first search for graphs using recursion
15.Breadth first search for graphs.
SEMESTER V
CST301 - DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
UNIT I: Advantages and Components of a Database Management Systems – Feasibility Study – Class Diagrams – Data Types – Events – Normal Forms – Integrity – Converting Class Diagrams to Normalized Tables – Data Dictionary.
UNIT II: Query Basics – Computation Using Queries – Subtotals and GROUP BY Command – Queries with Multiple Tables – Subqueries – Joins – DDL & DML – Testing Queries.
UNIT III: Effective Design of Forms and Reports – Form Layout – Creating Forms – Graphical Objects – Reports – Procedural Languages – Data on Forms – Programs to Retrieve and Save Data – Error Handling.
UNIT IV: Power of Application Structure – User Interface Features – Transaction – Forms Events – Custom Reports – Distributing Application – Table Operations – Data Storage Methods – Storing Data Columns – Data Clustering and Partitioning.
UNIT V: Database Administration – Development Stages – Application Types – Backup and Recovery – Security and Privacy – Distributed Databases – Client/Server Databases – Web as a Client/Server System – Objects – Object Oriented Databases – Integrated Applications.
References:
1. G. V. Post – Database Management Systems Designing and Building Business Application – McGraw Hill International edition – 1999.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan – Database Management Systems – WCB/McGraw Hill – 1998.
3. C.J. Date – An Introduction to Database Systems – 7th Edition – Addison Wesley - 2000.
CST303 - Operating Systems
Unit-I: Introduction - Multiprogramming - Time sharing - Distributed system - real-time Systems - I/O structure - Dual-mode operation - Hardware protection - General system architecture - Operating system services - System calls - System programs - System design and implementation. Process Management: Process concept - Concurrent process - scheduling concepts - CPU scheduling
Unit-II: Process Management contd.: Scheduling algorithms, Multiple processors Scheduling - Critical section - Synchronization hardware - Semaphores, classical problem of synchronization, Interprocess communication. Deadlocks: Characterization, Prevention, Avoidance and Detection.
Unit-III: Storage management - Swaping, single and multiple partition allocation - paging - segmentation - pages segmentation, virtual memory - demand paging - page replacement and algorithms, thrashing. Secondary storage management - disk structure - free space management - allocation methods - disk scheduling - performance and reliability improvements - storage hierarchy.
Unit-IV: Files and protection - file system organisation - file operations - access methods - consistency semantics - directory structure organisation - file protection - implementation issues - security - encryption.
Unit-V: Case Studies: MS-DOS and UNIX operating systems.
Books for study:
1. A. Silberschatz and P.B. Galvin - Operating System Concepts - Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
2. A.S. Godbole – Operating Systems – Tata McGraw Hill – 1999.
CST305 - Visual Programming
Unit-I: Customizing a Form - Writing Simple Programs - Toolbox - Creating Controls - Name Property - Command Button - Access Keys - Image Controls - Text Boxes - Labels - Message Boxes - Grid - Editing Tools - Variables - Data Types - String - Numbers.
Unit-II: Displaying Information - Determinate Loops - Indeterminate Loops - Conditionals - Built-in Functions - Functions and Procedures.
Unit-III: Lists - Arrays - Sorting and Searching - Records - Control Arrays - Combo Boxes - Grid Control - Projects with Multiple forms - DoEvents and Sub Main - Error Trapping.
Unit-IV: VB Objects - Dialog Boxes - Common Controls - Menus - MDI Forms - Testing, Debugging and Optimization - Working with Graphics.
Unit-V: Monitoring Mouse activity - File Handling - File System Controls - File System Objects - COM/OLE - automation - DLL Servers - OLE Drag and Drop.
Books for Study:
1. Gary Cornell - Visual Basic 6 from the Ground up - Tata McGraw Hill - 1999.
2. Noel Jerke - Visual Basic 6 (The Complete Reference) - Tata McGraw Hill - 1999.
CST307 Computer Networks
Unit 1: Introduction – Network Hardware – Software – Reference Models – OSI and TCP/IP models – Example networks: Internet, ATM, Ethernet and Wireless LANs - Physical layer - guided transmission media
Unit 2: Wireless transmission - Communication Satellites – Telephones structure –local loop, trunks and multiplexing, switching. Data link layer: Design issues – error detection and correction.
Unit 3: Elementary data link protocols - sliding window protocols – Data Link Layer in the Internet - Medium Access Layer – Channel Allocation Problem – Multiple Access Protocols.
Unit 4: Network layer - design issues - Routing algorithms - Congestion control algorithms – IP protocol – IP Address – Internet Control Protocol.
Unit 5 : Transport layer - design issues - Connection management - Addressing, Establishing & Releasing a connection – Simple Transport Protocol – Internet Transport Protocol (TCP).
1. Recommended Texts
i) A. S.Tanenbaum, 2003, Computer Networks, Fourth Edition, - Pearson Education, Inc, (Prentice hall of India Ltd), Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) B. Forouzan, 1998, Introduction to Data Communications in Networking, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
ii) F. Halsall, 1995, Data Communications, Computer Networks and Open Systems, Addison Wessley.
iii) D. Bertsekas and R. Gallagher, 1992, Data Networks, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi.
iv) Lamarca, 2002, Communication Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i)
CST309 - Practical-V: RDBMS with visual programming Lab.
Students are advised to use the concepts like Data Normalization, Link between table by means of foreign keys and other relevant data base concepts for developing databases for the following problems. The implementation of each problem should have necessary input screen Menu-driven query processing and pleasing reports. The choice or RDBMS is left to the students. Necessary validations must be done after developing database.
1. Library Information Processing.
2. Students Mark sheet processing.
3. Telephone Directory maintenance.
4. Gas booking and delivering system.
5. Electricity Bill Processing.
6. Bank Transactions.
7. Pay roll processing.
8. Personal Information System.
9. Question Database and Conducting quiz.
SEMESTER VI
CST302 - Multimedia Systems
Unit-I: What is Multimedia: Definitions - CD-ROM and the Multimedia Highway - Where to use Multimedia - Introduction to Making Multimedia: The stages of a Project - What You Need - Multimedia Skills and Training: The team - Macintosh and Windows Production Platforms: Macintosh Versus PC - The Macintosh Platform - The Windows Multimedia PC Platform - Networking Macintosh and Windows Computers- Hardware Peripherals: Connection - Memory and Storage Devices - Input Devices - Output Hardware - Communication Devices
Unit-II: Basic Tools: Text Editing and Word Processing Tools - OCR Software - Painting and Drawing Tools - 3-D Modeling and Animation Tools - Image-Editing Tools - Sound Editing Tools - Animation, Video and Digital Movie Tools - Helpful Accessories - Making Instant Multimedia: Linking Multimedia Objects - Office Suites - Word Processors - Spreadsheets - Databases - Presentation Tools. Multimedia Authoring Tools: Types of Authoring Tools - Card-and-Page-Based Authoring Tools - Icon-Based Authoring Tools - Time-Based Authoring Tools - Object-Oriented Authoring Tools - Cross-Platform Authoring Notes
Unit-III: Text: The Power of Meaning - About Fonts and Faces - Using Text in Multimedia - Computers and Text - Font Editing and Design Tools - Hypermedia and Hypertext - Sound: The Power of Sound - Multimedia System Sounds - MIDI Versus Digital Audio - Digital Audio - Making MIDI Audio - Audio File Formats - Working with Sound on the Macintosh - Notation Interchange File Format (NIFF) - Adding Sound to Your Multimedia Project - Toward Professional Sound: The Red Book Standard - Production Tips
Unit-IV: Images: Making Still Images -Color - Image File Formats. Animation: The Power of Motion - Principles of Animation - Making Animations That Work - Video: Using Video - How Video works - Broadcast Video Standards - Integrating Computers and Television - Shooting and Editing Video - Video Tips - Recording Formats - Digital Video.
Unit-V: Planning and Costing : Project Planning - Estimating - RFPs and Bid Proposals - Designing and Producing : Designing - Producing - Content and Talent : Acquiring Content - Using Content Created by Others - Using Content Created for a Project - Using Talent - Delivering : Testing - Preparing for Delivery - Delivering on CD-ROM - Compact Disc Technology - Wrapping It Up - Delivering on the World Wide Web.
Books for Study:
1. Tay Vaughan - Multimedia: Making it Work. - Fourth Edition - Tata McGraw-Hill Edition - 1999.
2. Walterworth John A - Multimedia Technologies and Application - Ellis Horwood Ltd. - London - 1991.
3. John F Koegel Buford - Multimedia Systems - Addison Wesley - First Indian Reprint - 2000.
CST304 - Java Programming
Unit-I: Introduction to Java - Features of Java - Object Oriented Concepts - Lexical Issues - Data Types - Variables - Arrays - Operators - Control Statements.
Unit-II: Classes - Objects - Constructors - Overloading method - Access Control - Static and fixed methods - Inner Classes - String Class - Inheritance - Overriding methods - Using super-Abstract class.
Unit-III: Packages - Access Protection - Importing Packages - Interfaces - Exception Handling - Throw and Throws - Thread - Synchronization - Messaging - Runnable Interface - Inter thread Communication - Deadlock - Suspending, Resuming and stopping threads - Multithreading.
Unit-IV: I/O Streams - File Streams - Applets - String Objects - String Buffer - Char Array - Java Utilities - Code Documentation.
Unit-V: Networks basics - Socket Programming - Proxy Servers - TCP/IP Sockets - Net Address - URL - Datagrams - Working with windows using AWT Classes - AWT Controls - Layout Managers and Menus.
Books for Study:
1. Cay S.Horstmann, Gary Cornell - Core Java 2 Volume I –Fundamentals - Addison Wesley.
2. P. Naughton and H. Schildt - Java2 (The Complete Reference) - Third Edition.
3. K. Arnold and J. Gosling - The Java Programming Language - Second Edition.
CST306 Computer Architecture
Unit-I : Central Processing Unit : General Register and Stack Organization – Instruction Formats – Addressing Modes- Data Transfer and manipulation – Program Control – RISC.
Unit-II : Pipelining – Arithmetic , Instruction and RISC Pipelining- Vector Processing – Array Processors.
Unit-III : Computer Arithmetic- Addition and Subtraction – Multiplication and Division Algorithms – Floating Point and decimal Arithmetic operations.
Unit-IV : Input–Output Organization – Peripheral devices - I/O Interface – Asynchronous Data Transfer – Modes of Transfer – Priority Interrupt - Direct Memory Access – I/O Processor – Serial Communications.
Unit-V : Memory Organization – Memory Hierarchy – Main Memory – Auxiliary Memory- Associative Cache and Virtual Memory - Interconnection Structures - Interprocessor Arbitration.
Books for Study :
1. M.M.Mano – Computer System Architecture – 3 rd Edition – PHI – 1994.
2.J.P.Hayes – Computer System Architecture – McGrawHill – 1988.
CST308 - Object Oriented Analysis and Design
Unit-I: System Development - Object Basics - Development Life Cycle - Methodologies - Patterns - Frameworks - Unified Approach - UML.
Unit-II: Use-Case Models - Object Analysis - Object relations - Attributes - Methods - Class and Object responsibilities - Case Studies.
Unit-III: Design Processes - Design Axioms - Class Design - Object Storage - Object Interoperability - Case Studies.
Unit-IV: User Interface Design - View layer Classes - Micro-Level Processes - View Layer Interface - Case Studies.
Unit-V: Quality Assurance Tests - Testing Strategies - Object orientation on testing - Test Cases - test Plans - Continuous testing - Debugging Principles - System Usability - Measuring User Satisfaction - Case Studies.
Books for Study:
1. Ali Bahrami - Object Oriented Systems Development - McGraw Hill International Edition - 1999.
2. Grady Booch- Object Oriented Analysis and design –Addison Wesley.
CST310 : Practical VI- Java Programming Lab.
Application
1. Finding area and Perimeter of a circle. Use Buffered Reader class.
2. Substring Removal from a String. Use String Buffer Class.
3. Determining the order of numbers generated randomly using Random Class.
4. Implementation of Point Class for Image manipulation.
5. Usage of Calender Class and manipulation.
6. String Manipulation using Char Array.
7. Database Creation for storing e-mail addresses and manipulation.
8. Usage of Vector Classes.
9. Implementing Thread based applications & Exception Handling.
10.Application using synchronization such as Thread based, Class based and synchronized statements.
Applets
11.Working with Frames and various controls.
12. Working with Dialogs and Menus.
13. Working with Panel and Layout.
14. Incorporating Graphics.
15. Working with Colours and Fonts.
SEMESTER VII
CST401:Advanced Java Programming
Unit-I: Servlet overview – the Java web server – your first servlet – servlet chaining – server side includes- Session management – security – HTML forms – using JDBC in servlets – applet to servlet communication.
Unit-II: The software component assembly model – the Java beans development kit – developing beans – notable beans – using infobus – glasgow developments.
Unit-III: EJB architecture- EJB requirements- design and implementation- EJB session beans- EJB entity beans.
Unit-IV: EJB clients- deployment- tips,tricks and traps for building distributed and other systems- implementation and future directions of EJB.
Unit-V:Variable in pearl – pearl control structures and operators – functions and scope.
Books for Study:
1. Karl Moss - Java servlets – second edition– Tata McGraw Hill Edition.
2. Dustin R.Callaway-Inside Servlets - Addison Wesley.
3. Joseph O’Neil - Java Beans Programming –TMH.
4. TomValesky - Enterprise JavaBeans - Addison wesley.
5. Cay S Horstmann & Gary Cornell – Core Java – Vol II Advanced Features - Addison Wesley Pvt. Ltd. Indian Branch.
CST403 – Design and Analysis of Algorithms
Unit 1: Introduction - Definition of Algorithm – pseudocode conventions – recursive algorithms – time and space complexity –big-“oh” notation – practical complexities – randomized algorithms – repeated element – primality testing - Divide and Conquer: General Method - Finding maximum and minimum – merge sort.
Unit 2: Divide and conquer – Quicksort, Selection, Strassen's matrix multiplication – Greedy Method: General Method –knapsack problem - Tree vertex splitting - Job sequencing with dead lines – optimal storage on tapes.
Unit 3: Dynamic Programming: General Method - multistage graphs – all pairs shortest paths – single source shortest paths - String Editing – 0/1 knapsack. Search techniques for graphs – DFS-BFS-connected components – biconnected components.
Unit 4: Back Tracking: General Method – 8-queens - Sum of subsets - Graph Coloring – Hamiltonian cycles. Branch and Bound: General Method - Traveling Salesperson problem.
Unit 5: Lower Bound Theory: Comparison trees - Oracles and advisory arguments - Lower bounds through reduction - Basic Concepts of NP-Hard and NP-Complete problems.
1. Recommended Texts
i) E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and S. Rajasekaran, 1999, Computer Algorithms, Galgotia, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) G. Brassard and P. Bratley, 1997, Fundamentals of Algorithms, PHI, New Delhi.
ii) A.V. Aho, J.E. Hopcroft, J.D. Ullmann, 1974, The design and analysis of Computer Algorithms, Addison Wesley, Boston.
iii) S.E.Goodman and S.T.Hedetniemi, 1977, Introduction to the Design and Analysis of algorithms, Tata McGraw Hill Int. Edn, New Delhi.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i)
CST405 - Web Technologies
Unit 1: Introduction to Javascript – Advantage of Javascript – Javascript Syntax – Datatype – Variable – Array – Operator and Expression – Looping Constructor – Function – Dialog box.
Unit 2: Javascript document object model – Introduction – Object in HTMl – Event Handling – Window Object – Document object – Browser Object – Form Object – Navigator object – Screen object – Build in Object – User defined object – Cookies
Unit 3: Features of C# - C# and .NET framework – Getting started – C# language fundamentals – classes and objects – Inheritance and Polymorphism –Interfaces-Arrays – Indexers and Collections – Strings and Regular Expressions – Handling Exceptions – Delegates and Events.
Unit 4: ASP. NET Language Structure – Page Structure – Page event, Properties & Compiler Directives. HTML server controls – Anchor, Tables, Forms, Files. Basic Web server Controls – Lable, Textbox, Button, Image, Links, Check & Radio button, Hyperlink. Data List Web Server Controls – Check box list, Radio button list, Drop down list, List box, Data grid, Repeater.
Unit 5: Request and Response Objects, Cookies, Working with Data – OLEDB connection class, command class, transaction class, data adaptor class, data set class. Advanced Issues – Email, Application Issues, Working with IIS and page Directives , Error handling. Security – Authentication , IP Address, Secure by SSL & Client Certificates.
1. Recommended Texts
i) I. Bayross, 200, Web Enable Commercial Application Development Using HTML, DHTML, Javascript, Perl CGI, BPB Publications.
ii) G.Buczek, 2002, Developers Guide, TMH.
iii) Jesse Liberty, 2002, Programming C#”, Second Edition, O’Reilly Press.
2. Reference Books
i) J. Jaworski, 1999, Mastering Javascript, BPB Publications.
ii) T. A. Powell, 2002, Complete Reference HTML (Third Edition),Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
iii) Richard Anderson, Professional , Wrox Press Ltd.
iv) Jeffrey Ritcher, 2002, Appplied Microsoft .NET framework Programming, Microsoft Press.
v) Kumar Sanjeev and Shibi Panikkar, Magic of with C#, Firewall Media.
CST407:-Practical – VII: Advanced Java Programming - Lab
BEANS PROGRAMMING
1. Write a quiz applet and use gauge bean to update the score
2. Create a time zone list and retrieve any time which is given with zone using java beans
3. Develop a bean program that display a sequece of images in the form of slide show
4. Create a bean that displays a 3D plot of the following function
Z = f(x,y) = 0.01 *(x^2 – y^2)
5. Create a frame that instantiates the beans registers paints to receive color event notifications from selectors adds the beans to the frame and makes the frame visible
6. Create a bean that displays a pie chart and use pie customizer to update the pie chart
7. Develop a bean that takes date and year and represent it in the local language in the form of a calender For (Eg.) French , Italian etc
SERVLETS PROGRAMMING
1. Write a servlet to display
a. IP address and Port no. of server
b. The host name and address of the computer on which your browser visits
2. Use a servlet as RMI client to enable a method given
3. Using servlet create a form which contain a text area, checkbox, radio button, label and text field with buttons
4. Create a chat program that uses servlets to communicate with 2 machines.
5. Create a servlet that gets the date and time of the system
CST409:Practical –VIII: Web Applications Lab.
1.Write a script to create an array of 10 elements and arrange them in the ascending or descending order.
1. Write a function in Javascript that takes a string and looks at it character by character and perform all the String manipulation..
2. Create a simple calculator which should perform all the mathematical operations.
3. Create a document and add a link to it. Create a new window on that document. When the user moves the mouse over the link , it should load the linked document on it.
4. Create a document that accepts the user’s name in a text field form and displays the same the next time when the user visits the site informing him that he has accessed the site for the second time, and so on.
5. Create a Web form for an online library. This form must be able to accept the Membership Id of the person borrowing a book, the name and ID of the book, and the name of the book’s author. On submitting the form, the user (the person borrowing the book) must be thanked and informed of the date when the book is to be returned. You can enhance the look of the page by using various controls.
6. Use a calendar control in the page to determine the current date (when the book is borrowed) and calculate the due date, which must be three weeks from the current date. Display the due date to the user.
7. Create an array containing the titles of five new movies. Use this array as a data source for a drop down list control. The page must be capable of displaying the selected movie title to the user when the user clicks on the submit button.
8. Create a virtual directory in IIS. Create a global.asax file and include the “Session_Start” and “Session_End” and, “Application_BeginRequest” and “Application_EndRequest” events. Write a simple page and execute it in the browser. What is the output that you get?
9. Create an application. The application must consist of a form that accepts the user’s credentials and validate the same. The user is then allowed to purchase items from the site by filling in a form. The user is finally informed when the purchased goods will be delivered to him/her.
a. Create a single default error page for any errors occurring in the application.
b. Use debugger to debug the application during its development
c. Enable tracing for the application. Display the user entered data in the purchase form as trace information at the bottom of the purchase page.
d. Switch off tracing for the application.
10. Create the Employee information and perform all the validator controls.
Elective – I :CST411 - Parallel Algorithms
Unit-I: Need for parallel computers, Modules of Computation, Analyzing Algorithms, Expressing Algorithms - Broadcast, All sum and selection algorithms on SIMD model - Searching a sorted sequence: EREW, CREW SMSIMD algorithms, Searching a Random sequence on shared memory SIMD, Tree and mesh interconnected computers.
Unit-II: Sorting on a Linear Array, Sorting on a Mesh, Sorting on EREW SIMD computer, MIMD Enumeration sort, MIMD Quick sort. Sorting on other Networks.
Unit-III: Matrix Transposition: Mesh Transpose, Shuffle Transpose, EREW transpose.
Matrix by matrix Multiplication: Mesh multiplication, Cube multiplication. Matrix by vector Multiplication: Linear Array Multiplication, Tree Multiplication.
Unit-IV: Solving Numerical problems, solving systems of Linear equations: An SIMD algorithm, An MIMD algorithm. Finding Roots of Nonlinear Equations: MIMD algorithm. Solving partial Differential Equations, Computing Eigen values.
Unit-V: Solving Graph Theoretical problems, Computing the connectivity matrix. Finding connected components, All-Pairs shortest paths, Traversing combinatorial spaces, sequential tree traversal. The minimal alpha-Beta Tree, MIMD Alpha-Beta algorithm, parallel cutoffs. Storage requirements.
Books for Study:
1. Selim G. AKL - The Design and Analysis of parallel algorithm - Prentice hall.
2. Michael Quinn - Parallel Algorithms - McGraw Hill.
Elective – I : CST413 – Artificial Intelligence
And Expert Systems
Unit-I : Introduction – Evaluation of Artificial Intelligence production Systems- search strategies Hill climbing back tracking graph search ( Algorithm A and A*) properties of A* algorithm , monotone restriction specialised production systems – AO* algorithm.
Unit – II: Searching game trees : Minimax procedure alphabeta pruning – Introduction to predicate calculus Answer extraction – Introduction to Knowledge based systems – Knowledge Processing techniques- Knowledge inference techniques.
Unit – III: Expert System Definition – Various stages in developing expert system- Knowledge representation using sematicness, predicate calculus, frames- scripts- knowledge acquisition techniques- factors to be considered while expert systems.
Unit – IV: Forward Chaining , Backward Chaining- Tools for developing an expert system – Explanation facilities- Meta Knowledge – fuzzy reasoning.
Unit -V: Building various expert systems- case study Dendral, Mycin etc. Introduction to various applications of A.I. Natural Language processing – Natural Language understanding – perception – Learning using neuralnets.
Books for Study:
1. Elaine Rich , Artificial Intelligence McGraw Hill International.
2. P.H.Winston - Artificial Intelligence, Addison wessley.
3. Fredrick Hayes Roth , Donald A Waterman and Doughlas B.Leant (editors) - Building Expert System - Addison wesley - 1983.
References:
1. N.J. Nilson – Spring verlag - Principles of AI - 1983.
2. David W.Rolston - Principles of AI & Expert Systems Developmenet - McGrawHill.
3. Donald A Waterman - A guide to expert systems.
Elective – I : CST415: Systems Software
Unit-I: Introduction – System Sotware – Components of System software Evolution by System software – Model of Computer System; Introduction to software processors.
Unit-II: Assemblers: Elements of Assembly language programming – Overview of the Assembly process – Design of Two-pass Assembler – A single pass Assembler for the IBM PC – Macros and Macro processors.
Unit-III: Compilers: Aspects of compilation – Overview of the compilation process – Programming languages grammers – Scanning – Parsing – Storage allocation – Compilation of Expressions and Control structures – Code optimization – Compiler writing tools, Software processors for Interactive Environments.
Unit-IV: Loaders and Linkage Editors: Loading, linking and Relocation – Program relocatability – Overview of linkage editing – A linkage editor for the IBM PC – Linking for program over-lays.
Unit-V: Software tools: Spectrum of software tools – Text editors – Interpreters and program generators – Debug monitors – Programming environments.
Book for Study:
1. Dhamdhere – Introduction to systems software – Tata Mc-Graw Hill.
Reference:
1. Leland L. Beck – System Software, An Introduction to System Programming” – Addison-Wesley.
SEMESTER VIII
CST402 Unix And Shell Programming
Unit I: INTRODUCTION: File and common commands – Shell – More about files - Directories – Unix system – Basics of file Directories and filenames - Permissions – Inodes – Directory hierarchy - Devices – the grep family – Other filters – the stream editor sed – the awk pattern scanning and processing language – files and good filters.
Unit II: CONCEPTS OF SHELL: Command line structure – Metacharacters – Creating new commands – Command arguments and parameters – program output as arguments – Shell variables – More on I/O redirection – loop in shell programs – Bundle – Setting shell attributes, Shift command line parameters - Exiting a command or the shell, evaluating arguments – Executing command without invoking a new process – Trapping exit codes – Conditional expressions.
Unit III: SHELL PROGRAMMING: Customizing the cal command, Functions of command, While and Until loops – Traps – Catching interrupts – Replacing a file – Overwrite – Zap – Pick command – News command – Get and Put tracking file changes.
Unit IV: FEATURES IN UNIX: Standard input and output – Program arguments – file access – A screen at a time printer – On bugs and debugging – Examples – Zap – pick – Interactive file comparison program – Accessing the environment – Unix system calls – Low level I/O, File system Directories and inodes, Processors, Signal and Interrupts.
Unit V: PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT AND DOCUMENT PREPARATION: Program development – Four function calculator – Variables and error recovery – Arbitrary variable names, Built in functions, Compilation into a machine, Control flow and relational operators, Functions and procedures – Performance evaluation – Ms macro package – Troff level – Tbl and eqn preprocessors – Manual page – Other document preparation.
Book for Study:
1. Brian W. Kernighan, Rob Pike - The UNIX Programming Environment - Prentice Hall of India(1984).
References:
1. Steven Earhart - The UNIX System for MSDOS Users - Galgotia book source P. Ltd. (1990).
2. Stefen Prata - Advanced UNIX – A Programmer Guide.
CST404: Distributed Databases
Unit–I: Features of Distributed versus Centralized Databases – Why Distributed Databases – Distributed Database Management Systems (DDBMSs)- Review of Databases – Review of Computer Networks-Levels of Distribution Transparency- Reference Architecture for Distributed Databases – Types of Data Fragmentation – Distribution Transparency for read-only Applications – Distribution transparency for Update Applications – Distributed Database Access Primitives – Integrity Constraints in Distributed Databases - A Framework for Distributed Database Design – The Design of Database Fragmentation – The Allocation of Fragments.
Unit–II: Equivalence Transformations for Queries – Transforming Global Queries into Fragment Queries – Distributed Grouping and Aggregate Function Evaluation – Parametric Queries -Optimization of Access Strategies - A Framework for Query Optimization – Join Queries – General Queries. A Framework for Transaction Management – Supporting Atomicity of Distributed Transactions – Concurrency Control for Distributed Transactions – Architectural Aspects of Distributed Transactions
Unit–III: Foundations of Distributed Concurrency Control – Distributed Deadlocks – Concurrency Control Based on Timestamps – Optimistic Methods for Distributed Concurrency Control - Reliability – Basic Concepts Nonblocking Commitment Protocols – Reliability and Concurrency Control – Determining a Consistent View of the Network – Detection and Resolution of Inconsistency – Checkpoints and Cold Restart - Distributed Database Administration – Catalog Management in Distributed Databases – Authorization and Protection.
Unit–IV: Distributed object database management systems – Fundamental object concepts and Models – Object – Abstract Data Types – Composition (Aggregation) – Class – Collection – Subtyping and Inheritance. – Object Distribution Design – Horizontal Class Partitioning – Vertical Class Partitioning – Path Partitioning – Class Partitioning Algorithms – Allocation – Replication – Alternative Client / Server Architectures – Cache Consistency – Object Identifier Management – Pointer Swizzling Object Migration – Distributed Object Storage – Object Query Processor Architectures – Query Processing Issues – Query Execution – Correctness Criteria – Transaction Models and Object Structures – Transactions Management in Object DBMSs – Transactions as Objects – Conclusion – Bibliographic Notes – Exercises.
Unit–V: Parallel Database Systems – Database Server Approach – Database Servers and Distributed Databases – Parallel System Architectures – Objectives – Functional Aspects – Parallel Data Processing – Parallel Query Optimization – Data Placement – Query Parallelism – Parallel Execution Problems – Initialization – Interferences and Convoy Effect – Load Balancing – Parallel Execution for Hierarchical Architecture – Problem Formulation – Basic Concepts – Load Balancing Strategy – Performance Evaluation – Conclusion – Bibliographic Notes – Exercises
Books for Study:
1. Stefano Ceri, Giuseppe Pelagatti - Distributed Databases Principles &Systems- McGraw-Hill.
2. M.Tamer Ozsu, Patrick Valduriez - Distributed database systems- Prentice Hall-Second Edition.
CST406: E-Commerce
Unit-I: Overview of electronic commerce: introduction-definition of electronic commerce-potential benefits of electronic commerce-internet and www as enablers of electronic commerce-impact of electronic commerce on business models-electronic commerce security-organization of topics-implications for the accounting. Electronic commerce and the role of independent third parties: introduction-consulting practices and accountants-independence-cpa vision problem- new assurance services identified by the aicpa-impact of Electronic commerce on the traditional assurance function-third party Assurance of web based electronic commerce-implications for the accounting. Regulatory environment: introduction-cryptography issues-privacy issues-web linking-domain name dispuits-internet sales tax-electronic agreement and digital signature – Internet service providers and international libel laws-implications for the accounting.
Unit-II: Edi electronic commerce and the internet: introduction-traditional Edi system-data transfer and standards-financial Edi-Edi systems and the internet-impact of Edi internet applications on the accounting profession. Risks of insecure system: introduction-overview of risks associated with internet transactions-internet associated risk- intranet associated risk-social engineering-risks associated with business transactions- risks associated with confidentially maintained archival-Master file and reference data- risks associated with virus and malicious-implications of the accounting.
Risks management: introduction- control weekness vs control risks – Risk management paradigm – disaster recovery plans- Implications of the accounting.
Unit-III: Internet security standards:-introductions- standard setting issues and Committiees - security committiees and organization - security protocols and languages-messaging protocols –secure electronic payments and protocols-the role of accountants in internet related standard setting process. Cryptography and authentication: introduction-message security issues- Encryption techniques-key management-additional authentication methods-additional non repudiation techniques- implications of the accounting .
Unit-IV: Firewalls: introduction – firewall defined – TCP/IP-open system interconnect (OSI)-components of firewall-typical functionality of firewalls- network topology-securing the firewall-factors to consider in firewall design – in-house solutions Vs commercial fire wall software-limitations of security prevention provided by firewall – Implications of the accounting. Introduction-the set protocol – magnetic strip cards-smart cards-electronic check-electronic cash- implications of the accounting.
Unit-V: Intelligent agent: introduction-definition of intelligent agent-capabilities of intelligent agent-level of agent sophistication-agent societies- intelligent agents and electronic commerce-online information Chain - limitations of agents- implications of the accounting. Web based marketing: introduction-the scope of marketing-business marketing and information technology-strategy congruence-the four ps applied to internet marketing – the fifth “P”personalization- in ternet marketing techniques-online adv. mechanisms –web site design issues- Intelligent agent and their impacts on marketing techniques- Implications of the accounting.
Books for Study:
1. Marilyn Greenstein, Todd M Feinman - Electronic Commerce - Tata McGraw Hill - 2000.
2. Kalakota & Whinston – Frontiers of Electronic Commerce – 5th Indian Reprint – Addison Wesley – 2000.
CST408: Information Security
Unit 1: Introduction: Security- Attacks- Computer criminals- Method of defense Program Security: Secure programs- Non-malicious program errors- Viruses and other malicious code- Targeted malicious code- Controls against program threats.
Unit 2 : Operating System Security: Protected objects and methods of protection- Memory address protection- Control of access to general objects- File protection mechanism- Authentication: Authentication basics- Password- Challenge-response- Biometrics.
Unit 3 : Database Security: Security requirements- Reliability and integrity- Sensitive data- Interface- Multilevel database- Proposals for multilevel security.
Unit 4 : Security in Networks: Threats in networks- Network security control- Firewalls- Intrusion detection systems- Secure e-mail- Networks and cryptography- Example protocols: PEM- SSL- Ipsec.
Unit 5 : Administrating Security: Security planning- Risk analysis- Organizational security policies- Physical security - Legal- Privacy- and Ethical Issues in Computer Security - Protecting programs and data- Information and law- Rights of employees and employers- Software failures- Computer crime- Privacy- Ethical issues in computer society- Case studies of ethics.
1. Recommended Texts
1. C. P. Pfleeger, and S. L. Pfleeger, Security in Computing, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2003
2. Matt Bishop, Computer Security: Art and Science, Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Reference Books
1. Stallings, Cryptography And Network Security: Principles and practice, 4th Edition, 2006
2. Kaufman, Perlman, Speciner, Network Security, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2003
3. Eric Maiwald, Network Security : A Beginner’s Guide, TMH, 1999
4. Macro Pistoia, Java Network Security, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 1999
5. Whitman, Mattord, Principles of information security, Thomson, 2nd Edition, 2005
CST410: Practical – IX: Unix Lab
Students can refer the following book for further details.
Charles Crowley - Operating Systems ( A Design Oriented Approach) - TMH - 1998.
1. Inter Process Communication (IPC) using Message Queues.
2. IPC using pipes.
3. Implementation of wait and signal using counting semaphores.
4. Implementation of wait and signal using binary semaphores.
5. Atomic Counter update problem.
6. Counting Semaphores at the user level using binary semaphores.
7. Signaling processes.
8. Deadlock detection (for processes passing messages)
9. Process Scheduling: FCFS
10.Process Scheduling: Least Frequently Used.
11.Process Scheduling: Round Robin.
12.Producer-Consumer problem with limited buffers.
13.Dining-Philosopher Problem.
14.Reader-Writer problem.
15.Two Process Mutual Exclusion.
Elective –II - CST412: Software Project Management
Unit-I: Introduction to Software Project Management- Software project versus other types of project- problems- management control- Stakeholders- Requirement Specification – Information and control in organizations Introduction to step wise project planning- Select-identify scope and objectives- identify project infrastructure- Analyse project characteristics- products and activities- Estimate effort for each activity- Identify activity risks- Allocate resources- Review/ publicize plan- Execute plan and lower levels of planning. Project evaluation- Introduction – Strategic assessment- technical assessment- cost benefit analysis- cash flow forecasting- cost- benefit evaluation techniques- risk evaluation
Unit-II: Selection of an appropriate project approach- choosing technologies- technical plan contents list- choice of process models- structured methods-rapid application development- waterfall model- v-process model-spiral model- software prototyping- ways of categorizing prototypes- tools- incremental delivery- selecting process model - Software effort estimation- introduction- where-problems with over and under estimates- basis for software estimating- software effort estimation technique- expert judgement- Albercht function point analysis- Function points Mark II- Object points- procedural code oriented approach- COCOMO. Activity Planning- Objectives- Project schedules- projects and activities- sequencing and scheduling activities- network planning models- formulating a network model- using dummy activities- representing lagged activities- adding time dimension- forward pass- backward pass- identifying the critical path- Activity float- shortening project duration – identifying critical activities-precedence networks
Unit-III: Risk Management- nature of risk- managing- identification-analysis- reducing-evaluating- z values. Resource allocation- nature of resources- requirements-scheduling- critical paths- counting the cost-resource schedule- cost schedule- scheduling sequence. Monitoring and control- creating the frame work- collecting the data- visualizing the progress- cost monitoring-earned value- prioritizing monitoring-Change control.
Unit-IV: Managing contracts- types of contract- stages in contract placement- terms of a contract-contract management- acceptance. Managing people and organizing teams- organizational behaviour background- selecting the right person for the job- instruction in the best methods-motivation- decision making-leadership-organizational structures. Software quality- importance- defining –ISO9126- practical measures- product versus process quality management- external standards-techniques to help enhance software quality
Unit-V: Small projects- some problems- content of a project plan. PRINCE 2- an overview-BS6079:1996- an overview - Euro method- an overview
Books for Study:
1. Bob Hughes and Mike Cotterell – Software project management-second edition- McGraw Hill.
2. Walker Royce - Software Project Management - Addison Wesley.
Elective II - CST414: Fuzzy Logic
Unit-I: Introduction – Classical sets and Fuzzy Sets – Classical sets – fuzzy sets – sets as points in hyper cubes – classical relations and fuzzy relations – Cartesian product – crisp relations – fuzzy relations – tolerance and equivalence relations – fuzzy tolerance and equivalence relations – Value assignments.
Unit-II: Membership functions – Features of the membership functions – standard forms and boundaries – Fuzzification – Membership value assignments – Fuzzy to crisp conversions – Lambda cuts for fuzzy sets – Lambda cuts for fuzzy relations – Defuzzification methods – Fuzzy arithmetic, numbers, vectors and the extension principle – Extension principle – Fuzzy numbers – Interval Analysis in arithmetic – Approximate methods of extension – Fuzzy vectors.
Unit-III: Classical logic and fuzzy logic – Classical predicate logic – fuzzy logic – approximate reasoning – fuzzy tautologies, contradictions, equivalence and logical proofs – other forms of the implication operation – other forms of the composition operation – Fuzzy rule based system – natural language – linguistic hedges – rule based systems – graphical techniques of inference.
Unit- IV: Fuzzy nonlinear simulation – fuzzy relational equations – partitioning – nonlinear simulation using fuzzy rule based systems – fuzzy associative memories (FAMs) – Fuzzy decision making – fuzzy synthetic evaluation – fuzzy ordering – preference and consensus – multiobjective decision making - fuzzy Bayesian decision method – decision making under fuzzy states and fuzzy actions .
Unit-V: Fuzzy classification – classification by equivalence relations – cluster analysis – cluster validity – c-Means clustering – classification metric – hardening the fuzzy c-Partition – similarity relations from clustering – Fuzzy pattern recognition – feature analysis – partitions of the feature space- single sample identification - multi feature pattern recognition – image processing – syntactic recognition.
Book for Study:
1. Timothy J Ross - Fuzzy Logic With Engineering Applications - McGraw Hill International Editions – Electrical Engineering Series.
Elective –II: CST416 – Computer Simulation and System Modeling
Unit-I: Introduction to Simulation: Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Areas of Application – Systems and System Environment- Components of a System – Discrete and Continuous System – Model of a System – Types of Models – Discrete- Event System Simulation – Steps in a Simulation Study: Simulation Examples. Programming Languages for Simulation: FORTRAN, GPSS, SIMAN, SIMSCRIPT, SLAM and MODSIM III.
Unit-II: Statistical Models in Simulation: Useful Statistical Models- Discrete Distributions – Continuous Distributions-Poisson Process – Empirical Distributions. Simulation of Manufacturing and Material Handling Systems : Modeling of Manufacturing Systems- Models of Material Handling Systems – Goals and Performance measures- Issues in simulating Manufacturing and Material Handling Systems- Simulators and Languages for Manufacturing and Material Handling Systems. Simulation of Queueing Systems: Queueing System Characteristics- Queueing Notation – Transient and Steady – State behavior of queues- Long-Run-Measures of Performance of Queuing Systems- Steady – State – Behavior of Infinite Population Markovian Models- Network of Queues.
Unit-III: Random Number Generation: Properties of Random Numbers- Generation of Pseudo Random Numbers- Techniques for Generating Random Numbers- Tests for Random Numbers. Random Variate Generation: Inverse Transformation Technique- Uniform Distribution – Exponential Distribution – Weibull Distribution- Triangular Distribution- Empirical Continous Distribution – Discrete Distribution – Direct Transformation for the Normal Distribution – Convolution Method for Erlang Distribution – Acceptance-Rejection Technique: Pisson Distribution- Gamma Distribution.
Unit-IV: Input Data Analysis : Data Collection – Identifying the Distribution with Data- Parameter Estimation-Goodness-of-Fit Tests:- Chi-Square Test- Kolmogrov- Smirnov Test; Selecting Input Models without Data – Multivariate and Time Series Input Models. Verification and Validation of Simulation Models: Model Building , Verification and Validation – Verification of Simulation Models- Calibration and Validation of Models:- Face Validity- Validation of Model Assumptions- Validating Input-Output Transformations- Input-Output Validation using a Turing Test.
Unit-V: Output Data Analysis : Stochastic Nature of Output Data – Types of Simulation with respect to output Analysis- Measures of Performance and their Estimation – Output Analysis for Terminating Simulations- Output Analysis for Steady-State Simulations. Comparison and Evaluation of Alternative System Designs: Comparison of Two System Designs – Comparison of Several System Designs – Statistical Models for Estimating the Effect of Design Alternatives – Metamodeling.
Books for Study:
1. Jerry Banks , John S.Carson, II and Barry L.Nelson - ‘Discrete-Event System Simulation’ - 2nd Edition. - Printice Hall - 1995.
2. Averill M. Law and W. David Kelton - Simulation Modeling and Analysis – TMH - 2000.
SEMESTER IX
CST501 - Network Programming
Unit-I: Overview of ActiveX Scripting – Java Scripting- Stand-Alone Scripts- ActiveX Controls- Creating ActiveX Controls.
Unit-II: ActiveX Documents- ActiveX Document Architecture- Creating ActiveX Documents.
Unit-III: URL Monikers- Hyperlinking- Hyperlink Interface- Working with URL Monikers- Overview of ISAPI- ISAPI Extension- ISAPI Filter.
Unit-IV: Designing IIS Applications - Building IIS Applications- Building Data Driven
DHTML Applications.
Unit-V: ActiveX Documents - Technology – Migration Wizard- Modifying Code- Launching and Testing Document- Testing the DLL.
Books for Study:
1. John Paul Muller – Visual C++ 5 from the GroundUp- Tata McGraw Hill Edition – 1998 (For first three units)
2. Noel Jerke – Visual Basic 6 (The Complete Reference) – Tata McGraw Hill Edition –1999(For fourth and fifth units)
CST503: Software Testing
Unit 1: Introduction: Purpose – Productivity and Quality in Software – Testing Vs Debugging – Model for Testing – Bugs – Types of Bugs – Testing and Design Style.
Unit-2: Flow/Graphs and Path Testing – Achievable paths – Path instrumentation – Application – Transaction Flow Testing Techniques – Data Flow Testing Strategies
Unit 3: Domain Testing: Domains and Paths – Domains and Interface Testing – Linguistic –Metrics – Structural Metric – Path Products and Path Expressions.
Unit-4: Syntax Testing – Formats – Test Cases – Logic Based Testing – Decision Tables – Transition Testing – States, State Graph, State Testing.
Unit-5 : Verification and Validation – Fundamental Tools - Levels of Testing – Testing Approaches – Types of Testing – Test Plan – Software Testing Tools: WinRunner – Silk Test
1. Recommended Texts
i) B. Beizer , 2003, Software Testing Techniques, II Edn., DreamTech India, New Delhi.
ii) K.V.KK. Prasad , 2005, Software Testing Tools, DreamTech. India, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) I. Burnstein, 2003, Practical Software Testing, Springer International Edn.
ii) E. Kit, 1995, Software Testing in the Real World: Improving the Process, Pearson Education, Delhi.
iii) R.Rajani, and P.P.Oak, 2004, Software Testing, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i) -link
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
Data Warehousing and Data Mining
Unit 1: Introduction: Data Mining tasks – Data Mining versus Knowledge Discovery in Data bases – Relational databases – Data warehouses – Transactional databases – Object oriented databases – Spatial databases – Temporal databases – Text and Multimedia databases – Heterogeneous databases - Mining Issues – Metrics – Social implications of Data mining.
Unit 2: Data Preprocessing: Why Preprocess the data – Data cleaning – Data Integration – Data Transformation – Data Reduction – Data Discretization.
Unit 3: Data Mining Techniques: Association Rule Mining – The apriori Algorithm – Multilevel Association Rules – Multidimensional Association Rules – Constraint Based Association Mining.
Unit 4: Classification and Prediction: Issues regarding Classification and Prediction – Decision Tree induction – Bayesian Classification – Back Propagation – Classification Methods – Prediction – Classifiers accuracy.
Unit 5 : Clustering Techniques: cluster Analysis – Clustering Methods – Hierarchical Methods – Density Based Methods – Outlier Analysis – Introduction to Advanced Topics: Web Mining , Spatial Mining and Temporal Mining.
1. Recommended Texts
ii) J. Han and M. Kamber , 2001, Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann, .New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
iv) M. H.Dunham, 2003, Data Mining : Introductory and Advanced Topics , Pearson Education, Delhi.
v) Paulraj Ponnaiah, 2001, Data Warehousing Fundamentals, Wiley Publishers.
vi) S.N. Sivananda and S. Sumathi, 2006, Data Mining, Thomsan Learning, Chennai.
3. Website, E-learning resources
i) .
ii)
CST507-Practical–X-Network Programming Lab
1. Working with Java Scripts.
2. Creating ActiveX Controls.
3. OLE Server.
4. OLE Container.
5. Working with URL Monikers.
6. Creating an ISAPI Extension.
7. Creating an ISAPI Filter.
8. Building IIS Application.
9. Data- Driven DHTML Application.
10. ActiveX Documents.
Elective –III: CST509-TCP/IP Networks
Unit-I: TCP/IP layering- Link Layer- ethernet and IEEE – Trailer encapsulation- SLIP- Address Resolution Protocol- example- ARP cache- ARP packet format- ARP examples- proxy ARP- Internet control message protocol- Ping program- Trace route program- introduction – operation- LAN output- WAN output- IP source routing option.
Unit-II: IP routing- introduction- routing principles- ICMP host and network unreachable errors- ICMP redirect errors- ICMP router discovery messages- Dynamic routing protocols- Unix routing daemons- RIP : Routing Information protocol- OSPF- BGP- CIDR User datagram Protocol: - UDP header- UDP checksum- example- IP fragmentation- Determining the path MTU using Traceroute- Maximum UDP datagram size- ICMP Source Quench error- UDP server design – Broadcasting and multicasting- Internet Group Management Protocol- example
Unit-III: The domain name system- message format- Pointer queries- Resource records- Caching- TFTP: Trivial File Transfer Protocol- example – security- Bootstrap Protocol- BOOTP Packet format- Server design- Through a router- vendor specific information.
Transmission Control Protocol – TCP services- TCP header- TCP connection establishment and termination- Timeout of connection establishment- Maximum segment size- TCP half close- State Transition diagram- Reset segments- TCP server design. TCP Interactive dataflow- interactive input- delayed acknowledgements- Nagle algorithm- Window size advertisements - TCP Bulk data flow- Normal data flow- Sliding windows- window size – push flag- Slow start- Bulk Data throughput- Urgent mode.
Unit-IV: TCP timeout and retransmission- example- RTT example- congestion example- Fast retransmit and Fast recovery algorithms- ICMP errors- TCP persist timer- Silly window syndrome- TCP keep alive timer- example-TCP futures and performance-PAWS- T/TCP. SNMP- Simple Network Management Protocol- Object identifies- Instance Identification – Management Information Base – Additional Examples.
Unit V: Rlogin Protocol – Rlogin Examples – Telnet Protocol – Telnet Examples – File Transfer Protocol – FTP Examples – Simple Mail Transfer Protocol – SMTP Examples – SMTP Futures.
Books for Study:
1. W.Richard Stevens - TCP/IP - Illustrated Volume 1 - The Protocols –Addison Wesley.
2. Behrouz A.forouzan - TCP/IP – TMH.
Elective – III: CST-511 - Artificial Neural Networks
Unit I : Introduction to Neural Networks – Basic Concepts of Neural Networks – Inference and Learning – Classification Models – Association Models – Optimization Models – Self-Organization Models.
Unit II : Supervised and Unsupervised Learning – Statistical Learning – AI Learning – Neural Network Learning – Rule Based Neural Networks – Network Training – Network Revision- Issues- Theory of Revision- Decision Tree Based NN – Constraint Based NN.
Unit III : Incremental learning – Mathematical Modeling – Application of NN- Knowledge based Approaches.
Unit IV: Heuristics- Hierarchical Models – Hybrid Models – Parallel Models – Differentiation Models- Control Networks – Symbolic Methods- NN Methods.
Unit V: Structures and Sequences – Spatio-temporal NN – Learning Procedures – Knowledge based Approaches.
Books for Study:
1. Limin Fu - Neural Networks in Computer Intelligence – McGraw Hill International Edition – 1994.
2. Robert J Schalkoff – Artificial Neural Networks – McGraw Hill – 1997.
Elective- III: CST513 - Windows Programming
Unit-I : Windows Fundamentals – Programming Concepts and Vocabulary for Windows – Windows Development Tools – Resource Information.
Unit-II : Application Framework- Project Utility – Writing Windows Programming (Procedure Oriented) – Pie-chart Application.
Unit-III : MFC Library – MFC Design Considerations – Key features of MFC Library – C Object – Simple Application and Template- Drawing in Client Area- Fourier Series application with Resources- Bar Chart with Resources.
Unit-IV : Graph Applications – Word Processor Applications – OLE Features and Specifications - Container Application.
Unit-V: Active X Controls – Create simple Active X Controls with MFC – Customizing Controls – COM – DHTML- ATL vs. ActiveX.
Books for Study :
1. C.H.Pappas and W.H.Murray- Visual C++ 6 (The Complete Reference) Tata McGraw Hill Edition – 1999.
2. Lars Klander - Core Visual C++ 6 –Addison wesley- First Indian reprint – 2000.
3. Herbert Schildt – Windows 98 Programming from the GroundUp – Tata McGraw Hill Edition – 1999.
Elective –IV:-CST515- CAD/CAM
Unit-I: Introduction-CAD/CAM Contents and Tools – History of CAD/CAM Development - CAD/CAM Market Trends – Definition of CAD/CAM Tools – Industrial Look at CAD/CAM – Book Approach – Book Organization. CAD/CAM Hardware – Introduction – Types of Systems - CAD/CAM Systems Evaluation Criteria – Input Devices – Output Devices – Hardware Integration and Networking – Hardware Trends.
Unit-II: CAD/CAM Software – Introduction – Graphics Standards – Basic Definitions – Modes of Graphics Operations – User Interface – Software Modules – Modeling and Viewing – Software Documentation – Software Development – Efficient Use of CAD/CAM Software – Software Trends. Microcomputer-Based CAD/CAM – Introduction – General Features – System Implementation – Hardware Components and Configuration – Micro-Based CAD Software – Customizing the Software – File Translation – Operating Systems – Mechanical Applications – MicroCAD Trends – Product Distribution Trends.
Unit-III: Types and Mathematical Representations of Curves – Introduction – WireFrame Models – WireFrame Entities – Curve Representation – Parametric Representations of Analytic Curves – Parametric Representation of Synthetic Curves – Curve Manipulations – Design and Engineering Applications.
Unit-IV: Types and Mathematical Representations of Surfaces – Introduction – Surface Models – Surface Entities - Surface Representation – Parametric Representation of Analytic Surfaces – Parametric Representation of Synthetic Surfaces – Surface Manipulations – Design and Engineering Applications. Types and Mathematical Representations of Solids – Introduction – Solid Models – Solid Entities – Solid Representation – Fundamentals of Solid Modeling – Half-spaces – Boundary Representation (B-rep) – Constructive Solid Geometry (CSG) – Sweep Representation – Analytic Solid Modeling (ASM).
Unit-V: CAD/CAM Data Exchange – Introduction – Evolution of Data Exchange Format – IGES – PDES. TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL GRAPHICS CONCEPTS: Geometric Transformations – Introduction – Transformations of Geometric Models – Mappings of Geometric Models – Inverse Transformations and Mappings – Projections of Geometric Models – Design and Engineering Applications.
Book for Study:
1. Ibrahim Zeid - CAD/CAM Theory and Practice - Tata McGraw-Hill Edition -2000.
Elective – IV: CST517 - Distributed Computing
Unit-I: Hardware Concepts - Switched Multiprocessor - Bus-based multicomputers - Switched Multicomputers - Software concepts - Network Operating Systems and NFS - Time Distributed Systems. Design Issues: Transparency - Flexibility - Reliability - Performance and scalability.
Unit-II: Communications in distribute systems - The Client/Server Model - Blocking versus unbuffered primitives - Implementation of Client/Server model.
Unit-III: Synchronization in distributed systems - Clock synchronization - Mutual exclusion - Election algorithms - Atomic transactions - Dead lock distributed system - Threads - Thread usage and implementation of thread packages - Processor allocation.
Unit-IV: Distributed File System: File Service interface - Semantics of file sharing - Distributed file system - Implementation of new trends in distributed file system.
Unit-V: Distributed databases: Distributed DBMS Architecture - Sorting Data in a Distributed DBMS - Distributed Catalog Management - Distributed query processing - Updating distributed data - Distributed transaction management - Distributed Concurrency control - Recovery.
Book for Study:
1. A.S. Tanenbaum - Modern Operating Systems - Prentice Hall.
Elective – IV: CST519:-Image Processing
Unit 1: Introduction – steps in image processing, Image acquisition, representation, sampling and quantization, relationship between pixels. – color models – basics of color image processing.
Unit 2: Image enhancement in spatial domain – some basic gray level transformations – histogram processing – enhancement using arithmetic , logic operations – basics of spatial filtering and smoothing.
Unit 3: Image enhancement in Frequency domain – Introduction to Fourier transform: 1- D, 2 –D DFT and its inverse transform, smoothing and sharpening filters.
Unit 4: Image restoration: Model of degradation and restoration process – noise models – restoration in the presence of noise- periodic noise reduction.. Image segmentation: Thresholding and region based segmentation.
Unit 5 : Image compression: Fundamentals – models – information theory – error free compression –Lossy compression: predictive and transform coding. JPEG standard.
1. Recommended Texts
i) R.C. Gonzalez, R.E.Woods, 2002, Digital Image processing, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education.
2. Reference Books
i) Anil K. Jain, 1994, Fundamentals of Digital image Processing, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
ii) Pratt. W.K., Digital Image Processing, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons.
iii) Rosenfled A. & Kak, A.C, 1982, Digital Picture Processing, vol .I & II, Academic Press.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i)
SEMESTER X
CST502 - Project
Each student shall carry out an individual project for the full semester in an IT or related industry or in the department and a report of work done shall be submitted.
11. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN ELECTRONIC MEDIA
SYLLABUS
Semester III
Core Paper – 9 - Communication Research Methods-I
Unit 1: Fundamentals of Social Research
Unit 2: Varieties of Research Designs
Unit 3: Social Measurement & Statistical Techniques
Unit 4: Qualitative Research Approaches
Unit 5: Data Analysis & Interpretation
Core Paper – 10 Film Studies
Unit 1: Film theories, film aesthetics and film genres
Unit 2: Major film movements (German expressionism, French new wave, Italian neorealism, Indian new wave and Soviet montage)
Unit 3: History of early cinema with special reference to India
Unit 4: The history of political cinema and the dynamics of the cinema-society interface in Tamil Nadu
Unit 5: Film analysis techniques
Core Paper -11 Radio Production
Unit 1: Basics of Radio Programming
Unit 2: Formats and style of Radio Production
Unit 3: Advanced Radio Production –Digital Techniques
Unit 4: Radio Organization and Production Management
Unit 5: Hands on Training
Elective - 5
Technical Communication
Unit1 Areas of technical communication
Unit2 Tools of the trade and the requirements of the profession.
Unit3 Principles of technical report and manual writing
Unit4 Visual design strategies for technical communication
Unit5 Organizing ideas and developing persuasive skills for technical communication
Elective – 6
Public Relations and Corporate Communication
Unit 1: Introduction to PR
Unit 2: PR Process and Practice
Unit 3: Stake holder Communication
Unit 4: Advanced PR
Unit 5: Ethics and Research
Core Paper – 12 Communication Research Methods - II
Unit 1: Dissertation Writing-Research Project Management
Unit 2: Research Design-Mixed Methodologies
Unit 3: Qualitative Research Approaches- Interpretive Paradigms
Unit 4: Quantitative and Qualitative Data Analysis & Interpretation
Unit 5: Quantitative & Qualitative Content Analysis
Core Paper – 13 Cross Cultural Communication
Unit 1: The contexts of cross-cultural communication
Unit 2: Principles of cross-cultural communication
Unit 3: Theories of cross-cultural communication
Unit 4 : The role of ‘cultural distance,’ ‘cultural identity’-cultural other’ in cross- cultural communication
Unit 5: Cross cultural communication in the age of globalization
Core Paper – 14 Research Project
Core Paper – 15 Specialization (Video Magazine)
Core Paper – 16 Media Practice (Internship-II)
Elective -7
Media Analysis Techniques
Unit 1: Approaches to Media Analysis
Unit 2: Visual Persuasion Techniques
Unit 3: Media Aesthetics
Unit 4: Analyzing Media Analysis
Unit 5: Cases Studies and Exercises in media analysis
12. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN FOOD SCIENCE NUTRITION AND DIETETICS
THIRD SEMESTER
PAPER: IX - ADVANCED HUMAN NUTRITION – MACRO NUTRIENTS
Time: 6 Hrs
Credit: 5
PRE – REQUISITES:
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND,B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics / PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE:
To enable the students to Understand the relationship between lipid, carbohydrate, protein and mineral metabolism.
To learn about the therapeutic uses of carbohydrates and the role of fat in CHD’s.
To get insights in the inborn errors of metabolism of few amino acids.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT I:
Energy- Historical review of energy metabolism, energy from carbohydrates, fats and proteins – current research studies. Estimation of total energy requirements (BMR, REE and physical cost of activities)
Protein – Historical review of protein metabolism, amino acid patterns in protein & of animals and vegetable origin, critical study of methods of assessment of protein quality.
UNIT II:
Essential amino acids, amino acid balance and imbalance, requirement of individual amino acid, inborn errors in metabolism – phenyl ketonuria, alcaptonuria, homocystinuria and albinism.
Supplementation of individual amino acids like glutamine.
Carbohydrates – Adaptive effects of dietary carbohydrates on intestinal disaccnaridase activity in man. Therapeutic uses of carbohydrates – sugars in parenteral nutrition (glucose, fructose and xylitol).Toxic effects of fructose , xylitol and galactose.
Role of carbohydrates in dental caries, obesity, CVD’s and Diabetes Mellitus current research studies.
UNIT III:
Transport of lipids in the blood- composition and function of serum lipo proteins, inter relationship with lecithin cholesterol acyl transferase. Lipid transformation in the liver – lypotrophic factors. Adipose tissue – Lipogenesis and lipolysis, Fatty liver.
Storage of body fat, effects of deficiency and excess of fat.
UNIT IV:
Role of ascorbic acid in transforming cholesterol to bile acids.
Hypocholesterolemic foods – garlic, fiber and plant proteins.
Interrelationship of lipids, carbohydrates and proteins and other nutrients.
UNIT V:
Research studies on calcium, phosphorus, magnesium and sulphur- Metabolism.
Calcium in body tissues and fluids – factors affecting calcium absorption, calcium phosphorus ratio, inter- relationship between calcium, protein and vitamin D, bone density tests.
1. RECOMMENDED TEXTS:
a. Guthire, H.A. (2001) – “Introductory Nutrition” Tenth edition, C.V. Mosby Company, St. Louis.
b. Bogert, J.G.V., Briggs, D.H, Calloway, (2000), “Nutrition and physical fitness”, 11th edition W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
c. Wardlaw, G.M and kessel, M, (2002) “ Perspectives in Nutrition”, 5th edition, Mc Graw Hill, New York, New Delhi
d. William, S.R. (2000), “Nutrition and Diet Therapy”, Mosby Co., St. Louis,
e. Sizer, F.S and whitney E.R. (2003). “ Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”. 9th edition, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
f. Brown, J.E. (2002), “Nutrition Now”, 3rd edition, Wadsworth Thomson Learning New York.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Maurice, E.Shills, James A, obson, Moshe shike, (2000), “Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease”, Eight edition, vol I and II, Lea & Febiger Philadelphia, A Waverly Company.
b. Mahan L.K. and stump, S.E (2002), “Krause’s Food Nutrition and Diet Therapy”, 10th edition, W.B. Saunder’s company, Philadelphia.
c. Toteja,G.S and singh P (2004), “Micronutrient Profile of Indian Population”, ICMR Publication, New Delhi.
d. M. Swaminathan (2002), “Principles of Nutrition and Dietetics”, BAPPCO, 88, Mysore Road Bangalore – 560 018.
3. WEBSITE, E- LEARNING RESOURCES:
– Service of National agricultural library, USDA
nal.fnic - Food and nutrition information center
- Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
– Officer of dietary supplements,national institute of health.
4. JOURNALS:
American Journal of Clinical Nutrition,Official journal of the American Society for clinical nutrition, Inc
World review of nutrition and dietetics. Ed. Bourne, G.D.S Karger, Nutrition.
The Journal of Nutrition, Official journal of the American Institute of Nutrition
Nutrition reviews. The nutrition foundation Inc, New York,USA.
Nutrition Today, Published by Nutrition Today Inc. Annapolis, USA.
European Journal of Clinical Nutrition.
Indian Journal of nutritionand dietetics, Avinashilinagm Deemed University, Coimbatore
Indian Journal of Human Service, JBAS College for Women, Chennai.
CORE PAPER X -ADVANCED DIETETICS
Hours 6
Credits 5
Pre-requisites
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D, B.Sc. CND, B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploms in Nutrition and Dietetics\ PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
Objectives of the Course
To obtain knowledge regarding metabolic processes of normal and diseased organs.
To be familiar with dietary\ behaviour modifications based on physiological changes occuring in diseased conditions.
To acquire Knowledge regarding the effect of various diseases on nutritional status and nutrient requirement
To understand the role of die titian
To develop skills and techniques in the planning and preparation of therapeutic diets for various diseases and nutritional deficiencies.
To gain knowledge in diet counselling and educating patients.
Course Outline
Unit1
Nutrition and Diet Counselling -
Nutritional assessment of patients, dietary prescription and counselling following up, patient education and diet. Preparation of pamlohets for patient education
Routine Hospital diets-
Pre - operative and post operative diets, study and review of hospital dites, basic concepts and methods.
Oral feeding, tube feedinh , parenteral nutrition and intravenous feedinh. Diet in surgical condition, burns and cancer.
Unit II
Obesity and leanness-
Causes, complications and health effects, dietary treatment and other recommendations.
Diets in fevers and infections -
Types, metabolism in fevers, generak dietary considerations, diet in influenza, typhoid, recurrent malaria tunerculosis.
Unit III
Diet in Gastritis and peptic Uicer (Gastric and Duodenal)
Symptoms and clinical findings,treatment, dietary modification, adequate nutrition, amount of food, inrervals of feeding , chemically and thermally irritating foods. A four stage diet - Liquid, soft, Convalescence and Liberalised diets.
Diseases of the Gastro - Intestinal Tract
1. Recommended Texts:
a. Sue Rodwell Williams (1985), Nutrition and Diet therapy,. the CV. Mosby saint Louls.
b. Bogeri, J.G.V. Brigg D.H. Colloway, (1973), Nutrition and physical fitness, W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London.
c. M.V. Krause and M.A. Mahan. (1992), Food Nutrition and Diet therapy. W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London , Toronto
d. Robinson, C.H.Lawles, M.R. Chenoweth. W.L. Garwick, A.E. (1990), Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition the Macmillian company, New York.
e. Garrow et. Al (2000) “Human Nutrition and Dietetics”, 10th Edition, Churchill Livingstone
f. Wilson, E.P. Fisher K.H. and Fuqua M.E. (1975), Principles of Nutrition. Jhon Willey and Sons New York, London
g. G.A.Helen (1974), Introductory Nutrition; C.V. Mosby Company Saint Louis.
h. C.Gopalan, S.C.Balasubramanian, S.V.Ramasastri and Visvesara Rao, ,Diet Atlas, ICMR, New Delhi, India
i. Wadlock, G.M. and Kessel, M (2002), “ Perpectives in nutrition “,Mc Graw Hill, New York.
j. Davidson and passmore R and Brock J.B. (1976), Human nutrition and Dietetics.
The English Languages book society and Churchill Living Stone.
k. David M. Paize et.al (1988), Clinical Nutrtion, C.V. Mosby Co. St. Louis.
2. Reference Books
a. Antia, F.P.and Abraham P (1994), “Clinical dieteties and nurtrition”, 4th edition Oxford univristy press
b. M.Swaminathan, (1974), Essential of Nutrition Vol. I and II, The Ganesy and company, Madras - 17
c. Srilakshmi B (2005), :Dietetics”, revised fifth edition, New Age International (P) limited
d. Sizer, F.S. and Whitney E.R. (2003), “Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”. 9th edition, Thomson Wadsworth, Austrialia.
e. Brown, J.W (2006), “Clinical Nutrition, case studies”, Thomas Wadsworth, Austrialia.
f. Brown, A (2004), “understanding Food, Principles and Preparation”. Thomson Wadworth,Austrialia.
3. Wedsite, e-learning resources
nal.fnic/etext/000058.html - food and Nutrition Information Centre
- Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
- AMerican heart assocition
nhlbi.chd/ - National Cholesterol education program
PAPER: XI - DIETETICS PRACTICAL
Time: 6 Hrs
Credit: 3
PRE – REQUISITES:
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND,B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics / PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE:
To enable students to know to plan, prepare and serve diets for diseases.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT 1:
Planning, preparation and services of diets for different conditions.
1. Celiac diseaselactose intolerance.
UNIT II:
Pancreatitis.
Insulin Dependent Diabetes Mellitus
Non Insulin dependent Diabetes Mellitus.
UNIT III:
Cardio Vascular Diseases.
(a). atherosclerosis
(b). hypertension.
UNIT IV:
Renal Diseases
(a). Nephritis
(b). Nephrosis.
(c). Renal Failure.
UNIT V:
Serve burns – Total Parenteral nutrition (TPN)
AIDS
1. RECOMMENDED TEXTS:
a. Sue Rodwell Williams (1985), Nutrition and Diet therapy,. The CV> Mosby saint Louis.
b. Bogeri, J.G.V. Brigg D.H. Colloway, (1973), Nutrition and physical fitness, W.B. Saunders Philadelphia, London.
c. M.V. Krause and M.A. Mahan. (1992), Food Nutrition and Diet therapy. W.B.
Saunders company, Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
d. Robinson, C.H. Lawles, M.R. Chernoweth. W.L. garwick, A.E.(1990), Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition the Macmillan company, New York.
e. Garrow et.A1 (20/ Nutrition and Dietetics”, 10th Edition,Churchill Livingstone
f. Wilson, E.P. Fisher K.H. and Fuqua M.E. (1975), Principles of Nutrition. John Willey and Sons New York, London.
g. G.A. Helen (1974). Industry Nutrition; C.V. Mosby Company Saint Louis.
h. C. Gopalan,S.C. Balasubramanian, S.V. Ramasastri and Vivesara Rao, Diet Atlas, ICMR, New Delhi, India.
i. Wadlock, G.M. and Kessel, M. (2002), “ Perspectivesa in nutrition”, Mc Graw Hill, New York.
j. Davidson and Passmore R and Brock J.B (1976), Human nutrition and dietetics. The English languages book society and Churchill Living Stone.
k. David M. Paize et.al. (1988), Clinical nutrition, C.V.Mosby Co.St.Louis.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Antia, F.P. and Abraham P (1994), “ Clinical dietetics and nutrition”, 4th edition, Oxford university press.
b. M. swaminathan, (1974), essential of Nutrition Vol. I and II. The Ganesy and company, Madras- 17.
c. Srilakshmi B (2005), “ Dietetics”, revised fifth edition, New Age International (P) limited.
d. Sizere, F.S and Whitney E. R. (2003). “ Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”, 9the edition, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
e. Brown, j.E. (2006), “ Clinical Nutrition, Case studies”, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
f. Brown, A (2004), “ Understanding Food , Principles and Preparation”, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
3. WEBSITE, E-LEARNING RESOURCES:
nal.fnic/etext/000058.html - Food and nutrition information center
- Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
–American heart association
nhlbi.chd/- National cholesterol education program
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY PAPER II
PAPER – IV - CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY
Time: 5 Hrs
Credit: 3
PRE – REQUISITES:
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND,B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics / PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE:
To enable students to
Understand the basis principles of Clinical biochemistry
Acquire basic knowledge on analytical techniques
Know the Clinical significance of biochemical findings.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT I:
Analytical techniques and instrumentation:
Chromatography – paper, absorption, gel –HPLC. Electrophoresis –paper, gel. Photometry – colorimetry- spectrophotometry and flourimetry. Polarimetry and electron microscopy.
Immune assay- radio active isotopes- priciples detection measurement, GM counter, scintillation, scintillation counter, scanning techniques.
UNIT II:
Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism:
Blood glucose- homeostasis, ketosis, ketogenesis, Diabetes Mellitus- GTT, Hypoglycemia, glycohaemoglobins.
Disorders of lipid metabolism:
Lipid profile- disorders of lipoproteins, phospholipids and cholestral metabolism, liver function tests, diagnosis of apolipoproteins, LDL,HDL and Triglycerides.
UNIT III:
Disorders of Protein metabolism
Plasma protein, immuno deficiency syndrome, Nitrogen, albumin, alpha and beta globulin. Amino acid deficiency, urea.
UNIT IV
Disorders of purine and pyrimidine metabolism
Gout,Xanthonuria.
Mineral and Vitamin Matabolism
Abnormalities – hyper calcemia, hypocalcemia, kalemia, nitremia and phosphatemia.
Water metabolism.
Acid base and Electrolyte balance- Abnormalities – electrolytes, Blood gases, respiratory and metabolic acidosis and alkalosis.
UNIT V:
Inborn errors of metabolism
Fanconi’s syndrome, phenylketonuria, Von – Gierke’s disease , cystinuria, Galactosemia and Albinism.
1. RECOMMENDED TEXTS:
a. Harper H.A., (1997) Review of Physiological Chemistry, Lange Medical Publications, Los Angeles.
b. Ramakrishnan (1994), Text book of Clinical Biochemistry and Human Biology, New Delhi, Prentice hall.
c. Talwar G.P. Srinivatsava L.N and Mondgil. K.D.Text Book of Biochemistry and Human Biology, New Delhi, Prextice Hall
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Jean F. Zilwa, Peter R. Pannale, Philip R. (1998), Clinical Chemistry in Diagnosis and Treatment, New York.
b. Devlin (1994), Text Book of Biochemistry with Clinical correlations, New York, John Wiley and Sons.
c. Plummer D.T (1997), An introduction to practical Biochemistry, New Delhi McGraw Hill Publishing Company.
d. Cromwell L., Weibel F.J and Pfeiffer E.A (1996) Measurments, New Delhi, Prentice Hall.
e. Eccles R. (1993), electrolytes, Body fluids and Acid Basebalance Edward Arnold – A division of Hodder and Stoughton.
f. Andrew Travens, (1993), DNA Protein interactions, Chapman and Hall Pub, London.
3. WEBSITE, E-LEARNING RESOURCES:
-metabolic pathways of biochemistry
- inborn errors of metabolism
-enzymes
-biochemistry encyclopedia
FOURTH SEMESTER
PAPER: XIII- ADVANCED HUMAN NUTRITION MICRO NUTRIENTS
Time: 6 Hrs
Credit: 5
PRE – REQUISITES:
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND,B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics / PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE:
To learn the functions, deficiency symptoms, food sources and requirements of the different micro nutrients.
To learn to estimate Vitamin C, total nitrogen, lipids, iodine, vitamin A, beta carotene, and iron in foods.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT I:
Distribution in the body; functions, effects of deficiency, food sources and requirement of
Micro Minerals – iron,zinc, fluoride and copper
Ultratrace Minerals- Iodine, Selenium, Manganese, Chromium, Molybdenum, Boron and Cobalt
UNIT II:
Fat Soluble Vitamins – Functions, effects of deficiency, food sources, requirements, units of measurements and hyper vitaminosis of vitamins A,D,E and K
UNIT III:
Water soluble vitamins – Functions,effects of deficiency, food sources and requirements of ascorbic acid, falacin B12 and B6.
UNIT IV:
Other water soluble vitamins – Functions, effects of deficiency, sources and requirements of thiamin, riboflavin, niacin, pantothenic acid and biotin Other vitamin like factors- cholin, carnetine, Myo- inositol, Ubiquinines and Bioflavonoids.
UNIT V:
Water – Functions, Distributions, balance and requirements
Distribution of Water in the body – ICF & ECF, Composition of body fluids, Water balance in the body, Electrolytes- sodium, Potassium & chloride, Hypernatremia, Hyponatremia, Hyperkalmeia, Hypokalmeia and Electrolyte balance in the body.
Acid base balance – Acid Generation and Regulation
Acid base disorders- Metabolic Acidosis, Metabolic Alkalosis,Repiratory Acidosis, respiratory Alkalosis and compensation.
1. RECOMMENDED TEXTS:
a. Guthrie, H.A. (2001) – “Introductory Nutrition”, Tenth edition, C.V. Mosby Company, St. Louis.
b. Bogert, J.G.V., Briggs,D.H, Calloway, (2000). “ Nutrition and physical fitness”, 11th edition W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
c. Wardlaw, G.M and Kessel, M, (2002) “ Perespective in Nutrition”, 5th edition, Mc Graw Hill, New York, New Delhi.
d. Willium, S. R. (2000), “ Nutrition and Diet Therapy”, Mosby Co., St. Louis.
e. Sizer, F.S and Whitney E. R. (2003), “ Nutrition , Concepts and Controversies” 9th edition, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
f. Brown, J.E. (2002), “ Nutrition Now”, 3rd edition, Wadsworth Thomson Learning New York.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Maurice, E. Shils, James A. Obson, Moshe shike, (2000), “ Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease”, 8th Edition, Vol I and II, Lea & Febiger Philadelphia, A Waverly Company.
b. Mahan L.K. and stamp, S.E (2000), “Krause’s Food Nutrition and Diet Therapy”, 11th edition, W.B. saunder’s Company, Philadelphia.
c. Toteja, G.S and Singh P (2004), “ Micronutrient Profile of Indian Population”, ICMR Publication, New Delhi.
d. M. Swaminathan (2002), “ Principles of Nutrition and Dietetics”, BAPPCO, 88, Mysore Road Bangalore – 560 018.
3. WEBSITE, E- LEARNING RESOURCES:
– Service of National agricultural library, USDA
nal.fnic - Food and nutrition information center
- Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
– Officer of dietary supplements,national institute of health.
ELECTIVE EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
PAPER – V - PRINCIPLES OF GENE MANIPULATION TECHNOLOGY
(Dept. of Biotechnology)
Unit – 1:
Restriction enzymes, DNA modifying enzymes, cloning vectors, prokaryotic hosts-Creating Recombinant DNA Molecules-Isolation and Cloning of genes.-Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries-polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications-Southern / Northern blotting analysis.
Unit – 2:
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries- polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications- Southern/Northern bloting analysis, RFLP, RAPD, AFLP analysis. Genomics- Structural genomics-Gene mapping-Comparative genomics -Functional genomics -Gene expression -EST’s-DNA arrays.
Unit – 3:
Gene transfers - Introduction of Foreign Genes into Cells: electroporation, biolistic transfer, Transfection, selectable markers, microinjection, embryonic stem cells, reporter transgenes, Homologous recombination - "knock-ins / outs”.
Unit – 4:
Transgenics- Approaches to transgenesis: Microinjection / Embryonic stem cells/Sperm- mediated transfer -Mammalian cloning by nuclear transfer - "Dolly” as an example. Production of transgenic sheep, cattle, pigs and plants. - BT cotton, Transgenesis and growth- performance in farm livestock, & plants-The growth hormone in both bovine and porcine systems.
Unit – 5:
Edible vaccines, Disease resistance in transgenic organisms, Pest and herbicide resistant plants. The Mx gene system for anti-viral disease resistance in animals. Issues in Genetic Engineering - Biosafety of transgenic organisms.-Food safety of GMOs-Environmental safety .
Recommended Texts:
1. Old, R,W. and Primrose, S.B., Principles of Gene Manipulation (5th edition).
Blackwells Scientific Publications, Oxford, U.K. 1998.
2. Strachan, T. and Read, A.P. Human Molecular Genetics 2 ( 2nd edition), BIOS
Scientific Publications, John Wiley and Sons , Toronto, Canada. 1999
3. Watson, J.D., Gilman, M., Witkowski, J., and Zoller, M., Recombinant DNA (2nd edition),Scientific American Books, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York, N.Y., U.S.A. 2001.
4. Cantor and Smith (1999). Genomics. Wiley & Sons.
5. T.A. Brown (1999). Genomes. Bios Publishers.
6. K.Dharmalingam (1987). M13 cloning manual. MacMIllan, Chennai.
ELECTIVE EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
PAPER VI- COMMUNITY RELATIONS
(Dept. of Mass Media and Communication Studies)
Unit 1: Role of Public Relations in Community Developments
Definitiions and Functions of Community Relations and Community development
Unit 2: Corporate Social Responsibility,
Need for CSR. Difference between CSR and Cause Related Marketing, Cases studies
Unit 3: Public Relations in Non-government Organizations
PR& NGOs-Media Advocacy, Fund Raising and Media Relations
Unit 4: Strategies for Community Relation building
Participatory Approaches, Community Involvement, Tools and Techniques
Unit 5: Media Advocacy-Case Studies (E.g Health Campaign)
Case Studies of NGO-Relations-Health Communication and Awarness Campaigns
References
Kumar, Smessh (2002) Methods of Community Participation.A Complete Guide to Practioners Vistaar Publication
Mikkelsen, Birtha(1995).Methods for Development Work and Research.A Guide for Practioners.Sage Publicatiuon
ELECTIVE – INTER DISCIPLINARY
PAPER – VII - FUNDAMENTALS OF CHILD GUIDANCE AND COUNSELLING
Hours 5
Credit 3
Pre - requisites
B.Sc.Home Science, B.Sc. Nutrition, FSM and Dietetics, B,Sc, Clinical Nutrition, B.Sc. Interior Design and decor, Any UG Degree plus Diploma in Early childhood education, Any UG Degree plus Diploma in Child Psychology, B.Sc. Psychology, B.A. Applied Psychology, Any UG Degree with B.ED in Science subiects, PG Diploma in teaching children with special needs.
Objectives of the Course
To enable the students to understand the basics of guidance and counselling.
To impart knowledge on educational and vocational guidance.
To enable students to understand the concept of mental health and hygiene, causes and adjustment.
Course Outline
Unit 1
The concept of guidance
a. Meaning, nature and scope of guidance
b. Philosophical, Psychological and sociological bases of guidance
c. Need and importance of educational guidance services in schools.
Unit II
Vocational Guidance
a. Purpose and functions of vocational guidance
b. Relationship between educational and vocational guidance
c. Relation between vocational guidance and work education
Uint III
Educational Guidance
a. Basic data necessary for educational guidance - Pupil’s abilities, aptitude, interest.
b Construction, administration and interpretation of Cumulative record cards and individual inventories
Unit IV
The concept of counselling
a. Meaning, nature and scope of counselling
b. Different types of counselling
c. Varioussteps and techniques of counselling
13. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT AND DIETETICS
THIRD SEMESTER
PAPER IX - FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT
Hours: 6
Credits: 4
Pre-requisite
B.SC. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND, B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics\PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
Objectives of the Course
To enable students to Develop capacity and aptitude for food administration in institutions Apply knowledge in qyantity food service.
Course Outline -
Unit I
Organisation:
Definition, types of organization in different institution
Unit II
Management:
Definitions and functioons Delegation of responsibilities and authority - tools of management such as organizxation chart, job analysis, job specification and work sheet - work improvement and work simplification time and motion economy and their application to food preparation and service - time scheduledaily, weekly, monthly and annually in relation to food planning, preparation, cooking and service - planning for special occasions. Planning for use and care of equiment - record kepping and monthly accounts.
Unit III
Personnel Management:
Personnel and leadership qualifications for the foods service administrator- responsibilities and importance of good human relationship in organzation of personnel - criteria for selection and enroloment of personnel education and training of personnel - labour management relations - supervision - self appraisal and employee - rating - personnel policies related to salaries, other emoluments, allowances, leave, unifrom and other fringy benefits - labour laws and organizations.
Unit IV
Food plant:
Space allocation of food plant according to different capacities - flow or traffic- receiving food, preparing food and storage - food storage - food preparation and cooking -food service -removing soiled utensils to dishwashing area - dish storage area - traffic of guests -entrances and exits - hand washing and latrines -cashier and control supervision - study of equipment lay out with reference to electrical and plumbing installations - remodeling, renovation and repair.
Unit V
Sanitation & Hygiene
a) Personnel
b) Equipment & facilities
c) Waste Management
d) Past control.
1. Recommended Texts:
a. Jain S.P and Narang (1999), “Hotel Accountancy and Finance, Kalyani publishers, Ludhiana.
b. Thulsian, P.C. (2000), Financial and management Accounting”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company ltd, New Delhi.
c. Verghese, B. (1994), professional Food and Beverage Service Management, McMillan India Limited, Bangalore.
d. Bemmion, M and Hughers, d (1975), Introductory foods, Macmillan publishing Co. New York.
e. Kotas, R. and Davis B. (1973), “ Food Cost Control”, International Textbook Company Ltd. London.
f. West B.B., Wood L and Harger F (1976), Food service in institutions, John Wiley and Sons’Inc , New York.
g. Lawrence A.A., (1970), “ Management in action, Times of India Press.
h. Finely R.E (1971), “ The Personnel man and his part, D.B Toreprevale.
2 Reference Books:
a. Kinton, R et. al (2002), “ Theory of catering”,9th edition, ELST, London
b. Manay Shakunthala, N and Shadaksharaswamy, M (1987) - Foods, Facts and Principles, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi, Bangalore.
c. Decenzo, D.A and Robbins, S.P. (2002), Prentice Hall of India pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
d. Dharmaraj, E (2002), “Food and Hotel Legislations and policies,
New Age International Publishers, New Delhi
3. Website, e-learning resources:
http:\\infotree. library. ohiou, edu\bysuject\health -and -life- sciences\food\food-service-management\
http:\\ capitol.state.tx.us\statutes\dies\HS\content\htm\hs.006.00.000437. 00 htm
http:\\\finance\np fncehtm.
CORE PAPER X -ADVANCED DIETETICS
Hours 6
Credits 5
Pre-requisites
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D, B.Sc. CND, B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploms in Nutrition and Dietetics\ PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
Objectives of the Course
To obtain knowledge regarding metabolic processes of normal and diseased organs.
To be familiar with dietary\ behaviour modifications based on physiological changes occuring in diseased conditions.
To acquire Knowledge regarding the effect of various diseases on nutritional status and nutrient requirement
To understand the role of die titian
To develop skills and techniques in the planning and preparation of therapeutic diets for various diseases and nutritional deficiencies.
To gain knowledge in diet counselling and educating patients.
Course Outline
Unit1
Nutrition and Diet Counselling -
Nutritional assessment of patients, dietary prescription and counselling following up, patient education and diet. Preparation of pamlohets for patient education
Routine Hospital diets-
Pre - operative and post operative diets, study and review of hospital dites, basic concepts and methods.
Oral feeding, tube feedinh , parenteral nutrition and intravenous feedinh. Diet in surgical condition, burns and cancer.
Unit II
Obesity and leanness-
Causes, complications and health effects, dietary treatment and other recommendations.
Diets in fevers and infections -
Types, metabolism in fevers, generak dietary considerations, diet in influenza, typhoid, recurrent malaria tunerculosis.
Unit III
Diet in Gastritis and peptic Uicer (Gastric and Duodenal)
Symptoms and clinical findings,treatment, dietary modification, adequate nutrition, amount of food, inrervals of feeding , chemically and thermally irritating foods. A four stage diet - Liquid, soft, Convalescence and Liberalised diets.
Diseases of the Gastro - Intestinal Tract
1. Recommended Texts:
a. Sue Rodwell Williams (1985), Nutrition and Diet therapy,. the CV. Mosby saint Louls.
b. Bogeri, J.G.V. Brigg D.H. Colloway, (1973), Nutrition and physical fitness, W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London.
c. M.V. Krause and M.A. Mahan. (1992), Food Nutrition and Diet therapy. W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London , Toronto
d. Robinson, C.H.Lawles, M.R. Chenoweth. W.L. Garwick, A.E. (1990), Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition the Macmillian company, New York.
e. Garrow et. Al (2000) “Human Nutrition and Dietetics”, 10th Edition, Churchill Livingstone
f. Wilson, E.P. Fisher K.H. and Fuqua M.E. (1975), Principles of Nutrition. Jhon Willey and Sons New York, London
g. G.A.Helen (1974), Introductory Nutrition; C.V. Mosby Company Saint Louis.
h. C.Gopalan, S.C.Balasubramanian, S.V.Ramasastri and Visvesara Rao, ,Diet Atlas, ICMR, New Delhi, India
i. Wadlock, G.M. and Kessel, M (2002), “ Perpectives in nutrition “,Mc Graw Hill, New York.
j. Davidson and passmore R and Brock J.B. (1976), Human nutrition and Dietetics.
The English Languages book society and Churchill Living Stone.
k. David M. Paize et.al (1988), Clinical Nutrtion, C.V. Mosby Co. St. Louis.
2. Reference Books
a. Antia, F.P.and Abraham P (1994), “Clinical dieteties and nurtrition”, 4th edition Oxford univristy press
b. M.Swaminathan, (1974), Essential of Nutrition Vol. I and II, The Ganesy and company, Madras - 17
c. Srilakshmi B (2005), :Dietetics”, revised fifth edition, New Age International (P) limited
d. Sizer, F.S. and Whitney E.R. (2003), “Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”. 9th edition, Thomson Wadsworth, Austrialia.
e. Brown, J.W (2006), “Clinical Nutrition, case studies”, Thomas Wadsworth, Austrialia.
f. Brown, A (2004), “understanding Food, Principles and Preparation”. Thomson Wadworth,Austrialia.
3. Wedsite, e-learning resources
nal.fnic/etext/000058.html - food and Nutrition Information Centre
- Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
- AMerican heart assocition
nhlbi.chd/ - National Cholesterol education program
PAPER: XI - DIETETICS PRACTICAL
Time: 6 Hrs
Credit: 3
PRE – REQUISITES:
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND,B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics / PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE:
To enable students to know to plan, prepare and serve diets for diseases.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT 1:
Planning, preparation and services of diets for different conditions.
1. Celiac diseaselactose intolerance.
UNIT II:
Pancreatitis.
Insulin Dependent Diabetes Mellitus
Non Insulin dependent Diabetes Mellitus.
UNIT III:
Cardio Vascular Diseases.
(a). atherosclerosis
(b). hypertension.
UNIT IV:
Renal Diseases
(a). Nephritis
(b). Nephrosis.
(c). Renal Failure.
UNIT V:
Serve burns – Total Parenteral nutrition (TPN)
AIDS
1. RECOMMENDED TEXTS:
a. Sue Rodwell Williams (1985), Nutrition and Diet therapy,. The CV> Mosby saint Louis.
b. Bogeri, J.G.V. Brigg D.H. Colloway, (1973), Nutrition and physical fitness, W.B. Saunders Philadelphia, London.
c. M.V. Krause and M.A. Mahan. (1992), Food Nutrition and Diet therapy. W.B.
Saunders company, Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
d. Robinson, C.H. Lawles, M.R. Chernoweth. W.L. garwick, A.E.(1990), Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition the Macmillan company, New York.
e. Garrow et.A1 (20/ Nutrition and Dietetics”, 10th Edition,Churchill Livingstone
f. Wilson, E.P. Fisher K.H. and Fuqua M.E. (1975), Principles of Nutrition. John Willey and Sons New York, London.
g. G.A. Helen (1974). Industry Nutrition; C.V. Mosby Company Saint Louis.
h. C. Gopalan,S.C. Balasubramanian, S.V. Ramasastri and Vivesara Rao, Diet Atlas, ICMR, New Delhi, India.
i. Wadlock, G.M. and Kessel, M. (2002), “ Perspectivesa in nutrition”, Mc Graw Hill, New York.
j. Davidson and Passmore R and Brock J.B (1976), Human nutrition and dietetics. The English languages book society and Churchill Living Stone.
k. David M. Paize et.al. (1988), Clinical nutrition, C.V.Mosby Co.St.Louis.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Antia, F.P. and Abraham P (1994), “ Clinical dietetics and nutrition”, 4th edition, Oxford university press.
b. M. swaminathan, (1974), essential of Nutrition Vol. I and II. The Ganesy and company, Madras- 17.
c. Srilakshmi B (2005), “ Dietetics”, revised fifth edition, New Age International (P) limited.
d. Sizere, F.S and Whitney E. R. (2003). “ Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”, 9the edition, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
e. Brown, j.E. (2006), “ Clinical Nutrition, Case studies”, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
f. Brown, A (2004), “ Understanding Food , Principles and Preparation”, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
3. WEBSITE, E-LEARNING RESOURCES:
nal.fnic/etext/000058.html - Food and nutrition information center
- Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
–American heart association
nhlbi.chd/- National cholesterol education program
ELECTIVE - EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
PAPER – IV - CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY
Time: 5 Hrs
Credit: 3
PRE – REQUISITES:
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND,B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics / PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE:
To enable students to
Understand the basis principles of Clinical biochemistry
Acquire basic knowledge on analytical techniques
Know the Clinical significance of biochemical findings.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT I:
Analytical techniques and instrumentation:
Chromatography – paper, absorption, gel –HPLC. Electrophoresis –paper, gel. Photometry – colorimetry- spectrophotometry and flourimetry. Polarimetry and electron microscopy.
Immune assay- radio active isotopes- priciples detection measurement, GM counter, scintillation, scintillation counter, scanning techniques.
UNIT II:
Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism:
Blood glucose- homeostasis, ketosis, ketogenesis, Diabetes Mellitus- GTT, Hypoglycemia, glycohaemoglobins.
Disorders of lipid metabolism:
Lipid profile- disorders of lipoproteins, phospholipids and cholestral metabolism, liver function tests, diagnosis of apolipoproteins, LDL,HDL and Triglycerides.
UNIT III:
Disorders of Protein metabolism
Plasma protein, immuno deficiency syndrome, Nitrogen, albumin, alpha and beta globulin. Amino acid deficiency, urea.
UNIT IV
Disorders of purine and pyrimidine metabolism
Gout,Xanthonuria.
Mineral and Vitamin Matabolism
Abnormalities – hyper calcemia, hypocalcemia, kalemia, nitremia and phosphatemia.
Water metabolism.
Acid base and Electrolyte balance- Abnormalities – electrolytes, Blood gases, respiratory and metabolic acidosis and alkalosis.
UNIT V:
Inborn errors of metabolism
Fanconi’s syndrome, phenylketonuria, Von – Gierke’s disease , cystinuria, Galactosemia and Albinism.
1. RECOMMENDED TEXTS:
a. Harper H.A., (1997) Review of Physiological Chemistry, Lange Medical Publications, Los Angeles.
b. Ramakrishnan (1994), Text book of Clinical Biochemistry and Human Biology, New Delhi, Prentice hall.
c. Talwar G.P. Srinivatsava L.N and Mondgil. K.D.Text Book of Biochemistry and Human Biology, New Delhi, Prextice Hall
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Jean F. Zilwa, Peter R. Pannale, Philip R. (1998), Clinical Chemistry in Diagnosis and Treatment, New York.
b. Devlin (1994), Text Book of Biochemistry with Clinical correlations, New York, John Wiley and Sons.
c. Plummer D.T (1997), An introduction to practical Biochemistry, New Delhi McGraw Hill Publishing Company.
d. Cromwell L., Weibel F.J and Pfeiffer E.A (1996) Measurments, New Delhi, Prentice Hall.
e. Eccles R. (1993), electrolytes, Body fluids and Acid Basebalance Edward Arnold – A division of Hodder and Stoughton.
f. Andrew Travens, (1993), DNA Protein interactions, Chapman and Hall Pub, London.
3. WEBSITE, E-LEARNING RESOURCES:
-metabolic pathways of biochemistry
- inborn errors of metabolism
-enzymes
-biochemistry encyclopedia
FOURTH SEMESTER
ELECTIVE – EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
PAPER – V - PRINCIPLES OF GENE MANIPULATION TECHNOLOGY
(Dept. of Biotechnology)
Unit – 1:
Restriction enzymes, DNA modifying enzymes, cloning vectors, prokaryotic hosts-Creating Recombinant DNA Molecules-Isolation and Cloning of genes.-Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries-polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications-Southern / Northern blotting analysis.
Unit – 2:
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries- polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications- Southern/Northern bloting analysis, RFLP, RAPD, AFLP analysis. Genomics- Structural genomics-Gene mapping-Comparative genomics -Functional genomics -Gene expression -EST’s-DNA arrays.
Unit – 3:
Gene transfers - Introduction of Foreign Genes into Cells: electroporation, biolistic transfer, Transfection, selectable markers, microinjection, embryonic stem cells, reporter transgenes, Homologous recombination - "knock-ins / outs”.
Unit – 4:
Transgenics- Approaches to transgenesis: Microinjection / Embryonic stem cells/Sperm- mediated transfer -Mammalian cloning by nuclear transfer - "Dolly” as an example. Production of transgenic sheep, cattle, pigs and plants. - BT cotton, Transgenesis and growth- performance in farm livestock, & plants-The growth hormone in both bovine and porcine systems.
Unit – 5:
Edible vaccines, Disease resistance in transgenic organisms, Pest and herbicide resistant plants. The Mx gene system for anti-viral disease resistance in animals. Issues in Genetic Engineering - Biosafety of transgenic organisms.-Food safety of GMOs-Environmental safety .
Recommended Texts:
1. Old, R,W. and Primrose, S.B., Principles of Gene Manipulation (5th edition).
Blackwells Scientific Publications, Oxford, U.K. 1998.
7. Strachan, T. and Read, A.P. Human Molecular Genetics 2 ( 2nd edition), BIOS
Scientific Publications, John Wiley and Sons , Toronto, Canada. 1999
8. Watson, J.D., Gilman, M., Witkowski, J., and Zoller, M., Recombinant DNA (2nd edition),Scientific American Books, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York, N.Y., U.S.A. 2001.
9. Cantor and Smith (1999). Genomics. Wiley & Sons.
10. T.A. Brown (1999). Genomes. Bios Publishers.
11. K.Dharmalingam (1987). M13 cloning manual. MacMIllan, Chennai.
ELECTIVE EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
PAPER-VI- COMMUNITY RELATIONS
(Dept. of Mass Media and Communication Studies)
Unit 1: Role of Public Relations in Community Developments
Definitiions and Functions of Community Relations and Community development
Unit 2: Corporate Social Responsibility,
Need for CSR. Difference between CSR and Cause Related Marketing, Cases studies
Unit 3: Public Relations in Non-government Organizations
PR& NGOs-Media Advocacy, Fund Raising and Media Relations
Unit 4: Strategies for Community Relation building
Participatory Approaches, Community Involvement, Tools and Techniques
Unit 5: Media Advocacy-Case Studies (E.g Health Campaign)
Case Studies of NGO-Relations-Health Communication and Awarness Campaigns
References
Kumar, Smessh (2002) Methods of Community Participation.A Complete Guide to Practioners Vistaar Publication
Mikkelsen, Birtha(1995).Methods for Development Work and Research.A Guide for Practioners.Sage Publicatiuon
ELECTIVES INTER DISCIPLINARY
PAPER – VII - FUNDAMENTALS OF CHILD GUIDANCE AND COUNSELLING
Hours 5
Credit 3
Pre - requisites
B.Sc.Home Science, B.Sc. Nutrition, FSM and Dietetics, B,Sc, Clinical Nutrition, B.Sc. Interior Design and decor, Any UG Degree plus Diploma in Early childhood education, Any UG Degree plus Diploma in Child Psychology, B.Sc. Psychology, B.A. Applied Psychology, Any UG Degree with B.ED in Science subiects, PG Diploma in teaching children with special needs.
Objectives of the Course
To enable the students to understand the basics of guidance and counselling.
To impart knowledge on educational and vocational guidance.
To enable students to understand the concept of mental health and hygiene, causes and adjustment.
Course Outline
Unit 1
The concept of guidance
a. Meaning, nature and scope of guidance
b. Philosophical, Psychological and sociological bases of guidance
c. Need and importance of educational guidance services in schools.
Unit II
Vocational Guidance
a. Purpose and functions of vocational guidance
b. Relationship between educational and vocational guidance
c. Relation between vocational guidance and work education
Uint III
Educational Guidance
a. Basic data necessary for educational guidance - Pupil’s abilities, aptitude, interest.
b Construction, administration and interpretation of Cumulative record cards and individual inventories
Unit IV
The concept of counselling
a. Meaning, nature and scope of counselling
b. Different types of counselling
c. Varioussteps and techniques of counselling
14. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN GENERAL GENETICS
SYLLABUS
Paper XIV Recombinant DNA Technology
|Title of the |PAPER XIV RECOMBINANT DNA TECHNOLOGY |
|Course / Paper | |
|Category of the |Second year and third semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|Course C | |4 |MGC 10 |
|Pre - requisites |Paper IV completion. |
|Objectives of the Course |This course introduces the students to understanding the techniques of Molecular Biology. |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 |
| |Basic Techniques: Southern, Northern, Western Blotting, Agarose Gel electrophoresis, pulse |
| |fielded Gel electrophoresis, PCR and Autoradiography and Bacterial transformation. |
| |Unit 1 |
| |Basic Techniques: Southern, Northern, Western Blotting, Agarose Gel electrophoresis, pulse |
| |fielded Gel electrophoresis, PCR and Autoradiography and Bacterial transformation. |
| |Unit 2 |
| |Restriction modification, restriction enzymes, cutting and joining of DNA molecules. Cloning |
| |Vectors: Plasmids, Cosmid, BAC, PAC and YAC. |
| |Unit 3 |
| |Cloning Strategies, Construction of genomic and c-DNA libraries, Recombinant selection and |
| |Screening. Expression of cloned DNA in E.coli. Cloning in Saccharomyces cervesia, |
| |Unit 4 |
| |PCR and its applications, DNA sequencing database and homology search, Site-directed mutagenesis |
| |Unit 5 |
| |Gene transfer to plants, Introducing genes into animal cells, gene knockout. Applications of |
| |recombinant DNA technology. |
Recommended Text
1. S.B Primrose, R.M. Twyman and O.W. Old (2001). Principles of Gene manipulation- an introduction to genetic engineering. Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Reference Books
1. Tom Strachan and Adrew P. Read (2004). Human Molecular Genetics 3. III rd edition, Garland publishing company.
2. Miodos, D. A and Treyer, G.A. (2003). DNA Science. Third edition, Cold Spring Harbor Press, New York.
Website:
Paper XV Human Genetics II
|Title of the |PAPER XV HUMAN GENETICS II |
|Course / Paper | |
|Category of the |Second year and fourth semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|Course C | |4 |MGC 11 |
|Pre - requisites |Paper IX completion, |
|Objectives of the Course |The course provides knowledge in Human genetics. |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 |
| |Mendelian and Non-Mendelian inheritance patterns in Human Families: Autosomal dominant, autosomal |
| |recessive, x-linked dominant, x-linked recessive, y-linked inheritance and mitochondrial |
| |inheritance. |
| |Unit 2 |
| |Complication to basic pedigree patterns: Non-penetrance, late-onset, variable expression, genomic |
| |imprint, genetic heterogeneity, new mutations, male lethality, lionization, mosaicism and |
| |chimerism. |
| |Unit 3 |
| |Multifactorial inheritance: Liability and threshold, two classes-one thresholds heritability of |
| |liability. Criteria for Multifactorial inheritance. |
| |Unit 4 |
| |Genetic Counselling: Objectives, requirements and process of genetic counselling; Risk estimation |
| |and genetic counselling to single gene disorders, chromosomal disorder and complex disorders. |
| |Unit 5 |
| |Fetal Diagnosis: Pre-implantation diagnosis, post-implantation diagnostic techniques- |
| |ultrasonography, amniocentesis, chorionic villus sampling, fetal cell sorting, maternal serum |
| |markers. Ethical issues and impact on medical practice. |
Recommended Text
1. Thompson and Thompson, 2004, Genetics in Medicine, Sixth edition, Elsevier’s Health Sciences Rights Department in Philadelphia, USA.
Reference Books
1. T. Strachan and A.P. Read, 2003, Human Molecular Genetics, Third edition, BIOS Scientific Publishers Ltd, UK.
2. Jack J.Pasernak, 2005, Introduction to Human Molecular Genetics, second edition, A john wiley and sons, Inc., publication, Canada.
Website
Paper XVI Developmental Genetics
|Title of the |PAPER XVI DEVELOPMENTAL GENETICS |
|Course / Paper | |
|Category of the |Second year and third semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|Course C | |4 |MGC 12 |
|Pre - requisites |General biology at graduation level. |
|Objectives of the Course |Elaborates how genes influence the morphogenesis. |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 |
| |Principles – Differentiation and morphogenesis in Dictyostelium – Cell specification autonomous |
| |and conditional – Morphogenesis – Cell adhesion – Cadherins – Differential cell affinity. |
| |Unit 2 |
| |Genomic equivalence – Differential gene expression – Transcriptional and translational controls – |
| |Methylation – Hierarchy of gene expression – Drosophila. |
| |Unit 3 |
| |Cell-cell communication – Induction and competence – Paracrine factors – Cell surface receptors |
| |and signaling pathways. |
| |Unit 4 |
| |Early embryonic development – fertilization – cleavage – gastrulation in C. elegans – Axis |
| |specification – C. elegans and Drosophila - Role of organizer in amphibian development. |
| |Unit 5 |
| |Late embryonic development – Vertebrate eye development – Tetrapod limb – Sex determination – |
| |Drosophila and mammals. |
| | |
Recommended Text
1. Scott F. Gilbert, 2003, Developmental biology, VII Ed., Sinnauer Associates Inc., Publishers, Sunderland, Massuchusetts.
Reference Books
1. J.M.W.Slack, 2001, Essential Developmental Biology, First Edition,Blackwell Publishing Ltd,USA.
2. Wener.A.Miller and Wener Muller, 1996, Developmental Biology, Springer-veilag, New York.
Website
Paper XVII Practical III
|Title of the |PAPER XVII PRACTICAL III |
|Course / Paper | |
|Category of the | Second year and First semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|Course C | |4 |MGC 13 |
|Pre - requisites |Registration to Paper XIV to XVI. |
|Objectives of the Course |To introduce some basic techniques in Molecular Biology, Developmental Biology, Immunology and |
| |Human genetics. |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 |
| |Isolation of Genomic DNA from Human Leucocytes |
| |Isolation of bacterial DNA |
| |Isolation of Plasmid DNA |
| |Unit 2 rDNA Technology |
| |Restriction digestion of DNA and Agarose gel electrophoresis. |
| |Transformation of Bacteria with plasmid |
| |PCR amplification |
| |Unit 3 |
| |Dissection of Salivary gland chromosomes from Chironomus larva. |
| |Identification of developmental stages during Drosophila embryogenesis (0-24 hrs) |
| |Whole mount preparation of Chick embryo- observations of developmental stages – early and late |
| |stages (24 and 33 hours of hatching) |
| |Unit 4 |
| |Pedigree drawing for Mendelian and Mitochondrial inheritance |
| |Risk estimation for single gene disorder |
| |Unit 5 |
| |Molecular and cytological diagnosis of specific genetic disorders |
| |Estimation of Protein by Lowry method. |
Paper XVIII Gene Therapy
|Title of the |PAPER XVIII GENE THERAPY |
|Course / Paper | |
|Category of the |Second year and Third semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|Course E | |5 |MGE 04 |
|Pre - requisites |Paper IV completion |
|Objectives of the Course |Students will appreciate new developments, approachs human genetic disorder. |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 |
| |Gene Therapy strategies: Gene augmentation, gene replacement, and mutation of gene expression, |
| |targeted cell killing- prodrug activation, bystander effect immunomodulation. |
| |Unit 2 |
| |Gene transfer / Delivery system: Principles of in vivo and ex vivo transfer; Gene delivery system |
| |– physical methods: |
| |Calcium phosphate mediated transformation, antibody mediated gene transfer, cationic lipids and |
| |liposomes, polycationic molecular conjugates, gene gun and naked DNA administration, nebulization,|
| |microinjection, electroporation. Biological gene delivery vectors: Adenoviruses, adenoassociated |
| |viruses, herpes simplex viruses, and mammalian artificial chromosome vectors. |
| |Unit 3 |
| |Role of promoters in Gene therapy: Tissue targeted (tissues specific) gene therapy. |
| |Unit 4 |
| |Targeted Diseases: Cystic fibrosis, hemophilia, ADA deficiency, muscular dystrophy and cancer. |
| |Unit 5 |
| |Ethical considerations and limitation of gene therapy |
Recommended Texts
1. N.R. Lemoine and D.N. Cooper, 1996, Gene Therapy, Bios scientific publishers, Oxford, UK.
2. J.Thomas August, 1997, Gene Therapy- Advances in pharmacology,Academic press, San Diego,USA.
Reference Books
1. N.R. Lemoine, 1999, Understanding Gene Therapy, Bios scientific publishers, Oxford, UK.
2. C.Dennis, R.Gallagher, 2001, The Human Genome, Nature publications groups, New York.
Websites
sci/techresources/human genome/medicine/genetherapy.html
gt/index.html
Paper XIX Genomics and Proteomics
|Title of the |PAPER XIX GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS |
|Course / Paper | |
|Category of the |Second year and Fourth semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|Course E | |5 |MGE 05 |
|Pre - requisites |Paper IV completion. |
|Objectives of the Course | Introduces the students to the whole genome analysis and protein analysis of biological sequences |
| |and use of databases. |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 |
| |Genome size: Number of genes, gene related sequences, organellar DNA. |
| |Unit 2 |
| |Experimental techniques for gene location: Hybridization tests to tests to determine expressed |
| |sequences, cDNA sequencing, and mapping of ends of transcripts, location of exon-intron boundaries.|
| |Unit 3 |
| |Locating genes in DNA sequences: by sequence inspection – ORF- homology searches; determining the |
| |function of a gene: homology and evolutionary relationships, homology analysis to determine the |
| |function of a gene. Gene inactivation and functional analysis, gene over expression and assessment |
| |of function. Reporter genes and immunocytochemistry in locating gene expression in cells and |
| |tissues. Comparative genomics in the study of human disease genes. Current state of the human |
| |genetic map. |
| |Unit 4 |
| |Proteomics: Protein functions and malfunction in cells, defective proteins – dominance and |
| |recessiveness, functional division: nucleic acid binding proteins; transcription factors, |
| |Chaperons, cell cycle regulators, enzymes, storage, structural proteins, enzyme inhibitors, tumour |
| |suppressors. |
| |Unit 5 |
| |Databases, Entrez – programme, BLAST and uses, finding conserved domains, determining protein |
| |structure, measuring phylogenetic distances. |
Recommended Texts
1. Cantor & Smith, 1999, Genomics, John-Willey &Sons
2. T.A. Brown, 1999, Genomes, John-Willey &Sons
References Book
1. R. Durbin, S. Eddy, A. Krogh, G. Mitchison, 1998, Biological sequences analysis.
2. P. Clote, R. Backofen, 2000, Computational Molecular Biology. Wiley, West Sussex
3. M.J. Bishop, 1999, Genetic Database, Academic press, London.
Websites
Useful Internet starting points for Genetics
15. M.Sc. HOTEL AND CATERING MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the student to acquire computer skills, marketing skills in tourism and to get advance knowledge in Hospitality Management and Yield Management.
CORE PAPER XI
HOTEL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
UNIT I
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
• Financial Funtions
• Nature and Scope
• Its relationship with other functions
• Finance Organizations
UNIT II
FINANCIAL FORECASTING
• Interpretation and Analysis of Financial Statement
• Actual performance and modet statements
• Preparation and uses
UNIT III
FINANCIAL PLANNING AND CONTROL
• Break even Analysis operation leverage
• Profit cost analysis
UNIT IV
LIQUIDITY MANAGEMENT
• Current asset management – Cash receivables – Inventories liquidity, profitability and solvency criteria
• Current liabilities management – Size and source – Money market, banks – regulation of working capital finance Dehejia Committee – Marathe Committee
UNIT V
LONG TERM CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
• Cost of capital, basic concepts, rational and assumption, cost of retained earnings.
• Capital structurre, decision of the firm – composition and source of long term funds
• Financial leverage – factors determining fund requirements
• Bugetery control – performance – zero base budgeting – financial information systems
REFERENCE
Fundamentals of Financial Management – James .C. Vanhorne
Financial Management and Policy – James .C. Vanhorne
Financial Management – Theory and Practice – Prassana Chandra
Fundementals of Financial Management – Prassana Chandra.
*******
CORE PAPER - XII
TOURISM MARKETING AND TRAVEL OPERATIONS
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION
• Defining tourism and marketing concepts
• Tourism as a product
• Tourism planning
• Tourism Development
UNIT - II
MARKETING TOOLS AND PLANNING
• The product mix
• Interactive marketing
• International marketing
• Private and public tourism marketing
• Business perspectives and planning for marketing
UNIT – III
RESEARCH AND MANAGEMENT
• Research and tourism
• Types of research
• The research process
• Research consultants
UNIT – IV
TOURISM POLICY
• Policy defined
• US Tourism policy
• Tourism policy around the world
• International tourism organization.
UNIT - V
TRAVEL & TRANSPORT OPERATIONS
• Introduction
• Travel decision
• Scheduled airline development
• Technical aspects of airline services
• Airline costs
• Air fares
• Revenues and load factors
• Business travel
• Responding to delayed
• Travelers
• Management strategies to gain passenger loyality
REFERENCE:
1. Tourism & Hospitality industry by Fridgen
2. Hotels for Tourism Development by Dr. Jagmohan Negi
3. Marketing Research – G.C.Beri
4. Tourism and Travel Management – Bishwar R.Ghosh.
***********
CORE PAPER - XIII
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM
UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION
System Concept – system classification - elements of systems; Input, Output, process, Information system for managers – Role of MIS.
UNIT – II
SYSTEM ANALYSIS & DESIGN:
The work of system analyst – The assignment brief and mutual investigation – feasibility study system design – Data collection and prepartion – Detailed system Design – Implementation – Evaluation and maintenance of MIS –Pitfalls in mis-development.
UNIT - III
FUNCTIONAL MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS:
Production information system – marketing information system – Accounting Financial Information System - Personal information system. Interrelationship of functional management information systems.
UNIT – IV
FUNDAMENTAL OF COMPUTER & DATABASE SYSTEMS:
General characteristics of Computer information system: The important of computer – Type of computers - information systems CPU 1/0 devices , computer software –operating systems programming language – Application software. Manual system computer system.
Information as a resources – meaning of Data base components of database – DBMS –Data Base Technology – Operations data base – comparison of DBMS – Design Principles of data base – Data base administration – Advantages and disadvantages of data base
UNIT V
COMPUTER POWER - SOURCE & SELECTION :
Collection purchase – Computer rental from the manufacture – Computer lease from a third party – Acquision of a used Computer – Computers – Service centres – third Sharing Companies Facilities management companies – The criteria for choice – Computer system selection Acquiring a small business computer – Source selection.
REFERENCE:
1. Principles of Management information Systems by G.M. Scott Ph.D Mcgraw – Hill Education
2. Management information system by Davis and Oison Mcgraw Fill Education.
********
CORE PAPER XIV
ADVANCED FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT
UNIT - I
FRONT OFFICE OPERATIONS:
• The guest cycle
• Front office system
• Front office forms
• The front desk
• Front office equipments
• Front office computers application
UNIT – II
FRONT OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES:
• Front office communication
• Inter departmental communications
• Guests service
• Guest relations
• Front office security functions
UNIT – III
FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT:
• Management functions
• Establishing Room rates
• Forecasting room availability
• Budgeting for operations
• Evaluation front office operation
UNIT – IV
YIELD MANAGEMENT:
• The concept of yield and management
• Measuring yield
• Elements of yield management
• Using yield management
UNIT – V
THE NIGHT AUDIT:
• Functions
• Operation modes
• Night audit process
• Verifying night audit
• Automated system update
REFERENCE:
1. Front office procedure – By Seaton
2. Basic Hotel Front Office Procedures (II edn.) – Peter Renner.
3. Front Office Procedures – Peter Abbott
4. Principles of hotel front office operations – Sue Becker, Pam Bradley and Feremy Hyton
5. Managing Front office operations – Michael and Kasavana
6. Hotel and motel front desk personnel – Grace Paige
7. Front office procedures – social skills and management – Petrabbol & Sue Lewry.
************
CORE PAPER XV
KITCHEN OPERATION AND COST CONTROL
UNIT 1
KITCHEN MANAGEMENT
• Kitchen Management Skills
• Attitude, Behavior in Kitchen
• Personal Hygiene
• Importance of Sanitation in Kitchen
• Safety procedures to be followed in Kitchen
• Handling Modern Kitchen Equipments
• Rechauffing.
UNIT 2
KITCHEN LAYOUT
• General Planning Layout of Kitchen in a star hotel,
• Types of Kitchen,
• Layout of Receiving area,
• Storage area, Service & Wash up area.
UNIT 3
KITCHEN COMMODITIES
• Extensive study of Kitchen ingredients and its various characters of Vegetables, Fruits, Meat,Poultry, Game, Fish, Rice, Cereals, Cocoa, Chocolate.
UNIT 4
COST CONTROLS
• Menu Compilation & Balancing of Recipes
• Portion Control, Standard portion Sizes,
• Receiving: Definition, Functions ,Blind Receiving
• Indenting: Definition, Functions Principles of Indenting,
• Food Cost Control Importance, Relevance of Food Costing System.
• Purchasing: Definition. Types, Importance Purchase Order
• Cost Controls Procedures & Methods.
• Inventory. Records
• Bin Card, Stock Card, Perpetual Inventory.
REFERENCE:
Practical Cookery By Ronald Kington victor Ceserani
The Theory of Catering – Kinton & Ceserani – Hoddel & Strouhton Educational, London.
Practical Professional Catering – Kauffman and Cracknell
Food & Beverage Management – Richard Kotas & Chandana Jayawardena
Food & Beverage Management & Cost Control – D. Antony Ashok Kumar.
*************
IV SEMESTER
OBJECTIVE
The student is given an introduction to Research Methodology which helps him in his project work. Two subject related electives are dealt with in detail. Also the student is equipped with research orientation.
CORE PAPER XVI - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION
• Meaning of research
• Objectives of Research
• Types of Research
• Research Approaches
• Importance of knowing how research is done
• Research process
• Criteria of good research
UNIT - II
RESEARCH DESIGN
UNIT - III
SAMPLING DESIGN
UNIT –IV
METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION AND PROCESSING
UNIT – V
ANALYSIS OF DATA AND REPORT WRITING
REFERENCE:
Research Methodology – C.R.Kothari
***************
CORE PAPER XVII
FOOD AND BEVERAGE DEPARTMENT ORGANISATION
UNIT I
FUNCTIONS OF FOOD & BEVERAGE DEPARTMENT.
• Planning,
• Coordinating
• Controlling
• Duties & Responsibilities of F& B Personnel.
UNIT II
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
• Span of Control,
• Levels of Management,
• Delegation of Authority,
• Division of Work
UNIT III
STAFFING
• Recruitment and Training,
• Duty Rota
• Motivation,
• Performance Appraisals
UNIT IV
FOOD & BEVERAGE COMMUNICATION SKILLS
• Internal & External Communication.
• Channels of Communications
• Handling F& B Complaints
UNIT V
SERVICE CONCEPTS
• Service Standards
• Standard Specifications
• Service Methods.
REFERENCE:
Food & Beverage Management & Cost Control – D. Antony Ashok Kumar
Food & Beverage Service - Dennis R.Lillicrap. & John .A. Cousins.
Modern Restaurant Service – John Fuller.
********
CORE PAPER XVIII
CONCEPTUAL SKILLS OF ACCOMMODATION OPERATIONS
UNIT – I
CONCEPTUAL PLANNING
• Organizing House Keeping department.
• Importance of fore casting
• Coordinating
• Controlling
UNIT – II
STAFFING AND WAVE SCHEDULING
• Selecting & Training
• Job description & Job Specification
• Work Scheduling – Rotational & tight
• Contract Service
• Criteria for Work – load
• (Equal distribution of Work)
UNIT – III
BUDGET BUDGETARY CONTROL
• Importance of Budgetary Control
• Capital of Operational Expenditure Budget.
• Variance analysis
• Preopening Budget.
• Inventory Control
UNIT – IV
MATERIAL PLANNING – SUPPLIES & EQUIPMENT
• Selection Criteria
• Guest Supplies
• Selection of Cleaning Equipment & Cleaning Agents
• Storage & Care.
UNIT – V
HOUSE KEEPING & ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
• Pest Control
• Waste water treatment & disposal
• Environmental Service
• Environmental Pollution
REFERENCES:
House Craft – Valerie Paul
Commercial HouseKeeping & Maintenance – Stanley Thornes
Hotel, Hostel and Hospital Housekeeping – John C. Bronson and Margaret Lennox
Hotel and Catering Studies – Ursula Jones
Housekeeping and Front Office – Jones
Managing housekeeping Custodial Operation – Edwin B. Feldman
Professional Management of Housekeeping Operations (II Edn.)- Robert J. Martin & Thomas J.A. Jones
Housekeeping Management – Margaret M. Leappa & Aleta Nitschke.
*************
CORE PAPER XIX
ROOMS DIVISION YIELD MANAGEMENT
UNIT – I
FRONT OFFICE MANGEMENT
• Planning & Organizing
• Coordinating
• Staffing
• Controlling & Evaluating
UNIT - II
ESTABLISHING ROOM RATES & FORECASTING
• Market Conditions
• Rule of Thumb & Hubbart formula
• Forecasting Room Availability
• Forecasting Data
UNIT – III
YIELD MANAGEMENT
• Definition & concept
• Meaning
• Elements
• Yield Management Strategies.
UNIT- IV
ROOMS DIVISION MANAGEMENT
• Forecasting Rooms Revenue
• Estimating Expenses
• Revenue analysis
• Rooms Division income statement
• Rooms Division Budget Reports
REFERENCE:
Front Office Procedure – By Seaton
Basic Hotel Front Office Procedures (II den).-) – Peter Renner.
Front Office Procedures – Peter Abbott
Principles of hotel front office operations – Sue Becker, Pam Bradley and Feremy Hyton
Managing Front Office Operations – Michael and Kasavana
Hotel and motel front desk personnel – Grace Paige
Front office Procedures – Social skills and management – Petrabbol & Sue Lewry.
************
CORE PAPER XX
PROJECT & VIVA VOCE
Project topic should be selected based on hospitality industry (The topics may cover hotels, restaurant, Front Office and Accommodation Operations, and resort management, Catering establishments like air, rail, industrial, Convenience foods and health foods)
The topic should be approved by the Head of the Department. The presentation of the project should strictly follow the guidelines.
************
16. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
SYLLABUS
|Title of the Course/ |Computer Networks |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 15 |
|Objective of the course|This course gives an insight into various network models and the general network design issues and related |
| |algorithms. |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction – Network Hardware – Software – Reference Models – OSI and TCP/IP models – Example |
| |networks: Internet, ATM, Ethernet and Wireless LANs - Physical layer – Theoretical basis for data |
| |communication - guided transmission media |
| |Unit 2: Wireless transmission - Communication Satellites – Telephones structure –local loop, trunks and |
| |multiplexing, switching. Data link layer: Design issues – error detection and correction. |
| |Unit 3: Elementary data link protocols - sliding window protocols – Data Link Layer in the Internet - |
| |Medium Access Layer – Channel Allocation Problem – Multiple Access Protocols. |
| |Unit 4: Network layer - design issues - Routing algorithms - Congestion control algorithms – IP protocol –|
| |IP Address – Internet Control Protocol. |
| |Unit 5 : Transport layer - design issues - Connection management - Addressing, Establishing & Releasing a |
| |connection – Simple Transport Protocol – Internet Transport Protocol (TCP) - Network Security: |
| |Cryptography. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) A. S.Tanenbaum, 2003, Computer Networks, Fourth Edition, - Pearson Education, Inc, (Prentice hall of India Ltd), Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) B. Forouzan, 1998, Introduction to Data Communications in Networking, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
ii) F. Halsall, 1995, Data Communications, Computer Networks and Open Systems, Addison Wessley.
iii) D. Bertsekas and R. Gallagher, 1992, Data Networks, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi.
iv) Lamarca, 2002, Communication Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i)
|Title of the Course/ |Design and Analysis of Algorithms |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No.: 16 |
|Objective of the course|This course gives insight into the design and analysis for selected problems. |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction - Definition of Algorithm – pseudocode conventions – recursive algorithms – time and |
| |space complexity –big-“oh” notation – practical complexities – randomized algorithms – repeated element – |
| |primality testing - Divide and Conquer: General Method - Finding maximum and minimum – merge sort. |
| |Unit 2: Divide and conquer contd. – Quicksort, Selection, Strassen's matrix multiplication – Greedy Method:|
| |General Method –knapsack problem - Tree vertex splitting - Job sequencing with dead lines – optimal storage|
| |on tapes. |
| |Unit 3: Dynamic Programming: General Method - multistage graphs – all pairs shortest paths – single source |
| |shortest paths - String Editing – 0/1 knapsack. Search techniques for graphs – DFS-BFS-connected |
| |components – biconnected components. |
| |Unit 4: Back Tracking: General Method – 8-queens - Sum of subsets - Graph Coloring – Hamiltonian cycles. |
| |Branch and Bound: General Method - Traveling Salesperson problem. |
| |Unit 5 : Lower Bound Theory: Comparison trees - Oracles and advisory arguments - Lower bounds through |
| |reduction - Basic Concepts of NP-Hard and NP-Complete problems. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and S. Rajasekaran, 1999, Computer Algorithms, Galgotia, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) G. Brassard and P. Bratley, 1997, Fundamentals of Algorithms, PHI,
New Delhi.
ii) A.V. Aho, J.E. Hopcroft, J.D. Ullmann, !974, The design and analysis of Computer Algorithms, Addison Wesley, Boston.
iii) S.E.Goodman and S.T.Hedetniemi, 1977, Introduction to the Design and Analysis of algorithms, Tata McGraw Hill Int. Edn, New Delhi.
3. Website, E-learning resources
i)
|Title of the Course/ |Advanced Java Programming |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 17 |
|Objective of the course|This course gives an insight into advanced features of Java |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Servlet overview – the Java web server – your first servlet – servlet chaining – server side |
| |includes- Session management – security – HTML forms – using JDBC in servlets – applet to servlet |
| |communication. |
| |Unit 2: Java Beans :The software component assembly model- The java beans development kit- developing beans|
| |– notable beans – using infobus - Glasgow developments - Application Builder tool- JAR |
| |files-Introspection-Bound Properties-Persistence-customizers - java beans API. |
| |Unit 3: EJB: EJB architecture- EJB requirements – design and implementation – EJB session beans- EJB entity|
| |beans-EJB Clients – deployment tips, tricks and traps for building distributed and other systems – |
| |implementation and future directions of EJB-Variable in perl- perl control structures and operators – |
| |functions and scope |
| |Unit 4: RMI – Overview – Developing applications with RMI:Declaring & Implementing remote interfaces-stubs|
| |& skeletons,Registering remote objects,writing RMI clients –Pushing data from RMI Servlet – RMI over |
| |Inter-ORB Protocol |
| |Unit 5: JSP –Introduction JSP-Examining MVC and JSP -JSP scripting elements & directives-Working with |
| |variables scopes-Error Pages - using Java Beans in JSP Working with Java Mail-Understanding Protocols in |
| |Javamail-Components-Javamail API-Integrating into J2EE-Understanding Java Messaging Services-Transactions. |
1. Recommended Text:
i) J. McGovern,R. Adatia,Y. Fain, 2003, J2EE 1.4 Bible, Wiley-dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
ii) H. Schildt, 2002, Java 2 Complete Reference, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Reference books:
i) K. Moss, 1999, Java Servlets, Second edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
ii) D. R.Callaway, 1999, Inside Servlets, Addison Wesley, Boston
iii) Joseph O’Neil, 1998, Java Beans from the Ground Up, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
iv) TomValesky, Enterprise JavaBeans, Addison Wesley.
v) Cay S Horstmann & Gary Cornell, Core Java Vol II Advanced Features, Addison Wesley.
|Title of the Course/ |Information Security |
|Paper | |
|Extra -Disciplinary |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 18 |
|Objective of the course|This course studies on some basics of Information Security |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction: Security- Attacks- Computer criminals- Method of defense Program Security: Secure |
| |programs- Non-malicious program errors- Viruses and other malicious code- Targeted malicious code- Controls|
| |against program threats. |
| |Unit 2: Operating System Security: Protected objects and methods of protection- Memory address protection- |
| |Control of access to general objects- File protection mechanism- Authentication: Authentication basics- |
| |Password- Challenge-response- Biometrics. |
| |Unit 3: Database Security: Security requirements- Reliability and integrity- Sensitive data- Interface- |
| |Multilevel database- Proposals for multilevel security. |
| |Unit 4: Security in Networks: Threats in networks- Network security control- Firewalls- Intrusion |
| |detection systems- Secure e-mail- Networks and cryptography- Example protocols: PEM- SSL- Ipsec. |
| |Unit 5: Administrating Security: Security planning- Risk analysis- Organizational security policies- |
| |Physical security - Legal- Privacy- and Ethical Issues in Computer Security - Protecting programs and |
| |data- Information and law- Rights of employees and employers- Software failures- Computer crime- Privacy- |
| |Ethical issues in computer society- Case studies of ethics. |
1. Recommended Texts
1. C. P. Pfleeger, and S. L. Pfleeger, Security in Computing, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2003
2. Matt Bishop, Computer Security: Art and Science, Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Reference Books
1. Stallings, Cryptography And Network Security: Principles and
practice, 4th Edition, 2006
2. Kaufman, Perlman, Speciner, Network Security, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition,
2003
3. Eric Maiwald, Network Security : A Beginner’s Guide, TMH, 1999
4. Macro Pistoia, Java Network Security, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 1999
5. Whitman, Mattord, Principles of information security, Thomson, 2nd Edition,
2005
|Title of the Course/ |Practical - V: Advanced Java Lab. |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 2 |Sl. No. : 20 |
|Objective of the course|This course gives practical training in Advanced java programming |
|Course outline |HTML to Servlet Applications |
| |Applet to Servlet Communication |
| |Designing online applications with JSP |
| |Creating JSP program using Java Beans |
| |Working with Enterprise Java Beans |
| |Performing Java Database Connectivity. |
| |Creating Web services with RMI. |
| |Creating and Sending Email with Java |
| |Building web applications |
|Title of the |Project & Viva-Voce |
|Course/Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Fourth Semester |Credit: 20 |Sl. No. : 24 |
|Objective of the course|This course is to train the student in executing a project and preparing the report of work done. |
|Course outline |The project work is to be carried out either in a software industry or in an academic institution for the |
| |entire semester and the report of work done is to be submitted to the University. |
Elective – V
|Title of the Course/ |Mobile Computing |
|Paper | |
|Elective |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 19A |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the basic concepts of mobile computing |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction - Mobile and Wireless Devices – Simplified Reference Model – Need for Mobile |
| |Computing –Wireless Transmissions –Multiplexing – Spread Spectrum and Cellular Systems- Medium Access |
| |Control – Comparisons. |
| |Unit 2: Telecommunication Systems – GSM – Architecture – Sessions –Protocols – Hand Over and Security – |
| |UMTS and IMT – 2000 – Satellite Systems. |
| |Unit 3: Wireless Lan - IEEE S02.11 – Hiper LAN – Bluetooth – Security and Link Management. |
| |Unit 4: Mobile network layer - Mobile IP – Goals – Packet Delivery – Strategies – Registration – Tunneling|
| |and Reverse Tunneling – Adhoc Networks – Routing Strategies. |
| |Unit 5: Mobile transport layer - Congestion Control – Implication of TCP Improvement – Mobility – Indirect |
| |– Snooping – Mobile – Transaction oriented TCP - TCP over wireless – Performance. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) J. Schiller, 2003, Mobile Communications,2nd edition, Pearson Education, Delhi.
2. Reference Books
i) Hansmann, Merk, Nicklous, Stober, 2004, Principles of Mobile Computing, 2nd Edition, Springer (India).
ii) Pahlavan, Krishnamurthy, 2003, Principle of wireless Networks: A unified Approach, Pearson Education, Delhi.
iii) Martyn Mallick, 2004, Mobile and Wireless Design Essentials, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
iv) W.Stallings, 2004, Wireless Communications and Networks, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, Delhi.
|Title of the Course/ |Artificial Intelligence |
|Paper | |
|Core |Second Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 19B |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the concepts of machine learning. |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction - Intelligent Agents- Problem Solving - by Searching - Informed Search and Exploration|
| |- Constraint Satisfaction Problems - Adversarial Search |
| |Unit 2: Knowledge and Reasoning - Logical Agents - First-Order Logic - Inference in First-Order Logic - |
| |Knowledge Representation |
| |Unit 3: Planning – Planning and Acting in the Real World - Uncertain knowledge and reasoning - Uncertainty |
| |- Probabilistic Reasoning - Probabilistic Reasoning Over Time - Making Simple Decisions - Making Complex |
| |Decisions |
| |Unit 4: Learning - Learning from Observations - Knowledge in Learning - Statistical Learning Methods - |
| |Reinforcement Learning |
| |Unit-5: Communicating, Perceiving, and Acting - Communication - Probabilistic Language Processing - |
| |Perception – Robotics. |
1. Recommended Texts
i) Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, 2003, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
3. Reference Books
(i) Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight, 1991, Artificial Intelligence, 2nd Edition,
Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
(ii) Herbert A. Simon, 1998, The Sciences of the Artificial Intelligence, 3rd
Edition, MIT Press.
(iii) N.J. Nilson, 1983, Principles of AI, Springer Verlag.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i)
|Title of the Course/ |Computer Graphics |
|Paper | |
|Elective |II Year & Third Semester |Credit: 4 |Sl. No. : 19C |
|Objective of the course|This course introduces the basic concepts of Computer Graphics which shall be useful for virtual modeling. |
|Course outline |Unit 1: Introduction to graphic devices - picture representation, display devices , display adapters , |
| |Types of printers , Plotters & input devices |
| |Unit 2: Transformations - Basic 2D & 3D transformations - translation , scaling , rotation , reflection, |
| |shearing, Multiple transformations, Rotation about an axis parallel to a coordinate axis, Rotation about |
| |an arbitrary axis in space, Affine and perspective Geometry , Orthographic projections and Axonometric |
| |projections |
| |Unit 3: Raster Scan Graphics - Bresenham's line and circle drawing algorithms, scan conversion, RLE, Frame |
| |buffer, Scan converting polygons - Edge fill and Seed fill algorithms, Anti aliasing and Half toning |
| |Unit 4: Clipping and Display file Compilation - Sutherland - Cohen line clipping algorithm, Windowing and |
| |Viewporting - Segmented display file, structure and compilation. - Hidden Surface and hidden Line Removal |
| |- Backface removal algorithm, Z- buffer, Warnock algorithm, Hidden line elimination. |
| |Unit 5 : Plane Curves and Space Curves - Curve Representation, Non-parametric and parametric curves, |
| |representation of space curves, Cubic Spline, Parabolic Blended curves, Bezier curves and B-spline curves. |
Recommended Text
i) D. F. Rogers, J. A. Adams, 2002, Mathematical elements for Computer Graphics, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
ii) D. F. Rogers, 2001, Procedural elements for Computer Graphics, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
Reference Books
i) W.M. Neumann and R. F. Sproull, Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
ii) D. Hearn and M. P. Baker, 2004, Computer Graphics (C Version), 2nd Edition, Pearson Education.
iii) S. Harrington, 1989, Fundamentals of Computer Graphics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
iv) Foley, Van Dan, Feiner, Hughes, 2000, Computer Graphics, Addison Wesley, Boston
17. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN MATHEMATICS
SYLLABUS
|Title of the Course | COMPLEX ANALYSIS-I |
|Paper Number |XIV |
|Category |Core |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |III | | | | |
|Pre-requisite |Real Analysis and UG level Complex Analysis |
| |UNIT-I : Cauchy’s Integral Formula: The Index of a point with respect to a closed curve – The |
| |Integral formula – Higher derivatives. |
|Course Outline |Local Properties of analytical Functions : |
| |Removable Singularities-Taylors’s Theorem – Zeros and poles – The local Mapping – The Maximum |
| |Principle . |
| |Chapter 4 : Section 2 : 2.1 to 2.3, Section 3 : 3.1 to 3.4 |
| |UNIT-II : The general form of Cauchy’s Theorem : Chains and cycles- Simple Connnectivity - |
| |Homology - The General statement of Cauchy’s Theorem - Proof of Cauchy’s theorem - Locally |
| |exact differentials- Multilply connected regions - Residue theorem - The argument principle. |
| |Chapter 4 : Section 4 : 4.1 to 4.7, Section 5: 5.1 and 5.2 |
| |UNIT-III : Evaluation of Definite Integrals and Harmonic Functions: Evaluation of definite |
| |integrals - Definition of Harmonic functions and basic properties - Mean value property - |
| |Poisson formula. |
| |Chapter 4 : Section 5 : 5.3, Section 6 : 6.1 to 6.3 |
| |UNIT-IV : Harmonic Functions and Power Series Expansions: |
| |Schwarz theorem - The reflection principle - Weierstrass theorem – Taylor Series – Laurent |
| |series . |
| |Chapter 4 : Sections 6.4 and 6.5 |
| |Chapter 5 : Sections 1.1 to 1.3 |
| |UNIT-V: Partial Fractions and Entire Functions: Partial fractions - Infinite products – |
| |Canonical products – Gamma Function- Jensen’s formula – Hadamard’s Theorem |
| |Chapter 5 : Sections 2.1 to 2.4, Sections 3.1 and 3.2 |
|Recommended Text |Lars V. Ahlfors, Complex Analysis, (3rd edition) McGraw Hill Co., New York, 1979 |
|Reference Books |1.H.A. Priestly, Introduction to Complex Analysis, Clarendon Press,Oxford, 2003. |
| |2.J.B.Conway, Functions of one complex variable Springer International Edition, 2003 |
| |3.T.W Gamelin, Complex Analysis, Springer International Edition, 2004. |
| |4.D.Sarason, Notes on complex function Theory, Hindustan Book Agency, 1998 |
|Title of the Course |TOPOLOGY |
|Paper Number |XV |
|Category |Core |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |III | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Real Analysis |
|Course Outline |UNIT-I : Metric Spaces: Convergence, completeness and Baire’s Theorem; Continuous mappings;Spaces|
| |of continuous functions; Euclidean and Unitary spaces. Topological Spaces: Definition and |
| |Examples; Elementary concepts. |
| |Chapter Two (Sec 12 - 15) Chapter Three (Sec 16 & 17) |
| |UNIT-II : Topological Spaces (contd…) Open bases and subbases; Weak topologies; the function |
| |algebras C(X,R) and C(X,C): Compact spaces. |
| |Chapter Three (Sec 18 - 20) Chapter Four (Sec 21) |
| |UNIT-III : Tychonoff’s theorem and locally compact spaces; Compactness for metric spaces; |
| |Ascoli’s theorem. |
| |Chapter Four (Sec 23 - 25) |
| |UNIT-IV : T1 – spaces and Hausdorff spaces; Completely regular spaces and normal spaces; |
| |Urysohn’s lemma and the Tietze extension theorem; The Urysohn imbedding theorem. |
| |Chapter Five (Sec 26 - 29) |
| |UNIT-V: The Stone – Cech compactification; Connected spaces; The components of a space; Totally |
| |disconnected spaces; Locally connected spaces; The Weierstrass approximation Theorem. |
| |Chapter Five (Sec 30) Chapter Six (Sec 31 - 34) |
| |Chapter Seven (Sec 35) |
|Recommended Text | George F.Simmons, Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, Tata-McGraw Hill. New Delhi, |
| |2004 |
|Reference Books |1. J.R. Munkres, Topology (2nd Edition) Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., Delhi-2002 (Third Indian |
| |Reprint) |
| |2. J. Dugundji , Topology , Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1975. |
| |3. J.L. Kelly, General Topology, Springer |
| |4. S.Willard, General Topology, Addison - Wesley, Mass., 1970 |
|Title of the Course | OPERATIONS RESEARCH |
|Paper Number |XVI |
|Category |Core |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |III | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | UG Level Operations Research |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Decision Theory : Steps in Decision theory Approach – Types of Decision-Making |
| |Environments – Decision Making Under Uncertainty – Decision Making under Risk – Posterior |
| |Probabilities and Bayesian Analysis – Decision Tree Analysis – Decision Making with Utilities. |
| |Chapter 10 : Sec. 10.1 to 10.8 |
| |UNIT-II : Network Models : Scope of Network Applications – Network Definition – Minimal |
| |spanning true Algorithm – Shortest Route problem – Maximum flow model – Minimum cost capacitated |
| |flow problem - Network representation – Linear Programming formulation – Capacitated Network |
| |simplex Algorithm. |
| | |
| |Chapter 6 : Sections 6.1 to 6.6 |
| |H.A.Taha : Operations Research |
| |UNIT-III : Deterministic Inventory Control Models: Meaning of Inventory Control – Functional |
| |Classification – Advantage of Carrying Inventory – Features of Inventory System – Inventory Model|
| |building - Deterministic Inventory Models with no shortage – Deterministic Inventory with |
| |Shortages |
| |Probabilistic Inventory Control Models: |
| |Single Period Probabilistic Models without Setup cost – Single Period Probabilities Model with |
| |Setup cost. |
| |Chapter 13: Sec. 13.1 to 13.8 |
| |Chapter 14: Sec. 14.1 to 14.3 |
| |UNIT-IV : Queueing Theory : Essential Features of Queueing System – Operating Characteristic of |
| |Queueing System – Probabilistic Distribution in Queueing Systems – Classification of Queueing |
| |Models – Solution of Queueing Models – Probability Distribution of Arrivals and Departures – |
| |Erlangian Service times Distribution with k-Phases. |
| |Chapter 15 : Sec. 15.1 to 15.8 |
| |UNIT-V : Replacement and Maintenance Models: Failure Mechanism of items – Replacement of Items |
| |that deteriorate with Time – Replacement of items that fail completely – other Replacement |
| |Problems. |
| |Chapter 16: Sec. 16.1 to 16.5 |
|Recommended Texts |1. For Unit 2 : H.A. Taha, Operations Research, 6th edition, Prentice Hall of India |
| |2. For all other Units: J.K.Sharma, Operations Research , MacMillan India, New Delhi, 2001. |
|Reference Books | 1. F.S. Hiller and J.Lieberman -,Introduction to Operations Research (7th Edition), Tata |
| |McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhui, 2001. |
| |2. Beightler. C, D.Phillips, B. Wilde ,Foundations of Optimization (2nd Edition) Prentice Hall |
| |Pvt Ltd., New York, 1979 |
| |3. Bazaraa, M.S; J.J.Jarvis, H.D.Sharall ,Linear Programming and Network flow, John Wiley and |
| |sons, New York 1990. |
| |4. Gross, D and C.M.Harris, Fundamentals of Queueing Theory, (3rd Edition), Wiley and Sons, New |
| |York, 1998. |
|Title of the Course | MECHANICS |
|Paper Number |XVII |
|Category |Core |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |III | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Calculus and Differential equations. |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Mechanical Systems : The Mechanical system- Generalised coordinates – Constraints - |
| |Virtual work - Energy and Momentum |
| | |
| |Chapter 1 : Sections 1.1 to 1.5 |
| |UNIT-II : Lagrange's Equations: Derivation of Lagrange's equations- Examples- Integrals of |
| |motion. |
| | |
| |Chapter 2 : Sections 2.1 to 2.3 (Omit Section 2.4) |
| |UNIT-III : Hamilton's Equations : Hamilton's Principle - Hamilton's Equation - Other variational|
| |principles. |
| | |
| |Chapter 4 : Sections 4.1 to 4.3 (Omit section 4.4) |
| | UNIT – IV : Hamilton-Jacobi Theory : Hamilton Principle function – Hamilton-Jacobi Equation - |
| |Separability |
| | |
| |Chapter 5 : Sections 5.1 to 5.3 |
| | UNIT-V : Canonical Transformation : Differential forms and generating functions – Special |
| |Transformations– Lagrange and Poisson brackets. |
| | |
| |Chapter 6 : Sections 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3 (omit sections 6.4, 6.5 and 6.6) |
|Recommended Text | D. Greenwood, Classical Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1985. |
|Reference Books |1. H. Goldstein, Classical Mechanics, (2nd Edition) Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi. |
| |2. N.C.Rane and P.S.C.Joag, Classical Mechanics, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991. |
| |3. J.L.Synge and B.A.Griffth, Principles of Mechanics (3rd Edition) McGraw Hill Book Co., New |
| |York, 1970. |
|Title of the Course | COMPLEX ANALYSIS- II |
|Paper Number |XX |
|Category |Core |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Complex Analysis-I and Real Analysis |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Riemann Zeta Function and Normal Famalies : |
| |Product development – Extension of ((s) to the whole plane – The zeros of zeta function – |
| |Equicontinuity – Normality and compactness – Arzela’s theorem – Families of analytic functions – |
| |The Classcial Definition |
| |Chapter 5 : Sections 4.1 to 4.4, Sections 5.1 to 5.5 |
| |UNIT-II : Riemann mapping Theorem : Statement and Proof – Boundary Behaviour – Use of the |
| |Reflection Principle. |
| |Conformal mappings of polygons : Behaviour at an angle |
| |Schwarz-Christoffel formula – Mapping of a rectangle. |
| |Harmonic Functions : Functions with mean value property – |
| |Harnack’s principle. |
| |Chapter 6 : Sections 1.1 to 1.3 (Omit Section 1.4) |
| |Sections 2.1 to 2.3 (Omit section 2.4), Section 3.1 and 3.2 |
| |UNIT-III : Elliptic functions : Simply periodic functions – Doubly periodic functions |
| |Chapter 7 : Sections 1.1 to 1.3, Sections 2.1 to 2.4 |
| |UNIT-IV : Weierstrass Theory : The Weierstrass (-function – The functions ((s) and ((s) – The |
| |differential equation – The modular equation ((() – The Conformal mapping by (((). |
| |Chapter 7 : Sections 3.1 to 3.5 |
| |UNIT-V: Analytic Continuation : The Weiesrtrass Theory – Germs and Sheaves – Sections and Riemann|
| |surfaces – Analytic continuation along Arcs – Homotopic curves – The Monodromy Theorem – Branch |
| |points. |
| |Chapter 8 : Sections 1.1 to 1.7 |
|Recommended Text |Lars V. Ahlfors, Complex Analysis, (3rd Edition) McGraw Hill Book Company, New York, 1979. |
|Reference Books | 1.H.A. Priestly, Introduction to Complex Analysis, Clarendon Press,Oxford, 2003. |
| |2.J.B.Conway, Functions of one complex variable, Springer International Edition, 2003 |
| |3.T.W Gamelin, Complex Analysis, Springer International Edition, 2004. |
| |4.D.Sarason, Notes on Complex function Theory, Hindustan Book Agency, 1998 |
|Title of the Course | DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY |
|Paper Number |XXI |
|Category |Core |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Linear Algebra and Calculus |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Space curves: Definition of a space curve – Arc length – tangent – normal and binormal|
| |– curvature and torsion – contact between curves and surfaces- tangent surface- involutes and |
| |evolutes- Intrinsic equations – Fundamental Existence Theorem for space curves- Helices. |
| |Chapter I : Sections 1 to 9. |
| |UNIT-II : Intrinsic properties of a surface: Definition of a surface – curves on a surface – |
| |Surface of revolution – Helicoids – Metric- Direction coefficients – families of curves- |
| |Isometric correspondence- Intrinsic properties. |
| |Chapter II: Sections 1 to 9. |
| |UNIT-III : Geodesics: Geodesics – Canonical geodesic equations – Normal property of geodesics- |
| |Existence Theorems – Geodesic parallels – Geodesics curvature- Gauss- Bonnet Theorem – Gaussian |
| |curvature- surface of constant curvature. |
| |Chapter II: Sections 10 to 18. |
| |UNIT-IV : Nonintrinsic properties of a surface: |
| |The second fundamental form- Principal curvature – Lines of curvature – Developable - Developable|
| |associated with space curves and with curves on surfaces - Minimal surfaces – Ruled surfaces. |
| |Chapter III: Sections 1 to 8. |
| |UNIT-V : Differential Geometry of Surfaces : |
| |Compact surfaces whose points are umblics- Hilbert’s lemma – Compact surface of constant |
| |curvature – Complete surfaces and their characterization – Hilbert’s Theorem – Conjugate points |
| |on geodesics. |
| |Chapter IV : Sections 1 to 8 |
|Recommended Text | T.J.Willmore, An Introduction to Differential Geometry, Oxford University Press,(17th |
| |Impression) New Delhi 2002. (Indian Print) |
|Reference Books |1. Struik, D.T. Lectures on Classical Differential Geometry, Addison – Wesley, Mass. 1950. |
| |2. A.Pressley, Elementary Differential Geometry, Springer International Edition, 2004 |
| |3. Wilhelm Klingenberg: A course in Differential Geometry, Graduate Texts in Mathematics, |
| |Springer-Verlag 1978. |
| |4. J.A. Thorpe Elementary Topics in Differential Geometry, Springer International Edition, 2004.|
|Title of the Course | FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS |
|Paper Number |XXII |
|Category |Core |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Basic Analysis, Topology and Linear Algebra |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Normed Spaces : Definition – Some examples – Continuous Linear Transformations – |
| |The Hahn-Banach Theorem – The natural embedding of N in N** |
| |Chapter 9 : Sections 46 to 49 |
| |UNIT-II : Banach spaces and Hilbert spaces: Open mapping theorem – conjugate of an operator – |
| |Definition and properties – Orthogonal complements – Orthonormal sets |
| |Chapter 9 : Sections 50 and 51 |
| |Chapter 10 : Sections 52, 53 and 54. |
| |UNIT-III : Hilbert Space : Conjugate space H* - Adjoint of an operator – Self-adjoint operator –|
| |Normal and Unitary Operators – Projections |
| |Chapter 10 : Sections 55 to 59. |
| |UNIT-IV : Preliminaries on Banach Algebras : Definition and some examples – Regular and |
| |singular elements – Topological divisors of zero – spectrum – the formula for the spectral radius|
| |– the radical and semi-simplicity. |
| |Chapter 12 : Sections 64 to 69. |
| |UNIT-V: Structure of commutative Banach Algebras : Gelfand mapping – Spectral radius formula -|
| |Involutions in Banach Algebras – Gelfand-Neumark Theorem. |
| |Chapter 13 : Sections 70 to 73. |
|Recommended Text | G.F.Simmons , Introduction toTopology and Modern Analysis, McGraw Hill International Book |
| |Company, New York, 1963. |
|Reference Books |1.W.Rudin Functional Analysis, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi , 1973 |
| |2. G. Bachman & L.Narici, Functional Analysis Academic Press, New York ,1966. |
| |3.C. Goffman and G.Pedrick, First course in Functional Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New |
| |Delhi, 1987 |
| |4. E. Kreyszig Introductory Functional Analysis with Applications, John wiley & Sons, New |
| |York.,1978. |
| |5. M.Thamban Nair, Functional Analysis. A First Course, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002 |
Group C: Elective III (Semester III)
|Title of the Course | ALGEBRAIC THEORY OF NUMBERS |
|Paper Number |XVIII |
|Category |Elective – III|Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Algebra and Linear Algebra |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Algebraic background: Rings and Fields- Factorization of Polynomials – Field Extensions|
| |– Symmetric Polynomials – Modules – Free Abelian Groups. |
| |Chapter 1: Sec. 1.1 to 1.6 |
| |UNIT-II : Algebraic Numbers: Algebraic numbers –Conjugates and Discriminants – Algebraic |
| |Integers – Integral Bases – Norms and Traces – Rings of Integers. |
| |Chapters 2: Sec. 2.1 to 2.6 |
| |UNIT-III : Quadratic and Cyclotomic Fields :Quadratic fields and cyclotomic fields |
| |Factorization into Irreducibles: Trivial factorization – Factorization into irreducibles – |
| |Examples of non-unique factorization into irreducibles. |
| |Chapter 3: Sec. 3.1 and 3.2 ; Chapter 4: Sec. 4.1 to 4.4 |
| |UNIT-IV : Prime Factorization – Euclidean Domains – Euclidean Quadratic fields - Consequences |
| |of unique factorization – The Ramanujan –Nagell Theorem. |
| |Chapter 4: Sec. 4.5 to 4.9 |
| |UNIT-V : Ideals: Prime Factorization of Ideals – The norms of an Ideal – Non-unique Factorization|
| |in Cyclotomic Fields.. |
| |Chapter 5 : Sec. 5.1 to 5.4 |
|Recommended Text | I. Stewart and D.Tall. Algebraic Number Theory and Fermat’s Last Theorem (3rd Edition) |
| |A.K.Peters Ltd., Natrick, Mass. 2002. |
|Reference Books |Z.I.Borevic and I.R.Safarevic, Number Theory, Academic Press, New York, 1966. |
| |J.W.S.Cassels and A.Frohlich, Algebraic Number Theory, Academic Press, New York, 1967. |
| |P.Ribenboim, Algebraic Numbers, Wiley, New York, 1972. |
| |P. Samuel, Algebraic Theory of Numbers, Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston, 1970. |
|Title of the Course | NUMBER THEORY AND CRYPTOGRAPHY |
|Paper Number |XVIII |
|Category |Elective-III |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Elementary number theory and calculus |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : |
| |Elementary Number Theory: Time Estimates for doing arithmetic – divisibility and Euclidean |
| |algorithm – Congruences – Application to factoring. (Chapter 1) |
| |UNIT-II : |
| |Introduction to Classical Crypto systems – Some simple crypto systems – Enciphering matrices DES |
| |(Chapter 3) |
| |UNIT-III : |
| |Finite Fields, Quadratic Residues and Reciprocity (Chapter 2) |
| |UNIT-IV : |
| |Public Key Cryptography (Chapter 4) |
| |UNIT-V: |
| |Primality , Factoring, Elliptic curves and Elliptic curve crypto systems (Chapter 5, sections |
| |1,2,3 &5 (omit section 4), Chapter 6, sections 1& 2 only) |
|Recommended Text | Neal Koblitz, A Course in Number Theory and Cryptography, Springer-Verlag, New York,1987 |
|Reference Books |1.I. Niven and H.S.Zuckermann, An Introduction to Theory of Numbers (Edn. 3), Wiley Eastern Ltd.,|
| |New Delhi,1976 |
| |2. David M.Burton, Elementary Number Theory, Brown Publishers, Iowa,1989 |
| |3. K.Ireland and M.Rosen, A Classical Introduction to Modern Number Theory, Springer Verlag, 1972|
| | |
| |4. N.Koblitz, Algebraic Aspects of Cryptography, Springer 1998 |
|Title of the Course |STOCHASTIC PROCESSES |
|Paper Number |XVIII |
|Category |Elective-III |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Probability Theory |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Markov Chains :Classification of General Stochastic Processes – Markov Chain – Examples|
| |– Transition Probability Matrix – Classifications of States – Recurrence – Examples of recurrent |
| |Markov Chains. |
| |Chapter 1 : Section 3 only |
| |Chapter 2 : Sections 1 to 6 (Omit section 7) |
| |UNIT-II : Limit Theorems of Markov Chains: Discrete renewal equation and its proof – Absorption|
| |probabilities – criteria for recurrence – Queueing models – Random walk. |
| |Chapter 3 : Sections 1 to 7 |
| |UNIT-III : Continuous Time Markov Chains: Poisson Process – Pure Birth Process – Birth and Death |
| |Process – Birth and Death process with absorbing states – Finite State Continuous time Markov |
| |Chains. |
| |Chapter 1 : Section 2 (Poisson Process) |
| |Chapter 4 : Sections 1,2 and 4 to 7 (Omit sections 3 and 8) |
| |UNIT-IV : Renewal Processes: Definition and related concepts – Some special Renewal processes –|
| |Renewal equation and Elementary Renewal Theorem and its applications. |
| |Chapter 5 : Sections 1 to 6. |
| |UNIT-V : Brownian Motion : Definition – Joint probabilities for Brownian Motion – Continuity of |
| |paths and the maximum variables – Variations and extensions – Computing some functionals of |
| |Brownian Motion by Martingale methods. |
| |Chapter 1 : Section 2 (Brownian Motion) |
| |Chapter 6 : Sections 1 to 5 and 7A only (Omit Sections 6, and 7B,C) |
|Recommended Text | S.Karlin and H.M.Taylor. A First Course in Stochastic Processes( 2nd edition), Academic Press, |
| |New York, 1975. |
|Reference Books |1. Cinler E., Introduction to Stochastic Processes, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1975 |
| |2. Cox D.R. & H.D.Miller, Theory of Stochastic Processes (3rd Edn.), Chapman and Hall, London, |
| |1983 |
| |3. Kannan D., An Introduction to Stochastic Processes, North Holland, New York 1979 |
| |4. Ross S.M., Stochastic Processes, John Wiley and Sons, New ork,1983 |
| |5. H.W.Taylor and S.Karlin, An Introduction to Stochastic Modeling (3rd Edition), Academic |
| |Press, New York, 1998 |
|Title of the Course | DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS |
|Paper Number |XVIII |
|Category |Elective-III |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Algorithms and Elementary Data Structures : |
| |Algorithms – Structures programs – Analysis of algorithms – Stacks and Queues – Trees – Heaps and|
| |Heapsort – Sets and disjoint set union – Graphs – Hashing. |
| |Chapter 1 : Sections 1.1 to 1.4 |
| |Chapter 2 : Sections 2.1 to 2.6 |
| |UNIT-II : The Divide and Conquer Method : The general method – Binary search – Finding the |
| |maximum and minimum – Mergesort – Quicksort – Selection sort – Strassen’s matrix multiplication. |
| |Chapter 3 : Sections 3.1 to 3.7 |
| |UNIT-III : The Greedy Method : The General method – Optimal storage on tapes – Knapsack problem |
| |– Job Scheduling with deadlines – Optimal merge pattern – Minimum spanning trees – Single source |
| |shortest paths. |
| |Chapter 4 : Sections 4.1 to 4.7 |
| |UNIT-IV : Backtracking : The general methods – The 8-queens problem - sum of subsets – Graph |
| |colouring – Hamiltonian Cycles – Knapsack problem. |
| |Chapter 7 : Section 7.1 to 7.6 |
| |UNIT-V : Branch-and-Bound and NP-Hard and NP-Complete problems : Branch and Bound Method – 0/1 |
| |knapsack problem – Traveling salesperson – Efficiency Considerations – Basic concepts of NP-Hard |
| |problems – Cook’s theorem - NP-Hard graph problems - NP-Hard Scheduling Problems. |
| |Chapter 8 : Sections 8.1 to 8.4 |
| |Chapter 11: Sections 11.1 to 11.4 (omit 11.5 and 11.6) |
|Recommended Text |E.Horowitz and S.Sahni. Fundamentals of Computer Algorithm, Galgotia Publications New Delhi, 1984|
|Reference Books |1. D.E.Knuth, The Art of Computer Programming, Sorting and Searching. |
| |Vol.3. Addism tresher mass.1973. |
| |2. A.Nijenhuis and H.S.Wilf, Combinatorial Algorithms, Academic Press. |
| |New York 1975. |
| | |
| |3. M.Garey and D.Johnson, Computers and Intractability: A Guide to the |
| |theory of pleteners. Johnson, Freeman and San Francisco, |
| |1979. |
| | |
| |4. A.V.Aho, J.E.Hoperoft, JD Ullman, The Design and Analysis of |
| |Computer Algorithms. Addison – Wesley, Reading’, MASS. 1974. |
| | |
Computer Laboratory Exercise
(Data structure exercise for Programming in C++)
1. Arrays
1. Operations on Arrays
2. Linear Search
3. Binary Search
2. Sorting
2.1 Bubble Sort
2.2 Selection Sort
2.3 Insertion Sort
2.4 Shell Sort
2.5 Quick Sort
2.6 Heap Sort
3. Stacks and Queues
1. Operations on Stack
2. Operations on Queue
3. Operations on Priority Queue
4. Operations on Circular Queue
4. Linked Lists
1. Singly Linked List
2. Doubly Linked List
3. Double-ended List
5. Recursion
1. Towers of Honoi
2. Merge Sort
6. Binary Tree Traversal
7. Conversion of Polish Expression and Evaluation
Group D: Elective IV (Semester IV)
|Title of the Course | FLUID DYNAMICS |
|Paper Number |XXIII |
|Category |Elective-IV |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | Basic Differential Equations, Vector Calculus and Complex Analysis |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Kinematics of Fluids in motion. Real fluids and Ideal fluids- Velocity of a fluid at a|
| |point, Stream lines , path lines , steady and unsteady flows- Velocity potential - The |
| |vorticity vector- Local and particle rates of changes - Equations of continuity - Worked |
| |examples - Acceleration of a fluid - Conditions at a rigid boundary. |
| |Chapter 2. Sec 2.1 to 2.10. |
| |UNIT-II: Equations of motion of a fluid : Pressure at a point in a fluid at rest.- Pressure at a |
| |point in a moving fluid - Conditions at a boundary of two inviscid immiscible fluids- Euler’s |
| |equation of motion - Discussion of the case of steady motion under conservative body forces. |
| |Chapter 3. Sec 3.1 to 3.7 |
| |UNIT-III : Some three dimensional flows. Introduction- Sources, sinks and doublets - Images in a|
| |rigid infinite plane - Axis symmetric flows - Stokes stream function |
| |Chapter 4 Sec 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5. |
| |UNIT-IV : Some two dimensional flows : Meaning of two dimensional flow - Use of Cylindrical |
| |polar coordinates - The stream function - The complex potential for two dimensional , |
| |irrotational incompressible flow - Complex velocity potentials for standard two dimensional |
| |flows - Some worked examples - Two dimensional Image systems - The Milne Thompson circle |
| |Theorem. |
| |Chapter 5. Sec 5.1 to 5.8 |
| |UNIT-V Viscous flows: Stress components in a real fluid. - Relations between Cartesian components|
| |of stress- Translational motion of fluid elements - The rate of strain quadric and principle |
| |stresses - Some further properties of the rate of strain quadric - Stress analysis in fluid |
| |motion - Relation between stress and rate of strain- The coefficient of viscosity and Laminar |
| |flow - The Navier – Stokes equations of motion of a Viscous fluid. |
| |Chapter 8. Sec 8.1 to 8.9 |
|Recommended Text | F. Chorlton, Text Book of Fluid Dynamics ,CBS Publications. Delhi ,1985. |
|Reference Books |1. R.W.Fox and A.T.McDonald. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, Wiley, 1985. |
| |2. E.Krause, Fluid Mechanics with Problems and Solutions, Springer, 2005. |
| |3. B.S.Massey, J.W.Smith and A.J.W.Smith, Mechanics of Fluids, |
| |Taylor and Francis, New York, 2005 |
| |4. P.Orlandi, Fluid Flow Phenomena, Kluwer, New Yor, 2002. |
| |5. T.Petrila, Basics of Fluid Mechanics and Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, |
| |Springer, berlin, 2004. |
|Title of the Course |COMBINATORICS |
|Paper Number |XXIII |
|Category |Elective- IV |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Classical Techniques : Basic combinatorial numbers - Generator functions and |
| |Recurrence Relations – Symmetric functions – Multinomials – Inclusion and Exclusion Principle. |
| |Chapter 1 : Sections 1 to 5 only (avoid 6 ). |
| |UNIT-II : Polya Theory : Necklace problem and Burnside’s lemma – cycle Index of Permutation |
| |group – Polya’s Theorems and their applications – Binary operations on permutation Groups. |
| | |
| |Chapter 2 : Sections 1 to 4 only |
| |UNIT-III : Schur Functions : Robinson–Schensted–Knuth correspondence – Combinatorics of the |
| |Schur Functions |
| |Chapter 3 : Sections 1 & 2 only . |
| | |
| |More on Schur functions: Little wood – Richardson Rule – Plethysm and Polya process – The Hook |
| |formula. |
| | |
| |Chapter 5 : Sections 1 to 3 only |
| |UNIT-IV : Character Theory of Sn : Character Theory of finite groups . |
| |Chapter 6 : Sections 1 only |
| | |
| |Matching Theory : Partially ordered set – Basic Existence Theory |
| |Chapter 6 : Sections 1 & 2 only |
| |UNIT-V : Inversion Techniques : Classical Inversion Formulae Inversion via Mobius Function. |
| |Chapter 7 : Sections 1 & 2 only. |
| | |
| |Designs : Existence and construction . |
| |Chapter 8 : Section 1 only |
| | |
| |Ramsey Theory : Ramsey Theorem. |
| |Chapter 9 : Section 1 only |
|Recommended Text | V.Krishnamurthy, Combinatorics – Theory and Applications, Affiliated East – West Press Pvt Ltd, |
| |New Delhi . 1985. |
|Reference Books | Aigner, M. Combinatorial Theory, Springer Verlag, Berlin 1979. |
| |Liu, C.L. Introduction to combinatorial Mathematics . MC |
| |Grimaldi,R.P. Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics : An applied Introduction ( 4th Edition |
| |).Pearson, (8th Indian Print) |
| |. |
|Title of the Course |MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS |
|Paper Number |XXIII |
|Category |Elective-IV |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite |Basic Probability Theory |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Sample Moments and their Functions: Notion of a |
| |_ |
| |sample and a statistic – Distribution functions of X, S2 and |
| |_ |
| |( X , S2 ) - (2 distribution – Student t-distribution – Fisher’s Z-distribution – Snedecor’s |
| |F- distribution – Distribution of sample mean from non-normal populations |
| |Chapter 9 : Sections 9.1 to 9.8 |
| |UNIT-II : Significance Test : Concept of a statistical test – Parametric tests for small |
| |samples and large samples - (2 test – Kolmogorov Theorem – Smirnov Theorem – Tests of |
| |Kolmogorov and Smirnov type – The Wald-Wolfovitz and Wilcoxon-Mann-Whitney tests – Independence |
| |Tests by contingency tables. |
| |Chapter 10 : Sections 10.11 |
| |Chapter 11 : 12.1 to 12.7. |
| |UNIT-III : Estimation : Preliminary notion – Consistency estimation – Unbiased estimates – |
| |Sufficiency – Efficiency – Asymptotically most efficient estimates – methods of finding estimates|
| |– confidence Interval. |
| |Chapter 13 : Sections 13.1 to 13.8 (Omit Section 13.9) |
| |UNIT-IV : Analysis of Variance : One way classification and two-way classification. Hypotheses |
| |Testing: Poser functions – OC function- Most Powerful test – Uniformly most powerful test – |
| |unbiased test. |
| |Chapter 15 : Sections 15.1 and 15.2 (Omit Section 15.3) |
| |Chapter 16 : Sections 16.1 to 16.5 (Omit Section 16.6 and 16.7) |
| |UNIT-V : Sequential Analysis : SPRT – Auxiliary Theorem – Wald’s fundamental identity – OC |
| |function and SPRT – E(n) and Determination of A and B – Testing a hypothesis concerning p on 0-1 |
| |distribution and m in Normal distribution. |
| |Chapter 17 : Sections 17.1 to 17.9 ( Omit Section 17.10) |
|Recommended Text | M. Fisz , Probability Theory and Mathematical Statistics, John Wiley and sons, New Your, 1963. |
|Reference Books |E.J.Dudewicz and S.N.Mishra , Modern Mathematical Statistics, John Wiley and Sons, New York, |
| |1988. |
| |V.K.Rohatgi An Introduction to Probability Theory and Mathematical Statistics, Wiley Eastern New |
| |Delhi, 1988(3rd Edn ) |
| |3. G.G.Roussas, A First Course in Mathematical Statistics, |
| |Addison Wesley Publishing Company, 1973 |
| |4. B.L.Van der Waerden, Mathematical Statistics, G.Allen & |
| |Unwin Ltd., London, 1968. |
|Title of the Course |ALGEBRAIC TOPOLOGY |
|Paper Number |XXIII |
|Category |Elective-IV |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite |Algebra, Topology |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Homotopy of paths - Fundamental Group – Covering space -The Fundamental Group of the |
| |circle – Retractions and Fixed points |
| | |
| |Chapter 9: Sections 51 – 55. |
| |UNIT-II : The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra – Borsuk–Ulam Theorem – Deformation Retracts and |
| |Homotopy Type – The Fundamental Group of S n - Fundamental Groups of some surfaces. |
| | |
| |Chapter 9 : Sections 56 - 60 |
| |UNIT-III : Direct sums of Abelian Groups – Free products of Groups – Free Groups – The |
| |Seifert–van Kampen Theorem – The Fundamental Group of a wedge of circles. |
| | |
| |Chapter 11 : Sections 67 -71. |
| |UNIT-IV : Fundamental groups of surfaces – Homology of surfaces – cutting and pasting – The |
| |classification theorem – constructing compact surfaces. |
| |Chapter 12 : Sections 74 - 78 |
| |UNIT-V : Equivalence of covering spaces – The Universal covering space – covering transformations|
| |– Existence of covering spaces |
| |Chapter 13 : Sections 79 - 82 |
|Recommended Text |J.R.Munkres, Toplogy, Pearson Education Asia , Second Edition 2002. |
| |M.K.Agoston, Algebraic topology – A First Course, Marcel Dekker, 1962. |
| |Satya Deo, Algebraic Topology , Hindustan Book Agency, New Delhi, 2003. |
| |M.Greenberg and Harper, Algebraic Topology – A First course, Benjamin/Cummings, 1981. |
| |C.F. Maunder, Algebraic topology, Van Nostrand, New York, 1970. |
| |A.Hatcher, Algebraic Topology, Cambridge University Press, South Asian Edition 2002. |
| |W.S.Massey, Algebrai Topology : An Introduction, Springer 1990 |
Group E: Elective V (Semester IV)
|Title of the Course | TENSOR ANALYSIS AND RELATIVITY |
|Paper Number | XXIV |
|Category |Elective -V |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite |Vector Calculus and Mechanics |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Tensor Algebra : Systems of Different orders – Summation Convention – Kronecker Symbols|
| |- Transformation of coordinates in Sn - Invariants – Covariant and Contravariant vectors - |
| |Tensors of Second Order – Mixed Tensors – Zero Tensor – Tensor Field – Algebra of Tensors – |
| |Equality of Tensors – Symmetric and Skew-symmetric tensors - Outer multiplication, Contraction |
| |and Inner Multiplication – Quotient Law of Tensors – Reciprocal Tensor – Relative Tensor – Cross |
| |Product of Vectors. |
| |Chapter I : I.1 – I.3,I.7 and I.8 and Chapter II : II.1 – II.19 |
| |UNIT-II : Tensor Calculus : Riemannian Space – Christoffel Symbols and their properties. |
| |Chapter III: III.1 and III.2 |
| |UNIT-III : Tensor Calculus(contd) : Covariant Differentiation of Tensors – Riemann–Christoffel |
| |Curvature Tensor – Intrinsic Differentiation |
| |Chapter III:III.3 – III.5 |
| |UNIT-IV : Special Theory of Relativity : Galilean Transformations – Maxwell’s equations – The |
| |ether Theory – The Principle of Relativity. |
| |Relativistic Kinematics : Lorentz Transformation equations – Events and simultaneity – Example |
| |– Einstein Train – Time dilation – Longitudinal Contraction - Invariant Interval - Proper time |
| |and Proper distance - World line - Example – twin paradox – addition of velocities – |
| |Relativistic Doppler effect. |
| |Chapter 7 : Sections 7.1 and 7.2 |
| |UNIT-V : Relativistic Dynamics : Momentum – Energy – Momentum – energy four vector – Force - |
| |Conservation of Energy – Mass and energy – Example – inelastic collision – Principle of |
| |equivalence – Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulations. |
| |Accelerated Systems : Rocket with constant acceleration – example – Rocket with constant thrust.|
| |Chapter 7 : Sections 7.3 and 7.4 |
|Recommended Text |U.C. De, Absos Ali Shaikh and Joydeep Sengupta, Tensor Calculus, Narosa Publishing House, New |
|For Units I,II and III |Delhi, 2004. |
| | |
|For Units IV and V |D.Greenwood, Classical Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1985. |
|Reference Books |J.L.Synge and A.Schild, Tensor Calculus, Toronto, 1949. |
| |A.S.Eddington. The Mathematical Theory of Relativitity, Cambridge University Press, 1930. |
| |P.G.Bergman, An Introduction to Theory of Relativity, Newyor, 1942. |
| |C.E.Weatherburn, Riemannian Geometry and the Tensor Calculus, Cambridge, 1938. |
|Title of the Course |MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS |
|Paper Number |XXIV |
|Category |Elective - V |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Integral Equations, Sturm–Liouville Theorem and Green’s Functions |
| |Chapter 4: Sections 4.1 – 4.4 only. |
| |UNIT-II : Methods of Non linear Dynamics – I : Phase Portraits . |
| |Chapter 6 : Sections 6.1 – 6.4 only. |
| |UNIT-III : Methods of Non linear Dynamics - II : Stability and Bifurcation. |
| |Chapter 7 : Sections 7.1 -7.4 only . |
| |UNIT-IV : Non linear Differential Equations and their solutions. |
| |Chapter 8 : Sections 8.1 - 8.3 only |
| |UNIT-V : Non linear Integral Equations and their solutions. |
| |Chapter 9 : Sections 9.1 – 9.7 only. |
|Recommended Text |R.S.Kaushal and D.Parashar, Advanced Methods of Mathematical Physics |
|Reference Books |Arfken,G (1966) Mathematical Methods for Physicists, A.P.NY. |
| |Butkor,E. (1968) Mathematical Physics, Addison –Wesley. |
| | |
| |Strogatz,S.H.(1994) Non linear Dynamics and Chaos : With |
| |Applications to Physics, Biology, Chemistry and Engineering. |
| |Addison – Wesley |
| |Tabor, M (1989) Chaos and integrability in Non linear systems: |
| |An Introduction, John Wiley & Sons,NY. |
| | |
| |Lakshmanan, M (1988). Solitons : Introduction and Applications, |
| |Springer Verlag, Berlin |
| | |
| |Debnath, Lokenath ( 1997). Introduction to Non linear PDE for |
| |Scientists and Engineers , Birkhauser , Boston |
|Title of the Course | FINANCIAL MATHEMATICS |
|Paper Number |XXIV |
|Category |Elective-V |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite |Stochastic processes |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : Single Period Models : Definitions from Finance – Pricing a forward One-step Binary |
| |Model – a ternary Model – Characterization of no arbitrage – Risk-Neutral Probability Measure |
| |Chapter 1 |
| |UNIT-II : Binomial Trees and Discrete parameter martingales |
| |Multi-period Binary model – American Options – Discrete parameter martingales and Markov |
| |processes – Martingale Theorems – Binomial Representation Theorem – Overture to Continuous models|
| | |
| |Chapter 2 |
| |UNIT-III : Brownian Motion : Definition of the process – Levy’s Construction of Brownian |
| |Motion – The Reflection Principle and Scaling – Martingales in Continuous time. |
| |Chapter 3 |
| |UNIT-IV : Stochastic Calculus : Stock Prices are not differentiable – Stochastic Integration – |
| |Ito’s formula – Integration by parts and Stochastic Fubini Theorem–Girsanov Theorem – Brownian |
| |Martingale Representation Theorem – Geometric Brownian Motion – The Feynman-Kac Representation |
| |Chapter 4 |
| |UNIT-V : Block-Scholes Model : Basic Block-Scholes Model – Block-Scholes price and hedge for |
| |European Options – Foreign Exchange – Dividends – Bonds – Market price of risk. |
| |Chapter 5 |
|Recommended Text |Alison Etheridge, A Course in Financial Calculus, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2002. |
|Reference Books |1. Martin Boxter and Andrew Rennie, Financial Calculus : An Introduction to Derivatives Pricing,|
| |Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1996. |
| |2. Damien Lamberton and Bernard Lapeyre , (Translated by Nicolas Rabeau and Farancois Mantion ), |
| |Introduction to Stochastic Calculus Applied to Finance, Chapman and Hall, 1996 |
| |3. Marek Musiela and Marek Rutkowski, Martingale Methods in Financial Modeling, Springer Verlag, |
| |New York, 1988. |
| |4. Robert J.Elliott and P.Ekkehard Kopp, Mathematics of Financial Markets, Springer Verlag, New |
| |York, 2001 (3rd Printing) |
|Title of the Course |CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS AND INTEGRAL EQUATIONS |
|Paper Number |XXIV |
|Category |Elective-V |Year |II |Credits |4 |Course Code | |
| | |Semester |IV | | | | |
|Pre-requisite | UG level Differential equations |
|Course Outline | UNIT-I : The Method of Variations in Problems with Fixed Boundaries |
| |Chapter 6 : Sections 1 to 7 (Elsgolts) |
| |UNIT-II : Variational Problems with Moving Boundaries and certain other problems and Sufficient |
| |conditions for an Extremum |
| |Chapter 7 : Sections 1 to 4 (Elsgolts) |
| |Chapter 8 : Sections 1to 3(Elsgolts) |
| |UNIT-III : Variational Problems Involving a conditional Extremum |
| |Chapter 9 : Sections 1 to 3. (Elsgolts) |
| |UNIT-IV : Integral Equations with Separable Kernels and Method of successive approximations. |
| |Chapter 1 : Sections 1.1 to 1.7 (Kanwal) |
| |Chapter 2 : Sections 2.1 to 2.5 (Kanwal) |
| |Chapter 3 : Sections 3.1 to 3.5 (Kanwal) |
| |UNIT-V: Classical Fredholm Theory , Symmetric Kernels and Singular Integral Equations |
| |Chapter 4 : Sections 4.1 to 4.5 (Kanwal) |
| |Chapter 7 : Sections 7.1 to 7.6 (Kanwal) |
| |Chapter 8 : Sections 8.1 to 8.5 (Kanwal) |
|Recommended Text | For Units I,II and III : L. Elsgolts , Differential Equations and the Calculus of variations, Mir|
| |Publishers, Moscow, 1973 (2nd Edition) |
| |For Units IV and V :Ram P.Kanwal,Linear Integral Equations, Academic Press, New York, 1971. |
|Reference Books |I.M.Gelfand and S.V.Fomin, Calculus of Variations, Prentice-Hall Inc. New Jersey, 1963. |
| |A.S.Gupta, Calculus of Variations with Applications, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 1997. |
| |M.Krasnov, A.Kiselev and G.Makarenko, Problems and Exercises in Integral Equations, Mir |
| |Publishers, Moscow, 1979. |
| |S.G.Mikhlin, Linear Integral Equations, Hindustan Publishing Corp. Delhi,1960. |
| |L.A.Pars, An Introduction to the Calculus of Variations, Heinemann, London, 1965. |
| |R.Weinstock, Calculus of Variations with Applications to |
| |Physics and Engineering, McGraw-Hill Book Company |
| |Inc. New York, 1952. |
18. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN MEDICAL LABORATORY TECHNOLOGY
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER- III
|Title of the paper |Microbiology –Core -7 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To introduce to the students the various pathogens involved in diseased conditions |
Course outline: (Microbiology)
UNIT I
Introduction to microbiology, morphology and nature of micro-organisms, growth and nutrition, classification and identification, sterilization and disinfection, antimicrobial agents, bacterial genetics, antiviral agents.
Microbiology of special environments - air, water, soil, milk and foods,
UNIT II
Evolutionary relationships, morphologic changes during growth. Normal flora of human body. Major groups of bacteria, classification, principles, descriptions of principle groups, growth, survival and death of microorganisms, cultivation of microorganisms, microbial metabolism. Bacteria and nutrition.
UNIT III
Structure, properties and classification of plant and animal viruses, bacteeriophages.
Structure, properties and classification of fungi, mycoplasmas and cell wall defective bacteria, mycobacteria, spirochetes, chlamydiae.
UNIT IV
Microbial techniques: sterilization, disinfection and the treatment of infected materials, culture media, cultural methods, staining and identification methods, mycological methods, counting microorganisms, agglutination tests, antibiotic sensitivity and assay tests, food preservation and food poisoning.
UNIT V
Strategy of anti-microbial therapy, epidemiology and control of community infections, hospital infection, microbial genetics, industrial microbiology and its applications.
Reference Books:
Microbiology - Michael J.Pelczar I.R., Chan E.C.S and Noel R.Kreieg, 2004, 5th
Edition, 27th reprint Tata McGRAW-Hill, New Delhi.
Bioprocesses and Biotechnology for Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals - Jean-Richard Neeser, and Bruce 1 German. 2004. Marcel Dekker.
Principles of Microbiology - Atlas RM, 1997, WCB Publishers.
Microbiology - Daniel Lim, 1998, 2nd edition. McGraw-Hill.
Microbiology: A laboratory manual -.Cappuccino J.G &.Sharman N, 1999, 4th
Edition, Addition Wesley Lonbgman, Inc.
Recommended Books:
Microbiology - Presscot, 2003, 3rd edition, Mc-Graw hill, Boston.
Medical Microbiology:A guide to microbiological infection - David Slack Richard, 1992, 10th, edition, Churchill Livingstone, New York.
Indian Books:
Microbiology of Diseases - Gupta Yanka, 2000 ,1st edition, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi.
Microbiology - Panicker, 2000,6th edition, Orient Longman, Hyderabad.
Web sites:
microbiology-direcLcom
bact.wisc.edu/MicrotextbookJindex.php
|Title of the paper |Medical Laboratory Technology and Biostatistics |
| |Core -8 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the various aspects of Medical Laboratory Technology and Biostatistics |
Course outline: (Medical Laboratory Technology and Biostatistics)
UNIT I
General laboratory techniques, procedures and safety measures - chemicals and related substances, laboratory ware, volumetric equipments and its calibration, laboratory operations, buffer solutions and their actions, Units of measurement.
UNIT II
Specimen collection, pre analytical variables, automation in clinical laboratory - basic concepts, automation of analytical processes, integrated automation, automation of point of care analyzers.
Analytical techniques and instrumentation - Basic concepts, definitions and applications of chromatography - paper, Ion exchange, affinity, HPLC, Gel filtration and Thin layer chromatography, radioactivity and UV - visible spectrophotometry – Beer-Lambert's law.
UNIT III
Laboratory operation - evaluation of methods with an introduction to statistical techniques - basic statistics, concepts, performance standards, selecting an evaluating analytical methods, assessing method acceptability, establishment and use of reference values, clinical laboratory informatics - computer system, microcomputer applications, laboratory information systems, future use of computers.
UNIT IV
Laboratory management- health care delivery and financial strategies, laboratory strategies for managed care, financial management, human resource management, space and facility management.
Quality management - fundamentals, total quality management, total testing process, control of pre - analytical and analytical variables, external quality assessment and proficiency testing, new quality initiatives.
UNIT V
Introduction, meaning and scope, classification of data, frequency distribution, graphical representative, and measures of central tendency - mean median, standard deviation, standard error, skewness and kurtosis, probability, probability distribution, normal, binomial and Poisson distribution, Hardy Weinberg law. Random variable - standard distributions and their properties distribution, function, decomposition, of distribution, classification, functions of random variables, Discrete and continuous distribution. ]
Applications in biology. Elements of sampling theory - simple, stratified and systematic sampling schemes. Correlation and regression analysis - multiple and partial correlation, rank correlation, large sample test, small samples tests, tests of significance : Chi - square test, student t - test and analysis of variance - one - way and two way analysis of variance, COANOVA goodness of fit and homogeneity, elements of demography, computer applications in biostatistics.
Reference Books:
A procedure manual for Rountine Diagnostic Tests, Volume I,II & III – Kanai L, Mukerjee, 8th reprint, 2001, TATA Mc Graw-Hill publishing Co. Ltd.
Methods in Interpretations – Ramnik Soot, 1994, 4th edition, Jaypee Prakash Publications.
|Title of the paper |Practical III (Microbiology)- Core-9 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To get hands on training in Microbial techniques and in the field of Parasitology |
Course outline: (Practical III - Microbiology)
1. Safety in microbiology, laboratory equipments, perparation of glass wares and sterilization techniques.
2. Culture methods: isolation, maintenance, systemic study, staining and identification.
3. Mycological methods, counting microorganisms, antibiotic sensitivity and assay methods.
4. Agglutination tests, fluorescent antibody techniques.
Reference Books:
Clinical Pathology and parasitology for Medical Laboratory technology - Sarkas
Medical Parasitology - N.C.Dey & T.K.Dey.
links.html
|Title of the paper |Parasitology – Elective 5 |
|Category: E |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To introduce to the students the various parasites involved in diseased conditions |
Course outline: (Parasitology)
UNIT I
Taxonomy and classification of parasites, giardia lamblia, trichonomas, intestinal parasites. Flagellates, homoflagellates and other intestinal amoebas, free living amoeba.
UNIT II
Plasmodium, isospora, cryptosporodium, sarcocystis, toxoplasma gondii, babesiea micrcti, balantidium coli, pneumocystis carinii
UNIT III
Identification, classification and properties of protozoa - rhizopoda, mastigophora, sporoxoa and ciliated parasites in faeces and blood.
UNIT IV
Microfilaria. Helminthes - trematodes, nematodes, cestodes.
UNIT V
Anthropods - general features of insects of medical importance and their role in the transmission of. diseases.
Reference Books:
Microbiology - Michael J.Pelczar I.R., Chan E.C.S and Noel R.Kreieg, 2004, 5th
Edition, 27th reprint Tata McGRAW-Hill, New Delhi.
Bioprocesses and Biotechnology for Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals - Jean-Richard Neeser, and Bruce 1 German. 2004. Marcel Dekker.
Principles of Microbiology - Atlas RM, 1997, WCB Publishers.
Microbiology - Daniel Lim, 1998, 2nd edition. McGraw-Hill.
Microbiology: A laboratory manual -.Cappuccino J.G &.Sharman N, 1999, 4th
Edition, Addition Wesley Lonbgman, Inc.
Recommended Books:
Microbiology - Presscot, 2003, 3rd edition, Mc-Graw hill, Boston.
Medical Microbiology:A guide to microbiological infection - David Slack Richard, 1992, 10th, edition, Churchill Livingstone, New York.
Indian Books:
Microbiology of Diseases - Gupta Yanka, 2000 ,1st edition, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi.
Microbiology - Panicker, 2000,6th edition, Orient Longman, Hyderabad.
Web sites:
microbiology-direcLcom
bact.wisc.edu/MicrotextbookJindex.php
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
|Title of the paper |Diagnostic Clinical Biochemistry-Elective 6 |
|Category: ED |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the basics of disease based clinical investigations. |
Course Outline : (Diagnostic Clinical Biochemistry)
UNIT I
Specimen Collection and preservation of samples, automation in clinical laboratory – basic concepts.
UNIT II
Diagnostic significance of serum enzymes, - CPK, amylase, transaminases, alkaline phosphatases and LDH.
UNIT III
Liver function test with special reference to hepatitis and jaundice, renal function test and gastric function tests.
UNIT IV
Blood lipid profile – risk in cardiovascular diseases, routine urine analysis and stone analysis. Composition analysis of gall stones and renal calculi.
UNIT V
Prenatal and postnatal diagnosis of inborn errors using enzyme assays, PCR, ARMS, RT-PCR, DHPLC in amniotic fluid, chorionic villi.
Reference Books:
Varley’s Practical Clinical Biochemistry by Alan H Gowenlock, published by CBS Publishers and distributors, India Sixth Edition (1988).
Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical chemistry – Burtis and Ashwood, Fifth Edition, WB Saunders Company, Oxford Science Publications USA, (2001)
Practical Biochemistry – Keith Wilson & John Walker, fifth edition, Cambridge Universtiy Press, UK (2000).
Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – Palanivelu third edition (2004).
Biochemical calculations – Irwin H. Segel, second edition, John Wiley & Sons, USA (1976).
Introduction to Practical Biochemistry by Sawhney and Randhir Singh, Narosa Publishing House, London (2000).
Experiments in Biochemistry – A Hands on Approach by Shawn O Farrell and Ryan T Ranallo, Thomson Learning Inc., USA (2000)
Recommended Books:
Principles of Instrumental analysis – Skoog, Holler, Nieman, fifth edition Published by Harcourt College Publishers, Singapore (2001).
Essentials of Practical Biochemistry by Lalit M Srivatsava, Nibhriti Das, Subrata Sinha, Published by CBS Publishers and Distributors, India, (2002)
Indian Books:
Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – Palanivelu third edition (2004).
|Title of the paper |Serology and Hematology-Core 10 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the various components involved in the field of Serology and Hematology |
Course outline: (Serology and Hematology)
UNIT I
Preparation of serology reagents and antisera. Storage and stability, evaluation and interpretation -VDRL, Kahn flocculation test, Widal test, C- reactive protein, anti streptolysis O, rheumatoid factors, Australia antigen, Hbs Ag, serological diagnosis of rheumatic disorders with Rapi Tex RF, CRD, ASL Rapid diagnostics in serology.
UNIT II
Immunization - bacterial, viral and polysaccharide vaccines, immunity to bacterial, viral and parasitic infections, immunopathology, Herd immunity, attenuation, classical methods of attenuation, by recombined DNA technology, constraints on the use of attenuated vaccines, directions for future development of live attenuated virus vaccines, vaccines containing individual protective antigens, idiotypes, spectific vaccines, current vaccines, experimental vaccines, adjuvants.
UNIT III
Sero diagnostic tests - General principles, serologic methods - agglutination, precipitin, complement fixation, fluorescent antibody methods, treponemal and non-treponemal antigen test, serologic response to infection - salomonella, brucella, tularemia, ricketissial diseases, anistreptococcal antibodies, streptococcus antibodies, cold agglutinins, hepatitis associated antigens, antibodies to tissue antigens, serology in chronic liver disease, antibodies to thyroid antigens, antinuclear antibodies, serologic procedures in parasitic diseases.
UNIT IV
Virology -pathogenesis of viral infections, general principles and specific steps in viral pathogenesis, diagnostic virology - introduction, laboratory diagnosis of viral diseases, growth of viruses from clinical samples, serologic methods, rapid methods for virus detection, clinician’s role, approach to the major syndromes:
UNIT V
Composition and functions of Blood, plasma proteins and variations in diseases. Haemopoiesis and diseases of hemopoietic stem cells, erythrocyte disorders, granulocyte and monocyte disorders, lymphocytic disorders.
Structure, synthesis, metabolism and functions of haemoglobin, haemoglobinopathies, anaemia, structure, synthesis, metabolism and functions of porphyrin. Diseases related to porphyrins. Haemostases, clotting mechanism, biochemistry of plasma coagulation factors hemorrhagic diseases, disorders of clotting mechanism.
Lymphopoiesis, lymphatic system and lymphocytic disorders. Biochemistry, metabolism and function of platelets. Preservation and clinic at use of blood and blood components - blood banking, erythrocytes, leukocytes and platelets.
Reference Books:
Notes on Hematology – Hughes Jones N.C, Vikramasinvhe S.N, 1973, 6th edition, Black Well Science Ltd.
|Title of the paper |Practical IV (Serology and Hematology) - Core - 11 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To get hands on training in the field of Serology and Hematology |
Course outline: (Practical III - Serology and Hematology)
1. Introduction to serology and serodiagnostic procedures - principles of immunologic neactiols, serodiagnosis
2. Laboratory procedures in serology - collection and preparation of specimen, serological test for syphilis, agglutination test, C reactive protein test, Rheumatoid arthritis test, serodiagnosis of streptococcal infection, serodiagnostic test for AIDS, Rubella. Immunologic test for pregnancy
3. Blood group and Rh typing, blood banking, anti human globulin or coombs test, cross matching, Blood transfusion process.
Hematology
1. TC & DC, Hb, ESR, PCV, MCV, MCHC, MCH, platelet count.
2. Clotting time, bleeding time, prothrombin time, whole blood coagulation
time
3. Blood film staining - Leishmann stain, Heinz body staining, reticulocyte staining, test for Sickle cell Hb, Carboxy Hb, Met Hb and Sulp Hb.
4. Screening test for Factor XIII deficiency
5. Platelet aggregation factor
6. Complement assay.
7. Periodic acid Schiffs stain, Sudan Black stain for leukemia
Reference Books:
Medical Laboratory Technology - Ramnik Sood
Virology - Bernard Fields
Essential Immunology - Ivan Roitt
Clinical Diagnosis - Todd and Sanford
Haematology – Williams, Beutler, Erslev, Lichtman.
SEMESTER- IV
|Title of the paper |Pathology-Core -12 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Fourth Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the various pathogens involved in pathological conditions |
Course outline : (Pathology)
UNIT I
General pathology - Introduction to pathology, cellular structure and metabolism, cell injury, causes of cell injury, cell injury and necrosis, apoptosis, sub cellular responses to cell injury, cellular adaptations of growth and differentiation, intracellular accumulation, pathologic calcification, hyaline change, cellular ageing.
UNIT II
Inflammation and tissue repair - Acute and chronic inflammation, chemical mediators of inflammation, morphologic patterns in acute and chronic inflammation, systemic effects of inflammation, control of normal cell growth, extra cellular matrix and cell matrix interactions, repair by connective tissues, wound healing, overview of inflammatory - reparative response.
UNIT III
Hemodynamic, genetic and environmental disorders - edema, hyperaemia and congestion, haemostasis and thrombosis, embolism, infarction, shock, mutations, mendelian disorders, disorders with multifactorial inheritance, single - gene disorders with none-classic inheritance, molecular diagnosis, diagnosis of genetic diseases, humans and the environment, common environmental and occupational exposure.
UNIT IV
Infectious diseases and diseases of child hood and infancy - general principles of microbial pathogenesis, respiratory infections, gastrointestinal infections, parasitic intestinal infections, sexually transmitted diseases, gram-positive pyogenic bacterial infections, infections of childhood and adolescence, opportunistic and AIDS associated infections, tropical, zoonotic and vector - prone infection, birth weight and gestational age, birth injuries, congenital malformation, perinatal infections, neonatal respiratory distress syndrome (RDS), erythroblastosis fetalis, inborn errors of metabolism and other genetic disorders, sudden infant death syndrome, tumors and tumor - like lesions of infancy and childhood.
UNIT V
Histology and diseases of the organ systems - introduction to histotechnology and cytotechnology, laboratory techniques - histochemistry and histopathology, diagnostic exfoliative cytology, diseases of the heart, lung, head and neck, Gl tract, liver and biliary tract, pancreas, kindey, genito - urinary tract, eye, skin, central nervous system, muscles and bones.
Reference Books:
Robbins pathologic basis of disease - Ramzis. cotran, vinay kumar, tukar Collins.
Essential pathology for dental students - Harsh mohan.
Medical laboratory technology - A procedure manual for routine diagnostic tests - Kannai L.mukherjee.
Clinical diagnosis by lab methods - Isreal Davidson.
Clinical pathology and parasitology for medical Laboratory technology – Sarkas.
Recommended Books:
Essentials of Histology – William Krause, Hary Clitts J, 1994, 1st edition, Little Brown & Company.
|Title of the paper |Practical V (Pathology) – Core 13 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Fourth Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To get trained with various Pathological techniques |
Course outline: (Practical V - Pathology)
1. Clinical pathology and urine analysis - Urine analysis, routine examination of urine, rapid chemical test of urine.
2. Examination of miscellaneous body fluids - CSF, laboratory investigations, serous fluids, synovial fluid, gastric juice.
3. Semen analysis - Clinical significance, specimen collection, laboratory investigations, examination for the presence of semen.
4. Stool examination - Clinical significance, collection of faecal specimen, laboratory investigation.
5. Histopathology of various organs - liver, kiney, heart, aorta, brain, testis, ovary, spleen, pancreas and endocrine glands.
Reference Books:
Robbins pathologic basis of disease - Ramzis. cotran, vinay kumar, tukar Collins.
Essential pathology for dental students - Harsh mohan.
Medical laboratory technology - A procedure manual for routine diagnostic tests - Kannai L.Mukherjee.
Clinical diagnosis by lab methods - Isreal Davidson.
Clinical pathology and parasitology for medical Laboratory technology – Sarkas.
|Title of the paper |Pharmacology and Toxicology-Elective -7 |
|Category: E |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Fourth Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |To understand the metabolism of drugs and its toxic effects |
Course outline: (Pharmacology and Toxicology)
UNIT I
General principles of pharmacology. Routes of drug administration. Modes of action of drugs. Methods and measurements in pharmacology. Absorption and distribution of drugs. Drug elimination and pharmacokinetice. Pharmacodynamics. Adverse drug effects.
UNIT II
Drugs acting on automonous Nervous systern-cholinergic and adrenergic system and related drugs. Drugs acting on peripheral Nervous System - skeletal muscle relaxant, local anesthetics. Drugs acting on Central Nervous System - anesthetis, sedative, CNS stimulants and depressants, drugs for epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's diseases and others and antipsychotic drugs.
UNIT III
Drugs acting on Respiratory system - drugs for cough, asthma and other related diseases. Drugs affecting Blood and Blood formation - effect on coaulation, bleeding and thrombosis. Hormones and related drugs. Cardiovascular drugs - cardiac glycosides, antiarrhythmic, antifungal, antiischemic and antihypertensive drugs. Chemotherapy - anticancer and neoplastic drugs.
UNIT IV
Drugs acting on Gastrointestinal system - drugs for ulcer, constipation, diarrhea and other related drugs. Drugs acting on Kidney - diuretics and antidiuretics. Antibiotics - antimicrobial, antifungal. antiviral, anti inflammatory, antihelminthic, antiprotozoal drugs and immunosupprments. Miscellaneous drugs - drugs for Skin diseases, antiseptic, disinfectants, chelating agents, vitamins, vaccines and sera.
UNIT V :
General principles of toxicology. Introduction. Bioaccumulation, Bioconcentration, Biomagnification. Food toxicology - toxins from common food, food adulteration, synthetic chemicals used in food processing and acts on food processing and acts on food processing. Industrial toxicology - Waste materials from various industries and related toxicity. Drugs of abuse - alcohol, morphine, codeine, heroin etc.
BOOKS
1. Essentials of Medical Pharmacology - K.D. Tripathi
2. General Principles of Toxicology - Gazerette and Doul
3. Pharmacology - H.P Rand, M.M Dale and J.M Ritter
|Title of the paper |Project + Viva voce-Core 14 |
|Category: C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject code |
| |Second year & Fourth Semester |8 | |
|Pre-requisites |Bachelor degree in any life science discipline |
|Objective |- |
C - Core; E- Elective; ED- Extra Discipliniary
1. Reference Books: Author–Year-Title-Edition-Publisher-Place
2. Recommended Books: Author–Year-Title-Edition-Publisher-Place
3. Websites: e-learning resources
19. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN PHYSICS
SECOND YEAR
SYLLABUS
Paper 11: STATISTICAL MECHANICS
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, THIRD SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: Phase Transitions
Thermodynamic potentials - Phase Equilibrium - Gibb’s phase rule - Phase transitions and Ehrenfest’s classifications –Third law of Thermodynamics.
Order parameters - Landau theory of phase transition - Critical indices - Scale transformations and dimensional analysis.
UNIT 2: Statistical Mechanics and Thermodynamics
Foundations of statistical mechanics - Specification of states of a system - Microcanonical ensemble - Phase space – Entropy - Connection between statistics and thermodynamics – Entropy of an ideal gas using the microcanonical ensemble - Entropy of mixing and Gibb’s paradox.
UNIT 3: Canonical and Grand canonical Ensembles
Trajectories and density of states - Liouville’s theorem - Canonical and grand canonical ensembles - Partition function - Calculation of statistical quantities - Energy and density fluctuations.
UNIT 4: Classical and Quantum Statistics
Density matrix - Statistics of ensembles - Statistics of indistinguishable particles - Maxwell-Boltzman statistics - Fermi-Dirac statistics – Ideal Fermi gas – Degeneracy - Bose-Einstein statistics - Plank radiation formula - Ideal Bose gas - Bose-Einstein condensation.
UNIT 5: Real Gas, Ising Model and Fluctuations
Cluster expansion for a classical gas - Virial equation of state – Calculation of the first virial coefficient in the cluster expansion - Ising model - Mean-field theories of the Ising model in three, two and one dimensions - Exact solutions in one-dimension.
Correlation of space-time dependent fluctuations - Fluctuations and transport phenomena - Brownian motion - Langevin theory - Fluctuation-dissipation theorem - The Fokker-Planck equation.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. S.K.Sinha , 1990 , Statistical Mechanics , Tata Mc Graw – Hill, New Delhi.
2. B. K. Agarwal and M. Eisner, 1998, Statistical Mechanics, Second Edition New
Age International, New Delhi.
1. J. K. Bhattacharjee, 1996, Statistical Mechanics: An Introductory Text, Allied Publication, New Delhi.
2. F. Reif, 1965, Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics, Mac Graw-Hill, New York.
3. C. Kittel, 1987, Thermal Physics, 2nd edition, CBS Publication, New Delhi.
4. M. K. Zemansky, 1968, Heat and Thermodynamics, 5th edition, Mc Graw-Hill New York.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. R. K. Pathria, 1996, Statistical Mechanics, 2nd edition, Butter Worth-Heinmann, New Delhi.
2. L. D. Landau and E. M. Lifshitz, 1969, Statistical Physics, Pergomon Press,Oxford.
3. K. Huang, 2002, Statistical Mechanics, Taylor and Francis, London
4. W. Greiner, L. Neise and H. Stoecker, thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics, Springer Verlang, New York.
5. A. B. Gupta, H. Roy, 2002, Thermal Physics, Books and Allied, Kolkata.
6. A. Kalidas, M. V. Sangaranarayanan, Non-Equilibrium Thermodynamics, Macmllan India, New Delhi.
7. M. Glazer and J. Wark, 2001, Statistical Mechanics, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
8. L. P. Kadanoff, 2001, Statistical Physics - Statics, Dynamics and Renormalization, World Scientific, Singapore.
9. F. W. Sears and G. L. Salinger, 1998, Thermodynamics, Kinetic Theory and Statistical Thermodynamics, 3rd Edition, Narosa, New Delhi.
WEB SITES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Paper 12: NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, THIRD SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
Unit 1 – Nuclear interactions
Nucleon-nucleon interaction – Tensor forces – Meson theory of nuclear forces – Yukawa potential – Nucleon-Nucleon scattering – Effective range theory – Spin dependence of nuclear forces – Charge independence and charge symmetry of nuclear forces – Isospin formalism
Unit 2 – Nuclear reactions
Types of reactions and conservation laws – Energetics of nuclear reactions –Dynamics of nuclear reactions – Q-value equation – Scattering and reaction cross sections – Compound nucleus reactions – Direct reactions – Resonance scattering – Breit-Wigner one level formula
Unit 3 – Nuclear Models
Liquid drop model – Bohr-Wheeler theory of fission – Experimental evidence for shell effects – Shell model – Spin-orbit coupling - Magic numbers – Angular momenta and parities of nuclear ground states – Qualitative discussion and estimate of transition rates – Magnetic moments and Schmidt lines – Collective model of Bohr and Mottelson
Unit 4 – Nuclear decay
Beta decay – Fermi theory of beta decay – Shape of the beta spectrum – Total decay rate - Mass of the neutrino – Angular momentum and parity selection rules – Allowed and forbidden decays – Comparative half-lives – Neutrino physics – Non-conservation of parity – Gamma decay – Multipole transitions in nuclei – Angular momentum and parity selection rules – Internal conversion – Nuclear isomerism
Unit 5 – Elementary particle physics
Types of interaction between elementary particles – Hadrons and leptons – Symmetries and conservation laws – Elementary ideas of CP and CPT invariance – Classification of hadrons – SU(2) and SU(3) multiplets – Quark model - Gell-Mann-Okubo mass formula for octet and decuplet hadrons – Charm, bottom and top quarks
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. K. S. Krane, 1987, Introductory Nuclear Physics, Wiley, New York.
2. D. Griffiths, 1987, Introduction to Elementary Particle Physics, Harper & Row, New York.
3. R. R. Roy and B.P. Nigam, 1983, Nuclear Physics, New age Intl. New Delhi.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. H. A. Enge, 1983, Introduction to Nuclear Physics, Addison-Wesley, Tokyo
2. Y. R. Waghmare, 1981, Introductory Nuclear, Physics, Oxford-IBH, New Delhi.
3. Ghoshal, Atomic and Nuclear Physics, Vol. 2
4. J. M. Longo, 1971, Elementary particles, McGraw-Hill, New York.
5. R. D. Evans, 1955, Atomic Nucleus, McGraw-Hill, New York.
6. I. Kaplan, 1989, Nuclear Physics, Narosa, New Delhi
7. B. L. Cohen, 1971, Concepts of Nuclear Physics, TMH, New Delhi
8. M. K. Pal, 1982, Theory of Nuclear Structure, Affl. East-West, Chennai.
9. W. E. Burcham and M. Jobes, 1995, Nuclear and Particle Physics, Addison-Wesley, Tokyo.
WEB SITES
1. 2004/Lecture notes
2. Interest/D.Bailey/SubAtomic/ Lectures/ Lect.html
Paper 13 : COMPUTATIONAL METHODS AND PROGRAMMING
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, THIRD SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: SOLUTIONS OF EQUATIONS
Determination of zeros of polynomials –Roots of nonlinear algebraic equations and transcendental equations – Bisection and Newton-Raphson methods – Convergence of solutions.
UNIT 2: LINEAR SYSTEMS
Solution of simultaneous linear equations – Gaussian elimination – Matrix inversion – Eignenvalues and eigenvectors of matrices – Power and Jacobi Methods.
UNIT 3 : INTERPOLATION AND CURVE FITTING
Interpolation with equally spaced and unevenly spaced points (Newton forward and backward interpolations, Lagrange interpolation) – Curve fitting – Polynomial least – squares fitting.
UNIT 4: DIFFERENTIATION, INTEGRATION AND SOLUTION OF DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Numerical differentiation – Numerical integration – Trapezoidal rule – Simpon’s rule – Error estimates – Gauss-Legendre, Gauss-Laguerre, Gauss-Hermite and Gauss-Chebyshev quadratures – Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations – Euler and Runge Kutta methods.
UNIT 5: PROGRAMMING WITH FORTRON/C :
Flow-charts – Integer and floating point arithmetic expressions – Built-in functions – Executable and non-executable statements – Subroutines and functions – Programs for the following computational methods: (a) Zeros of polynomials by the bisection method, (b) Zeros of polynomials/non-linear equations by the Newton-Raphson method, (c) Lagrange Interpolation, (d) Trapezoidal and Simpson’s Rules, (e) Solution of first order differential equations by Euler’s method.
Books for Study:
1. V. Rajaraman, 1993, Computer oriented Numerical Methods, 3 rd Edition. PHI, New Delhi
2. M. K .Jain, S. R. Iyengar and R. K. Jain, 1995, Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation, 3 rd Edition, New Age Intl., New Delhi
3. S. S. Sastry, Introductory Methods of Numerical analysis, PHI, New Delhi
4. F. Scheid, 1998, Numerical Analysis, 2 nd Edition, Schaum’s series, McGraw Hill, New York
5. W. H. Press, S. A. Teukolsky, W. T. Vetterling and B. P. Flannery, 1992, Numerical Recipes in FORTRAN, 2 nd Edition, Cambridge Univ. Press
6. W. H. Press, S. A. Teukolsky, W. T. Vetterling and B. P. Flannery, 1992, Numerical Recipes in C, 2 nd Edition, Cambridge Univ. Press
7. V. Rajaraman, Programming in FORTRAN / Programming in C, PHI, New Delhi
8. E. Balagurusamy, 1998, Numerical Methods, TMH
Books for Reference:
1. S. D. Conte and C. de Boor, 1981, Elementary Numerical analysis-an algorithmic approach, 3 rd Edition, McGraw Hill,)
2. B. F. Gerald, and P. O. Wheatley, 1994, Applied Numerical analysis, 5th Edition., Addison-Wesley, MA.
3. B. Carnagan, H. A. Luther and J. O. Wilkes, 1969, Applied Numerical Methods, Wiley, New York.
4. S. S. Kuo, 1996, Numerical Methods and Computers, Addison-Wesley.
WEB SITES
1.
2. (numerical recipes online book on C & FORTRAN)
PRACTICAL III
Paper 14 : COMPUTATIONAL METHODS – FORTRAN / C PROGRAMMING
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, THIRD SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
All TWELVE experiments:
Determination of zeros of polynomials (Tables of Legendre, Laguerre, Hermite & Chebyshev polynomials should be provided during the Practical examination)
Bisection method / Newton-Raphson method
1. Zeros of the Legendre Polynomials Pn(x) (or roots of the equation Pn(x) = 0 or nodes of the Gauss-Legendre quadrature), 2 ( n ( 6, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
2. Zeros of the Laguerre Polynomials Ln(x) (or roots of the equation Ln(x) = 0 or nodes of the Gauss-Laguerre quadrature), 2 ( n ( 6, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
3. Zeros of the Hermite Polynomials Hn(x) (or roots of the equation Hn(x) = 0 or nodes of the Gauss-Hermite quadrature), 2 ( n ( 6, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
4. Zeros of the Chebyshev Polynomials Tn(x) (or roots of the equation Tn(x) = 0 or nodes of the Gauss-Chebyshev quadrature), 2 ( n ( 6, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
5. Lagrange interpolation with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN/C PROGRAM, and output.
6. Newton forward interpolation with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
7. Newton backward interpolation with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
8. Curve-fitting: Least-squares fitting with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
9. Numerical integration by the trapezoidal rule, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
10. Numerical integration by Simpson’s rule, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
11. Numerical solution of ordinary first-order differential equations by the Euler method, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
12. Numerical solution of ordinary first-order differential equations by the Runge- Kutta method, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
Paper 15: EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE
(ELECTIVE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, THIRD SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
This elective will be offered by Chemistry or Mathematics or Other departments
Paper 16: CONDENSED MATTER PHYSICS
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: Crystal Physics
Types of lattices - Miller indices – Symmetry elements and allowed rotations - Simple crystal structures – Atomic Packing Factor- Crystal diffraction - Bragg's law – Scattered Wave Amplitude - Reciprocal Lattice (sc, bcc, fcc) – Diffraction Conditions - Laue equations - Brillouin zone - Structure factor - Atomic form factor - Inert gas crystals - Cohesive energy of ionic crystals - Madelung constant - Types of crystal binding (general ideas).
UNIT 2: Lattice Dynamics
Lattice with two atoms per primitive cell - First Brillouin zone - Group and phase velocities - Quantization of lattice vibrations - Phonon momentum - Inelastic scattering by phonons - Debye's theory of lattice heat capacity - Thermal Conductivity - Umkalapp processes.
UNIT 3: Theory of Metals and Semiconductors
Free electron gas in three dimensions - Electronic heat capacity - Wiedemann-Franz law - Band theory of metals and semiconductors - Bloch theorem - Kronig-Penney model - Semiconductors - Intrinsic carrier concentration – Temperature Dependence - Mobility - Impurity conductivity – Impurity states - Hall effect - Fermi surfaces and construction - Experimental methods in Fermi surface studies - de Hass-van Alphen effect .
UNIT 4: Magnetism
Diamagnetism - Quantum theory of paramagnetism - Rare earth ion - Hund's rule - Quenching of orbital angular momentum - Adiabatic demagnetization - Quantum theory of ferromagnetism - Curie point - Exchange integral - Heisenberg's interpretation of Weiss field - Ferromagnetic domains - Bloch wall - Spin waves - Quantization - Magnons - Thermal excitation of magnons - Curie temperature and susceptibility of ferrimagnets - Theory of antiferomagnetism - Neel temperature.
UNIT 5: Superconductivity
Experimental facts: Occurrence - Effect of magnetic fields - Meissner effect – Critical field – Critical current - Entropy and heat capacity - Energy gap - Microwave and infrared properties - Type I and II Superconductors.
Theoretical Explanation: Thermodynamics of super conducting transition - London equation - Coherence length – Isotope effect - Cooper pairs - BCS Theory - Single particle tunneling - Josephson tunneling - DC and AC Josephson effects - High temperature Superconductors - SQUIDS.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. C. Kittel, 1996, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 7th Edition, Wiley, New York.
2. M. Ali Omar, 1974, Elementary Solid State Physics - Principles and Applications, Addison - Wesley
3. H. P. Myers, 1998, Introductory Solid State Physics, 2nd Edition, Viva Book, New Delhi.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. N. W. Aschroft and N. D. Mermin, Solid State Physics, Rhinehart and Winton, New York.
2. J. S. Blakemore, 1974 , Solid state Physics, 2nd Edition, W.B. Saunder, Philadelphia
3. A. J. Dekker, Solid State Physics, Macmillan India, New Delhi.
4. H. M. Rosenburg, 1993, The Solid State, 3rd Edition, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
5. S. O. Pillai, 1997, Solid State Physics, New Age International, New Delhi.
6. S. O. Pillai, 1994, Problems and Solutions in Solid State Physics, New Age International, New Delhi.
7. S. L. Altmann, Band Theory of Metals, Pergamon, Oxford.
8. J. M. Ziman, 1971, Principles of the Theory of Solids, Cambridge University Press, London.
9. C. Ross-Innes and E. H. Rhoderick, 1976, Introduction to Superconductivity, Pergamon, Oxford.
10. M. Tinkham, Introduction to Superconductivity, McGraw-Hill, New York.
11. J. P. Srivastava, 2001, Elements of Solid State Physics, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi.
WEB SITES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Paper 17: PRACTICAL IV
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
ANY TWO PARTS OUT OF PARTS A, B and C.
Part – A – Microprocessor 8086 & Microcontroller 8051
(Compulsory for those who take the Elective : Microprocessor and Microcontroller)
External Examination: 4 hrs., Marks:30 (5 marks for record & 25 marks for experiment)
Any SIX Experiments:
Microprocessor 8086 programs using MASM:
1. Addition & subtraction
2. Multiplication & division
3. Multibyte addition & subtraction
4. Sorting in ascending & descending order
5. Generation of Fibonacci series
Microcontroller 8051 Experiments:
6. Addition & subtraction
7. Multiplication & division
8. Sorting in ascending & descending order
9. LED interface
10. Stepper motor interface
Part – B – Advanced Experiments I
(Compulsory for those who take the Elective : Materials Science )
External Examination: 4 hrs., Marks:30 (5 marks for record & 25 marks for experiment)
Any SIX Experiments:
1. GM counter – Characteristics, inverse square law, absorption coefficient.
2. GM counter - Feather’s analysis : Range of Beta rays.
3. Michelson Interferometer – Wavelength, separation of wavelengths, thickness of mica sheet.
4. Hall effect.
5. Molecular spectra – ALO band .
6. Susceptibility by Quincke’s method.
7. Susceptibility by Guoy’s method.
8. Ultrasonics – Compressibility of a liquid.
9. Dielectric measurements in Microwave test bench.
10. B-H curve using CRO.
11. Miscibility measurement using Ultrasonic diffraction method.
12. Conductivity measurement using four probe method.
Book for Reference:
1. D. Chattopadhyay, P. C. Rakshit, and B. Saha, 2002, An Advanced Course in Practical Physics, 6th EditionBooks and Allied, Kolkata.
Part - C – Advanced Experiments II
(Compulsory for those who take the Elective : Advanced Spectroscopy)
External Examination: 4 hrs., Marks:30 (5 marks for record & 25 marks for experiment)
Any SIX Experiments:
1. Iodine Absorption Spectrum.
2. Molecular spectra – CN bands.
3. UV – Visible Spectroscopy – verification of Beer-Lambert’s law and identification of
wavelength maxima – Extinction Coefficient.
4..UV- Visible Spectroscopy – Identification and measurement of a component in a mixture.
5. Infrared and Raman Spectra and Vibrational band assignments of Organic, Inorganic and
Crystalline materials.
6. Infrared and Raman Spectra – Normal coordinate analysis of XY2 bent symmetrical and XY3 pyramidal molecules.
7. Spectroflurometer – Characerization of materials.
8. Experiments on Optical fibers.
9. Laser Experiments
a) Diffraction at straight edge.
b) Interference of laser beams – Llyods single mirror method.
c) Interference using an optically plane glass plate and a laser
d) Laser diffraction at a straight wire
e) Laser diffraction at a circular aperture.
10. Study of vibrational spectra – IR and Raman studies of Organic compounds.
11. Characterization of Organic Compounds using UV- Visible spectrometer.
12. Microwave bench – Microwave measurements.
Paper 18: ELECTIVE II
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
One of the courses listed below
Paper 19: ELECTIVE III
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
One of the courses listed below
ELECTIVES
Two out of the following 3 courses will be offered as Elective II and Elective III
1. Microprocessor and Microcontroller
2. Materials Science
3. Advanced Spectroscopy
Paper 18/19: MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER
(ELECTIVE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: 8086 Architecture
8086 Architecture – Min.Mode, Max.Mode – Software Model – Segmentation- Segmentation of address – Pipe line Processing – Interrupts in 8086 – Interrupt types and 8086 response – NMI- Internal Interrupts – Interrupt Priorities.
UNIT 2: 8086 Programming
Addressing Modes – Instruction Set- Constructing Machine Code – Instruction Templates for MOV Instruction– Data Transfer Instructions– Arithmetic, Logic, Shift, rotate instructions- Flag Control instructions- Compare, Jump Instructions– Loop and String instructions -Assembly programs- Block move, Sorting, Averaging, Factorial – Code Conversion : Binary to BCD , BCD to Binary.
UNIT 3: Microcontroller 8051
Introduction – 8 & 16 Bit Microcontroller families –Flash series – Embedded RISC Processor – 8051 Microcontroller Hardware – Internal registers – Addressing modes – Assembly Language Programming – Arithmetic, Logic & Sorting operations.
UNIT 4: Interfacing I/O and Memory With 8051
Interfacing I/O Ports, External memory, Counters & Timers. Serial data input/Output, Interrupts – Interfacing 8051 with ADC, DAC, LED display, Keyboard, Sensors and Stepper motor.
UNIT 5 : Embedded Microcontroller
Embedded Microcontroller system – Types of embedded Operating system – Micro Chip P1C16C6X / 7X family – features –Architecture – Memory organization –Register file map – I/O Ports – Data & Flash program memory – Asynchronous serial port –Applications in Communication and industrial Controls.
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Douglas V. Hall : - Microprocessors and Interfacing programming and Hardware (Tata Mc Graw Hill) (Unit 1)
2. W.A. Triebel and Avatar Singh, The 8086 /8088 Microprocessors- Programming, Software, Hardware and application, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. (Unit 2)
3. Kenneth J. Ayala – The 8051 Micro Controller Architecture, Programming and Applications. 3rd Edition , Penram International, (Unit 3)
4. John B. Peatman, 2004, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, 7th Indian reprint, Pearson Education. (Unit 4 & 5)
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. B. Brey, 1995, Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186,80286,80486,80486, Architecture, Programming and Interfacing
2. Yu – Cheng and Glenn A. Gibson, The 8086 / 8088 family Architecture, Programming and Design, Prentice-Hall of India.
3. Muhammed Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillespie Mazidi, 2004, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, Fourth Indian Reprint, Pearson Education.
4. Raj Kamal, 2002, Introduction to Embedded Systems, TMS
5. V. Vijayendran, 2002, Fundamentals of Microprocessor –8086- Architecture, Programming (MASM) and interfacing, Viswanathan, Chennai.
Paper 18/19: MATERIALS SCIENCE
(ELECTIVE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: Ceramics and Composites:
Structural features – production of ceramics – forming and post forming process – mechanical properties – commercial ceramic system : Si-Al system technical ceramics – Zr and Si alloys – cement and concrete – composite materials – continuous and discontinuous fibre composites.
UNIT 2: Polymers:
Classification of polymers – structural features – mechanism – thermoplastics – rubber and elastomers – physical, chemical and mechanical properties – cellular plastics – liquid crystal polymers.
UNIT 3 : Dielectrics:
Electrical polarisation – mechanism of polarization – optical, molecular and interfacial polarizability – classification of dielectric materials – piezoelectric, pyroelectric and ferroelectric materials – temperature and frequency effects on dielectric materials – applications of these materials.
UNIT 4: Electronic materials:
Purification of electronic materials – single crystal growth – pulling method – wafer manufacture – oxidation – photolithography – doping technique – epitaxial growth – metallization – circuits and process simulation and integration – junction formation – junction lasers – contact formation.
UNIT 5: Magnetic materials:
Classification of magnetism – origin and size of domain structure – hard magnetic materials – permanent magnetic alloys – magnetic steels and Al-Ni / Al-Ni-Co alloys – fine particle alloys – rare earth cobalt alloys – applications of permanent magnets – soft magnets – Si-Fe and nanocrystaline magnetic metals – microwave ferrites and garnets – magnetic bubbles.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. V. Raghavan, 2003, Materials Science and Engineering 4th Edition, (Printice-Hall
India, New Delhi,) (for units 2, 3, 4 and 5)
2. C.M. Srivastava and C. Srinivasan, 1987, Science of engineering materials, New Age Intl, New Delhi. (for units 1, 3 and 5)
3. J. C. Anderson, K.D. Leaver, R.D. Rawlings and J.M. Alexander, 1990, Material Science, 4th Edition, Chapman & Hall. London.
4. M. Arumugam, 2002, Materials Science, 3rd Edition, Anuradha Agencies.
BOOKS FOR REFERNCE:
1. G.K. Narula, K.S.Narula and V.K.Gupta, 1988, Materials Science, Tata McGraw-Hill.
2. Lawrence H. Van Vlack, 1998, Elements of Materials Science and Engineering, 6th Edition, second ISE reprint, Addison-Wesley
3. H. Iabch and H.Luth, 2001, Solid state Physics – An introduction to principles of Material Science, 2nd Edition, Springer
Paper 18/19: ADVANCED SPECTROSCOPY
(ELECTIVE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: Nuclear Quadruple Resonance
Hamiltonian for NQR – Energy levels of quadruple transitions for half integral and integral spins – Design of NQR spectrometer – Principles of super regenerative oscillator – CW Oscillator – Pulsed RF detection – Application of NQR to chemical bonding and molecular structure.
UNIT 2: Mossbauer Spectroscopy
Principles of Mossbauer effects – Schematic arrangements of a Mossbaur spectrometer – Chemical Isomer shift – Magnetic hyperfine interactions – Electric quadropole interactions – Application to molecular and electronic structures.
UNIT 3: Surface Enhanced Raman Scattering(SERS)
Surfaces for SERS study – Enhancement mechanism – Surface selection rules – SERS microprobe – SERS study of bio molecules – SERS in medicine.
UNIT 4: Surface Spectroscopies
Electron energy loss spectroscopy (EELS) – Reflectance – Absorbance – IR spectroscopy (RAIRS) – Inelastic helium scattering – Photo electron spectroscopy (PES) – X ray photo electron spectroscopy (XPES) – Ultraviolet PES – Auger electron spectroscopy (AES).
UNIT 5: Nonlinear Spectroscopic Phenomena
Nonlinear Raman phenomena – Hyper Raman effect – Experimental Techneque – Stimulated Raman scattering – Inverse Raman effect – Coherent antistokes Raman scattering – Photo acoustic Raman scattering – Multiphoton spectroscopy.
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. C. N. Banwell and E. M. McCash, 1994, Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, New Delhi.
2. G. Aruldhas, 2001, Molecular structure and spectroscopy, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
3. P. S. Sindhu, 1990, Molecular Spectoscopy, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, New Delhi.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. G. W. King, 1964, Spectroscopy and molecular structure, Hoit Rinchart and Winsten Inc, London
2. T. A. Carlson, 1975, Photo electron and Auger spectroscopy, Plenum Press
3. J . Loder, 1970, Basic Laser Raman spectroscopy, Hezdan and Son Ltd.
4. T. P. Das and E. L. Hehn, 1958, NQR Spectroscopy, Academic Press
5. Raymond Chang, 1980, Basic Principles of Spectroscopy Mc Graw-Hill Kogakusha
Paper 20: PROJECT
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVES (EDP)
To be offered to M Sc students in Chemistry, Mathematics, etc.,
1. BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS
2. INTELLIGENT INSTRUMENTATION
3. BASIC MATERIAL SCIENCE
4. MATHEMATICAL METHODS
5. CLASSICAL DYNAMICS
Each Course carries 4 Credits.
EDP - BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS
UNIT 1: Wave– Particle Duality
Particle properties of waves : PhotoelectRic effect and Compton effect - Wave properties of matter: De Broglie waves - Phase and group velocity - Experimental evidences for matter waves: Davisson and Germer experiment and G.P Thomson’s experiment - Electron microscope – Heisenberg uncertainty principle and its consequences.
UNIT 2: Schrodinger Equation
Basic postulates of quantum mechanics – Time independent and time dependent Schrodinger equation - Properties of wave function - Probability interpretation of wave function - Probability current – Normalisation of wave functions and conservation of norm - Stationary states.
UNIT 3: Operator Formalism
Linear operators - Operators associated with different observables - Selfadjoint (Hermitean) operators – Expectation value - Eigenvalues and eigenfunctions – Reality of eigenvalues and orthogonality of eigenfunctions of a Hermitian operator – Examples - Commutativity and compatibility.
UNIT 4: Angular Momentum in Quantum Mechanics
Orbital angular momentum operators and their commutation relations – Separation of
three dimensional Schrodinger equation into radial and angular parts - Solution of the angular part and Spherical harmonics as the eigenfunctions of [pic] and [pic] (Outline of the steps only) - Elementary ideas of Spin angular momentum of an electron- – Pauli matrices.
UNIT 5: Solutions of Schrodinger Equation
Free particle solution – Particle in a box - Potential well of finite depth (one dimension) - Linear harmonic oscillator (one dimension) - Rigid rotator - Hydrogen atom.(only outline of steps).
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. P. M. Mathews and S.Venkatesan, 1976, A Text book of quantum mechanics, Tata Mc-Graw –Hill, New Delhi.
2. R. Murugeshan, 2001, Modern physics, 8th Edition, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi.
3. A. Beiser, 1997, Concepts of modern physics, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw –Hill, New Delhi.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Pauling and Wilson, Introduction to Quantum mechanics, Edition, McGraw- Hill, Place.
2. A. Ghatak, 2002, Basic Quantum Mechanics, Macmillan India, New Delhi.
EDP – INTELLIGENT INSTRUMENTATION
UNIT 1 – Transducers and Input Elements
Classification of Transducers – Selecting a transducer – Strain gauges – Gauge factor – Metallic sensing elements – Gauge configuration – Displacement Transducers – Capacitive, inductive and LVDT, Piezo electric and Potentiometric transducers – Thermocouples and thermistor – Photosensitive devices.
UNIT 2 - Bridge Measurements
Wheatstone Bridge – Kelvin Bridge – AC Bridges – Maxwell Bridge – Hay Bridge – Schering Bridge – Wien Bridge – Wagner ground connection.
UNIT 3 - Analog and Digital Principles
Operational amplifier ideal characteristics – Closed loop properties – Virtual ground concept - Three modes of operation – Difference amplifier – Transducer bridge Type instrumentation amplifier- Digital Principles – Logic gates – Flip Flops – Counters – Registers – Digital to Analog conversion – Weighted resistor type DAC – Analog to digital conversion concept – Flash type , Counter type and dual slope ADC – Successive approximation technique ADC .
UNIT 4 – Instrumentation System
Analog data acquisition system – Digital data acquisition system – Interfacing Transducers to Electronic and measuring systems – Multiplexing – Digital to analog multiplexing – Analog to digital multiplexing.
UNIT 5 – Microprocessor Based Instrumentation
8085 Architecture – Addressing modes – Basic Instructions – Data Transfer and I/O – Interrupts and Interrupt circuit – I/O operation – Interfacing keyboard, LED display, ADC , DAC and stepper motor (Functional Block diagrams and FLOW chart only) – Microprocessor based data acquisition system – Temperature controller, Lift operation, Traffic lights control.
BOOKS FOR STUDY AND REFERENCE
1. Albert D. Helfrich and William D. Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques, 5th Edition, - Prentice Hall of India
2. Milman and Halkias – Integrated Electronics,
3. Malvino Leech – Digital Principles,
4. R. S. Gaonkar, 1997, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with 8085, 3rd Edition, Penram International Publishing, Mumbai
EDP – BASIC MATERIAL SCIENCE
Unit 1 – Introduction:
Classification of materials – materials for engineering applications – different types of chemical bonds – crystal structure s of important engineering materials – crystal imperfection and types of imperfections
Unit 2 – Phase diagram:
Systems – components – phases – solid solutions – Hume-Rothery’s rule and Gibbs’ Phase rule – Lever rule – construction of phase diagrams – eutectic, peritectic, eutectoid and peritectoid systems
Unit 3 – Phase transformation:
Mechanism – nucleation and growth – applications of phase transformations – cooling, casting, solidification and heat treatment – TTT diagram – martensitic transformation
Unit 4 – Electron theory of metals:
Classical free electron theory – density of states – electron energies in a metal – energy band and Fermi energy in solids – distinction between metals, insulators and semiconductors on the basis of Fermi level – effect of temperature on Fermi level
Unit 5 – Electrical and magnetic properties of materials:
Electrical resistivity and conductivity of meterials – dielectric materials – electrical polarization – piezo, pyro and ferroelectric materials – electrostriction – classification of magnetic materials – domain structure – magnetostriction – soft and hard magnetic materials
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. V. Raghavan, 2003, Materials Science and Engineering, 4th Edition, Printice-Hall India, New Delhi (for units 2, 3, 4 and 5)
2. G.K. Narula, K.S. Narula and V.K. Gupta, 1988, Materials Science, Tata McGraw- Hill
3. M. Arumugam, 2002, Materials Science, 3rd revised Edition, Anuradha Agencies
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Lawrence H. Van Vlack, 1998, Elements of Materials Science and Engineering, 6th Edition, second ISE reprint, Addison-Wesley
2. H. Iabch and H.Luth, 2001, Solid state Physics – An introduction to principles of Material Science, 2nd Edition, Springer
EDP – MATHEMATICAL METHODS
UNIT 1: Matrix theory
Types of matrices – symmetric, anti-symmetric, Hermitian and unitary matrices – Caley-Hamilton theorem – proof – applications to find the inverse of a matrix – eigen values and eigen vectors – properties of eigen values and eigen vectors of hermitian and unitary matrices
UNIT 2: Tensor analysis
Definitions of covariant, contravariant and mixed tensors – symmetric and anti-symmetric tensors – higher order tensors – piezo-electric and moment of inertia tensors
UNIT 3: Special functions
Bessel’s differential equation – series solution- generating function – recurrence relations – Hermite differential equation – series solution – Rodrigue’s formula – generating function – recurrence relations – orthogonal property of Hermite polynomials – Legendre differential equation – series solution- generating function – recurrence relations
UNIT 4: Integral transforms
Fourier transforms – convolution theorem – properties of Fourier transforms – simple applications – Laplace transforms – convolution theorem – properties of Laplace transforms – simple applications
UNIT 5: Numerical methods
Solution of simultaneous linear system of equations – Gauss elimination method – matrix inversion – Gauss-Jordan method – Eigen values and eigen vectors of matrices – power and Jacobi methods
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. Schaum’s outline series, Matrices, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. A.W. Joshi, 1995, Matrices and tensor in Physics, New age Intl., New Delhi.
3. Schaum’s outline series, Vectors and introduction to tensors, New York.
4. M.K. Venkatraman, Higher Engineering Mathematics, National Publsh. Co.,Chennai.
5. P.K. Chattopadhyayay, 1990, Mathematical Physics, New Age Intl., New Delhi
6. M.K. Venkatraman, Numerical methods, National Publsh. Co.,Chennai
7. R.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and M.K. Jain, 2002, Numerical methods for scientific and engineering computation, New Age Intl., New Delhi.
8. V. Rajaraman, 1993, Computer oriented numerical methods, PHI, New Delhi.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. G. Arfken and H.J. Weber, 2001, Mathematical methods for engineers and Scientists, Hartcourt, India.
2. S. Sokolonikoff, Mathematical methods for Scientists and Engineers, McGraw Hill, New York.
3. Sathya Prakash, 1985, Mathematical Physics, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
4. S.S. Kuo, 1996, Computer oriented numerical methods, Addison-Wesley, London.
EDP- CLASSICAL DYNAMICS
UNIT 1: Principles of classical mechanics
Mechanics of a single particle – mechanics of a system of particles – conservation laws for system of particles – constraints – holonomic & non-holonomic constraints – generalized coordinates – configuration space – transformation equations – principle of virtual work
UNIT 2: Lagrangian formulation
D’Alembert’s principle – Lagrangian equations of motion for conservative systems – applications: (i) simple pendulum (ii) Atwood’s machine (iii) projectile motion
UNIT 3: Hamiltonian formulation
Phase space – cyclic coordinates – conjugate momentum – Hamiltonian function – Hamilton’s canonical equations of motion – applications: (i) simple pendulum (ii) one dimensional simple harmonic oscillator (iii) motion of particle in a central force field
UNIT 4: Small oscillations
Formulation of the problem – transformation to normal coordinates – frequencies of normal modes – linear triatomic molecule
UNIT 5: Special theory of relativity
Inertial and non-inertial frames – Lorentz transformation equations – length contraction and time dilation – relativistic addition of velocities – Einstein’s mass-energy relation – Minkowski’s space – four vectors – position, velocity, momentum, acceleration and force in for vector notation and their transformations
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. H. Goldstein, 2002, Classical Mechanics, 3 rd Edition., Pearson edu.
2. Upadhyaya, Classical Mechanics, Himalaya Publshing. Co. New Delhi.
3. R. Resnick, 1968, Introduction to Special Theory of Relativity, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. K. R. Symon, 1971, Mechanics, Addison Wesley, London.
2. S. N. Biswas, 1999, Classical Mechanics, Books & Allied, Kolkatta.
3. Gupta and Kumar, Classical Mechanics, Kedar Nath.
4. T.W.B. Kibble, Classical Mechanics, ELBS.
5. Greenwood, Classical Dynamics, PHI, New Delhi.
20. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN VISUAL COMMUNICATION
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER III
Core 9 - Visual Research Methods
Unit 1: Research Process, Design, Basic Terminology, Applications
Unit 2: Content Analysis of Visual Images-Measurement and Coding
Unit 3: Social Semiotic Approach to Visual Analysis-Meaning Categorization
Unit 4: Audience Survey, Reception Analysis
Unit 5: Researching for Story
Core 10 - Special Visual Effects (Practical)(Using Tools like Combustion)
Unit 1: Compositing-principles and pipelines, integration with compositing software
Unit 2: Paint, Particles Creating simple composites Matte Paintings, Animatronics, Sets,
etc
Unit 3: Pre-Production and Post-Production, Keying and Color correction
Unit 4: VFX and its Constitutes, Techniques of Compositing-Exercises
Unit 5: Compositing Techniques, Finishing Tools and Techniques
Core 11 - Video Editing (Practical)(FCP, AVID or Adobe Premier)
Unit 1: Basic Editing Principles &Techniques
Unit 2: Clipping, cutting, moving video clips & images, Fine tuning,
Unit 3: Transitions and Effects—
Unit 4: Non-linear Editing Software Interface and Functionalities
Unit 5: Exercises and Practice- Editing Problems/Solutions
Elective 5 - Entertainment & Society
Unit 1: Entertainment Definition-Characteristics of Mass Mediated Entertainment
Unit 2: Pleasure Principle, Narrative Theory, Dramatic Theory
Unit 3: Understanding Entertainment Audiences-
Unit 4: Media Effects (Cultivation/Cultural Effects), News as Entertainment
Unit 5: Business of Entertainment—Markets, Trends, Regulations, Interactive Media
Elective 6 - Film Analysis & Criticisms
Unit 1: Film as Art and Mass Communication
Unit 2: Early Film Theories Structuralisms Expressionism
Unit 3: Cinema Vetier Realism, Neo-Realism, Critical Marxist Approaches
Unit 4: Post-modern approaches, Feminist Approaches
Unit 5: Contemporary Cinema, Digital Cinema & Aesthetics
SEMESTER IV
Core 12 - Computer Graphics & Animation III (Practical) (Advanced Techniques/Portfolio/Project)
Unit 1: Finishing Tools, Special Effects, Scripting
Unit 2: Advanced Tips and Techniques with Maya/3D Max/Combustion
Unit 3: Basic Animated Character, Movements shots (walk, run etc,) Logos/Titles
Unit 4: TV Commercial/Promotions, Public Service Announcements
Unit 5: Short Animation Film, Information-Educational Programs
Core 13 -Sound Recording & Editing (Practical)(Sound Forge, Pro-Tools )
Unit 1: Sound Recording—Basic Tools and Techniques for Animation
Unit 2: Voice-Over-Dialogue-Non Voice-Music Track
Unit 3: Sound Editing- -Dialogue and Lip syc.
Unit 4: Editing Software Interface and Functionalities
Unit 5: Exercises and Practice, Sound Effects for Animation
Core 14 -Project Management
Unit 1: Market-Industries, Applications (Movies, Television, Web, Education)
Unit 2: Project Management-Stages and Process-(Progress Charts etc.)
Unit 3: Team/ Talent Management –Roles/Responsibilities, Work Flow-Piping
Unit 4: Scheduling, Time Management, Delivery, Distribution, Contingency Plan
Unit 5: Project Finance and Budgeting, Licensing, Copyright, Contracts Ownership
Core 15 - Research Project Work
Core 16 - Specialization (Project)
Advanced Techniques in 3D Max and Maya
Audio and Video Editing Software
Advanced Effects/Finishing Tools
Elective 7 - Gaming & Game Design
Unit 1: Gaming History, Models of Games
Unit 2: Social and Cultural implications of games
Unit 3: Game design-Structure-Storytelling- Interactivity-Difficulty Level
Unit 4: Techniques, Stages and Process of Design- Game Scripting/Writing
Unit 5: Mobile Gaming, On-line Gamig-Social Games
21. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN ZOOLOGY
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER - III
Core - DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY
4 Credits
UNIT I: GAMETOGENESIS
History of Embryology - Ovists Vs Animalculist Preformation and Epigenesis - Descriptive Embryology Experimental Embryology - Molecular Embryology gametogenesis: Growth of oocytes - Synthesis and storage of macromolecules in the oocytes - Nuclear activities during oocytes growth. Hormonal and nervous control of ovulation.
UNIT II: FERTILIZATION
Fertilization: polyspermy - Androgenesis - Egg activation - Electron microscopic and biochemical aspects - Fertility of sperm and its in vitro fertilization - artificial fertilization Chemodiffertiation.
UNIT III: EARLY DEVELOPMENT
Gastrulation movements: role of egg cortex - Cell surface in morphogenesis - Cell adhesion and cell communication. Chemotatic induced aggregation - Aggregation in sponges. Early development stage of fish. Experimental analysis in the early development of Echinoderms, Amphibians and Birds.
UNIT IV: ORGANOGENESIS
Organogenesis - formation of organ. rudiments: Differentiation and development of limb, thymus, spleen, salivary glands, heart and kidney in a mammal. Organiser: Inductive tissue interactions in developments.
UNIT V: GENES AND DEVELOPMENT
Nuclear transplantation. Cellular differentiation and protein synthesis. Differential activation. Developmental genetic defects. Role of cell death in development. Teratogenesis - Ageing, transgenics.
UNIT VI: REGUALTION OF DEVELOPMENT
Metamorphosis - morphological and biochemical changes during amphibian metamorphosis - Hormonal control of metamorphosis in amphibians - Neuro - endocrine control of insect metamorphosis - Biochemistry and mechanism of action of hormones during metamorphosis - Tissue reactivity in amphibian metamorphosis - Neotany. Malignant growth - Neoplasia - Teratoma - Gene activation in neoplasia.
UNIT VII: INVERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY
Early development - larval metamorphosis and organogenesis in Nemathelminthes, Platyhelminthes, Anneilds, Crustaceans and Molluscs.
REFERENCE/BOOKS
1. Balinsky, B. L., 1981. An introduction to embryology, Saunders, Philadelphia.
2. Karp. G. and Berrill, N.J. 1981. Development, McGraw Hill, New York.
3. Eber, J.D., 1970. Interacting system in Development, Holt Rein chart and Winston, Inc. New York and Chicago.
4. Grant, P., 1978. Biology of developing systems, Hoit Rein chart and Winston, Inc. New York and Chicago.
5. Saunders, J. W. 1982. Developmental Biology. Macmillan Co., London.
6. Brachet J. 1974. Introduction to Molecular Embryology. The English Universities Press, London.
7. Nagabhushanam. R., and R. Sarojini. Invertebrate Embryology. Oxford and IBA Publishing Co.
8. Gilbert, Scott. F. 1985. Developmental Biology. Sinauer Association, Inc., Publishers.
9. Tyagi, Rajiv and AN. Shukla, 2002. Development of fishes, Jaya publishing house, New Delhi.
10. Raven, P. An outline of developmental physiology, Pergamon Press, New York.
11. Browder, W. 1984. Developmental Biology, Saunders College Publishing, Rinchert and Winston.
Core - IMMUNOLOGY
4 Credits
UNIT I: BASIC OF IMMUNOLOGY
Introduction - Historical perspective. Innate immunity (Non-specific), Adaptive immunity (Specific) - Humoral immunity, Cell Mediated immunity.
UNIT II: CELLS AND ORGANS OF IMMUNE SYSTEM
Cells of Immune system - Haematopoiesis, Stem cells, Lymphoid cells, Mononuclear cells, Granulocytes, Mast cells, Dendritic cells. Organs of Immune system - Primary lymphoid organs and Secondary lymphoid organs.
UNIT III: ANTIGENS
Antigens - Immunogenicity Vs Antigenicity, Haptens. Factors influencing Immunogenicity. Epitopes - B cell epitope and T cell epitope.
UNIT IV: ANTIBODIES
Immunoglobulin - structure, isotypes and biological function. Immune response & theories. Antigenic determinant on immunoglobulin - isotype, allotype and idiotype. B-cell receptor, immunoglobulin superfamily, Monoclonal antibody, Polyclonal antibody. Organization and expression of immunoglobulin genes. Synthesis of immunoglobulin and disorders of immunoglobulin synthesis.
Antigen - Antibody interaction and immunodiagnostics. MHC - Restriction, Organization and inheritance of MHC, Antigen processing and presentation.
UNIT V: MEDIATORS OF IMMUNE SYSTEM
T cell receptor, cytokine, adhesion molecules. Complement, Hypersensitive reaction, Transplantation immunology.
UNIT VI: VACCINES
Vaccines - Principles and types of Vaccines - DNA Recombinant Vaccine, Serum therapy.
REFERENCE/BOOKS
1. Roitt, I.M. 1994. Essential Immunology. Blackwell Scientific, Oxform ISBN.
2. Richard, A Golds, Thomas J. Kindt & Barbara A. Osborne. 2000. Kuby - Immunology. Freeman and Co. New York.
3. D.P. Stites, A.I. Terr and T.G. Parsloio. 1997. Medical Immunology. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
4. Janeway, C.A. and P. Travers. 1997. Immunobiology. Current Biology Ltd. London.
5. Paul, W.E. 1989. Fundamentals of Immunology. Raver Press. New York.
6. Srivastava, R., Ram, B.P. and Ty!e, P. 1991. Molecular mechanism of Immune regulation. VCH Publishers, New York.
Core
LAB COURSE III: DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY
4 Credits
1. Different stages in developmental- Crustaceans (Crab/Prawn)-Insects. (Drosophila) - Frog.
2. Demonstration: Experimental biology -Wound healing and cell aggregation in frog embryo.
3. Developmental of chick stage- observation of living chick embryo and vital staining demonstration only - slide showing C.S. of heart, kidney, lens and limb to demonstrated induction and organization.
4. Slides showing the uterus cycles in mammals (Rat).
5. Development of invertebrates- Eggs- cleavage- Gastrula- Study of larva forms Nauplius, Zoea, Veliger, Bipinnaria, Leptocephalus.
6. Developmental stage of fish.
7. Lymphoid organ anatomy - Rat Histology of lymphoid organs - Thymus, Spleen, Bone morrow, Lymph node.
8. Haernagglutination - Qualitative analysis "ABO" blood group. .
9. Haemagglutination -Quantitative analysis - haemagglutination titration.
10. Preparation of Antigen; RBC- Demonstration.
11. Immunoelectrphoresis - Demonstration.
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - II
MICROBIOLOGY
3 Credits
UNIT I:
History and scope of Microbiology - Milestones in Microbiology.
UNIT II:
Anatomy of Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Morphology - Ultra structure of bacteria, fungi and Viruses - Classification of microbes - Phenotypic and taxonomic characters - Principles of classification - taxonomic structure - DNA analysis, Ribosomal RNA analysis - Numerical Taxonomy - Molecular taxonomy - Methods of microbial identification.
UNIT III:
Sterilization: Principles - dry heat, moist heat, filtration, Tantilization, pasteurization, Radiation - disinfection - Antimicrobial chemotherapy - Antibiotics source - Classification -Mode of action Antimicrobial resistance - Tests for sensitivity to antimicrobial agents and its quality control.
UNIT IV:
Culture techniques - media preparation - preservation of cultures - Aerobic and anaerobic culture techniques- Wet mount - Hanging drop - staining methods - dyes simple - differential and special staining techniques - acid fast stain, spore stain, capsule stain, staining for pure and mixed cultures
UNIT V:
Environmental microbiology - Microbial ecology, role of microorganisms in the productivity of ecosystems - Interactions between microorganisms, and with plants and animals - microbes and biodegradation - microbes in waste treatment. Microbiology of soil, water and air.
UNIT VI:
Medical microbiology - Pathogenic microbes of bacteria, viral, fungal and protozoan diseases - cure, control and prevention.
UNIT VII:
Industrial microbiology - Industrial uses of microbes - fermentation products bioconversions - bioremediation. Products of industrial microbiology - Penicillin, fuels, ethanol, vinegar, vitamin B12, citric acid, glutamic acid, protease etc. Food and Dairy microbiology - Microbes in food - Role of microbes in food production; Dairy and non-dairy products - fermented foods and alcoholic beverages. Pharmaceuticals (antibodies, vaccines etc,).
UNIT VIII:
Biotechnology potentials of microbes - production of food (single cell protein), Biofertilizers (BOA), Biopesticides (Bacillus. thrungiensis), Biopolymers, biosurfactants etc., Use of microbes in Biotechnology - Streptomyces, Yeasts(Saccharomyces, Hansenela), Spirulina and penciIIium etc., Disposals of microbes and biosafety.
REFERENCE / BOOKS
1. Pelczer MJ, Chao ECS, King NR, Mc Graw-HilI, Jnc. Ny. (1979) Microbiology Concepts and AlpIications,
2. Haley JO, Klecin DA. Microbiology, Prescott Lm., WCB Publishers, Sydney.
3. Davis BD, Dulbecco R, Eisen HN, Gihsbercs HS, Harper & Row. (1990) Microbiology, 4th edn. Publishers, Singapore.
4. Principle of Microbiology, (1997). RM atlas, WBC Pubkishers.
5. Raymond Rodriguez and David T. Denhard. (1988) Vectors - A survey of Molecular cloning vectors and their uses.
6. Winnacker, E.L.(1987) From Genes of clones - Introduction to Gene Technology, VCH publishers, New York.
SEMESTER IV
Core - BIOTECHNOLOGY
4 credits
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Biotechnology - Definition - Scope and importance - Historical background Global impact of biotechnology - Biotechnology in India - Achievements of biotechnology - Prevention and misuse of biotechnology - Bioinformatics.
UNIT II: RECOMBINATION DNA TECHNOLOGY
Gene cloning - the basic steps - various types of restriction enzymes - ligases linker and adaptors - DNA - transformation - Selection of recombination - Hybridization techniques - chemical synthesis of oligonucleotides.
Gene probe - molecular finger printing (DNA finger printing) - RFLP - the PCR techniques - Genomic library - Blotting techniques - Southern blotting - Northern & Western blotting. cDNA - Changing genes - Site directed mutagenesis and protein engineering.
UNIT III: GENE CLONING VECTORS
Plasmid biology - cloning vector based on E. coli PBR 322 and bacteriophage. Cloning vector for yeast. Cloning vector for Agro bacterium tumefaciens. Cloning vector for mammalian cells - Simian Virus 40 - Gene transfer technology - Particle bombardment - Micro injection techniques.
UNIT IV: PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
Plants tissue culture techniques - cell fusion - protoplast fusion - gene for disease resistance - salt tolerant varities. Transgenic plants- Nitrogen fixation - Transfer of Nif genes to microorganisms - Biofertilizers - Cryobiology. Transposons and its applications.
UNIT V: ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
Cell culture - Organ culture - Whole embryo culture - Embryo transfer - In vitro fertilization (IVF) technology - Dolly - In vitro fertilization and embryo transfer in human. Transgenic animal. Human genome project- Human gene therapy.
UNIT VI: MICROBIAL & ENVIRONMENTAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
Fermentation - bioreactor - microbial products - primary & secondary metabolites antibiotics - enzymes technology - single cell protein (SCP).
Bioremediation - bioremediation of hydrocarbons - Industrial wastes - Heavy metals - Xenobiotics - bioleaching- biomining.
UNIT VII: IMMUNOTECHNOLOGY
Hybridoma technology - Monoclonal antibodies - Application in biotechnology. Genetically modified organism (GMO's) - GM foods. Biotechnology & biosafety bioethics IPR - IPP - WIPO.
REFERENCE / BOOKS:
1. Purohit, S. S. and S. K. Mathur, (1999), Biotechnology: Fundamentals and Application. Agro Botanica, New Delhi. ISBN. 81-87167-IO-b.
2. Alan scragg, (1999), Environmental Biotechnology; Long Mann Publication. ISBN. 0582 276829.
3. R. C. Dubey, (2001). A text book of biotechnology, Rajendra Printer. New Delhi. ISBN. 81-219-09 16-3.
4. T.A Brown Gene cloning and DNA analysis. (1996) Blackwell science, Osney Mead, Oxford, OX20EL.
5. Sathyanarayane,U. (2006) Biotechnology Books and Allied (p) Ltd, India.
Core - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
4 Credits
1. Concepts of Scientific research - Scope - Null Hypothesis.
2. a) Literature collection - Primary, Secondary and tertiary sources Bibliography.
b) Use of internet facilities in literature collection - data bases.
c) Reviews monographs - Text books - Reference / Books – Scientific journals - News letters - etc.,
3. Selection of Animals models - Maintenance - CPCSEA regulations.
4. Analytical tools: Microscopes (Light, Phase, Fluorescence), pH meter, 02 Electrodes, Photometers: Colorimeter, Spectrophotometer (Single, Double beam and double array Spectrophotometeric.
5. Chromatographic techniques - Paper - Gel matrices (gel filtration, lon Exchange, affinity and HPLC) - Thin layer chromatography.
6. Enzyme kinetics - Lines weaver Burke plot - Vmax & Km determinations.
7. Histology & Histochemical Methods (Proteins, carbohydrates and lipids) Micrometry and photomicrography.
8. Population Estimation - concepts Density - (Soil Fauna, aquatic fauna or terrestrial fauna).
9. Presentation of Data- Preparation and Manuscript (Thesis & Publications)
Core
LAB COURSE IV: BIOTECHNOLOGY & RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
4 Credits
Visit to Biotechnology Laboratory to observe the demonstration of
1. Tissue culture.
2. Titration and preparation of virulent phage.
3. Isolation of DNA from the plasmids.
4. Restriction enzymes digestion of DNA.
5. DNA electrophorosis in Agarose gel.
Necessary book may be referred to learn the techniques and to be recorded in the Record Note books. Observation of photographs of different instrument used in Biotechnology, their principals and application.
6. Histological and Histochemical methods.
7. Electrophoresis.
8. Chromatography-Paper.
ELECTIVE I: FISHERY BIOLOGY
3 Credits
UNIT I: BIONOMICS AND CLASSIFICATION
Study of habit, food, feeding adaptations, growth, reproduction behaviour, fecundity and spawning of Indian major carps, three live fishes, three exotic fishes and six economically important marine fishes.
Classification of the above fishes as in Day’s volumes, or in Munro’s volume or in FAO Publications.
UNIT II: REPRODUCTION BIOLOGY
Role of hormones in reproduction - maturity stages - morphological and histological observation of gonads – Cryopreservation.
UNIT III: GROWTH STUDY
Age determination - length-weight relationship - factors influencing growth -condition factor - tagging methods.
UNIT IV: FISH GENETICS AND IMMUNOLOGY
Sex determination in fish – monosex production - hormonal and chromosomal methods - hybridization techniques in aquaculture androgenesis and Gynogenesis fish immune system.
UNIT V: FISH AND PUBLIC HEALTH
Diseases caused by fishes in man - prevention. Uses of fishes as biological control of diseases in man. Fish as food for human health.
UNIT VI: CAPTURE FISHERY OF INDIA
Fishery zones of India and the type of fishery in these zones. At least six types of economically important marine pelagic, fishes to be studied with regards their fishery and the methods of capture.
Reservoir fishery.
Preservation and processing. By-products.
REFERENCE/BOOKS:
1. Baluyut, E. A. (1989). Aquaculture systems and Practices. A selected review Publishing House, New Delhi.
2. Chondar, A (1970). Handbook of breeding of Indian major carps by pituitary harm one injection. Agra Satisdh Book Enterprise.
3. Das M. C. and Patnaik, P. N. (1994). Brackish water culture. Palani paramount Publications, Palani, T. N.
4. Day, F (1958). Fishes of Indiaa , Vol. I and Vol. II. William Sawson and Sons Ltd., Londan.
5. Jhingran, C. G. (1981). Fish and Fisheries of India. Hindustan Publilcating Co., India.
6. Maheswari. K. (1983) Common fish disease and their control. Institute of FIOsheries Education, Powarkads( M. P.)
ELECTIVE II: ENTOMOLOGY
3 Credits
UNIT I:
Biology of an insect with special reference to the following: Nutrition, Development, Reproduction and Endocrinology.
UNIT II:
Insects and their interrelationships with environments (interspecific and intraspecific).
UNIT III:
Insects as pollinators, predators, parasitoids, scavengers, weedkillers, etc.,
UNIT IV:
Biology of honeybees, lac insects and their management.
UNIT V:
Prospects of sericulture, Biology of silkworm (Nutrition, Genetics, Endocrinology, Reproduction, Pest and Diseases).
UNIT VI:
Insects as crop pests: Types of injuries and loss caused to plants in general factors governing the outbreak of pests.
UNIT VII:
Vector borne diseases: Method of transmission of parasitic agents reference to mosquitoes and houseflies.
UNIT VIII:
Principles and methods of pest suppression: Conventional and Non-conventional, Biological and Integrated pest management.
REFERENCES:
1. The Science of Entomology. William S. Romoser and John G. Stoffolano. Wm. C. Brown Publishers, England. 1994.
2. The Silkwonn. An important laboratory tool. By Yataro Tazima, Kodarsha, Scientific Book Ltd., Japan. 1978.
3. Sericulture Manual: FAD, Agril, Service Bulletin, Rome.
4. Applied Entomology: P. G. Fenemore, Allaprkash, Wiley Eastern Ltd., Delhi. 1992.
5. Park, J. E and K. Park. Textbook of social and preventive medicine. Publ. Mis. Banarasides Bharol. Jabalpur.
6. Nayar, K. K, Ananthakrishnan, T. Nand B. V. David. General and Applied Entomology. Tata McGraw Hill Publ., New Delhi. 1989.
7. Entomology and Pest M~agement. Larry, P. Pedigo Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 1989.
ELECTIVE III: ENDOCRINOLOGY
3 Credits
Unit I: Pituitary Gland
General characteristics of hormones - Pituitary gland - structural organization - Pituitary hormones functions hypothalamic control.
Unit II: Thyroid Gland
Thyroid gland - structural organization - metabolic effects of thyroid hormone - effects of thyroid on reproduction - Parathyroid - structure - functions of parathyroid hormone.
Unit III: Pancreas and Adrenal Glands
Structure of pancreas- function of Insulin and glucagon- Adrenals - structural organization. functions of cortical and medullary hormones.
Unit IV: Vertebrate Reproductive Endocrinology
Structure of mammalian testis and ovary - male and female sex accessory organs - hormones of testis and ovary - estrus and menstrual cycle -, hormones of pregnancy - parturition - hormonal control of lactation.
Unit V: Insect and Crustacean Endocrinology
The concepts of neurosecretion - Endocrine system in Crustacea - endocrine control of moulting and metamorphosis - Neuroendocrine system in insects endocrine control of moulting and metamorphosis.
Practicals
1) Dissection of pituitary, adrenal and gonad in vertebrate animals.
2) Dissection of reproductive systems in vertebrate animals.
3) Histological study of pituitary, adrenal. teMis, ovary, corpus luteum, pancreas and thyroid gland.
4) Dissection of reproductive system neuroendocrine complex in insects.
5) Histology of ovary, accessory glands, corpus allatum, and brain in insects.
6) Parabiosis in cockroach.
7) Ovariectomy in cockroach.
Text Books
1. Turner, C.D., 1966. “General Endocrinology”, 4th Ed, W.B. Saunders Co., London.
2. Bentley, P.J., 1985. “Comparative Vertebrate Endocrinology”, S.Chand and Co.,
3. Barrington, E.J.W., 1968. “An Introduction to General and Comparative Endocrinology”, Academic Press, London.
Reference Books
1) Harris, G.W. and B.T. Donovan, (Ed). 1968. “The Pituitary Gland”, Vo1.3.
2) Williams, R.M., 1974. “Text Book of Endocrinology”, 5th Ed.
3) Bentley, P.J., 1982. "Comparative Vertebrate Endocrinology", Cambridge University Press.
4) Michael. P., 1968. “Endocrinology and Human Behaviour”, Oxford University Press, New York.
ELECTIVE IV: TOXICOLOGY
3 Credits
Unit I: Absorption Distribution and Excretion of Toxicants
Definition and scope of toxicology - Chemical interaction - Membrane permeability - Diffusion, filteration and engulfing by cells - Absorption distribution - excretion.
Unit II: Bio-Transformation of Toxicants
Definition - general principles - receptor site degradation reaction - conjugation - bio-activation - complex nature of bio--transformation - Antidotes - mechanism of antidotal action - assessment of antidotal efficacy.
Unit III: Bio-chemical basis of Toxicology
Mechanism of Toxicity - receptor mediated events disturbance of excitable membrane function, biochemical process - Ca+ homeostasis - covalent binding genotoxicity - Tissue specificity - Target organs mechanism of action.
Unit IV: Methods of Toxicology
Bioassay test - single species test - multi species test - acute toxicity test - subacute toxicity test - chronic toxicity test - determination of LC50 value - Pathological techniques - autopsy and histology - histopathology Histochemistry - cytochemistry - morphometric methods.
Unit V: Chemical and Immuno toxicology
Toxic chemicals: Pesticides - automobile emission heavy metals - fertilizers - food additives - animal, plant and mushroom toxins.
Immunotoxiclology - General concepts - lymphocytes Natural killer cells - macrophages - hypersensitivity reaction - immuno suppression - moleculer immuno toxicology.
Practicals
1. Determination of Sodium level in water samples
2. Determination of Potassium level in water samples.
3. Determination of Cadmium level in water samples
4. Determination of Mercury level in water samples
5. Estimation of SDH activity in liver tissue of normal and malathion treated fish
6. Estimation of total protein content in the muscle tissue of normal and endosulfan treated fish
7. Estimation of Glucose and Glycogen level in the liver tissue of normal and Lead treated fish
8. Estimation of AchE activity in brain tissues of normal and mercury treated mouse
9. Estimation of GSH level in liver tissue of normal and endrin treated mouse
10. Determination of cell volume in liver tissue of normal and copper treated fish
11. Histopathological observation of the following
1. Liver, 2. Kidney, 3. Brain, 4. Intestine, 5. Muscle
12. Determination of LCso value of Zinc on fish.
Text Books
1. Sharma, P.D., 1996. “Environmental Biology and Toxicology”, Rastrogi Publication, meerut, India.
2. LU, F.C., 1985. “Basic Toxicology”, Hemisphere Publication, Corporation, Washington, N.Y., London.
3. Gupta, P.K. and Salunka, D.K. 1985. Modern Toxicology”, Volume I and II, Metropolitan, New Delhi.
4. Sood, A., 1999. “Toxicology”, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi
Reference Books
1. Butler, G.C. 1978. “The Principles of Ecotoxicology Scope, 12, ICSO Scope”, John Wiley and Sons, Chicheater.
2. Finney, D.J., 1971. “Probit Analysis”, Cambridge University Press.
3. Adrien Albert, 1981. “Selective Toxicity”, University Press Cambridge.
4. Gupta, P.K. and V. Raviprakash, 1988. “Advance in Toxicology and Environmental” Health. Jagmandar Book Agency, New Delhi.
ELECTIVE VII: AQUACULTURE
3 Credits
UNIT I: FRESHWATER FISH AQUACULTURE
Types of ponds in the intensive aquaculture, Culture pond - site selection - soil quality - layout - inlet and outlet - formation of dykes and construction neutralization of pH - reducing seepage.
Source of water - water quality management in aquaculture - temperature - pH DO levels - nutrients - trace elements.
Feed - formulated - conventional- artificial, Feed cost. Feeding methods.
Composite fish culture - paddy cum - fish culture - integrated fish culture sewage water fish culture - raceway culture.
Control of parasites, predators and weeds in culture ponds.
Procurement of seed, transport, stocking, harvesting and marketing.
Fish farm implements - Secchi disc - aerator - pH meter - tools for hypophysation - feeding trays - gears.
Freshwater prawn culture.
UNIT II: HATCHERY TECHNIQUES
Hatching technology for major carps - common carp, silver carp - live fishes trout. Induced breeding methods. Live feed-Artemia, Rotifer, Diatoms and their culture. Prawn developmental stages - freshwater and marine prawn hatchery.
UNIT III: FISH DISEASE MANAGEMENT
Non-parasitic diseases and parasitic diseases - symptoms - prevention – treatment.
UNIT IV: AQUARIUM AND ORNAMENTAL FISHES
Aquarium tanks - maintenance - selection of ornamental fishes.
Ornamental fish culture as cottage .industry and its export potential.
UNIT V: MARl CULTURE
Types of seaweeds - species suitable for culture - methods of culture - by products.
Prawn culture - extensive culture methods semi- intensive - intensive culture methods - feeds and feeding management - disease managements.
Pearl oyster culture - pearl production crab culture. Economic importance of Lobster, sea urchin and sea cucumber - their bye products.
CMFRI, CIBA, CIFRI, CIF A and CIFE and its activities
Brackish water fish culture
REFERENCE/BOOKS
1. Baluyut, E. A. (1989) Aquaculture systems and Practices. A selected review Publishing House, New Delhi.
2. Chondar, A (1970) Handbook of breeding of Indian major carps by pituitary. harmone injection. Agra Satisdh Book Enterprise.
3. Das M. C. and Patnaik, P. N. (1994) Brackish water culture. Pal ani paramount Publications, Palani, T. N.
4. Day, F (1958). Fishes of Indiaa , VoL I and Vol. II. William Sawson and Sons Ltd., Londan.
5. Jhingran, C. G. (1981). Fish and Fisheriesof India. Hindustan Publilcating Co., India.
6. Maheswari. K. (1983) Common fish disease and their control. Institute of FIOsheries Education, Powarkads( M. P.).
7. Michael, B. N. and Singholka, B.(1985). Freshwater Prawn Farming: A manual of cultureof Macrobrachium rosenbergii. Daya publishing House, New Delhi.
8. Paul Raj S. (Ed.) (1995). Shrimp farming Techniques, problems and solutions. Palani Paramount Publications, Palani, T. N.
9. Paul Raj S. (Ed.) (1996). Aquaculture for 2000 A. D. Publications, Palani, T. N. Palani Paramount.
10. Pillay, T. V. R. (1990). Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. Balackwell Scientific Publications Ltd.
11. Ponnuchammy, R. (1997). Practice guide to shrimp farming. Palani Paramount Publications, Palani, T. N.
12. Post, G. M. (1983). Text book offish health. TFH Publication.
13. Santhanam, R. (1990). Fisheries Science. Daya Publishing House, New Delhi
14. Sinha, V.R. P. and Srinivastava, H. C. (1991). Aquaculture Producativity. Oxford and IBH Publications CO., Ltd., New Delhi.
15. Yadav, B. N. (1997). Fish and fisheries. Daya Publishing house, New Delhi.
16. FAO volumes for fish identification.
A.C.F.2009
................
................
In order to avoid copyright disputes, this page is only a partial summary.
To fulfill the demand for quickly locating and searching documents.
It is intelligent file search solution for home and business.
Related download
- dimensionamento degli impianti remi
- college of the redwoods
- semester iii university of madras
- introduction
- water rockets a for calculus courses
- school of engineering science simon fraser university
- briefly explain the features that would define quality
- ap calculus ap statistics sat i ii math
- ordinances of
- explanation of medical literature ratings
Related searches
- university of minnesota college of education
- university of minnesota school of social work
- wharton school of the university of pennsylvania
- cost of university of scranton
- university of oklahoma semester schedule
- university of minnesota school of education
- university of scranton cost of attendance
- university of south florida college of medicine
- university of cincinnati semester dates
- university of minnesota masters of social work
- ecampus of university of phoenix
- university of minnesota college of continuing education